Home

vfmc-1000-ptc series m - Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

1. FIGURE 1 2 HC PCI O Input Output Details C4 Ea O cs O O O aoe Hy 100 o 7 IK C603 O gt Tz 60 S ey 70 L ESA J JT 1602 om O O _ Tg 604 O G U Ge 1601 O T 60 70 kes c 504 om O7 cD 504 uie dk ues U24
2. TTT NSS I iL JE 5 g E on 5 aee E ram SN O Q CUON 0 OOONNNNMMNa mmoas rE 2 Z gt gt AMBDDAOTVURANWY GW W z ee Ou u 4475445 Ow Gn S 22 a D19 8 D15 a A om c5 5 DBF Bip ISTD g T ve PE 4 aq 16 allo K1 K2 K3 Be T C3 Di on BN C gt z e oo aa R7 C4 Di a INTD ae a aL oe Ra DIS R8 DT4 A be 2B UA m Re t os 2 O o y 5 r no AS DBF z RESET R15 Ds a D46 Lz g s2 KS D ii c9 K9 Q A IN K6 K7 lt K8 j K4 2 eee my BEST iS 047 A vA ETS RESET 55 a os A Q d si F X A D36 NS R20 Lo R22 F Z033 er EB D42 Bos nA J5 p34 Dz wP1 D50 A R21 Da4 2 WPA osa CA cio 035 D56 S
3. E R1 COMP PRINT 3282R4 0 eS NARs 2 Dd ce of fp NA p2 1 ba g A Bet ED R2 INX d L R5 O HX R8 R10 x K1 8 D14 R M Ra RESET I De Ke Z A KS pS 1 E 825 D7 D13 c6 men a wee E C oF C2 D9 cd D15 E I lL Ree m wes J ps Hpi 011 C E 16 A C 219 I I bee a I a COM E1 E2 D28 R13 E6 cc1 E7 D26 a ile O O SPD 033 PX Ria D34 D36 SAF D D21 y k4 E D29 Ks O I ps0 Ds5I DSD USD L T C7 D31 K5 t a INS n 1 D37 R15 Bll up Aa C ps2 D38 rie K KB oa A 2 DN MoE HC Aci a DA K12 K13 UA J REV 4 BDD BE Da Qs o EE 3D COPYRIGHT 1998 Ube VR1 VR2 SQ MADE IN USA EET Q ra D41 R18 R a ILOH l I D143 5 O 2 oO 22 cig D39 ra u2 re tt LET isv Vl ay 4 SOMO ANDE z GND p46 D47 D48 J BARA EEEE a ele ci 8 C20 c22 RP Fa R10 D 9 C21 These T2k1s C14 Ci o KH RRIS D53 31 BE RER n fab 58 IONI fe BDD R39 Bee R40 2 R ToT R32 be Is Joo
4. is v 8 ca I g 3 Ps o 2c h M 3 88 sup sl ml T42 4 S 3 g a ay Yi 6c c12 c1 C14 cig _ 4 jin G44 BIRYI 3 i R al g 5 gt Gi H 5 J ate amp c18 c19 cockP c21 j Sh l al g 3 3 yg a m4 N oO S MADE TPI FT REVIIII COPYRIGHT 1992 UP1 OF USA 26 01 0045 REV 1 an B SBa C23 C24 C25 7 S 5 R7 L__ O ai f p p aq feel El 8 ups c28 R o Ser mE ciek o 7 Sea l ae Raa O O I Ly 3 COOTEE Je 8 eee Ee 2 c32 a a Je 5 3 a R 5 5 5 lO O ups z A i usd l C yP10 S lO f a ee a b JPT2 Ly 0 h L 3 PRES JP13 Fai EERE lege R28 Hi JP14 JP15 c66 ONI F 072 7 See rd oes Af i 5 B 8 2 o Booo 5 Diagnostic LED s Dip Switch set Volume DN 3168 RO control trimpots A 28 APPENDIX G FLEX TALK OPTION 42 02 2P21 G 2 DIAGNOSTICS The six switches on the dip switch package are used for diagnostics purposes There are eight LED s D2 through D9 also for displaying diagnostics information These LED s are used in conjunction with the dip switch package see below For self test turn on switch S2 of the dip switc
5. DBF FAULT AS FAULT HC ACIF REV 2 COPYRIGHT 1997 MADE IN USA D N 3560 R1 SWITCHES INDICATORS AS DBF Reset Resets the At Speed Fault AS and or the ETS Fault Dynamic Braking Fault DBF ETS Reset Resets the Emergency Terminal Switch Fault ETS TRIMPOT AS Fault ETS Emergency Terminal Switch speed threshold adjust CW sets the speed threshold higher Not used on ASME A17 1 2000 compliant controllers Set the ETS trimpot on the HC ACIF board fully CW Use the ETS trimpot on the SC BASE or SC BASER board to adjust the ETS speed threshold DBF Fault 42 02 2P21 Emergency Terminal Switch overspeed Fault Turns on when the car speed exceeds the threshold speed set by the ETS trimpot Not used on ASME A17 1 2000 compliant controllers At Speed Fault Turns on if the car speed exceeds the maximum or minimum limits set for contract speed Increase the speed error threshold to desensitize this fault provided that the Speed Proportional Gain is set correctly G5 GPD515 Drive verify adjust L4
6. COMPUTER Fi CONTROLLER CHIP ON LIGHT JP17 wee COMPUTER DN 7 COMPUTER RESET CO PUTER JP5 pmj JP3 p E x C POWER SUPPLY gP TERMINALS z IE L q COMMUNICATION Ay d PORTS FOR a y DUPLEXING AND nN FOR CONNECTION nd DOORS LOCKED TO THE OPTIONAL HIGH SPEED i hs STATUS MC PA BOARD IND SERVICE 5 PIN CIRCULAR Ae ilies INDICATOR DIN CONNECTOR LIGHTS FIRE SERVICE 2 TIMED Ou ni 2 MOTOR VALVEC 2 LCD DISPLAY fo HNdRIMalL E MODULE al lpi el Izol ololiolool10 FUNCTION SWITCHES l N S AND PUSHBUTTON LCD CONTRAST SWITCHES ADJUSTMENT COPYRIGHKO 1993 MADE IN USA TRIMPOT D N 3784 R2 FIGURE 1 7 MC PA Peripherals Adapter Board optional JP3 IS A LINE eeen COMPUTER gt RESET ia oe
7. a A MCE V f Field No Ba ee Parameter Description Unit Be Drive MCE isp ay ange Defaults Set E Motor Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows E1 V f Pattern E1 01 Input Voltage Input voltage V 180 460 230 460 B E1 02 Motor Selection Motor selection 0 Fan Coded 1 Blower Coded 0 1 0 B 0 E1 03 V f Selection V f pattern selection 0 F F B F N A to Flux Vector 0 50Hz 1 60Hz Saturation 2 50Hz Saturation 3 72Hz 4 50Hz Variable Torque 1 5 50Hz Variable Torque 2 6 60Hz Variable Torque 1 7 60Hz Variable Torque 2 8 50Hz High Starting Torque 1 9 50Hz High Starting Torque 2 A 60Hz High Starting Torque 1 B 60Hz High Starting Torque 2 C 90Hz N A D 120Hz N A E 180Hz N A F User defined V f pattern E1 04 Max Frequency Maximum frequency Hz 0 0 80 0 60 0 B E1 05 Max Voltage Maximum voltage Motor Voltage V 0 0 460 0 230 460 B x E1 06 Base Frequency Maximum voltage output frequency Hz 0 0 72 0 60 0 B E1 07 Mid Frequency A Mid output frequency N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 3 0 B 3 0 E1 08 Mid Voltage A Mid output voltage N A to Flux Vector V 0 0 255 0 16 1 32 2 B x E1 09 Min Frequency Minimum output frequency N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 0 5 B 0 5 E1 10 Min Voltage Minimum output voltage N A to Flux Vector V 0 0 255 0 10 0
8. 4 POWER SUPPLY The power supply is a single output linear power supply that provides 5 VDC power to the computer and its peripheral boards FIGURE 1 8 Main Relay Board HC RB4 VFAC 2 4 6 8101214161820 L 1 2 4 6 8101214161820 See ES ES ENS EE lle ze lz lz e e 2 C1 O 1 357 91113151719 1357 9 1113151719 T T ro Os Iiz epee ss F PUNE EELL Sy O t Ezel Jess 3 a N1 NA D1 Bees Fur 2H eal 2 a To po 2 J4 1 Z on je a7 S g 48 O INA 3 Doz 2 45 TES N1 5 amp 47 ce I 42 a SI line NORM cos F er Ques esorh Qsc z Owe2 D1 esa g z Owes E34 E35 E36 O DIX O E34 8 m O H Hx Ese 5 wP4 a dla a Owes N 2 SA M Oo SF z Bao NS aS DZ U1 U2 la Sa pe BB_ SaF amp BIS fi 4 4 4 ANER SAF A No No NO NO srd a L2 3 2 3 ia a 4 a ce 5 M M RP2 E6 L2 3 ui 2 3 red m z x S ve A ie OO n 55 cc4 O Q pen O Qsar p ne J Q LDB E2 INSPECTIOI tis ya 7 oe ge 5 O sarx RS AAXC dax go RPI STU LD AA BB O es faye OFF aT Sa 0000 OOOO LPF werd rig E UP OOOO GC a 10 bas E vx O OOOO z Ovo E re_ f DELI amp Lt oaol boo o e lz S L vi dcl amp ls Os Me 7 R30 F a AAE38 J5 1 ae E E Re Qwrs HC RB4 MM t R32 SS Of as we7 wer REV 4 ID 59 eer 59 86 86 45 A wes C wes COPYRIGHT 1991 51 E14 Sf O O 2 87 s9 a Owo MADE IN USA O s 12 88 sae z WOT S 4 nao z we12_ WP11 z E wP13
9. POWER TRANSFORMERS oe 9 BLOCK POWER FILTER CONTACTOR B IN SOME JOBS ALL THE COMPONENTS MAY NOT FIT IN ONE ENCLOSURE IN SUCH CASES A DIFFERENT ENCLOSURE MAY BE USED OR SOME OF THE COMPONENTS MAY BE MOUNTED EXTERNALLY D N 3386 R1 1 INPUT OUTPUT BOARDS This block consists of a number of different Input Output boards The following is a list of boards that could be used in this block HC PCI O Power and Call Input Output board HC CI O E Call Input Output board optional HC RD Rear Door Logic board optional HC lOX Input Output Expander board optional HC 140 Input Output Expander board optional Note that the HC CI O E HC IOX and HC 140 boards are optional and may be required depending on system requirements e g number of landings served HC PCI O Power and Call Input Output Board This board provides the following e 22 input signals e 10 call input and output terminals e 12 output signals e 2direction arrow output terminals 4 PI output terminals e 1 passing floor gong output terminal e 2 gong output terminals For details of each input and output signal and the associated terminals see Figure 1 2 1 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 42 02 2P21
10. J5 e s ME WPS wes Q HC RB4 MM we7 w7 Rev 4 M C594 ESE Ws COPYRIGHT 1991 wee Owes MADE IN USA WP10 wer Wo S N TEOL P14 wens Q C oe 6 31 O Owu O 6OO7 6 Fa 0a020 20202020 808 080a HI Pavananedh 8 1011 1213 18 20 21 22 25 26 27 31 32 33 37 5 37 38 39 40 42 43 45 47 48 49 51 59 71 72 DN 2351 R1 eee Check all terminals for Ground with OFF not activated 0 to 20VAC Power OFF and fuse F4 removed 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 61 FIGURE 6 44 HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board Quick Reference 42 QR HC ACI Te PRINT 3282R4 0 ina pi2e D13 c6 D22 oF ois E 02s Dio BET D E oz o33P D34 k4 C oS D ria 034 D C_I ozo D35 Pes Rg D37 L_ oss C_I D31 KS C ps2 M HC Aci REV 6 COPYRIGHT 1998 M MADE IN USA co u1 SWITCHES Falt Reset If the ILO indicator is ON this push button turns BDD the indicator OFF and drops out the FLT relay Drive Reset SPD INDICATOR ILO This pushbutton resets VFAC drive faults Inspection Leveling Overspeed Turns ON when the car speed exceeds the threshold set by the ILO trimpot Not used on ASME A17 1 2000 compliant controllers 6 62 TROUBLESHOOTING HC ACI QUICK REFERENCE BOARD 51 R11 D20 oxeSAFD i 1 025 o
11. FLAG Definition Addr Position FLAG Definition Addr Position CCT Car call time flag 22 2 HCT Hall call door time flag 22 3 CCTR_ Car call time flag rear 12 2 HCTR Hall call door time flag rear 12 3 CD Car done flag 2F 4 HD High speed delay flag 27 8 CNFG _ Configuration error flag 38 5 HDLYE _ High speed delay elapsed flag 25 3 CSB Car stop switch bypass 23 5 HLI Heavy load input 25 5 CSBR Car stop switch bypass rear 13 5 HLW Heavy load weigher flag 38 1 CTL Car to lobby input 31 6 HML Home landing input 38 8 CTLDOT Car to lobby door open timer 31 8 HOSP In car hospital emergency input flag 33 1 CTLF Car to lobby function 31 7 HOSPH2_ Hospital emergency phase 2 flag 33 2 CTST __ Capture for test input 33 3 HSEL _ Hospital service select flag 2B 3 DBC Door close button input 20 4 IN Inspection or access input 27 4 DBCR _ Door close button rear 10 4 INCF Independent service car call cancel 28 3 flag DC Down call flag 21 7 IND Independent service input 27 5 DCA Down call above flag 2A 3 INT Intermediate speed input 24 8 DCB Down call below flag 2A 7 ISR In service and ready 28 4 DCC Door close complete flag 23 4 ISRT __ In service truly flag 2C 1 DCCR Door close complete flag rear 13 4 ISTD R2_ Intermediate step down absolute 30 7 floor encoding 2 DCF Door close function output 22 8 ISTU R3 Intermediate step up absolute floor 30 6 encoding 3 DCFR Door close function output rear 12 8 ISV
12. T 7 ts from HC RBX CCC To From MC PCA OA 1 C1 S N CONNECTOR C2 HC PCI O INPUT OUTPUT CONNEC ae PIN INPUT OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT 1 ec DETAIL SST MGR 1 DCP 2 M FM 24 DCF 3 m SE _ 3 STOP SW OUT 4 lt SPARE 1 INPUT 5 DOF 5 usp ___ NUDG 6 UPDO 6 DSD _ _ LAMP COMMON r 7 Dk CSAF 8 8 FR SUB REL 9 9 Fes 10 PRAM D N 1111 R2 DNDO _ STOP SW SOURCE 17 19 H 20 11 6 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 Figure 6 1 is a picture of the HC PCI O board which shows where the DZ signal can be found on this board Refer to the HC RB4 VFAC board illustration Figure 1 5 in Section 1 for the location of the DZ signal on the Relay board If power is present at terminal 27 there should be approximately 120VAC at the bottom of the 47K 1W resistor corresponding to DZ Whereas the top of the same resistor should read approximately 5VAC if the C2 ribbon cable is connected Ifthe ribbon cable is disconnected the reading should be 120VAC at the top of this same resistor This is because the other half of the voltage divider is on the HC PCI O board The HC RB4 VFAC board has test pads on the front of the board for every r
13. FIGURE D 1 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters TORQMAX Speed S Curve Speed Command Parameters Parameters High Speed Contract Speed LF 42 LF 55 LF 56 LF 53 60 to 75 of Contract Speed Intermediate Speed LF 45 High Level Speed 5 to 10 of Contract Speed LF 44 Level Speed LF 41 Zero Speed LF 50 LF 54 Time Tested By 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX D QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX DRIVE PARAMETERS A 23 Drive Software LF 80 APPENDIX E NOMENCLATURE MeE NOMENCLATURE Motion Control Engineering Inc FADOCS Nmcltr1 Shipping frm Effective Date 11 27 00 Approved By Engineering Manager Page 1 of 2 PC BOARD DESCRIPTION HC RB4 Traction Controller Main Relay Board HC RBH Hydraulic Controller Main Relay Board HC CI O Non Programmable Controller Call I O Board HC CI O E Programmable Controller Call I O Expander Board HC PI O Non Programmable Controller Power I O Board Car A HC PCI O Programmable Controller Power And Call I O Board HC PI O Non Programmable Controller Power I O Board Car B HC TAB Traction Adapter Board HC RDRB Rear Door Relay Board INIIAI OININ HC RD Rear Door Logic Board Car A HC RD Rear Door Logic Board Car B HC DB MOD Front G A L MOD Door Interface Board HC DB MOD R Rear G A L MOD Door Interface Board HC D
14. The first Menu Message will appear THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 Press the N pushbutton again the next Menu message will appear Hold down the N pushbutton each Menu Message will appear one at a time Finally the Start Message will appear again 5 4 1 2 VIEWING OPTIONS WITHIN A MENU The options can be viewed inside a particular menu by pressing the S pushbutton when the Menu Message appears on the display For example to look at the options in the Door Operation Menu first press the Npushbutton until the Door Operation Menu Message appears Press the S pushbutton The following display will appear To view the next option press the Npushbutton Hold down the Npushbutton to scroll through the options Eventually the Menu Message will reappear or to return directly to the Menu Message while the options are displayed press the N and pushbuttons at the same time Press the S pushbutton to see the options for that same menu again or press the N pushbutton to go on to the next menu 5 4 1 3 CHANGING A VALUE For each option that appears the value can be changed by pressing the S pushbutton While in the Timer Spare Inputs and Spare Outputs menus pressing and holding the Spushbutton for five seconds causes the display to scroll through the values at a faster rate Also in those same menus pressing the S and pushbuttons at the same time will cause the display to scroll backwards an
15. 4 34 4 9 3 Brake Adjustment for 125 Load TORQMAX F4 4 34 4 9 4 Bringing the Car up to High Speed TORQMAX F4 2 4 34 4 9 5 Load Testing TORQMAX F4 00 anaana 4 37 TABLE OF CONTENTS iii 4 10 Final Elevator Inspection Procedure TORQMAX F4 005 4 39 4 10 1 Inspection Leveling over Speed Test TORQMAX F4 4 39 4 10 2 Terminal Slowdown Limit Switches TORQMAX F4 4 39 4 10 3 Emergency Terminal Limit Switch Monitor TORQMAX F4 4 40 4 10 4 Contract Speed Buffer Test TORQMAX F4 2000 0 eee 4 41 4 10 5 Governor and Car Safety Tests TORQMAX F4 4 42 4 10 6 Phase Loss Detection Tests TORQMAX F4 0 0 4 43 4 11 Explanation of Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters and S Curves 4 44 4 11 1 Setting the Speed Levels 0 ee 4 44 4 11 2 Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Rate 4 46 4 11 3 Adjusting the S curves Yaskawa F7 0 000 eee eee eee 4 46 4 12 Final Adjustments Yaskawa F7 0 00 cece eee 4 48 4 12 1 Final Preparation for Running on Automatic Operation Yaskawa F7 4 48 4 12 2 Switching to Automatic Operation Yaskawa F7 00 4 48 4 12 3 Brake Adjustment for 125 Load Yaskawa F7 0 00 4 49 4 12 4 Bringing the Car up to High Speed Yaskawa F7 4 49 4 12 5 Load Testing Y
16. IF THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE 1 C il D18 CALL CIRCUIT CHECK THE TRIAC ZENER DIODE OR RESISTOR lt _ Bottom most Resistor Fuse KO Dos ovr om nvr F Aaa aanas A nD E oe 000000000000 FES I Dee IL D24 IL D26 IL Des D21 D23 D25 ID27 replacing DC 3C OC ms IL D20 SEDE A C CD C ICDC The Triacs Resistor Fuses and Call Terminals are layed out in the same sequence as shown on the Call Label i C c HC C1 0 REV 44 COPYRIGHT 1988 MADE IN USA 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 9 TROUBLESHOOTING THE CALL CIRCUITS NOTE Call terminal voltage must be gt 85 of call supply voltage Example If supply is 100VAC terminal voltage may be 85VAC to 100VAC 80VAC is insufficient If there is a problem with a call first disconnect the field wire or wires from that call terminal to determine if the problem is on the board or in the hoistway wiring or fixtures Disconnect the calls by unplugging the terminals or removing individual wires If the individual field wire is disconnected lightly tighten the screw terminal since it may not make contact if an attempt is made to ground the terminal using a jumper when the screw on the terminal is loose Problem Recommended steps to resolve the problem Call Terminal Voltage is 1 Turn OFF the power and remove the resistor fuse associated with that
17. TERMINATION Li JUMPER FOR Be MC PCA TO pa MC PA CABLE oH pa _ SPS J1 P3 CUTS O u1 RA a uT0 Bo ROM RA ve ROM RA J3 ti O mH u1 De F u3 oe G23 u24 O JP3Z aes Z us Mui JP8 iN u17 COM1 eres Hee ASS q p 4 2 E PIs me G A FF e COM2 4 0 e q A SN al a a ere D u7 E u18 uf Ls COM3 R a a wee uu I SLU BS ii O REN JP23 Mes uf if qc COM4 5 Rous puis O J T zm lt 6 gare Tg AS A7 A6 AS A4 AB A2 Al Zz Fo D N 2507 R 1 42 02 2P21 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 5 MC PA Peripherals Adapter Board The optional MC PA board contains the COM ports used for serial communication with peripherals such as CRTs and PCs through direct connection or through line drivers or modems see Figure 1 7 This board also stores the events displayed on the Special Events Calendar screen on a peripheral device
18. 4 58 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 14 EXPLANATION OF TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS AND S CURVES 42 02 2P21 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 Before attempting to bring the car up to contract speed or making any adjustments it is important to verify the following control parameters in the VFAC Drive Unit It is very important to become familiar with drive keypad operation to access the drive program NOTE In order to access the parameter values review the use of the Digital Operator in Section 3 Parameter Adjustments in the TORQMAX F5 Drive Technical Manual SETTING THE SPEED LEVELS CAUTION Verify the critical drive parameter settings as described in Section 3 6 2 Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation CAUTION Itis very important that drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation The PTC Series M controller uses drive parameters for setting the five speed levels described in Table 4 11 and Figure 4 7 The controller selects the desired speed using the TORQMAX F5 drive logic inputs The Speed Command parameters should be set as shown in Table 4 11 in pre
19. cc 4 4 4 2 2 Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Rate 4 6 4 2 3 Adjusting the S curves G5 GPD515 0 0c cece eens 4 6 Final Adjustments G5 GPD515 creeds ot saree ae ge Seree meee abek eet 4 8 4 3 1 Final Preparation for Running on Automatic Operation G5 GPD515 4 8 4 3 2 Switching to Automatic Operation G5 GPD515 4 8 4 3 3 Brake Adjustment for 125 Load G5 GPD515 4 9 4 3 4 Bringing the Car up to High Speed G5 GPD515 4 9 2 4 3 5 Load Testing G5 GPD515 is sciece hs daha dR RERS eR REG Re 4 1 Final Elevator Inspection Procedure G5 GPD515 000 4 14 4 4 1 Inspection Leveling over Speed Test G5 GPD515 4 14 4 4 2 Terminal Slowdown Limit Switches G5 GPD515 4 14 4 4 3 Emergency Terminal Limit Switch Monitor G5 GPD515 4 15 4 4 4 Contract Speed Buffer Test G5 GPD515 00 4 15 4 4 5 Governor and Car Safety Tests G5 GPD515 0 4 16 4 4 6 Phase Loss Detection Tests G5 GPD515 004 4 18 Explanation of HPV 900 Drive Parameters and S Curves 4 19 4 5 1 Setting the Speed Levels 0 c eee ee 4 19 4 5 2 Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Rates 4 20 4 5 3 Adjusting the Jerk Parameters 0000 cece eee eens 4 20 Final Adjustments HPV 900 occ 2cuheete
20. Door Close Protection Doors unable to close and lock in specified time Check door lock string contacts and individual doors for physical obstruction Earthquake Earthquake input CWI or EQI activated high Emergency Power System placed on emergency power Power removed from EPI input Fire Service Main Main Fire Service input FRS activated low Fire Service Alternate Main Fire Service input FRS activated low and Alternate Fire Service input FRA activated high Fire Service Phase 2 Phase 2 Fire Service input FCS activated high Hospital Service Car assigned to a HOSPITAL EMERGENCY CALL 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 13 TABLE 6 1 Special Events Calendar Messages Independent Service Car placed on Independent Service Inspection Hoistway access or car top inspection Lost DLK During Run The DOOR LOCK input was deactivated while the car was traveling through the hoistway Motor Limit Timer Motor stalled due to excessive time to complete run Put car on inspection then take it off or reset processor Check Up and Down Sense inputs UPS and DNS and generator and motor brushes Photo Eye Failure The PHOTO EYE input has been continuously active for a considerable period of time Suspect an abnormal blockage of the optical device or failure of the PHOTO EYE input circuit Safety String Open Check on car and off car saf
21. SP2 used for SP3 used for SP4 used for SP5 used for SP6 used for SP7 used for SP8 used for SP9 used for SP10 used for SP11 used for SP12 used for SP13 used for SP14 used for SP15 used for SP16 used for SP17 used for SP18 used for SP19 used for SP20 used for SP21 used for SP22 used for SP23 used for SP24 used for SP25 used for SP26 used for SP27 used for SP28 used for SP29 used for SP30 used for SP31 used for SP32 used for SP33 used for SP34used for SP35 used for SP36 used for SP37 used for SP38 used for SP39 used for SP40 used for SP41 used for SP42 used for SP43 used for SP44 used for SP45 used for SP46 used for SP47 used for SP48 used for SP49 used for SPARE OUTPUTS OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES OUT1 used for OUT2 used for OUTS used for OUT4 used for OUT5 used for OUTE6 used for OUT7 used for 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX A ORIGINAL PROGRAMMED VALUES AND RECORD OF CHANGES e A 3 SPARE OUTPUTS OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES OUTS8 used for OUTS used for OUT10 used for OUT11 used for OUT12 used for OUT13 used f
22. 1 12 D N 1105 e PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 42 02 2P21 1 3 1 LS STAN This is a car top mounted vane operated landing system which uses the VS 1A infrared proximity switches The vanes are to be mounted to the rails see Figure 1 12 1 3 2 LS QUTE This is a tape and magnet operated landing system with a 3 inch steel tape mounted in the hoistway and an electronic box mounted on the car top see Figure 1 13 More information is provided in Appendix G LS QUTE Landing System Assembly Drawings 42 02 2P21 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 13 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION 2 0 2 0 1 2 0 2 42 02 2P21 GENERAL INFORMATION This section contains important recommendations and instructions for site selection environmental considerations installation guidelines and other factors that will help ensure a successful installation SITE SELECTION In choosing a proper location for the control equipment the factors listed below should be considered Provide adequate working space for comfort and efficiency Mount the controller in a logical location taking into consideration the location of other equipment in the machine room and proper routing of electrical power and control wiring Note that MCE controllers do not require rear access Do not install equipment in a hazardous location Provide space for future expansion if possible Install a telephone in the machine room Remote diagnostics are available via the tele
23. ISV In Service Output IUL In Use Light output This output activates when the car is in use e g the car is in motion or the doors are open LLW Light Load Weigher Output This output will be generated when the LLI input is activated and the required number of car calls have been registered see Section 5 4 9 6 for more details MISV Mechanically In Service Output MLT Motor Limit Timer Elapsed Output NCD Car Not Done with Emergency Power Return Output This output may only be used if the elevator has Emergency Power Operation see Section 5 4 9 5 OFR One Floor Run Output This output is generated when the car initiates a run and remains active until the car encounters the first door zone in its movement the output is active while traversing the first floor height in its direction of travel OFRP One Floor Run Programmable This output will be active while making one floor runs between adjacent floors designated in the Extra Features Menu OLW Overloaded Car Threshold Output This output is set when the threshold value considered to be unsafe to move the elevator is reached When this threshold is exceeded the car will remain at the floor with doors open PH1 Fire Service Phase 1 Return Complete Output This output is most often used as a signal to activate the machine room sprinklers PRIFLG Priority Service Output This is to indicate to the emergency
24. Terminal M3 M4 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 4 Frequency Detection 1 Display Scaling Digital Operator Display Selection Sets the units of the Frequency References D1 01 to D1 17 the Frequency Reference Monitors U1 01 U1 02 U1 05 and the Modbus communication frequency reference Units are fixed at FPM ft Min with a range of 10 0 to 999 9 FPM at max frequency 10100 to 19999 User units e g 10100 10 0 FPM 19999 999 9 FPM 3 22 e START UP 11000 100 FPM Set to contract speed 42 02 2P21 TABLE 3 4 Additional Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters Applicable to Flux Vector Applications ADDITIONAL YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS APPLICABLE TO FLUX VECTOR Parameter Number Digital Operator Display Parameter Description Units Setting Range MCE drive default Field MCE settings C5 ASR TUNING ASR P Gain1 ASR Proportional Gain 1 0 0 300 0 20 00 20 00 ASR Time 1 ASR Integral Time 1 0 00 10 00 0 200 0 200 ASR P Gain 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2 0 00 300 0 20 00 20 00 ASR I Time 2 ASR Integral Time 2 0 0 10 00 0 500 0 500 PG Option Setup PG pulse Rev Encoder pulses per revolution 0 60000 1024 1024 PG Fdbk Loss Sel Stopping method at PG line brake detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only 0 3 PG Overspeed Sel
25. 000 e eee eee 5 27 5 4 4 14 Dir Preference until DLK 0 000 0c cee eee 5 27 5 4 4 15 Fully Manual Doors 000 ces 5 27 5 4 4 16 Cont D C B to Close Doors 00 0c 5 27 5 4 4 17 Cont D C B for Fire Ph 1 0 02 e eee 5 27 5 4 4 18 Moment D O B Door Opening 00000 0 ee 5 27 5 4 4 19 Doors to Open if Parked 00002 5 28 5 4 4 20 Doors to Open on Main Fire 200 0c eee 5 28 5 4 4 21 Doors to Open on Alt Fire 0 02 ee eee 5 28 5 4 4 22 Leave Doors Open on CTL 0000 e eee 5 28 5 4 4 23 Limited Door Reopen Option 0200 eee eee 5 28 5 4 4 24 Reduce HCT with Photo Eye e cee 5 28 5 4 4 26 Doors to Open If No Demand 20 0c ee eee 5 28 5 4 4 27 Const Press Op Bypass PHE 0000 0 eee 5 28 5 4 4 28 Door Type Is Horizontal Vertical 0050 5 29 5 4 4 30 Rear Door Mech Coupled 000 0c eee eee 5 29 5 4 4 31 Prevent DCP Til Doors Close 200000 ee eee 5 29 5 4 4 32 Moment D C B to Close Doors 000 cee ee 5 29 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 42 02 2P21 5 4 4 33 Doors to Latch DOF 2 2 ics been de balde ek aed e we kek 5 29 5 4 4 34 Doors to Latch DCF wen sees wie ween ee eae en ee 5 29 5 4 5 1 Short Door Timer Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds 5 29 5 4 5 2 Car Call Door Timer Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds 5 29 5 4 5 3 Hal
26. 6 17 6 5 8 ALARMS AND FAULTS 6 18 The Alarms amp Fault Displays section in the EMS Yaskawa AC Drive manual explains the fault conditions and suggests corrective actions to be taken if the AC Drive malfunctions There are some faults which are not listed in the drive manual such OPE40 AND OPE41 which are described in Table 6 2 AC Drive Alarms amp Faults When the AC Drive detects a fault the fault is displayed on the digital operator and activates a fault contact output after which the motor coasts to a stop Check the causes listed in the Alarms amp Fault Displays section in the EMS Yaskawa AC Drive manual and take the corresponding corrective actions To restart the inverter remove any run command and turn ON the reset input signal or press the RESET key on the digital operator or cycle power to reset the stop status If taking the recommended corrective actions described does not solve the problem contact MCE immediately Unlike faults alarms do not activate fault contact outputs After the cause of the alarm is corrected the inverter returns to its former operation status automatically In the Fault Diagnosis and Corrective Actions table in the EMS Yaskawa AC Drive manual faults and alarms are classified in the as follows FAULT AND ALARM CLASSIFICATIONS Motor coasts to a stop operation indicator lights and fault Major Fault contact output terminals 18 amp 19 is activated Operation continues operation
27. Simplex Input Activation of this input will cause the car to behave as a simplex Asa simplex the car will respond to hall calls registered on its own call circuitry it will not accept hall calls assigned to it by another controller connected to it and will perform its own parking function independent of the other controller STARTIN Start Input The STARTIN input is used for the START position of the three position fire phase two switch for Australian jobs When activated it will cause the front and rear doors to close The car will not proceed to answer car calls during fire phase two until the STARTIN input has been activated In car Stop Switch Safety Input TEST Switch Input This input will monitor the TEST NORM Switch located on the Relay Board to differentiate between Test and Independent Operation This input is normally high and will go low when the switch is placed in the Test position Up and Down Direction Relay Fault Input Up Input Attendant Service Emergency Dispatch Input 5 4 8 SPARE OUTPUTS MENU OPTIONS There are 8 spare output terminals on the HC IOX board s and 4 spare output terminals on the HC 140O board s The maximum number of spare outputs possible is 32 Any of these spare outputs may be used for any of the output signals listed below SPARE OUTPUTS MENU OPTIONS Attendant Service Buzzer Output Car Call Time Flag Output This flag is activated upon normal response and canc
28. 1234567891011 1213141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Parking Floor Alt Parking Floor Secondary Park Floor Lobby Floor Car Identifier Set first car to A next car to B Set first car to A next car to B Number of IOX Boards Valid range is 0 4 Valid range is 0 4 Number of 140 Boards Valid range is 0 3 Valid range is 0 3 Number of AIOX Boards Valid range is 0 1 Valid range is 0 1 FIRE SERVICE OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES Fire Service Operation Yes No Yes No Fire Phase 1 Main Floor Fire Phase 1 Alt Floor Fire Service Code Fire Phase 1 2 Alt Landing Bypass Stop Sw on Phase 1 _ Yes No Yes No Honeywell Fire Operation _ Yes No Yes No NYC Fire Phase 2 w ANSI 89 Yes No Yes No White Plains NY Fire Code Yes No Yes No Mass 524 CMR Fire Code _ Yes No Yes No DOOR OPERATION OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES Nudging Yes No Yes No Stuck Photo Eye Protection _ Yes No Yes No Sequential Door Oper F R Yes No Yes No Car Call Cancels Door Time Yes No Yes No Nudging During Fire Phase 1 Yes No Yes No Retiring Cam Option _ Yes No Yes No Pre Opening _ Yes No Yes No Mechanical Safety Edge Yes No Yes No Nudging Output Buzzer Only Yes No Yes No 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX A ORIGINA
29. 3 3 1 42 02 2P21 This control system uses a Variable Frequency AC Drive Unit VFAC to run the 3 phase AC elevator motor Drives from various manufacturers may be used The VFAC Drive Unit varies the frequency as well as the voltage to run the AC elevator motor at slow speeds for improved stopping at the floor Simplified instructions for getting the elevator moving are provided This assumes the VFAC Drive Unit has been set up at the factory to provide a satisfactory match to the motor characteristics At this point it is strongly recommended to read the manual for the VFAC Drive Unit Specifically refer to the section on the Digital Operator drive keypad to learn how to display the output current and output frequency Also learn how to display and set the parameter constants The Drive is very flexible and can be programmed to accommodate many different motor characteristics INITIAL POWER UP a On the HC RB4 VFAC board place the INSPECTION switch in the ON position and the TEST NORMAL switch in the TEST position b Verify that fuse F4 is removed to disable the primary controller relay voltage C Check the line side of the main power disconnect switch to make sure that all three legs are at the correct voltage d Turn ON the main power disconnect switch and verify that the proper voltages are at the power terminals L1 L2 and L3 on the controller e The VFAC Drive Unit provided with this controller should not display any f
30. A corresponding flag exists for hall call registration prevention The computer may detect conditions for preventing hall calls from being registered and will set the Hall Call Disconnect HCDX flag This is a system flag as opposed to a per car flag but is available for viewing in Diagnostic mode along with the car operating flags There are also many reasons for the computer to reject hall call registration Fire Service a hall call bus problem no available cars in service to respond to hall calls etc It should also be mentioned that if a call circuit becomes damaged or stuck ON due to a stuck push button the elevator will release itself from the stuck call automatically It will probably return there later but will again release itself automatically thereby allowing continued service in the building PREPARATION FOR TROUBLESHOOTING CALL CIRCUITS Review Section 5 5 External Memory mode of this manual Then look at Table 5 6 It shows where to look up the calls in the computer memory addresses 0140 through 015F By looking at this memory it is possible to see if a particular call is being recognized by the computer Prepare a jumper with one side connected to terminal 1 which is the same as ground subplate is grounded then use the other end to enter the call by grounding the call terminal in question 6 3 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 1 Once the wires have been disconnected from the call input terminal the system sho
31. If this problem cannot be solved call MCE Technical Support Remove all test weights from the car BRINGING THE CAR UP TO HIGH SPEED YASKAWA F7 a Verify that all the steps described in Sections 4 1 and 4 11 regarding the adjustments and specifically the drive parameters are complete NOTE Itis very important that the drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation so that there is no demand To change a drive parameter the Programming mode has to be accessed When the drive is in Programming mode it will not function The drive has to be in Operation mode to run the elevator b Register a car call one floor above the car The High speed relay H should pick and the drive keypad should read 50 of contract speed as the car attempts to start If the car runs normally commence multi floor runs and slowly increase the High speed parameter D1 02 until contract speed is achieved The Position Indicator will step at the slowdown distance from the next floor After stepping occurs High speed is dropped and the car should rapidly decelerate to High Level speed Reduce the High Level speed parameter D1 03 so that the car runs at about 10 20 fpm or at a reasonable speed use your personal judgment Six inches before the floor at which the car is to stop High Level speed is dropped and the car decelerates to Level speed The Level speed can be adjusted using parameter
32. Put the car on Inspection at the bottom landing Put 2 3 of a contract load in the car Begin adding weights in 50 or 100 pound increments and move the car up and down on Inspection each time Adjust the brake tension to stop and hold 125 of a contract load by tripping a stop switch open while running down on Inspection Hold the DOWN button in while tripping open the stop switch preferably on the Inspection station KEEP THE CAR NEAR THE BOTTOM AS IT IS LIKELY TO SLIDE THROUGH THE BRAKE ONTO THE BUFFERS If the VFAC Drive Unit trips off when the car is going down but not while it is going up refer to the manual for the VFAC Drive Unit and look up the failure indication on the Drive display If it is the display for an over voltage fault there may be a problem in the regeneration or braking resistors the braking module if one is provided or in the fuses that may be in series with the wires to the braking resistors If this problem cannot be solved call MCE Technical Support Remove all test weights from the car BRINGING THE CAR UP TO HIGH SPEED HPV 900 a Verify that all the steps described in Sections 4 1 and 4 5 regarding the adjustments and specifically the drive parameters are complete NOTE Itis very important that the drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation so that there is no demand b Register a car call one floor above the car The High speed relay
33. 2 1 1 and 2 2 before bringing wires into the controller Mount the controller s securely to the machine room floor and cut holes to permit bringing the wires into the cabinet as shown in Figure 2 2 There may be labels in the cabinet to help identify locations for wiring holes Note that the standard MCE car control cabinet does not require rear access Also the doors are reversible and removable for ease of wiring T CAUTION Do not allow any metal chips to fall into the electronics Keep the covers on the AC Drive while wiring to prevent damage to the components 2 1 1 CONTROLLER WIRING GUIDELINES CAUTION Power conductors from the fused disconnect isolation transformer or other high voltage high current conductors must be separated from the control wires It is essential that the Encoder and Speed Sensor wires be placed in a separate conduit away from high current conductors Figure 2 2 shows the recommended routing for the field wiring Observe the following a PC boards can be easily damaged by Electrostatic Discharge ESD Use a properly grounded wrist strap as shown in Figure 2 1 when touching the PC boards FIGURE 2 1 ESD Electrostatic Sensitivity of PCBs Do not touch PC Boards unless you are properly grounded KS are oa J a amp oo 4 ATTENTION a ba OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR J NDLING ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES b Bring the wires in from a location that would allow use of
34. 5 16 PHER Photo eye input rear flag 5 16 PHOTO EYE ANTI NUISANCE option 5 38 Photo Eye Failure message 5 12 6 14 PI OUTPUT TYPE option 5 38 PI TURNED OFF IF NO DEMAND option 5 41 PIC PI correction flag 5 16 Power Transfer Input Active message 5 12 Power Up Shut Down Due to Earthquake message 5 12 POWERBACK R6 Regenerative Drive A 44 A 46 description A 44 drive parameters table A 46 parameter adjustments A 45 POWERBACK R4 Regenerative Drive A 33 36 description A 33 parameter adjustments A 34 PRE OPENING option 5 26 PRESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATED message 5 12 42 02 2P21 PREVENT DCP TIL DOORS CLOSE option 5 29 PRIFLG Priority Service Output option 5 37 Program Mode 5 20 5 43 PSS Pressure Switch Input 5 34 PTI Power Transfer Input option 5 34 R R2AB 2AB relay contact redundancy monitoring input option 5 34 R4 Absolute floor encoding 4 flag 5 16 R4 R3 R2 Floor Encoding Input option 5 34 RBAB BAB relay contact redundancy monitoring input option 5 34 RDLSR Rear Hoistway Door Lock Contacts Relay Status option 5 34 Rear DOL amp DLK are Both Active message 5 12 Rear Door is Locked but not fully closed message 5 12 Rear Door Lock Switch Failure message 5 12 REAR DOOR MECH COUPLED option 5 29 Rear Door Open Limit Failure message 5 12 Rear Gate Switch Failure message 5 13 REAR Rear door flag 5 16 REDUCE HCT WITH PHOTO EYE option 5 28 Redundancy Door Lock Relay Failure message 5 13 R
35. 9 99 0 00 0 00 Contactor DO Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 0 00 0 00 Determines the amount of time the drive is TRQ Lim Msg Dly in torque limit before the Hit Torque Limit sec 0 50 10 00 0 50 2 00 message is displayed Defines the serial mode 2 inspection only i SER2 Insp Spd serial mode 2 ft min 0 100 000 0 000 0 Defines the creep speed that will be used in i SER2 RS Crp Spd ih rescue m de ft min 0 100 000 0 000 0 Defines the maximum time the drive will SER2 RS Cpr Time continue to run at rescue creep speed only ft min 0 100 180 180 serial mode 2 Defines the maximum time that may elapse SER2 FLT Tol between valid run time messages beforea sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 4 serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback Gain Anti rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch filter center frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation 0 100 0 0 Determines the recognition time delay for a i MSPD Delay 1 4 defined multistep speed command sec 0 00 10 0 0 00 0 00 A2 S Curves Acc Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 00 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 2 60 3 00 Rate of increase of acceleration up to Accel 3 A Assal Leik in Rate when increasing elevator speed ue Cece oN oe Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero 3 Acea Jes Cut when approaching elevator contract speed is Cea ay 49 Rate of increase of deceleration to Decel 3 y Decal Jais
36. Analog Load Weigher None ____MCE___K Tech None MCE K Tech Ind Bypass Security _ _ Yes __ No Yes No Ats Bypass Security _ Yes __ No Yes No Car to Floor Return ___ Floor ____ Floor Scrolling Speed Slow __Normal____Fast Slow Normal Fast OFRP Between Firs ____ Floor ____ Floor ____ Floor ___ Floor PTHC Version 6 03 xxxx 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX A ORIGINAL PROGRAMMED VALUES AND RECORD OF CHANGES e A 5 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS SERIES M PRODUCT ONLY Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in shaded rows All other parameters should be set to the values shown below in the Field MCE Set column WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific motor machine job Refer to the adjustment manual for detailed information tet MCE V f Field No ca ene Parameter Description Unit eagle Drive MCE isp ay ange Defaults Set Initialize 4 Language Selection i 7 A1 00 Select Language 0 English 1 Japanese 0 1 0 B 0 Parameter access level 0 Operation Only 3 Basic Level 7 A1 01 Access Level 1 User Program 4 Advanced Level oad E B 3 2 Quick Start Level A1 02 Control Method Control Method selection motor 1 S or for MagneTek drive 0 V f Control 2 Open Loop Vector 0 3 0 Ble U1 04 use
37. B2 B2 Log In 8 TB1 8 Terminal 8 Selection eae aad S CURVE S CURVE Log In 9 TB1 9 Terminal 9 Selection SEL 0 SEL 0 C3 Logic Outputs SPEED SPEED Log Out 1 TB1 14 Terminal 14 Selection DEV LOW DEV LOW Log Out 2 TB1 15 Terminal 15 Selection ANDED CONNAN DED MTR MTR Log Out 3 TB1 16 Terminal 16 Selection OVERLOAD OVERLOAD ENCODER ENCODER Log Out 4 TB1 17 Terminal 17 Selection FAULT FAULT Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT FAULT SPEED SPEED Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection REGRLS REGRLS C4 Analog Outputs r SPEED SPEED Ana Out 1 TB1 33 Terminal 33 Selection CMD CMD SPEED SPEED Ana Out 2 TB1 35 Terminal 35 Selection FEEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 U2 Hidden Items Enable or disable hidden parameters ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED P DISABLED ENGLISH U3 Unit Unit for parameters METRIC ENGLISH ENGLISH U4 Overspeed Test Allows overspeed test during inspection YES NO NO NO U5 Restore Dflts Restore Motor Reset all parameters to default values Defaults except parameters in MOTOR A5 Restore Device Resets the parameters in MOTOR AS to the Defaults defaults defined by the MOTOR ID U6 Drive Info Drive information Drive Version Boot Version Cube ID Drive Type U7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor U8 Language Sel Selects the language for display Drive Version A2950 C 10304 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX C QUICK REF
38. CGF Car Generated Fault Output option 5 35 CNFG Configuration error flag 5 16 CNP Contactor Proof Input option 5 32 Communication Loss message 5 8 6 13 Computer Internal Memory 5 14 5 15 computer security 5 3 5 50 Passcode Request Operation 5 50 passcode 5 3 5 4 computer variable flags 5 15 Configuration Error change Settings Before Installation message 5 8 CONST PRESS OP BYPASS PHE option 5 28 CONT D C B FOR FIRE PH 1 option 5 27 CONT D C B TO CLOSE DOORS option 5 27 Contactor Proofing Redundancy Failure message 5 8 controller Car Communication Control CCC 1 10 Car Motion Control CMC 1 11 characteristics 1 1 duplexing 1 11 functional layout 1 9 functional description 1 9 ground wiring 2 6 installation of 2 4 normal operation 1 10 physical description 1 2 1 8 sequence of operation 1 11 special operations 1 10 typical layout 1 2 wiring guidelines 2 4 counter weight balance 3 11 3 15 3 26 COUNTERWEIGHTED DRUM MACHINE option 5 39 CRT terminal screens 6 12 6 13 Special Events Calendar messages 6 13 using for troubleshooting 6 12 6 13 CSB Car stop switch bypass flag 5 16 CSB Car Stop Switch Bypass Output option 5 35 CSBR Car stop switch bypass rear flag 5 16 CSEO Code Sequence Enable Output option 5 35 CSR Car Selected to Run Output option 5 35 CTL DOOR OPEN TIMER option 5 30 CTL Car to lobby input flag 5 16 CTL Car to Lobby Input option 5 32 C
39. Description The car is allowed to run at reduced speed on Earthquake Normal Operation EQI is high CWI is low used for ASME earthquake operation only Troubleshooting Go to Program Mode and check to see if any spare inputs are programmed as EQI Then check to see if that particular input is activated The elevator may be returned to normal service by means of the momentary reset button on the HC EQ2 board EVATOR SHUTDOWN SWITCH ACTIVE Description The ESS input has been activated Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and see if any of the inputs are programmed as ESS Then check to see if that particular input is activated EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICE Description Either the EMSH or the EMSC input has been activated Troubleshooting Ensure that the MASSACHUSETTS EMS SERVICE option is set correctly If not required set this option to NO and ensure that the EMSH and EMSC inputs are not programmed as spare inputs If it is required set this option to the floor that the car should return to when the EMSH input is activated EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION Emergency Power Description The car is on Emergency Power operation EPI is low Troubleshooting Ensure that the Emergency Power operation option is set correctly If emergency power is not required set this option to NO and ensure that the EPI input is not programmed If it is required set this option to the floor that the car should return to on Emergency Power and program
40. Each message will ask what the other car s top landing is if it serves rear floors etc Again select YES if the other car of the duplex serves that floor and NO if the other car does not Both controllers in a duplex need to be programmed with this information 5 4 2 7 PARKING FLOOR Any landing can be selected to be the parking floor The car will go to the parking floor when it is free of call demand In addition there is a Parking Delay Timer that will cause a free car to wait for a short time before parking The timer is adjustable with a value between 0 0 minutes no delay and 6 0 minutes see Section 5 4 5 10 for more details If the parking feature is not needed choose NONE when the Parking Floor option message is on the display The car will stay at the last call answered 5 4 2 8 ALT PARKING FLOOR This option is available only when the API input is programmed and a parking floor is set Any landing can be selected to be the alternate parking floor This car will go to the alternate parking floor when it is free of call demand and the API input is active 5 4 2 9 SECONDARY PARKING FLOOR This option is for duplex systems only Any landing can be selected to be the secondary parking floor The car will go to this floor when it becomes free of call demand and the other car is already parked at the first parking floor It is acceptable to make the secondary parking floor the same as the first parking floor if both cars are to park
41. For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 WARNING The following tests should be performed only by the qualified elevator personnel skilled in final adjustment and inspections INSPECTION LEVELING OVER SPEED TEST G5 GPD515 The HC ACI board is equipped with an independent low speed monitoring system which can trip and open a fault contact if the car runs faster than a preset speed 150 fom max on Car Top Inspection Hoistway Access or Leveling operation The monitoring system is active when the Leveling L relay is picked or when the Access Inspection relay INX is dropped out The trimpot is labeled ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed and is located on the HC ACI board The circuit looks at pulses coming from the hall effect sensor sensing the magnets on the motor shaft or brake drum etc Calibrate this circuit as follows a Put the car on Inspection operation by placing the Relay Panel Inspection switch on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board in the ON position Run the car on Inspection up or down and record the actual measured car speed with a hand held tachometer It must be returned to the original value when this test is complete Now run the car on Inspection and adjust the IN speed Parameter D1 09 as high as possible to trip the ILO the maximum
42. H should pick and the drive keypad display should read 50 of Contract Speed as the car attempts to FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 0 42 02 2P21 start If the car runs normally commence multi floor runs and slowly increase High speed by increasing the A3 Speed Command 8 parameter until Contract Speed is achieved If there is a problem reaching Contract Speed see the following note NOTE Drive gain adjustments The default values for the gain parameters A 1 Response Ai Inertia and A1 Inner Loop Xover are sufficient to run the car on High speed However for optimum performance and to help in achieving Contract Speed adaptive tuning of the drive as described in Section 4 6 5 is strongly recommended At the slowdown distance from the next floor the Position Indicator will step After stepping occurs High speed is dropped and the car should rapidly decelerate to High Level speed Reduce the High Level speed A3 Soeed Command 4 so that the car runs at about 10 20 fpm or at a reasonable speed use your personal judgment Six inches before the floor at which the car is to stop High Level speed is dropped and the car speed should decelerate to Level speed The Level speed can be adjusted using the A3 Speed Command 2 parameter so that the car levels into the floor and stops Level speed should be 5 7 fom or a reasonable leveling speed use personal judge ment If the car relevels frequently once Level speed is adjusted s
43. Horizontal Vertical Front Door Mech Coupled Yes No Yes No Rear Door Mech Coupled Yes No Yes No Prevent DCP Til Doors Close Yes No Yes No Moment D C B to Close Doors Yes No Yes No Doors to Latch DOF None Front Rear Both None Front Rear Both Doors to Latch DCF None Front Rear Both None Front Rear Both Inv Door Closed Limit None Front Rear Both None Front Rear Both TIMER OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES Short Door Timer seconds seconds Car Call Door Timer seconds seconds Hall Call Door Timer seconds seconds Lobby Call Door Timer seconds seconds Nudging Timer seconds seconds Time Out of Service Timer ___None____ seconds ___None_____ seconds Motor Limit Timer ____ minutes ______ minutes MGR Output Timer minutes ___ minutes Door Hold Input Timer seconds seconds Parking Delay Timer ____ minutes minutes Fan Light Output Timer ____ minutes ____ minutes Hospital Emerg Timer _____ minutes _____ minutes Door Open Protection Timer seconds seconds CTL Door Open Timer seconds seconds Door Buzzer Timer seconds seconds GONGS LANTERNS OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES Mounted in hall or car hal _ scar hall car Double strike on Down ____ Yes __ No Yes No PFG Enable Button Yes No Yes No Egress Floor Arrival Gong No Main Egress Floor No Main Egress Floor A 2 APPENDIX A ORIGINAL PROGRAMMED VALUES AND RECORD OF CHANGES 142 02 2P21 SPARE INPUTS OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES SP1 used for
44. Hz Velocity High Speed_ L L os ILLL LaLa Range D1 02 60 Hz A P1 17 P1 18 C1 01 C1 02 yA Acceleration Deceleration 4 Intermediate Di 07 45 Hz High Level D1 05 1 3 Hz Zero Speed A 12 48 Hz P1 04 P1 07 Time Table for Selection of S Curves g Increasing the value time of an S curve parameter causes a longer smoother transition Range Velocity Hz Start Accel End Accel Start Decel End Dece eomeonproraaproe Proe Pros eemo Pn These are the only S curve parameters that require field adjustment for smoothing the elevator ride All the other parameter values are set to the MCE Drive defaults E2 02 f f N x P 120 f slip frequency Hz f motor rated frequency Hz N motor rated speed F L rom kz Synchronous APH as 6 eomz Motor sohzmoror Drive Software U 14 1200 1000 Tested By 1800 1500 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 PARAMETER TREE wens srw ow nmo ar E Quick start_ Basic Advanced Monitor tg oos Sooo Ua fames ota us Fauithistory o eS A e a a __A2 User constans o ooo d 01 32 e focona Oo f ooa o e Sease Oooo o To o ea _ Delaytimers O O T T oo E Poom ooo o T o E ee Reerenern OO Ooo i oo E e foom o o T o E ee Energy saving OOOO ooo o o E e Zso o o T o E e Scuneacceldecel O o o o E cs _ Wotor sipcompe
45. LS 70 low speed control release is switched but no direction of rotation is adjusted modulation disabled rAcc reverse acceleration rCon 69 reverse constant running rdEc 68 reverse deceleration 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 27 6 7 8 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS TORQMAX F4 DRIVE FIGURE 6 25 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Drive Key Pad Drive Key Pad Series MTORQMAX How to change and save drive parameters There are four push buttons on the drive key pad Enter F R Saves the selected parameter In addition itis also used for selecting parameter groups UP Star Increases the selected parameter value In addition itis also used to find the parameter group DN STOP Decreases the selected parameter value In addition itis also used to find the parameter group FUNC SPEED Displays reads the parameter value Select the parameter group Press the Enter key The blinking dot next to the parameter number should flash Use UP or DN arrow to select the desired LF xx parameter Press the FUNC key to see the parameter value Use the UP or DN arrow to change the parameter value Press Enter to save the parameter value Important without this step parameter will not be saved 6 28 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 26 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Critical Drive Parameters Critical Drive Parameters Series M TORQMAX Write down the motor name plate information Moto
46. Password 100 read only 200 customer mode CP 0 a iaon password 059999 440 440 CP 1 Status disp ay CP 2 Main Line Frequency Hz CP 3 AC Phase current L1 A CP 4 AC Phase current L2 A CP 5 AC Phase current L3 A CP 6 Actual Load CP 7 Actual Load peak value CP 8 DC output current A CP 9 Actual DC voltage V CP 10 DC voltage peak value V CP 11 Heat sink temperature C CP 12 Over load counter CP 13 Active power kW CP 14 Total regen kWh counter kWh CP 15 Total motor kWh counter kWh CP 16 Total net kWh counter kWh CP 17 Apparent power Line input kVA CP 18 Analog output 1 amplification factor 01 CP 19 DC bus switching level 01 CP 20 Auto error reset counter 1 CP 21 Last Error CP 22 Last Error 1 CP 23 Last Error 2 CP 24 Last Error 3 CP 25 Last Error 4 CP 26 Last Error 5 CP 27 Last Error 6 CP 28 Last Error 7 CP 29 Software version CP 30 Software date code DDMM Y CP 31 Power part ID code Job Production Order Drive Model Drive Serial Number Test technician Date A 46 APPENDIX J POWERBACK R6 REGENERATIVE DRIVE 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX L QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS SERIES M PRODUCT ONLY WARNING Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running Incorrect values of drive parameters can cause erratic elevator operation A WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific motor machine
47. Setting Time before zero speed logic output is S Zero Speed Time declared tr e sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 Threshold for detection of up or down 5 2 Up Dwn Threshold dircetion o 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 0 250 0 250 0 250 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 0 250 0 250 0 250 0 Flux Wkn Factor Defines the torque limit at higher speeds 60 0 100 0 75 0 75 0 Subtracts an effective voltage to actual 7 i i Ana Out 1 Offset analog output 1 o 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 Subtracts an effective voltage to actual 6 5 Ana Out 2 Offset analog output 2 o 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 Ana Out 1 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana Out 2 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Fit Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically reset sec 0 120 5 5 Number of faults that is allowed to be Fit Reset Hour automatically reset per hour faults 0 10 3 3 The logic output function is true when the Up to SPD Level motor speed is above the user specified 0 110 00 080 00 080 00 speed defined by this parameter When enabled by the Main DIP Speed A1 Mains DIP Speed _ parameter speed is reduced by this percent 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 when a UV alarm low voltage is declared Run Delay Timer R the Drive s recognition ofthe RUN Sec 0 00 0 99 0 00 0 10 AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function N A to MCE products 0 00 2 00 0 00 0 00 AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00
48. Stopping method at OS detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Deviation Sel Stopping method at DEV fault detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Rotation Sel PG rotation 0 CCW 1 CW PG Output Ratio PG Division Rate Set to drive defaults Ref Detection Spd Agree Level Speed Agreement Detection Level L4 01 E1 06 Spd Agree Width Speed Agreement Detection Width 42 02 2P21 Torque Limits Set at Factory defaults START UP 3 23 3 7 3 MOVING THE CAR ON INSPECTION OPERATION YASKAWA F7 WARNING The motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied to the controller even when the motor is not rotating Do not open the drive cover for 5 10 minutes after removing the AC power to allow the capacitors to discharge Use extreme caution Do not touch any circuit board power device or electrical connection without insuring that high voltage is not present Once all the steps described in Sections 3 3 1 3 7 1 and 3 7 2 are accomplished then proceed with the following a 3 24 gt Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Turn ON the main power disconnect The RPI relay will pick and after few seconds the SAF relay should pick the LED on the relay will be lit On the HC ACI board relays RDY and CNP must also be picked If n
49. The acceleration rate is set using the LF 51 parameter The deceleration rate is set using the LF 54 parameter Increasing the value increases the acceleration deceleration rate steeper curve The default value is 3 00 ft s ADJUSTING THE JERK PARAMETERS The jerk parameters adjust the rate of change transition smoothness at the start and end of acceleration and deceleration known as jerk points See Figure 4 7 The jerk parameter values are in feet per second per second per second ft s Decreasing the value decreases the rate of change and causes a smoother longer transition The parameters used for the jerk points at the start and during acceleration are LF 50 and LF 52 The parameters used for the jerk points during deceleration and stop are LF 53 LF 55 and LF 56 Parameter LF 52 is used for the transition from acceleration to contract speed and parameter LF 53 is used for the transition from contract speed to deceleration FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 TABLE 4 12 _TORQMAX F5 S Curve Parameters Drive gua r Default Factory parameter Parameter Description Unit Setting Range Settings Settings S Curves Profile 0 0 LF 50 Start Jerk used for the transition at the start of ft s 0 30 32 00 3 00 3 00 acceleration 0 LF 51 Acceleration rate ft s 0 30 12 00 3 50 3 50 Acceleration Jerk used for the transition from 3 0 LF 52 acceleration to contract speed ft s 0 30 32 0
50. amount of time This cycle will continue until the doors have become fully closed The NUDG output can also be used to activate a buzzer The PHE Photo Eye input will be ignored during nudging if the Stuck Photo Eye Protection option has been selected see Section 5 4 4 2 A Safety Edge or Door Open Button input will stop the doors from closing but will not reopen the doors fully Nudging Operation will begin when the Nudging Timer elapses The Nudging Timer starts when the regular door timer elapses The Nudging Timer is adjustable with a value between 10 and 60 seconds see Section 5 4 5 5 Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 25 5 26 5 4 4 2 STUCK PHOTO EYE PROTECTION This option causes the controller to ignore the PHE Photo Eye input and to close the doors The PHE input will be ignored when the Nudging Timer elapses if the Nudging option is selected or when the Time Out of Service Timer elapses whichever comes first If the Nudging option is not selected then the PHE input will be ignored when the Time Out of Service Timer elapses see Section 5 4 5 6 for more details If the Stuck Photo Eye Protection option is not selected a PHE input that is stuck ON will keep the doors open indefinitely 5 4 4 3 SEQUENTIAL DOOR OPER F R This option is available only if independent rear doors are present If this option is set to Yes then the front and rear doors of the car do not open at the same time Whenever the controller recei
51. i Ea A Parameter Description Unit patel Drive Pia p g Defaults S Curves LF 51 Acceleration rate ft s 0 30 8 00 3 00 3 00 LF 53 Deceleration rate ft s 0 30 8 00 3 00 3 00 Start Jerk used for the transitions at the start and 3 i LiP S0 end of acceleration except see LF 55 ts US SA00 200 SW Flare Jerk used for the transitions at the start and 3 E LF S2 end of deceleration except see LF 56 ft s Usi SEO SA ee LF 54 Stop Jerk used for the final transitions from ft s off 0 02 32 00 OFF 1 00 leveling speed to zero speed Acceleration Jerk used for the transition from 3 HFSS acceleration to contract speed ie 0 30 SEO SAR o Deceleration Jerk used for the transition from 2 9 sas contract speed to deceleration is thee e00 SO So Speed parameters LF 42 High speed ft m 0 100 0 LF 45 Intermediate ft m 0 91 0 LF 44 High Level ft m 0 25 0 LF 41 Level ft m 0 16 0 LF 43 Inspection ft m 0 66 0 The speed setting range is described in percentage of the contract speed but the actual entered value of the speed is in FPM The drive will not accept any speed higher than the defined values The output response of the drive can be seen on an oscilloscope when the car is running by looking at the voltage between terminals X2 19 Output speed and X2 13 Com on the TORQMAX F4 drive The input can be seen at terminal X2 18 Speed reference and X2 13 Com The output signals are 10V for X2
52. input by removing the wire from terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting Bypass the Emergency Terminal Up Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and UET on the HC ACIF board Bypass the Up terminal slowdown and Up Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Register a car call for the top terminal landing from the controller The counter weight will strike the buffer Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the down direction to move the car Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 and reconnect the wire to terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Reseat the FLT relay 4 10 4 2 CAR BUFFER TEST WITH A FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car Disconnect the Step Down STD input by removing the wire from terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting Bypass the Emergency Terminal Down Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and DET on the HC ACIF board Bypass the Down terminal slowdown and Down Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and te
53. job Refer to the adjustment manual for detailed information AN CAUTION For permanent magnet PM Synchronous motors consult the following sections of the TORQMAX F5 Drive manual before roping the machine 5 5 PM Synchronous Motors 5 8 Encoder Feedback and 5 11 Running the Motor Digital Default Factor Operator Parameter Description Unit Setting Range Settin ARRA Display g g Signal operating mode AbSPd Absolute Analog Speed pe d SPd Digital Speed Selection Ane LF 2 Ator Analog Torque Control A Sod bnSPd bnSPd A Spd Analog Speed Control Sets SerSP Serial Com Speed Control bnSPd bnSPd Binary Speed Selection Drive configuration in run run mode conf LF 3 conF Configuration 5 minute time limit conF run s EconF EconF Expired Configuration S Lin SLrn activate auto tune for PM Motor Motor selection Displays mode selected using _ i LF 4 US 4 and US 10 see US 10 X LF 5 Drive Fault auto reset 1 0 10 5 5 LF 8 Electronic motor overload protection on off off on IM Electronic overload current 1 0 110 Drive Si PM not visible auto set same as LF 12 rated ae LF 10 Rated motor power PM read only auto calc HP 0 00 125 00 5 00 LF 11 Rated motor speed rom 10 0 6000 0 11650r x 150 1 0 110 Drive LF 12 Rated motor current A ied 8 0 LF 13 Rated motor frequency Hz 4 0 100 0 60 0 Rated Motor voltage IM 120 500V IM N
54. provided that the Displacement switch CWI is not activated When Earthquake Operation is needed the appropriate spare inputs should be selected see Section 5 4 7 5 4 9 9 COUNTERWEIGHTED DRUM MACHINE Only jobs that are termed Counterweighted Drum Machines should set this option to Yes For normal California jobs this option should be set to NO When set to YES it indicates that there is only one Earthquake input EQI When activated EQI will shut down the elevator and will not move it until EQI is reset Once deactivated the car will move to the next landing and cycle the doors before returning to normal operation 5 4 9 10 MG SHUTDOWN OPERATION MGS RETURN FLOOR This option will cause a car to return to the landing specified whenever the MGS input is activated Once the car has reached the specified floor the doors will cycle and the car will be shut down with the MGR output turned OFF To program this option set MG SHUTDOWN OPERATION to NO or press Sto select the return floor If Sis pressed the display will read MGS RETURN FLOOR Press S until the desired floor number is displayed Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 39 5 40 5 4 9 11 PERIPHERAL DEVICE If this option is set to YES it allows for various peripheral devices to be used Currently the controller has 2 Communication Ports that can be programmed Press N to select the media for COM Port 1 The display will read PA COM1 MEDIA One of the following media
55. s BEAR SPD gol LL PERI 35 R33 is ad oo 2 A EEE 2 110 ARDY CNP wane 8 R38 zig 7 ra ra La La t 8 g 5 m UF a DBI C31 85 o 2 8 2 58 o g a iz M BS D oon nm SRX B15 415v BSH 221182808 HOULE OEE I I HA F a aD af ajajaa ajaja paaga Cos Dos n a geja Heiane ga leaded ga Oe eje N O f2 x 9 iN 00 D O N TA ze 1 Of gt ad NO D N 3559 R2 T HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board The HC ACI board Figure 1 9 is the interface between the Main Relay board and the VVVF Drive Unit It performs a variety of functions including providing speed inputs and performing certain elevator code requirements such as Inspection Leveling overspeed detection and motor and brake contractor monitoring Other functions include an independent motor speed monitoring circuit plus brake and speed signal coordination HC ACIF Additional Flux Vector Drive Interface Board This board contains the intermediate speed ETS and Flux Vector Drive circuits see Figure 1 10 42 02 2P21 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 7 FIGURE 1 10 HC ACIF AC Drive Interface Board
56. see Accel Jerk Out 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Decel Jerk In 3 see Decel Jerk In 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Decel Jerk Out 3 see Decel Jerk Out 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 A3 Multistep Ref Inspection Speed command 1 Inspection ft m 0 66 0 Level Speed command 2 Level ft m 0 16 0 Speed Command 3 Speed command 3 ft m 0 0 0 High Level Speed command 4 High Level ft m 0 25 0 Speed Command 5 Speed command 5 ft m 0 0 0 Intermediate Speed command 6 Intermediate ft m 0 91 0 Speed Command 7 Speed command 7 ft m 0 0 0 High Speed Speed command 8 High Speed ftm 0 100 0 Speed Command 9 Speed command 9 ft m 0 0 0 Speed Command 10 Speed command 10 ft m 0 0 0 Speed Command 11 Speed command 11 ft m 0 0 0 Speed Command 12 Speed command 12 ft m 0 0 0 Speed Command 13 Speed command 13 ft m 0 0 0 Speed Command 14 Speed command 14 ft m 0 0 0 Speed Command 15 Speed command 15 ft m 0 0 0 The speed setting range is described in percentage of the contract speed but the actual entered value of the speed is in FPM Any speed other than the defined values will trip the drive SET UP FAULT 6 To clear this fault enter the correct value of the parameter and then reset the drive by pressing reset button on HC ACI board A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional gain 0 20 0 40 0 30 0
57. software versions 5 19 0001 or earlier Use the recorded values and the timer logic flowchart to help determine the cause of the problem Then call MCE for assistance if any is needed Note To determine the software version place switch F8 up ON with all other function switches down OFF e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 PTC TRACTION DATA TRAP MEMORY CHART DIAGNOSTIC INDICATORS Oo tor Ea ECRN PEG EAE AE 0495H MLT A MLT a i MLT on MLT ae Note In software version 5 19 0001 and aie A is aad at aS aT bit 1 and is eae only when the controller is reset 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 57 TRACTION MOTOR LIMIT TIMER LOGIC MLTTST CLR MLT RESET MLT SAF Addr 2CH Bit 6 TIMER Y DNS OR UPS 1 SPCRET DNS Addr 24H Bit 4 DNS Down direction sense input 0908H ELAPSED SET MLT CALL TRAP IN Inspection or Access input MLT Motor limit timer flag 6 58 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 SAF Safety string input UPS Up direction sense input 6 11 PC BOARD QUICK REFERENCES FIGURE 6 41 _MC PCA Quick Reference MC PCA Quick Reference Part 42 QR MC PCA Rev 2 PTC and PHC Connections MC PCA OA Board Simplex Duplex Configuration Cable MCE Part C PCA PCA X may connect to either top or bottom RS 485 port LoUSAFETY ONC DOORS LOCKED HIGH SPEED IND SERVICE INSP ACCESSC FIRE SERVICE Configuration with MC PA TIMED QUIC NGA ate a Peripherals Adapter Board z N
58. 00 6 00 15 Decel Jerk Out 3 S Curve 3 at the End of Deceleration 30 00 3 50 16 Accel Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Acceleration 30 00 15 00 17 Accel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Acceleration 30 00 2 50 18 Decel Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Deceleration 30 00 6 00 19 Decel Jerk Out 4 42 02 2P21 S Curve 4 at the End of Deceleration 30 00 15 00 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 47 4 12 4 12 1 4 12 2 4 48 The output response of the drive can be seen on an oscilloscope when the car is running by looking at the voltage between terminals AM Output Frequency and AC Com on the drive terminals The input can be seen at terminal FM Speed Reference and AC Com These two signals are 0 10VDC The High Level speed D1 03 Level speed L1 05 Deceleration time C1 02 and S curve parameters P1 11 P1 10 P1 06 P1 07 should be adjusted for correct approach to the floor The Acceleration time C 1 01 and the S curve parameters P1 04 and P1 17 canbe adjusted for smooth starting and transition to High Speed This will be addressed in the final adjustment section FINAL ADJUSTMENTS YASKAWA F7 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sectio
59. 01 and L4 02 HPV 900 Drive verify adjust A1 Drive parameters Spd Dev Lo Level and Spd Dev Time TORQMAx verify adjust LF 58 and LF 59 Dynamic Braking Fault Turns on if the dynamic braking temperature exceeds its threshold TROUBLESHOOTING e 6 63 APPENDIX APPENDIX A ORIGINAL PROGRAMMED VALUES AND THE RECORD OF CHANGES BASIC FEATURES OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES Simplex or Duplex Simplex __ Duplex Simplex __ Duplex _ Sel Coll _ Single Button _ Sel Coll __ Single Button Operation ___ Single Auto PB ____ Single Auto PB Top Landing Served Car A Car Doors are Walk Thru Car A Yes No Yes No Car Serves Frnt Flr Car A 1234567891011 12131415 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Car Serves Rear Flr Car A 1234567891011121314151617 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 12131415 1617 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Top Landing Served Car B Car Doors are Walk Thru Car B Yes No Yes No Car Serves Frnt Flr Car B 1234567891011 12131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Car Serves Rear Flr Car B 1234567891011 12131415 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
60. 02 F4 Main Menu Car A Status Automatic Operation In Service Car B Status Automatic Operation In Service DOORS LEGEND TT lt gt i __Closed Open Opening Closing HOISTWAY TOP HALLS I In Service H Yall Call OUT Out Of Service Up Direction Down Direction LEGE HOISTWAY C Car Ca dnID168 6 4 2 MCE SPECIAL EVENTS CALENDAR ENTRIES F7 1 SCREEN Events that could affect car functions are recorded inside the MC PA computer memory This data is available to the mechanic for troubleshooting and analysis of the events see Figure 6 5 The Special Events Calendar logs the following information DATE month day e TIME hour minute EVENT the cause for logging the data such as doorlock clipped stop switch pulled etc PI the car PI at the time the data was logged Table 6 1 provides a list of Special Events Calendar messages and their definitions 6 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 5 Up Dn Arrows TABLE 6 1 Special Event Calendar Display Special Event Entries F7 1 Screen 98 05 08 14 28 17 Esc Previous Menu MCE Special Event Calendar Entries Activated Activated Deactivated Time Out of Service Door Close Protection Time Out of Service Deactivated Activated Deactivated Door Close Protection Motor Limit Timer Motor Limit Time
61. 08 and verify that the High Level and Level speeds are adjusted to provide a smooth transition from high speed to leveling speed A very low leveling speed less than 7 fom might cause this overshoot problem These speed settings are very sensitive and should be adjusted in small increments 0 01 and carefully 4 A value that is too high in a deceleration S curve parameter P1 18 P1 11 P1 10 P1 07 or P1 06 can cause the car to overshoot and relevel 5 The coordination of the dropping of the brake and DC injection is very critical The dropping of the brake is adjusted by trimpot BDD on the HC ACI board and the DC injection is adjusted by the drive parameters B2 01 B2 02 and B2 04 Refer to drive parameter sheet for the correct settings Increasing B2 02 will increase the DC injection current and you might start hearing a humming noise from motor before the car stops and brake drops 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 39 O 6 8 5 6 8 6 6 8 7 6 8 8 6 40 NOTE Refer to Section 4 12 5 b for more details regarding over voltage trip 6 If all the items described above are set properly and the car still overshoots consult the Drive manual If the problem still exists then increase the slow down distance on a couple of floors so that you can run the car between these two floors at high speed and stop the car properly OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR AT CONTRACT SPEED CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM ONLY FLUX VECTOR APPLICATIONS For a clo
62. 1 50 1 50 2 LF 55 Approach jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 1 50 x 1 50 LF 56 Stop jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 2 00 2 00 LF 57 Speed following error 0 off 1 on 1 off on on on LF 58 Speed difference 0 30 10 10 LF 59 mox time speed difference Following error s g 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Off SPd1 SPd2 LF 61 Emergency operation mode SPd3 di 1 off off LF 67 Pre torque gain 0 25 2 00 1 00 1 00 LF 68 Pre torque offset 100 0 100 0 0 00 0 00 LF 69 Pre torque direction 1 V 1 V 1 1 1 1 1 LF 70 Speed pick delay Delay to turn on DRO sec 0 0 3 0 0 30 0 30 LF 71 Brake pick delay sec 0 0 3 0 0 05 0 20 LF 76 Encoder resolution multiplier 1 0 13 2 2 LF 77 Absolute encoder position measured 1 0 65535h 0 Brake dr lay Time motor will hold full Here a i after direction inputs drop SSS Secs gao 0 45 Current hold time Delay in turning off the drive LF 79 Delay to turn OFF the motor current after the sec 0 00 3 00 0 30 0 20 direction is dropped and LF 78 has expired Diagnostic Parameters Read only LF 25 Estimated gear ratio 1 LF 80 Software version LF 81 Software date 3 LF 82 X2A input state see tables LF 83 X2A output state in F5 Drive LF 86 Operation mode Manual LF 87 Actual inverter load 100 rated load LF 88 Motor set speed rpm LF 89 Actual motor speed rpm LF 90 Actual elevator speed ft m LF 93 Phase current A LF 94 Peak phase current A LF 95 Actual DC voltage V
63. 1 N4007 C C SE SSe 1 1 US K L 503 or cD 509 Oe Sree ea a 502 R O O CL 504 ae IK 104 CL 104 70 ae ae w C103 E eS _ Tg 109 uis t uee ii Z TK Coa O O r 7 104 ae u14 dt 1 us HE Co H co Ee 10 1 a ae e 3 LUS PIV DIO8 D08P1I4 HC PC1 ORB lt REV ll gt ke cari Won Z 4 ug 26 01 0038 REV 5 gt C P1702 gt poerla 4 COPYRIGHT 1991 5 Pirni poer MADE IN USA u ii wy Us 84 Bis w uig 1 183 2 Wiss So u25 al Q J is 84 2 s84 H UE 4 83 d S 8s 87657321 UJ z K __ EC1 CJ i PFG PFG ye JH wy C H 1N4007 Psom a eo Ly sup PSik u11 ule u13 IfA fo us DNDO at H h Jt Z m UPDO k a oA H HH ua tt aa E i T A Cy TE c DCF tf i E E Ye ug SEE yo CSB NA AE or C CSAF CU J TNuDG 1r jc 11 wy FWI ie c3 i gt O O cy O ot S N o N CONNECTOR C1 eA HC PCI O INPUT OUTPUT INPUT PIN INPUT PIN DETAIL OUTPUT PIN OUTPUT PIN SAF 1 UPS 11 SST MGR 1 DCP 10 DBC 2 DNS 12 Fwi 2 4 DCF 12 DOB 3 LU 13 s 3 STOP SW OUT 13 15 PHE 4 LD 14 SPARE 1 INPUT 5 DOF 14 DOL 5 USD 15 NUDG 6 UPDO 16 STU 6 DSD 16 LAMP COMMON 7 DNDO 18 STD 7 DLK 17 CSAF 8 STOP SW SOURCE 17 19 DZ 8 FRS 18 SUB REL 9 11 H 20 IN 9 FCS 19 IND 10 FRA 20 D N 1111 R1 FIGURE 1 3 HC CI O E Call Input Output Board RPL RPS cle w7 IF THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE O 9 177 as es D18 CALL CIRCUIT CHECK THE TRIAC o JO 13 CIS Jeo ZENER DIODE OR RESISTOR Ree T 4 a Lasc Dco Men Dee R
64. 21 Traction sheave diameter inches LF 51 Acceleration ft s s LF 53 Deceleration ft s s TROUBLESHOOTING 6 23 If all the parameters are correct relay DRO turns ON when direction is picked and car still does not move then call MCE technical support 6 7 2 CAR DOES NOT RUN REACH CONTRACT SPEED 6 24 If the car was operational on Inspection operation but does not reach CONTRACT SPEED verify that the following drive parameters are set correctly en woon SSS eao Conraaspeedn rem OOOO tea Traction Sheave diameterinches LF 22 Gear reduction rato S LF 23 Ropingrato LF31 Speed Propgain J o o O juF s2 Speedint ain J o O LFa2 Highspeed FPM Verify that the drive is getting the High speed command signal To verify that the drive is getting the High speed command signal from the controller select parameter LF 86 and make a multi floor run The display should change from zero 0 to three 3 when high speed is picked If the value remains zero 0 the drive is not getting the high speed command signal Check the following e Verify that relay H on the HC RB4 VFAC board and relay HX on the HC ACI board are both picked Verify that the voltage between terminal H and COM on the HC ACI board is zero when relay HX is picked If not check the wiring between the HC ACI board and the drive Verify the operation of relay USD DSD on the HC ACI board The normally open contacts of these relays are in
65. 2P21 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 42 02 2P21 CAUTION Do not coil excess Encoder cable near high voltage components as noise may be induced If necessary shorten the cable at the Drive end Do not cut and re splice in the middle of the encoder cable or shorten at the Encoder end Do not route the encoder close to a magnetized area the motor or brake coils as this may induce AC in the encoder signal output This can cause the AC Flux Vector Drive to miscount and cause erratic speed control at lower speeds HOISTWAY CONTROL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION This section covers the recommended procedures for installing the landing system terminal slowdown switches directional limit switches hoistway access switches if required the hoistway access limit switch and the emergency terminal slowdown switch INSTALLING THE LANDING SYSTEM Refer to the installation drawings for the type of landing system provided INSTALLING THE HOISTWAY LIMIT SWITCHES a The terminal landing slowdown switches should be installed and adjusted to open approximately two inches beyond the point where a normal slowdown is initiated The direction limit switches should be installed and adjusted to open approximately one inch beyond the terminal landing The emergency terminal slowdown switch if required should open approximately 50 of the slowdown distance from the terminal This switch should be installed and adjusted to achieve the required opera
66. 30 Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator proportional gain 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 80 99 80 80 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input Voltage RMS volts 110 480 Drive dep A5 Motor 4 PoleDFLT Motor ID Motor Identification 6 Pole DFLT MCE Test MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 A 16 APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 Digital Operator ya F Setting Drive Field MCE No o Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults Setting Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 460 Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 Rated Motor Curr _ Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 Motor Poles Motor poles 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 50 0 3000 0 1130 No Load Curr Percent no load current 10 0 60 0 35 0 Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance
67. 33 EMSIC Emergency Medical Service Indicator Car Output option 5 36 EMSIH Emergency Medical Service Indicator Hall Output option 5 36 ENCODE ALL FLOORS option 5 38 Enter Security Code message 5 9 EP1 Emergency Power Phase 1 Output option 5 36 EP2 Emergency Power Phase 2 Output option 5 36 EPI Emergency power input flag 5 17 EPI Emergency Power Input option 5 33 EPR Emergency power return flag 5 17 EPR Emergency Power Return Input option 5 33 EPRUN Emergency power run input flag 5 17 EPRUN Emergency Power Run Input option 5 33 EPSTP Emergency power stop input flag 5 17 EPSTP Emergency Power Stop Input option 5 33 EQI Earthquake Input option 5 33 EQIND Earthquake Indicator Output option 5 36 Error Status Messages 5 6 ESS Elevator Shutdown Input option 5 33 ETS Reset switch 3 5 ETS Emergency Terminal Limit Overspeed fault 3 5 ETS Emergency Terminal Limit Speed trimpot 3 5 ETS Emergency Terminal Limit trimpot 4 2 EXMLT Input Is Activated message 5 9 EXMLT message 5 9 EXMLTC Complimented EXMLT Input 5 33 External Memory mode 5 44 5 47 EXTRA FEATURES MENU OPTIONS 5 38 F FAN LIGHT OUTPUT TIMER option 5 30 FCCC Fire Phase 2 Call Cancel Button Input option 5 33 FCCC Fire phase 2 car call cancel flag 5 17 FCHLD Fire phase 2 hold flag 5 17 FCHLD Fire Phase 2 Switch HOLD Position Input option 5 33 FCOFF Fire phase 2 off flag 5 17 FCOFF Fire Phase 2 Switch OFF P
68. 4 3 Car Communication Control CCC 1 10 CAR DOORS ARE WALK THRU option 5 23 CAR IDENTIFIER option 5 24 Car in Test Mode message 5 7 Car Motion Control CMC 1 11 Car Operation Control COC 1 10 call logic troubleshooting 6 9 6 10 Car Out of Svc w DLK message 6 13 Car Out of Svc w o DLK message 6 13 Car Out of Svc w DLK message 5 7 Car Out of Svc w o DLK message 5 7 Car Safety Device Open message 5 7 CAR SERVES FRNT FLR 1 option 5 23 CAR SERVES REAR FLR 1 option 5 23 Car to Floor Function message 5 7 CAR TO FLOOR RETURN FLOOR option 5 43 Car to Lobby Operation message 5 8 Car Top Inspection switch 3 11 3 14 3 26 CC CANCEL W DIR REVERSAL option 5 40 CC Car call flag 5 15 CCA Car call above flag 5 15 CCB Car call below flag 5 15 CCC Car call cancel input flag 5 15 CCC Car Calls Cancel Input option 5 32 CCD Car call disconnect flag 5 15 CCDE Car Call Disconnect Enable Output option 5 35 CCH Car call hold flag 5 15 CCR Car call flag rear 5 15 CCT Car call time flag 5 15 CCT Car Call Time Flag Output option 5 35 CCTR Car call time flag rear 5 16 CD Car done flag 5 16 CD Car Done on Emergency Power Output option 5 35 CE ELECTRONICS INTERFACE option 5 40 CFLT CFLT Output option 5 35 CGED Car Gong Enable Down Output option 5 35 CGEDR CGED for rear doors Output option 5 35 CGEU Car Gong Enable Up Output option 5 35 INDEX l 1 CGEUR CGEU for rear doors Output option 5 35
69. 51 Acceleration Rate and LF 52 Acceleration Jerk Increase the drive gains by increase parameters LF 31 and LF 32 Turn OFF the power and wait for 5 minutes so the DC bus voltage is not present in the dynamic braking circuit Using a voltmeter verify that no voltage is present Then verify the value of the dynamic braking resistor with the job prints and check for any loose connection DRIVE TRIPS E OP OR THE CAR OVERSHOOTS ON DECELERATION If the drive trips on E OP during deceleration or overshoots the floors then check the following 1 Verify that all the items described in Section 6 9 3 and the counter weight are set properly 2 Verify that the High Level speed Level speed and Intermediate speed if required are set as described in Sections 4 8 1 and 4 9 4 c 3 Increase the deceleration parameter LF 54 and verify that the High Level and Level speeds are adjusted to provide a smooth transition from high speed to leveling speed 4 If the value of parameter LF 55 is too high it can cause the car to overshoot and relevel 5 If all the items above are set properly and the car still overshoots consult the Drive manual If the problem still exists then increase the slow down distance on a couple of floors so that you can run the car between these floors at high speed and stop the car properly OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR AT CONTRACT SPEED The TORQMAX F5 series drive is used for Flux Vector applications If there are OSCIL
70. 6000 0 IR 80 of 5 LF 17 Encoder Pulse Number ppr 256 10000 1024 1024 LF 18 Swap Encoder channel 0O OFF 1 ON off on off off LF 19 DC voltage compensation used for open loop V 150 500 230 460 LF 20 Contract Speed fom 0 0 2000 0 0 LF 21 Traction Sheave Diameter inch 7 0 80 0 24 me LF 22 Gear Reduction Ratio d 1 99 9 30 KON LF 23 Roping ratio 1 8 1 Fa LF 24 Load lbs 0 65535 0 LF 25 Estimated Gear Reduction s z LF 30 Control method 0 open loop 2 closed loop 0 3 0 LF 31 IM KP Speed proportional gain 1 65535 3000 rey LF 32 _ IM KI Speed integral gain 2 1 65535 1000 av O00 LF 33 _ IM KI Speed offset 0 0 1000 age LF 34 IM KP Current proportional gain a 1 65535 1500 1500 LF 35 IM KI Current integral gain F 1 65535 500 500 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX D QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX DRIVE PARAMETERS A 21 Digital Parameter Description Unit Setting MCE Field MCE Operator Range Drive Set Display Defaults LF 36 Maximum torque loft 0 500 200 300 of Automatically calculated by the drive This LF 91 value should be 3 times LF a LF 37 Low speed torque boost 0 25 5 10 0 10 0 LF 38 Switching frequency 0 8 KHz 1 16KHz 0 1 1 1 Note set LF 38 0 if E OL2 error on drive LF 40 Re leveling Speed Not used but must be set to 0 fpm a ae
71. Board HC SIB Selectable Input Buffer Board Car A HC SIB Selectable Input Buffer Board Car B HC RT Relay Tester Board IMC ACIB AC Baldor Interface Board HC DPS MOM H Front G A L MOM MOH Door Interface and Power Supply Board HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board HC ACIF AC Flux Vector Interface Board HC DPS MOM H R Rear G A L MOM MOH Interface and Power Supply Board A 24 APPENDIX E NOMENCLATURE 42 02 2P21 PC BOARD DESCRIPTION IMC MBX IMC Enhanced Motherboard SCR RIX SCR Relay Interface Extension Board HC HBF A S M E Front Door Lock Bypass Board HC HBFR A S M E Front and Rear Door Lock Bypass Board IMC ACIM AC MagneTek Interface Board HC TACH MG Tach Adjust Board for VVMC MG Controller HC TACH SCR Tach Asjust Board for VVMC SCR Controller Individual group cars use board numbers for car A only SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION OFF BOARD__ X _ BOARD BOARD DESIGNATOR BUS LOCATED ON PC BOARD SIDE T SOLDER CONNECTION ON REAR OF PC BOARD BUS LOCATED OFF PC BOARD WIRING INSIDE CONTROL CABINET TRA PC BOARD MICROCOMPUTER OUTPUT RASE TON IPE BOAR OR CALL CIRCUIT CUSTOMER WIRING INTO CONTROL CABINET ALL UNMARKED DIODES MICROCOMPUTER OUTPUT OR CALL ARE 2 5 AMP 1000 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR ASME 17 1 2000 SERIES CONTROLLER VOLTAGE SPIKE SUPPRESSOR MICROCOMPUTER INPUT FOR a
72. CC32R 132 CC32 SPARE INPUTS ADD 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O2AF SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 02B0 SP17 SP16 SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 02B1 SP25 SP24 SP23 SP22 SP21 SP20 SP19 SP18 02B2 SP33 SP32 SP31 SP30 SP29 SP28 SP27 SP26 02B3 SP41 SP40 SP39 SP38 SP37 SP36 SP35 SP34 02B4 SP49 SP48 SP47 SP46 SP45 SP44 SP43 SP42 ADD 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 02EF OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 02F0 OUT16 OUT15 OUT14 OUT13 OUT12 OUT11 OUT10 OUT9 02F1 OUT24 OUT23 OUT22 OUT21 OUT20 OUT19 OUT18 OUT17 OUT32 OUT31 OUT30 OUT29 OUT28 OUT27 OUT26 OUT25 This table shows the spare outputs for HC IOX boards If an HC I40 board is used the outputs follow those of an HC IOX board and are in the following format Increment the output numbers accordingly HC I40 board spare output format 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 not used not used not used not used 5 46 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 TABLE 5 7 Computer s Hospital Call and Eligibility Memory Chart HOSPITAL CALL ELIGIBILITY HOSPITAL CALLS OTHER CAR THIS CAR ASSIGNED HOSPITAL REGISTERED HOSPITAL CALLS CALLS Front rear Front reaR FRONT REAR FRONT Ea REAR EAEAN ZZZ For Z Floor 3 r CAS Peages es AS LA S A EGRIO EC10 Floor 10 Af J ECRI2 ECI2 Floor 12 J J j ECRI4 ECI4 Floor 14 Z
73. DCLR and or DLK circuitry or wiring Troubleshooting Inspect the Door Closed Limit Rear and the Door Lock circuitry and wiring When this error is generated the car is not allowed to run AR DOOR LOCK SWITCH FAILURE NYCHA Description The rear door lock contacts have failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the rear hoistway doors closed and locked there is power on the DLSR input an no power present on the DCLR input AR DOOR OPEN LIMIT FAILURE Description The rear door open limit switch has failed open Troubleshooting Ensure that the rear car gate is open there is no power on the DOLR input and no power is present on the DLSR or CDR inputs 5 12 6 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message REAR GATE SWITCH FAILURE NYCHA Description The rear car gate switch has failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the rear car gate closed there is power on the GSR input an no power present on the DCLR input DUNDANCY DOOR LOCK RELAY FAILURE Description The one or both of the front or rear door lock relays has failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the hoistway doors open there is no power present on the RDLS or RDLSR inputs If power is present one or more of the door lock relays has failed in the closed or picked position DUNDANCY FRONT GATE SWITCH FAILURE Non ASME 2000 Description The car gate switch
74. Fire phase 1 input FRSS Fire phase 1 flag FWI Fire warning indicator output 5 3 8 TROUBLESHOOTING SPECIFIC PROBLEMS This section will describe how to solve some specific problems by using the computer panel 5 3 8 1 PROBLEM THE BFD TFD ERROR MESSAGE IS FLASHING ON THE DISPLAY As shown in Table 5 2 the message means that there is either a Bottom Floor Demand or a Top Floor Demand The controller is trying to establish the position of the car by sending it to either the bottom or top floor If the controller has the Absolute Floor Encoding feature then the controller can establish the position of the car as soon as the car reaches any door zone The car does not have to travel to a terminal landing to establish the position of the car It is normal for the BFD TFD message to appear on the display right after power up or after the car is taken off Inspection or after the COMPUTER RESET button is pressed However in all Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 17 5 18 three cases the BFD TFD message should clear quickly and then should not appear again as the car runs on Normal service If the BFD TFD message is flashing for no apparent reason take the following steps The first step in troubleshooting is to decide which of the following scenarios applies Scenario A The car is stuck at the bottom floor with the BFD TFD error message flashing constantly OR Scenario B
75. G 4 TROUBLESHOOTING If there are no audio messages then The speaker may not be connected on J9 The 15V supply on connector J7 may not be present U39 relay may be defective U38 audio power op amp may be defective U5 program Eprom U7 or U8 digitized voice Eprom may be defective A volume control trimpot may be defective or turned fully clockwise If the message Please allow the doors to close is heard when nudging The photo eye used to detect objects in the door path may be blocked The photo eye may be dirty or defective G 5 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Square recessed mount 6 1 4 by 6 1 4 by 4 1 4 deep manufacturer Model 198 4 Square surface mount 7 by 7 by 4 1 4 deep manufacturer Model SE 198 4 Circular recessed mount 6 1 8 by 4 1 4 deep without lip manufacturer Model 94 4 7 round by 4 1 4 deep including lip 7 3 8 in diameter with circular grill FIGURE G 3 Speaker Dimensions Speaker Dimensions Baffle Dimensions 6 1 4 in X6 1 4 in X 4 1 4 in deep Baffle is mounted on enclosure __ using these four holes Top View OW A PN yo a K Speaker is PR mounted here o lt using these four studs 4 3 4 in Apart v K v e lt 512in gt 0 5 side view Bottom View A 30 APPENDIX G FLEX TALK OPTION 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX H LS QUTE LANDING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Q NOTE lf a sensor or the HC IPLS board is replace
76. HC ACI board If there is no voltage check the fuse on the primary side of the 30 VA transformer shown in drawing 3 of the job prints Also check the wiring from the secondary of the same transformer to terminal XC1 XC2 on the HC ACI board b Check for the correct direction enable signal by measuring the DC voltage between terminals COM and UP or DN on the HC ACI board In the down direction the voltage between COM and DN should be zero In the up direction the voltage between COM and UP should be zero The floating voltage between these points is approximately 15VDC when the direction relays are not picked The voltage between the COM and INS terminals should be zero when direction relays are picked on Inspection If all the functions described in the above steps are working properly and the car still does not move then verify the drive parameters and compare them with the drive parameter sheet which was shipped with the controller The motor name plate values should match the entered motor parameters Some of the following parameters if not set properly can prevent the car from moving on Inspection A1 02 Control method selection 0 V F control 3 Flux Vector B1 01 Reference selection 0 Operator B1 02 Run source 1 Terminals B1 03 Stopping method 0 Ramp to stop C1 01 Acceleration time 1 0 3 0 Setting described in Section 4 2 2 C1 02 Deceleration time 1 0 3 0 Setting is described in Section 4 2 2 D1 09 Inspection J
77. In service flag 2C 2 DCLC __ Door close contact input 23 6 LD Level down input 29 7 DCLCR_ Door close contact input rear 13 6 LEF Leveling encounter flag 25 4 DCP Door close power output 22 7 LFP Lower parking floor flag 26 8 DCPR __ Door close power output rear 12 7 LLI Light load input 28 1 DCR Down call flag rear 11 7 LLW Light load weighing function input 28 8 flag DDF Double ding function flag 28 6 LOT Lobby door time 22 5 DDP Down direction preference flag 29 5 LOTR Lobby door time rear 12 5 DEADZ_ Dead zone flag 30 4 LU Level up input 29 3 DELSIM Delta simulation flag 27 2 LWCE Load weighing change enable flag 38 2 DHEND Door hold end 33 4 MGR Motor generator run flag 2B 5 DHEND2 Door hold end rear 33 5 MLT Motor limit timer flag 2B 7 DHLD Door hold input flag 27 6 NDGBPS Nudging bypass flag 23 2 DHLDI ___ Normal door hold input flag 30 3 NDGBPSR Nudging bypass flag rear 13 2 DHO Door hold open flag 21 2 NDGF __ Nudging function flag 30 1 DHOR __ Door hold open flag rear 11 2 NDS Hall door timer non shorten 21 4 DIN Door open inactive 26 4 NDSR Hall door timer non shorten rear 11 4 DLI Dispatch Load Input 38 4 NUDG Nudging output 23 3 DLK Door lock input 28 7 NUDGR_ Nudging output rear 13 3 DLKS Door lock store bit 27 3 NYDS _ New York door shortening flag 26 6 DLW Dispatch load weighing function 38 3 PFG Passing floor gong output 2F 1 DMD Demand down flag 2A 8 PH1 Phase 1 return complete flag 30 2 DMU Demand up f
78. Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Parameter Description Unit Local Remote Key Oper Stop Key Run Cmd Delay Run Command Delay Scans 5ms scans 0 200 Fwd Torque Comp Forward Torque Compensation 100 100 Rev Torque Comp Reverse Torque Compensation 100 100 Dgtl Input Fltr Digital Input Filter Scans 5ms scans 0 200 Stop Dwell Time Stop Dwell Time 0 0 30 0 Num Auto Resets Number of Automatic Resets Auto Reset Time Time Delay Between Automatic Resets x Set values for 200 volts The value at 400V is twice that of 200V se Do not initialize the drive in the field if it is not required Setting A1 03 1110 and pressing enter will initialize the Drive and will set all of the drive parameters to the MCE Drive default values Parameter A1 03 will display 0 after Initialization Note 1 At the factory MCE will set the drive parameters to the values shown in the MCE Setcolumn and will save those values as defaults by setting parameter O2 03 1 In the field the drive parameters can be reset to the MCE Set values by setting parameter A1 03 1110 The Field Adjustable parameters can then be re entered Note 2 The Yaskawa drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in this sheet are different and are
79. L2 PwrLoss Ridethru Momentary power loss ridethrough selection 0 Disabled L2 01 PwrL Selection 4 Ridethrough for time set in L2 02 i s BE cO 2 Ridethrough while CPU has power L2 02 PwrL RideThrut Momentary power loss time s 0 0 2 0 2 0 B 2 0 L2 03 PwrL Baseblockt Minimum baseblock time s 0 0 5 0 0 7 B 0 7 L3 Stall Prevention StallP Accel Sel Stall prevention selection during accel i Bored ee PIERO 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent One 1 B i StallP Accel Lvl N A to Flux Vector StallP Decel Sel Stall prevention selection during decel L3 02 Stall Prevention level during accel 0 200 180 B 180 13 04 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent one 9 7 0 ne StallP Run Sel Stall prevention selection during running i L3 05 N A to Flux Vector 0 Disabled 1 Decel1 2 Decel 2 02 y Bo 20 StallP Run Level f i g L3 06 N A to Flux Vector Stall prevention level during running o 30 200 160 B 160 L4 Ref Detection Flux Vector only set to drive default for V f Speed agree det level Flux Vector only f L4 01 Spd Agree Level L4 01 E1 04 Hz 0 400 0 B 60 L4 02 Spd Agree width Speed agree det width Flux Vector only Hz 0 20 2 B aA L5 Fault Restart L5 01 Num of Restarts Number of automatic restart attempts 0 10 0 B 0 5 02 Restart Sel Automatic restart operation selection i 0 1 4 B A 0 No Fault Relay 1 Fault Relay Active L6 Torque Detectio
80. Level Level Speed must be lt D1 03 FPM 0 0 15 0 2 5 Reference 6 Preset Reference 6 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 Combination Intermediate must be gt D1 03 and lt D1 02 FPM 0 0 42 0 Reference 8 Preset Reference 8 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 Jog reference Ref Upper Limit Jog Reference Inspection Speed Frequency Reference Upper Limit FPM 0 0 0 0 110 0 42 0 100 0 100 0 Ref Lower Limit Input Voltage Frequency Reference Lower Limit Jump Frequencies Input Voltage Setting V 0 0 110 0 180 460 0 0 0 0 not used set at drive defaults V F Pattern Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded 230 460 Motor Selection Motor selection 0 Fan Coded 1 Blower Coded 0 1 0 V F Selection V F Pattern Selection N A to Flux Vector F Custom V F 0 FF F Max Frequency Maximum Output Frequency 40 0 80 0 60 0 Max Voltage Maximum Output Voltage Motor Voltage 0 0 460 0 230 460 Base Frequency Maximum voltage output frequency 0 0 72 0 60 0 A 38 Mid Frequency A e APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS Mid Output Freguency A N A to Flux Vector 0 0 72 0 3 0 42 02 2P21 Digital Operator ae Setting MCE Field MCE No Display Parameter Descr
81. ON e If set to ENABLED Security is ON when the BSI input is turned ON e If set to DEACTIVATED Security is OFF regardless of the status of BSI To find the BSI input refer to the job prints When Security is ON all car calls are screened by the computer and become registered only if 1 the callis not to a secured floor or 2 the call is to a secured floor and its security code is correctly entered within 10 seconds 5 6 1 1 VIEWING THE BUILDING SECURITY MENU Place the F3 switch in the up position with all other switches in the down position The following display appears A A a ie wae a ya A gt _f VY V N S FUNCTION SWITCHES a Fe F7F6 F5 F4 F3 F2F1 D NW eG Press the N pushbutton THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 The following display appears 5 6 1 2 PROGRAMMING AND VIEWING THE SECURITY CODES Press the S pushbutton to start programming or changing the Security codes A n pb D a id y wr or to view the codes FUNCTION SWITCHES 3 N S Fe F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2F1 r i If no code has been programmed then the computer displays NO CODE PROGRAMMED for that particular floor number Press the S pushbutton again to start programming the Security code If a code has already been programmed then the computer displays the security code The cursor will blink below the floor number for the Security code being displayed Press t
82. OVERLOAD WEIGHER above ADJUSTING THE LOAD THRESHOLDS The typical values for the load thresholds are shown below However these thresholds are user adjustable and may be changed at any time Load Threshold Default Value Range e LIGHT LOAD WEIGHER LLW 20 0 40 e DISPATCH LOAD WEIGHER DLW 50 20 80 e HEAVY LOAD WEIGHER HLW 80 50 100 e OVERLOAD WEIGHER OLW 105 80 125 e OVERLOAD 2 WEIGHER OLW2 0 disabled 100 140 To adjust these thresholds a b Software Revision 6 03 Enter the SYSTEM mode of operation by placing the F3 switch in the up position Press the N pushbutton until LOAD WEIGHER e THRESHOLDS appears on the LCD display o a o 4 Press the S pushbutton to display the load threshold you wish to set THE COMPUTER e 5 51 5 6 4 5 52 f The value shown is the current threshold value expressed as a percentage of the full load value see the table above Press the or pushbutton to adjust the value If the value is set to 0 the load weigher function is disabled Press the S pushbutton to select another load threshold to adjust or press the N pushbutton to exit this menu Place the F3 switch in the down position to exit SYSTEM mode when finished If an analog load weigher is used the Analog Load Weigher Learn Function must be performed before the load weigher system will perform properly see Section 5 6 4 ANALOG LOAD WEIGHER LEARN FUNCTION With the is
83. PHASE 2 AND ANSI 89 YES NO This option is only available if the FIRE SVCE CODE option is set to ANSI A17 1 89 see section 5 4 3 4 If this option is set to YES then the ANSI A17 1 89 Fire Code will conform to New York City Fire Code requirements when on Fire Phase 2 If this option is set to NO then the controller will conform to standard ANSI A17 1 89 Fire Code 5 4 3 9 WHITE PLAINS NY FIRE CODE YES NO This option is only available if the FIRE SVCE CODE option is set to ANSI A17 1 89 see section 5 4 3 4 The city of White Plains requires that if fire phase one is still in effect the car can exit fire phase two regardless of the position of the doors Setting this option to YES will comply with this requirement 5 4 3 10 MASS 524 CMR FIRE CODE YES NO This option is only available if the FIRE SVCE CODE option is set to A17 1 2000 If this option is set to YES the ASME A17 1 2000 fire code will conform to the Massachusetts 524 CMR requirements If this option is set to NO the controller will conform to the standard ASME A17 1 2000 code DOOR OPERATION MENU OPTIONS 5 4 4 1 NUDGING This option causes Nudging Operation to occur when the doors are prevented from closing During Nudging Operation the controller will turn ON the NUDG output to signal the door operator to close the doors at a reduced speed The NUDG output will stay ON for the amount of time the Nudging Timer is set and then cycle OFF for the same
84. Pick UP or DN the HC ACI board direction No Refer to the job prints to determine why the Directional relays U1 U2 or D1 D2 relays are not picking 6 30 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 PM Contactor does not pick Series M TORQMAX Page 2 Continued from page 1 Relay UA2 or DA2 amp UAX Verify 120VAC between terminal 1 and terminals 8 10 11 85 UP and ao 8 12 13 87 DN Relays PT1 and PT2 do not have indicators Relays ei es on m PT1 and PT2 serve the relays to verify that they are picking on the HI ACI boarg EaR If these relays are not picking refer to the job are ON prints and check the voltages Refer to the job prints to determine why 120VAC is PM contactor f turns ON not present on the contactor coil when PT1 and j PT2 are ON 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 31 FIGURE 6 28 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Brake does not pick Brake does not pick Series M TORQMAX Put the car on Inspection operation and pick UP or DN direction 6 32 Main PM Contactor urns ON No To resolve this issue refer to flow chart PM contactor does not pick Yes BR relay turns ON DRO relay turns ON No Yes if PMX relay is used verify that it picks when direction is picked Follow the job prints and verify brake fuses and input voltage to the brake circuit Verify that the drive parameters are set correctly Select LF 82
85. Power Operation when the controller receives the Emergency Power Input EPI signal During Phase 1 of Emergency Power Operation the car will be moved to the emergency power return floor In a duplex controller each car will be moved to the emergency power return floor one at a time During Phase 2 of Emergency Power Operation if the car s Emergency Power Run EPRUN input is activated the car will run normally Otherwise the car will remain at the emergency power return floor and will not respond to any calls For a simplex controller the car s EPRUN input is sometimes connected to a switch so that the input can be turned ON and OFF For a duplex controller both cars EPRUN inputs are usually connected to a Run Selection switch The position of this switch determines which car will run during Phase 2 of Emergency Power Operation Often there is an AUTO position on the Run Selection switch connected to the AUTO input on both controllers in a duplex If the AUTO input is activated then one car will be automatically selected to run during Phase 2 of Emergency Power Operation For example If one car happens to be out of service when the operation begins the other car will be automatically selected to run If the Emergency Power option is selected then the appropriate spare inputs should be selected also see Section 5 4 7 5 4 9 6 LIGHT LOAD WEIGHING LIGHT LOAD CAR CALL LIMIT This option is only used when the Light Load Weigher
86. Rate 4 Deceleration Rate 4 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 ve The maximum FPM is determined by 01 03 Set this paramet er before setting D1 02 thru D1 17 D1 02 High High Speed must be gt D1 07 FPM 0 0 50 D1 03 High Level High Level must be gt D1 05 and lt D1 07 FPM 0 0 30 0 13 0 D1 05 Level Level Speed must be lt D1 03 FPM 0 0 15 0 2 5 D1 07 Combination Intermediate must be gt D1 03 and lt D1 02 FPM 0 0 42 xk Xk xk D1 17 Jog Reference Inspection speed FPM 0 0 42 See Table 4 8 fo r suggested initial settings for these parameters E1 01 Input volt Drive Input Voltage Vk 180 460 Drive input voltage E1 03 V F Selection Pattern Selection N A to flux vector 0 F F E1 04 Max Frequency Maximum Output Frequency 40 0 80 0 60 0 E1 05 Max Voltage Motor Output Voltage 0 0 460 0 Motor name plate voltage E1 06 Base Frequency Maximum Voltage Output Freq 40 50 60 Motor rated 60 0 E1 07 Mid Frequency A Mid Output Frequency A N A to flux vector 0 0 72 0 3 0 E1 08 Mid Voltage A Mid Output Voltage A N A to flux vector 0 0 255 0 16 0 25 0 gt E1 09 Min Frequency Minimum Output Frequency N A to flux vector 0 0 72 0 0 5 E1 10 Min
87. STOP OPTION option 5 40 AXR Auxiliary Reset Input option 5 31 B BAB Redundancy Fault message 5 6 BAB Relay coil monitoring input option 5 31 BASIC FEATURE MENU OPTIONS 5 23 Basic Security 5 48 programming or changing the Security codes 5 49 BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot 3 4 3 10 3 14 3 18 3 25 3 30 4 1 6 62 G5 GPD515 Drive 4 11 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 24 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 36 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 64 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 51 BFD Bottom floor demand flag 5 15 BFD TFD error message 5 17 Both USD amp DSD Inputs are Active message 5 6 Both USD and DSD are Open message 5 6 6 13 Bottom Floor Demand message 5 7 6 13 Bottom Floor or Top Floor Demand message 5 7 42 02 2P21 BPS Brake Pick Sensor Input option 5 32 Brake Pick Failure message 5 7 brake switch installation of 2 9 BSI Building Security Input option 5 32 buffer tests G5 GPD515 Drive 4 15 4 16 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 28 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 41 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 69 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 55 4 56 Bus Fuse Blown 2 message 6 13 Bus Fuse Blown 2C message 5 7 Bus Fuse Blown 2H message 5 10 6 13 BYPASS STOP SW ON PHASE 1 option 5 25 C call logic troubleshooting 6 7 10 CANCEL CAR CALLS BEHIND CAR option 5 40 Capture For Test message 5 7 Car Call Bus is Disconnected message 5 7 Car Call Cancellation Output 900 option 5 37 CAR CALL CANCELS DOOR TIME option 5 26 CAR CALL DOOR TIMER option 5 29 car calls registering
88. Stop the car so that the car top is accessible from the top hall door Remove jumpers from the safety circuit Run the car from the car top Inspection station Verify that the SAF relay drops out and the car stops when the Car Top Emergency Stop Switch is released Also by opening the Emergency Stop Switch while the car is moving up or down verify that the brake stops and holds the car Run the car through the hoist way checking clearance and the door locks When all of the doors are closed remove the jumpers from terminals 4 and 8 and from terminals 18 and 59 if present Correct any problem with the door locks and the door closed contacts Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LCD display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection NOTE If the car is not completely wired temporary check the following wire removed from panel mount terminal DCL wire removed from terminal 47 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to panel mount ter
89. The CMC also provides for Inspection Leveling Overspeed ILO monitoring and Emergency Terminal Switch ETS monitoring These functions are covered by the following devices HC ACI AC Drive Interface board e HC ACIF Additional Flux Vector Drive Interface board The HC ACI board creates the speed command controls the brake monitors overspeed conditions and is the interface between the COC CPC and the power equipment brake AC Drive Unit and supporting devices VVVF DRIVE The VVVF Drive Unit receives the direction run and speed command from the HC ACI board and provides the proper 3 phase voltage and frequency to create the required RPM and torque in the motor It also provides dynamic braking when necessary 1 2 7 TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 42 02 2P21 To become familiar with the overall sequence of operation of this controller begin with a car call input and follow the signals as they progress through various parts of the control system A car call is registered by grounding an input on the HC PCI O board This 120VAC signal is converted to a 5V logic signal and is then read by the MC PCA Computer board The MC PCA board acknowledges this signal by sending a logic signal back to the HC PCI O board which then turns on a triac to illuminate the call registered light in the car panel and an LED on the HC PCI O board The MC PCA Computer board determines where the call is in relation to the car position and sends a directio
90. The car runs normally until it reaches the top floor then the BFD TFD error message flashes and the car goes to the bottom floor When it reaches the bottom the message is cleared and the car functions normally until it again reaches the top floor OR Scenario C The car runs normally until it reaches the bottom floor Then the BFD TFD error message flashes and the car goes to the top After it gets there the message is cleared and the car runs normally until it again reaches the bottom floor WHAT TO DO FOR SCENARIO A A Bottom Floor Demand should clear when all of the following conditions are met 1 The car is at the bottom and the Down Slow Down DSD input to the controller is OFF 2 The Door Zone DZ input to the controller is ON 3 The Door Lock DLK input to the controller is ON Look up the DSD DZ and DLK signals in the computer memory see Section 5 3 7 for an explanation When the car is at the bottom floor with the doors locked the correct values for these signals in the computer memory are as follows DSD 0 OFF DZ 1 ON DLK 1 ON If there is a different value for any of the 3 signals check the wiring associated with that particular signal For example if the DSD signal is equal to 1 ON in the computer memory inspect the DSD input wiring including the Down Slow Down limit switch The Down Slow Down switch contacts should be open when the car is at the bottom WHAT TO DO FOR SCENARIO B For scena
91. Then move the floor leveling magnet strips or vanes so the car stops accurately at each floor FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 51 The adjustment is almost complete The acceleration rate setting on drive parameter C1 01 should be at least as great as the deceleration rate parameter C1 02 but it should not be so high that it substantially exceeds the value of C1 02 Excessive acceleration will probably cause the VFAC Drive Unit circuits to saturate and therefore lose control of the car Ideally the slope of the acceleration in volts per second should be equal to the slope of the deceleration Note the present value of the C1 02 parameter Increase the value of C1 02 and run the car Continue to increase the value of C1 02 until the car overshoots the floor requiring a relevel operation Observe the response of the car to verify a stable releveling operation Return the value of the C1 02 parameter to its original value so that the approach to the floor is the same as before After the car stops check the empty car releveling operation by placing a jumper between terminals 18 and 26 to cause an up level after which the car will stop due to picking the LD Down Level switch Remove the jumper from terminals 18 and 26 and the car will level down against the counterweight Make sure that it does not stall If the car stalls you might have to increase the leveling speed 4 12 5 LOAD TESTING YASKAWA F7 a 4 52 Begin adding test weights to the c
92. U1 4 to verify the 1 V f w PG Fdbk 3 Flux Vector xxxxe COntrol method V F Control Open Loop 0 Flux Vector 3 A1 03 Operator status xxxexx Nit Parameters 0 No Initialize 2220 2 Wire Initial 0 9999 0 B o 1110 User Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initial A1 04 Enter Password Password for entry 0000 9999 B 0 A2___ User Contents Not used Programming B Application B1 Sequence Reference selection B1 01 Reference Source 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 0 3 0 B 0 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB Operation selection method B1 02 Run Source 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 0 3 1 B 1 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB Stopping Method B1 03 Stopping Method 0 Ramp to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 0 3 0 B 0 1 Coast to Stop 3 Coast w Timer Prohibition of reverse operation 51 04 Reverse Oper 0 Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Disabled i OA 2 E p B2 DC braking B2 01 DClnj Start Freq DC braking frequency speed level Hz 0 0 10 0 1 5 B 1 5 B2 02 DCInj Current DC braking current N A to Flux Vector 0 100 50 B 50 B2 03 DCInj Time Start DC braking time at start s 0 00 10 00 0 0 B ie e V F Control Open Loop 0 20 Flux Vector 0 0 B2 04 DClInj Time Stop DC Braking time at stop s 0 00 10 00 1 0 B 0 5 Cc Tuning Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows C1 Accel Decel C1 01 Accel Time 1 Acceleration time 1 s 10 00 6000 0 1 96 B x C1 02 Decel Time 1 Deceleration time 1 s 10 00 6000 0 1 96 B x C1 03 Accel Time 2 Accele
93. Voltage Minimum Output Voltage N A to flux vector V 0 0 255 0 8 0 12 0 42 02 2P21 x These values should be doubled for the 460 volt application START UP 3 21 TABLE 3 3 Critical Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters CRITICAL YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS Parameter Digital Operator Number Display Parameter Description Units Setting Range MCE drive default Field MCE settings E2 01 Motor Rated FLA Motor Full Load Amps 0 00 1500 0 Motor dependent Motor FLA E2 02 Motor Rated Slip Motor Rated Slip Frequency 0 0 15 0 Motor dependent E2 03 No load Current Motor No Load Current 0 150 30 40 of Motor FLA H1 01 Terminal S3 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S3 Function Selection 9 External BaseBlock N C 9 H1 02 Terminal S4 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S4 Function Selection 14 Fault Reset H1 03 Terminal S5 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S5 Function Selection 80 Mult step Ref 1F H1 04 Terminal S6 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S6 Function Selection 81 Mult step Ref 2F ETOS Terminal S7 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S7 Function Selection 82 Mult step Ref 3F Terminal S8 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S8 Function Selection 6 Jog Ref Inspection speed Terminal M1 M2 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 40 During Run 3
94. YES Press the N pushbutton to proceed to the next eligibility map If walk through doors are not programmed on this controller then rear eligibility maps will not display In order the next eligibility maps are as follows REAR UP STOP AT FLOOR 1 FRONT DOWN STOP AT FLOOR 2 REAR DOWN STOP AT FLOOR 2 Remember that the pushbutton increments the floor value to the next landing And that the N pushbutton will proceed to the next eligibility map THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 9 24 INTERMEDIATE SPEED BETWEEN FLOORS This option will only be available if the controller has the Intermediate Speed option set to YES It allows each individual floor run to be selected to run at high speed or at intermediate speed If you want the car to move at intermediate speed between the shown floors set the option to YES otherwise set it to NO Press the pushbutton to increment the floor values to the next landings Continue until all intermediate speed floors have been selected Press the N pushbutton to continue to the next option 5 4 9 25 LEVELING SENSOR ENABLED DISABLED If this option is set to disabled the LFLT ON LFLT OFF and DZ STUCK errors will not be generated 5 4 9 26 KCE ENABLE DISABLE The KCE Enable is set to ON when ENABLE is selected or OFF when DISABLE is selected from the menu display 5 4 9 27 ANALOG LOAD WEIGHER NONE MCE K TECH This option enables the analog load weigher log
95. _ wP12 Q SAF2 RP1 sp2 m 32 33 37 Esh m Eeg 9 CED oat 31 WP1B WP20 WP22 Owes O 49 wer 1 WO s007 O O 6 7 8 101 121318 202122252527 31 32 33 aK 37 3B 39 40 42 43 45 47 4B 49 5159 71 72 Xo Wae en 1 6 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION DN 3597 R1 HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board This board satisfies many of the code requirements for relay contact redundancy and the requirements for normal terminal stopping devices It also provides the necessary circuitry for running the car on Inspection or Access without the benefit of computers Along with the HC PCI O board this board comprises the high voltage interface between the MC PCA computer and the individual car logic functions such as door operation direction outputs direction sensing main safety circuits leveling circuitry etc This board typically contains 13 four pole relays as well as some terminals for field wiring Test pads surround each relay for 42 02 2P21 ease of troubleshooting A TEST NORMAL switch Inspection UP DN switch and Relay Panel Inspection switch are provided on this board 6 TERMINALS For field connections FIGURE 1 9 HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board
96. a duplex configuration either of the two controllers can become the dispatcher of hall calls The controller that assumes the dispatching duty on power up remains the dispatching processor until it is taken out of service If for any reason the communication link between the two controllers does not function each car will respond to the registered hall calls independently TROUBLESHOOTING In a duplexing configuration the controller that assumes dispatching duty is identified by the letter D in the upper left corner of the LCD display The other car is identified by the letter S slave in the upper left corner of the LCD If the upper left hand corner of the LCD is blank neither the D nor the S is displayed the cars are not communicating the following troubleshooting steps should be taken Step 1 Check for proper grounding between the two subplates Step 2 Check the communication cable hook up Step 3 The JP3 jumper is installed on both MC PCA boards found next to the power supply terminals see Figure 5 1 as the default configuration for duplex communication JP3 is an EIA 485 Standard Communication Termination jumper However in an attempt to optimize the duplex communication the JP3 jumper may be removed from either one or both of the MC PCA boards Step 4 If all of the above are unsuccessful contact MCE If the D and or S indicators on the LCD are flickering it is most likely caused by bad communication and the followin
97. abnormal conditions have been corrected When the car reaches a landing and is within the Door Zone relay DZ picked with leveling completed relays LU and LD not picked the controller reads the floor code vanes or magnets and corrects the Position Indicator If the car is on Automatic Operation and if a home floor has been designated the car will move to the home landing at this time If the car is at a landing within the Door Zone relay DZ picked with leveling completed relays LU and LD not picked when AC power is turned ON the controller will read the floor code vanes or magnets at the landing and correct the Position Indicator Again if a home floor has been designated the car will move to this landing to park REGISTERING CAR CALLS In the process of making final adjustments to the controller you will be asked to register car calls periodically A call or series of calls can be registered at the controller by momentarily placing a jumper between terminal 1 system common and the desired car call terminal or terminals on the HC PCI O or HC Cl O E board and then between terminal 2 and terminal 45 to allow the car to travel to each call The car may move immediately after the first call is put in or it may wait several seconds before moving CAUTION Thecall terminals on the HC PCI O and HC Cl O E board should never be connected to any of the power terminals such as 2 3 4 etc If this happens and the call is turned on it will bl
98. and LD inputs are active simultaneously Probable causes may be 1 A faulty leveling sensor or associated circuitry within the landing system assembly 2 Faulty wiring from the landing system to the controller 3 Faulty computer input circuit main relay board or HC PCI O board Troubleshooting Check operation of the leveling sensors and associated wiring place car on inspection move above and below a landing noting the transitions in the leveling signal s coming from the landing system e Verify that the computer diagnostic display of LU and LD matches the state of the sensor signals at the main relay board e Check also the operation of any contacts that may be placed at the low side the 1 bus side of the LU and LD relay coils e g H INT Check that such contacts close properly when appropriate LEVELING SENSOR FAILURE Description One or both of the LU and LD sensors have failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that power is not present on both the LU and LD inputs LEVELING UP Description The Level Up computer input is ON Comes ON normally when the car is just below a floor If the car is level with the floor and a message appears it is usually the result of a switch or sensor problem Troubleshooting Inspect the LU switch or sensor on the landing system and the placement of the landing system vane or magnet for that floor LIGHT LOAD WEIGHER CONDITION Description The Light Load Weighi
99. and the drive keypad display should read 50 of Contract Speed as the car attempts to start If the car runs normally commence multi floor runs and slowly increase High speed by increasing parameter LF 42 until Contract Speed is achieved If there is a problem reaching Contract Speed see the following note NOTE Drive gain adjustments The default values for the gain parameters LF 31 Speed Prop Gain and LF 32 Speed Integral Gain may not be sufficient to run the car on High speed It may be necessary to increase the value of these parameters At the slowdown distance from the next floor the Position Indicator will step After stepping occurs High speed is dropped and the car should rapidly decelerate to High Level speed Reduce the High Level speed LF 44 so that the car runs at about 10 20 fpm or at a reasonable speed use your personal judgment Six inches before the floor at which the car is to stop High Level speed is dropped and the car should decelerate to Level speed The Level speed can be adjusted using parameter LF 41 so that the car levels into the floor and stops Level speed should be 7 12 fom ora reasonable leveling speed use personal judgement If the car re levels frequently once Level speed is adjusted satisfactorily soread apart the LU and LD sensors or switches in the landing system to provide enough Dead Zone Turn the Speed Pick Delay SPD trimpot fully CCW fully OFF and then set it 1 4 turn in the CW di
100. are 10V and 0 10 V respectively Terminal X2A 5 is assigned to the drive Actual speed reference and terminal X2A 6 is assigned to the drive motor torque g The car should be running well now except possibly for the final stop Since the speed reference goes to zero when the car stops the VFAC Drive Unit will cause the machine to stop electrically Enough delay in the setting of the brake BDD will have to be provided to allow the sheave to stop turning before setting the brake firmly on the sheave During High speed if the speed change over can be felt in the car increase parameter A LF 33 Ki Speed Offset Accel and d LF 33 Ki Speed Offset Decel in steps of 100 This will help in achieving a smoother transition When the elevator slows down to leveling speed and travels to door zone the speed command will drop to zero before the brake drops This is adjustable using the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot The idea is to hold the brake up long enough to allow the motor to be stopped electrically and then drop the brake immediately the instant the motor has stopped If there is too long of a delay before dropping the brake the control system will release its control of the motor and the motor will drift briefly in the direction of the load before the brake is forced to drop by the PT relay The BDD trimpot controls the dropping of the brake through the BE relay Move the LU and LD sensors or switches closer together or further apart so th
101. as nudging The PTC controller has already been programmed at MCE Usually the controller Program mode does not have to be programmed during the initial installation Program mode can be used later to modify the elevator operation Refer to the Programming Record in the Job Prints for a list of the options and values programmed into the controller at MCE You may wish to copy these values into the space provided in Appendix A NOTE If any changes are made using Program mode record them in writing for future reference use Appendix A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAM MODE The car must be on Inspection before Program mode can be used Messages will appear on the computer board display Use the Nand S pushbuttons below the display to find and select options and to change values The next several subsections describe in detail how to use Program mode 5 4 1 1 VIEWING MENUS ON THE LCD DISPLAY All of the programmable options and features are divided into menus The following is a list of all of the menus Fire Service Menu Timer Menu Spare Inputs Menu Extra Features Menu Basic Features Menu Door Operation Menu Gongs Lanterns Menu Spare Outputs Menu For each menu there is a Menu Message on the display To look at these Menu Messages enter Program mode by moving the F1 switch to the up position The Start Message will appear A Press the N pushbutton and release it amp Ach wad NES ae a Ties
102. be active for the length of time determined by the Door Buzzer Timer DBZR Rear Door Buzzer Prior to automatic closing of the rear doors this output will be active for the length of time determined by the Door Buzzer Timer DHEND Door Hold End Output This output will turn ON five seconds prior to when the Door Hold Timer expires Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 35 5 36 SPARE OUTPUTS MENU OPTIONS DHENDR Door Hold End Rear Output This output will turn ON five seconds prior to when the Door Hold Rear Timer expires DHO Door Hold Output This output indicates that the doors are being held open by the door hold input function the DHLD input is active or the timer associated with the door hold function has not yet elapsed DLOB Door Left Open Bell Output DNO Down output Attendant Service DO1 DO2 DO4 DO8 DO16 D032 Binary coded P I outputs for digital P I devices DSH Door Time Shortening Output intermediate This output is generated whenever a destination car call button is pressed this action causes the shortening of the door dwell time if the doors are fully open DSHT Door Time Shortening This output is generated if either a destination car call button is pressed or if the door close button for the front doors is pressed DSHTR Door Time Shortening Rear This output is generated if either a destinati
103. call cancellation will give a CCT flag A door reopen from a hall or car call button at the lobby or a lobby hall or car call cancellation will give a LOT flag A door reopen from the Photo Eye Safety Edge or Door Open button will give a SDT flag Each flag HCT CCT LOT or SDT has a separate door standing open time The door logic provides protection timers for the door equipment both in the open and the close direction If the doors get stuck because of the door interlock keeper failing to lift high enough to clear the door interlock during the opening cycle then the doors cannot complete their opening cycle This could result in damage to the door motor The door open protection timer will eventually stop trying to open the doors so the car can go on to the next call Similarly if the doors do not close all the way i e the doors do not lock the computer will recycle the doors at a programmed interval in an attempt to clear the problem To provide a clearer understanding of the computer logic note that the logic looks for a reason to open the doors If a valid reason to open the doors is not found or if conditions are detected that prohibit the opening of the doors the logic will close the doors reset or turn OFF DOI To open the doors the car must be in a door zone and not running at high or intermediate e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 speed Once the car has settled into a proper position to open the doors a conditio
104. car at the bottom of the hoist way and while running the car in the up direction slowly turn the ETS trimpot CCW until the ETS indicator turns ON and trips the FLT2 FLT relay on the HC ACIF HC ETS board and the car stops Press the ETS reset push button on the HC ACIF HC ETS board to drop the FLT2 FLT relay The ETS indicator should turn OFF and the car should be able to run Repeat d and e in the down direction with the wire from the DET terminal removed The car should stop when it reaches 95 of contract speed Reconnect the wires removed from controller terminals UET and DET when the test is complete FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 16 4 CONTRACT SPEED BUFFER TEST TORQMAX F5 0 42 02 2P21 4 16 4 1 COUNTER WEIGHT BUFFER TEST WITH EMPTY CAR GOING UP NOTE The car should be at the bottom landing with the TEST NORM switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position To conduct the empty car buffer test going UP a number of functions need to be bypassed using jumpers Follow the steps below a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fom on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car Disconnect the Step Up STU input by removing the wire from terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent short
105. conductor size and minimize the resistance to ground by using shortest possible routing See National Electrical Code Article 250 95 or the related local applicable code For proper operation of the VVVF AC Drive Unit in your controller you must make sure that a direct solid ground is provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and motor Indirect grounds such as the building structure or a TABLE OF CONTENTS xi xii CAUTION A NOTE water pipe may not provide proper grounding and could act as an antenna to radiate RFI noise thus disturbing sensitive equipment in the building Improper grounding may also render any RFI filter ineffective Before applying power to the controller physically check all power resistors and other components located in the resistor cabinet and inside the controller Components loosened during shipment may cause damage Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running Incorrect values of drive parameters can cause erratic elevator operation For proper operation of the VVVF AC Drive Unit in your controller you must make sure that the incoming power to the controller and outgoing power wires to the motor are in their respective grounded conduits separate from all other control wires You must not connect the output triacs directly to a hot bus 2 3 or 4 bus This can damage the triacs PIs direction arrows and terminals 40 amp 42 are examples of outputs t
106. drive interface and which external functions are being used 3 4 2 VERIFYING THE CRITICAL G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS Table 3 1 lists the critical G5 GPD515 drive parameters which must be verified before start up Table 3 2 lists additional parameters applicable only to flux vector drives which must be verified A complete listing of drive parameters can be found in Appendix B CAUTION The following are very critical G5 GPD515 Drive parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation A1 02 Setting 0 or 3 depending upon the type of coniroller Open loop or Flux Vector B1 01 0 Operator B1 02 1 Terminals D1 02 H D1 03 HL D1 05 L D1 07 INT D1 09 INS must be set to valid speed settings None of these parameters may be set to zero value H1 01 7 Multi Acc Dec rate H1 02 14 Fault reset H1 03 80 Multi step spd 1F H1 04 81 Multi step spd 2F H1 05 82 Multi step spd 3F H1 06 6 Jog ref Inspection speed input terminal H2 01 37 During run 2 This parameter is very critical for the operation of the brake terminal 9 amp 10 contact TABLE 3 1 Critical G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters CRITICAL G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS Digital Operator Display Parameter Description Units Setting Range MCE drive default Field MCE settings Access Level Parameter access level 0 Operation Only 1 User Program 2 Quick Start Leve
107. eh Perel eet iat a ON et tee 1 13 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION 2 0 General Information esi coe ash he aaaea 2 1 2 0 1 Site Selection 22 02 04 teenager ehtendt ada ebacaedtesdeawds eed 2 1 2 0 2 Environmental Considerations 0 000 ees 2 1 2 0 3 Recommended Tools and Test Equipment 2 00005 2 2 220A Wining PINS e soera e or oe tear e We wha Beare wa ele See Be 2 3 2 1 Controller Installation 2 eacre st erate tee ber eh eek ee ESS Se Eee ees 2 4 2 1 1 Controller Wiring Guidelines 0 0 0 ee 2 4 2 2 General Wiring Guidelines 0 00 ees 2 6 2 2 1 Ground Wiring tr asthe tee he id ea nt ea Ee tt OE att Ne de 2 6 2 2 2 AC Motor and Brake Wiring 2 000 es 2 7 2 2 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor 00 0 eee eee 2 7 2 2 4 Installing the Brake Switch 00000 es 2 9 2 2 5 Installing and Wiring the Encoder 000 cence eee eee 2 10 2 3 Hoistway Control Equipment Installation 0 0 0 00 ee 2 11 2 3 1 Installing the Landing System 0 000 eee 2 11 2 3 2 Installing the Hoistway Limit Switches 000 eee eee 2 11 2 3 3 Installing the Landing System Control Box LS QUTE 2 11 2 3 4 Installing the Magnetic Strips on the Steel Tape 2 12 2 3 5 TM Switch Wiring and Adjustment If Used 00 2 12 42 02 2P21 TABLE OF CONTENTS i 2 3 6 Door Operator Diode Installation If Use
108. floors so that you can run the car between these floors at high speed and stop the car properly 6 6 5 OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR AT CONTRACT SPEED The HPV 900 series drive is used for Flux Vector applications If there are OSCILLATIONS in the car at contract speed then verify the following 1 Are the gain parameters are set two high A1 Response A1 Inner Loop Xover 2 Are the Motor parameters A5 Motor set correctly 3 Is the encoder properly mounted If it is properly mounted it should not oscillate 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 21 6 6 6 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE BY CLIPPING THE DOOR LOCKS If the drive trips on over voltage by clipping the door locks check the dynamic braking circuit and verify that drive parameters A1 Flt Reset Delay 5 A1 Fit Reset Hour 3 6 6 7 ALARMS AND FAULTS Refer to the fault section 3 7 in the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive Technical Manual 6 7 TROUBLESHOOTING THE TORQMAX F4 AC DRIVE The drive s digital operator display should have the normal display If there is any drive fault displayed refer to Section 6 8 7 in this manual or the fault section in TORQMAX F4 Drive Technical Manual 6 7 1 CAR THE DOES NOT MOVE ON INSPECTION The TORQMAX F4 drive software has been modified for use in MCE controllers Some of the parameters in the drive are different from those listed in the standard drive manual If a drive has been replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be e
109. four the car will shutdown The failure will be reset once the doors are locked DLK 1 if the car is placed on Inspection or the Computer Reset Button is pressed DOOR ZONE SENSOR FAILURE OFF POSITION Description Indicates that the car completed a run but did not see door zone Troubleshooting Reset this fault by pressing the Fault Reset button or by toggling MACHINE ROOM INSPECTION INSP NORM switch Run the car to the same floor and verify that DZ 1 or DZR 1 Check placement of DZ magnets DOOR ZONE SENSOR FAILURE ON POSITION Stuck Door Zone Input Description The controller computer detected that one of the DZ inputs front or rear did not transition to the low state during the last elevator run Probable cause may be 1 A faulty door zone sensor or associated circuitry within the landing system assembly 2 Faulty wiring from the landing system to the controller 3 Faulty computer input circuit main relay board or HC PCI O board Troubleshooting Check operation of the door zone sensors and associated wiring place car on inspection move car away from the floor noting the transitions in the door zone signal s coming from the landing system e Verity that the computer diagnostic display of DZ or DZ rear matches the state of the sensor signals at the main relay board or rear door relay board DRIVE FAILED TO RESPOND Non ASME 2000 Traction only Drive Failed to Respond DRIVE FAULT Description Monitor
110. indicator lights and multi Fault function fault signal is output when multi function output is selected Fault contact output is not activated Operation cannot be performed and operation indicator lights Alarm warning but no fault signal is output TABLE 6 2 Fault Diagnosis and Corrective Actions supplement to table in Drive manual D1 02 gt D1 07 gt D1 03 gt D1 05 gt 0 0 and within the Maximum specified values Enter the correct value of the parameter while accessing the program mode and then reset the drive The fault should clear OPE41 Invalid Parameter Preset speed reference D1 02 gt D1 07 gt D1 03 gt D1 05 gt 0 0 condition is C Case Fault 2 D1 01 D1 09 parameters not met Motor Faults f a motor fault occurs consult the Motor Faults and Corrective Actions table in the EMS Yaskawa AC Drive manual and take the corresponding corrective actions The following motor faults are addressed in this table OPE40 Invalid Parameter Preset speed reference D1 XX gt LIMIT D1 01 D1 09 parameters Motor does not rotate Motor rotation reverses Motor rotates but variable speed not available Motor RPM too high or too low e Motor RPM not stable during operation If taking the corrective actions described does not solve the problem contact your EMS Yaskawa representative immediately e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 6 6 TROUBLESHOOTING THE MAGNETEK HPV900 AC DRIVE The drive s digital operator
111. input When this input goes low Main Fire Service operation is initiated and the FWL output Fire Warning Light will flash GOV Governor input GS Gate Switch Input Makes up when the car door is approximately 1 inch from being fully closed With the car door closed there should be power on the GS input Gate Switch Rear Input Heat Detector Input Heavy Load Input A load weigher device can be connected to this input When the input is activated the controller will not answer hall calls Home Landing Input This input is used with the primary parking feature and will determine whether the car will park or not Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 33 SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS Hospital Emergency Operation Input Monitoring input for the INAX relay coil Inspection Down Input This input is used to indicate to the Microprocessor that there is an intent to move in the down direction while on inspection operation Inspection Up Input This input is used to indicate to the Microprocessor that there is an intent to move in the up direction while on inspection operation Intermediate Speed Input Front Infra Red Cutout This is a normally active input When this input goes low the infra red detector signal is ignored for the front door only and the door will always close at reduced torque and speed i e nudge closed unless th
112. is a problem reaching Contract Speed see the following note NOTE Drive gain adjustments The default values for the gain parameters A LF 31 Kp Speed Accel Proportional Gain and A LF 32 Speed Accel Integral Gain may not be sufficient to run the car on High speed It may be necessary to increase the value of these parameters At the slowdown distance from the next floor the Position Indicator will step After stepping occurs High speed is dropped and the car should rapidly decelerate to High Level speed Reduce the High Level speed LF 44 so that the car runs at about 10 20 fom or at a reasonable speed use your personal judgment Six inches before the floor at which the car is to stop High Level speed is dropped and the car should decelerate to Level speed The Level speed can be adjusted using parameter LF 41 so that the car levels into the floor and stops Level speed should be 7 12 fpm or a reasonable leveling speed use personal judgement If the car re levels frequently once Level speed is adjusted satisfactorily soread apart the LU and LD sensors or switches in the landing system to provide enough Dead Zone Turn the Speed Pick Delay SPD trimpot fully CCW fully OFF and then set it 1 4 turn in the CW direction The speed pick delay is achieved using the TORQMAX F5 drive parameter LF 70 Adjust LF 70 so that the brake is fully picked just as the motor first moves The goal is to delay long enough to avoid moving the mot
113. is in the ON position Run the car by toggling the UP DN toggle switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the desired direction using constant pressure The PM and BR contactors should pick and the car should move Verify that the car moves in the appropriate direction and the brake works properly Open loop applications If the car moves in the opposite direction interchange two of the motor leads e Flux vector applications Display the MOTOR CURRENT on the drive keypad by selecting parameter LF 93 Run the car on Inspection and check for one of the following conditions 1 If the car moves in the correct direction and the drive draws normal current 30 to 40 of motor FLA proceed to step c 2 Ifthe car oscillates at zero speed moves at slow speed or trips the E ENC fault on the drive change parameter LF 28 setting see parameters quick reference in Appendix L This parameter will swap the encoder channels internally in the drive It is not recommended to change the external encoder connections as the drive has the capability of changing them through software START UP 3 29 3 If the motor draws normal current but the car moves in the opposite direction turn OFF the power and wait until there is no voltage present on the DC bus Then interchange two of the motor leads Turn ON the power and change parameter LF 28 setting see parameters quick reference in Appendix L The car should now move in the correct direction and draw
114. jumpers from terminals 4 and 8 and from terminals 18 and 59 if present Correct any problem with the door locks and the door closed contacts Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LCD display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection NOTE If the car is not completely wired temporary check the following wire removed from panel mount terminal DCL wire removed from terminal 47 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present Check the counter weight balance Make whatever corrections are necessary to make the counter weight correct Check to see what the counter weighing should be before making any changes If a drum machine is being used follow the manufacturer s counterweighting recommendation and test the drum machine s limit switches On modernizations it is easy to overlook the typical 40 counter weighting Always put a 40 load in the car and check for equal motor current up verses do
115. landings top and bottom from the controller The car should make a normal slowdown at both terminal landings except that there may be a slight relevel which is okay If the car goes more than an inch past the floor move the slowdown limit until the approach is normal Reconnect the wires to terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board and return the TEST NORMAL switch to the NORMAL position The final adjustments are now complete 4 10 3 EMERGENCY TERMINAL LIMIT SWITCH MONITOR TORQMAX F4 4 40 All jobs under the requirements of ANSI A17 1 SECTION 209 4 B ASME A 17 1b 1992 ADDENDA must have a means to insure that the car speed is below 95 of the contract speed after opening the associated ETS limit switches The emergency terminal limit switch monitor performs this function Normally the jobs which come under the above requirements will have the HC ACIF or HC ETS board installed in the controller Both boards have the ETS monitor circuit This circuit receives the signal from the hall effect sensor and the magnets installed on the motor shaft or brake drum as described in Section 2 3 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor a b Make sure that all the wiring from the speed sensor to the HC ACIF board is complete Turn the ETS trimpot on the HC ACIF HC ETS board fully CW On a multi floor run adjust the speed of the car to 95 of the contract speed by adjusting the High speed parameter LF 42 Remove the wire
116. may be selected e SERIAL CABLE LINE DRIVER e MODEM e NONE Press N again to select the peripheral device that will be connected to COM Port 1 The display will read PA COM 1 DEVICE One of the following peripherals may be selected e CRT NO KEYBOARD color or monochrome CRT AND KEYBOARD color or monochrome PERSONAL COMP to be used with CMS or as a graphic display If one of the CRT options was selected the next option will be COLOR CRT Select YES if you have acolor CRT or NO if you have a monochrome CRT If PERSONAL COMPUTER was selected as the peripheral device the next option willbe FUNCTION Select CMS or GRAPHIC DISPLAY A similar set of options will be displayed for COM Port 2 Each Communication Port COM 1 and COM 2 must be programmed for a device and a media according to the particular job specifications to allow the particular peripheral device to operate properly 5 4 9 12 AUTOMATIC FLOOR STOP OPTION When this option is set to a specific floor number the car will automatically stop at that floor as the car is passing it 5 4 9 13 CC CANCEL W DIR REVERSAL This option will cause all of the previously registered car calls to be canceled whenever a direction reversal is detected 5 4 9 14 CANCEL CAR CALLS BEHIND CAR If this option is set to YES and the car has a direction arrow SUA SDA no car calls can be registered behind the car s current position For example If a car is at the fifth floor mo
117. n 3 LIMIT TIMER NdRIMa L All 2l 120l olo oloo Modem or Line Driver JUMPER TABLE MC PCA OA PHC amp PTC Controllers If U7 on the MC PCA OA board contains a 21 LB 217A microcontroller set JP1 to position B otherwise set to position A The JP3 jumper should be in the OFF position if the MC PCA OA board is not at the end of a daisy chain in a duplex configuration i e between MC PCA or MC PA boards position until car to car or car to PA communication is established P16 IPT Try JP4 and JP5 in either the ON or OFF 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING s 6 59 FIGURE 6 42 MC PA Quick Reference gorucrparv2 MC PA QUICK REFERENCE CARD MCE Part C PCA PCA X Ce P z H Bese ToUSAFETY ONC DOORS LOCKE HIGH SPEE IND SERVICE INSP ACCESSC FIRE SERVICE 2 TMD QUIO z voro ALEC POT bSkreast D N 3784 R2 O N 2307 R 0 MC PA MC PA 1 Port Switch Setting Cable and Peripheral SERIAL CABLE to CRT Terminal PC or Printer LINE DRIVER MODEM to C
118. normal current NOTE If the elevator does not run on Inspection refer to Section 6 7 Troubleshooting the TORQMAX AC Drive C Verify the inspection speed using a hand held tachometer If the car moves slower than the set value of the Inspection speed parameter LF 43 then verify the following LF 11 Rated motor speed LF 20 Contract speed LF 21 Traction sheave diameter LF 22 Gear reduction ratio LF 30 2 Close loop 0 Open loop If the gear reduction ratio is not available from the machine name plate calculate the value by first measuring the motor revolutions using a marker on the motor shaft or brake drum Reduce the inspection speed by decreasing LF 43 then determine the number of motor shaft revolutions required to complete one revolution of the sheave Calculate the gear reduction ration using the formula Gear reduction ratio Motor RPM Sheave RPM Enter the calculated value in parameter LF 22 Note The drive has the capability of estimating the gear reduction ratio Run the car on inspection and read the value parameter LF 25 the gear ratio estimated by the drive The value of LF 25 can be used for LF 22 However the correct value of LF 22 is critical for overall system performance therefore MCE TORQMAX recommends calculating or measuring the gear reduction ratio and entering the calculated value in parameter LF 22 if it is not available from the machine name plate Adjust the Inspection Speed for a comfortabl
119. on Inspection 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 37 6 8 2 6 38 If all the functions described in the above steps are working properly and the car still does not move then verify the drive parameters and compare them with the drive parameter sheet which was shipped with the controller The motor name plate values should match the entered motor parameters Some of the following parameters if not set properly can prevent the car from moving on Inspection A1 02 Control method selection 0 V F control 3 Flux Vector B1 01 Reference selection 0 Operator B1 02 Run source 1 Terminals B1 03 Stopping method 0 Ramp to stop C1 01 Acceleration rate 3 00 Setting described in Section 4 11 2 C1 02 Deceleration rate 3 00 Setting is described in Section 4 11 2 D1 17 Inspection Jog reference fom Inspection speed or as described in Section 4 11 1 E1 01 Input voltage Drive input voltage E1 03 V F pattern selection F User defined pattern E1 04 to V F pattern voltage at different Should be according to MCE setting but verify them E1 10 points E2 01 Motor rated FLA Motor name plate value E2 02 Motor rated slip frequency Should be according to MCE setting but verify Ref to the drive parameter sheet or the drive manual which explain how to calculate parameter E2 02 Motor rated No load current Normally 30 40 of Motor Full load current Inspection Jog reference 6 If the
120. or partially removed from their respective sockets p Put the car on Normal operation by taking the car off Inspection After the elevator finds a floor verify the operation of the elevator by registering calls and checking the speed 4 13 6 PHASE LOSS DETECTION TESTS YASKAWA F7 The VFAC Drive Unit is programmed to detect a motor phase loss Parameters L8 05 and L8 07 are enabled which will activate the drive input and output phase loss detection To test for proper tripping of the drive output phase loss connection between the drive and motor attempt to run the elevator on Inspection with one motor lead disconnected The Drive should trip off dropping the RDY relay and the brake The drive should display LF Output phase loss A manual reset of the Drive on the HC ACI board will be needed to return to Normal operation Reconnect the motor lead and return the controls to Normal operation If input phase loss is required disconnect any one of the three legs of the three phase MCE controller When either L1 or L2 is removed the drive will not function because the drive s control supply comes from L1 and L2 If either L2 or L3 is removed then the MCE controller will not function because the controller transformer is supplied by L2 and L3 If the controller and drive are normal but the controller wiring is not done as described above and one of the input power wires is disconnected then the drive will trip on fault PF Input open phase pr
121. parameters are set at the correct values and the car still does not move call MCE Technical Support CAR DOES NOT REACH CONTRACT SPEED If the car was operational on Inspection operation but does not reach CONTRACT SPEED verify that the following drive parameters are set correctly D1 02 High speed reference Contract speed or as described in Section 4 12 4 H1 03 Terminal 5 select 80 Mult step spd 1F for high speed input The D1 02 and H1 03 parameters are for High speed selection When the H relay on the HC RB4 VFAC board is picked the HX relay on the HC ACI should also pick If parameter D1 02 is set to contract speed then the drive keypad U1 02 parameter should display contract speed in fom and the DRIVE FWD or REV indicator should be illuminated If not verify that the voltage between the COM and H terminals on the HC ACI board are zero when the H relay is picked Also check the wiring between the HC RB4 VFAC board and the HC ACI board and the wiring between the HC ACI board and the drive unit e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 6 8 3 CAR OVERSHOOTS OR THE DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE ON ACCELERATION If during acceleration the car OVERSHOOTS or trips on OVER VOLTAGE then check the following Q NOTE Itis mandatory to have 40 counterweight 1 Adjust the ACC Drive parameter C1 01 C1 07 and increase acceleration time 2 Verify that parameter E2 02 and D1 02 are set correctly Adjust parameter P1 14 if required as
122. power overlay which car should be selected to run if it is on an emergency priority service SEC Security Code Incorrect When the building s elevator security is on this output will turn on for five seconds when an incorrect security code is entered SIMPO Simplex Output This output comes on when the SIMP input is activated or when Simplex Operation is chosen through KCE if available TOS Time Out of Service Output UPO Up Output Attendant Service WLDI Wildop Indication Output This output is generated if the car is in emergency dispatch mode of operation i e if the hall call bus fuse is blown and emergency dispatching is activated XPI1 XPI7 Auxiliary Position Indicators 1 thru 7 These outputs behaves identically to the standard Pl1 PIZ outputs except that the XPI1 XPI7 outputs are disabled on Inspection or during Fire Service Phase and Il XSDA Auxiliary Supervisory Down Arrow This output behaves identically to the standard SDA output except that the XSDA output is disabled on Inspection and during Fire Service Phase and Il XSUA Auxiliary Supervisory Up Arrow This output behaves identically to the standard SUA output except that the XSUA output is disabled on Inspection and during Fire Service Phase and Il ZADJ Zero Adjust This output is used to cause the analog load weigher to perform its zero adjust procedure The output is generated once ever
123. present Once all the steps described in Sections 3 3 1 3 8 1 and 3 8 2 are accomplished then proceed with the following a Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Turn ON the main power disconnect Under normal conditions there should be no fault message on the drive key pad display If there is a drive fault message refer to the fault section in the AC drive manual The drive key pad should be adjusted to display the speed The RPI relay will pick and after a few seconds the SAF relay should pick the LED on the relay will be lit On the HC ACI board relays RDY and CNP must also be picked If none of the relays have been picked inspect fuse F4 on the controller s back plate Verify that there is 120 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 on the HC RB4 VFAC main relay board If no problems are found then briefly place a jumper between terminals 2 and 20 on the HC RB4 VFAC board and confirm that the SAF relay turns ON after four seconds If the SAF relay turns OFF after removing the jumper there is a problem with the safety string Note that the RDY relay will turn ON as long as the VFAC drive is normal and there is 15DVC present on the HC ACI board The N C contact of the fault tripping output on the drive is used to pick the RDY relay This contact opens if there is a fault in the VFAC drive unit The fault can be reset by pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the d
124. preventing the leveling down operation If the car is trying to level it will not leave the landing for a call until the leveling is complete Move the limit switch if necessary The Status Indicator lights should now display the indication for Independent Service operation At this time the Position Indicator should match the actual car location Note that all of the Position Indicators and direction arrows are conveniently displayed on the controller All the calls are also displayed on the controller e FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 12 3 4 12 4 42 02 2P21 BRAKE ADJUSTMENT FOR 125 LOAD YASKAWA F7 Put the car on Inspection at the bottom landing Put 2 3 of a contract load in the car Begin adding weights in 50 or 100 pound increments and move the car up and down on Inspection each time Adjust the brake tension to stop and hold 125 of a contract load by tripping a stop switch open while running down on Inspection Hold the DOWN button in while tripping open the stop switch preferably on the Inspection station KEEP THE CAR NEAR THE BOTTOM AS IT IS LIKELY TO SLIDE THROUGH THE BRAKE ONTO THE BUFFERS If the VFAC Drive Unit trips off when the car is going down but not while it is going up refer to the manual for the VFAC Drive Unit and look up the failure indicated on the Drive display If an over voltage fault is indicated there may be a problem in the regeneration or braking resistors the braking module if one is provided
125. puts the drive in standby mode Drive parameter ru 0 reads stby during motoring condition and Active during deceleration overhauling conditions A voltage between drive terminals 7 amp 8 of 18 VDC ON 0 VDC OFF Drive Reset Terminal 11 This input resets an R4 drive fault Pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board activates the reset input and clears regenerative drive faults A voltage between drive terminal 11 amp 7 of 18 VDC ON 0 VDC OFF DRIVE OUTPUT Drive ready contact The contacts between terminals 1 and 3 on the R4 drive remain closed under normal condition and open during a fault which drops the RDY relay on the HC ACI board Pressing the Drive Reset button on the HC ACI board should clear the R4 drive fault and should turn ON the RDY relay POWER CONNECTIONS a It is recommended that the L1 L2 L3 connections on the Inverter and the R4 drive be in phase The input power connections L1 2 L2 2 L3 2 and the phase monitoring connections L1 L2 L3 on the R4 drive must be in phase If these connections are not in phase the R4 drive will trip fault E Syn and drop the RDY relay on the HC ACI board If the R4 drive trips on E nEt at power up or trips the over voltage E oP fault at the end of a run one of the phase monitoring fuses may be open or there may be a loose connection on the phase monitor inputs The DC bus connections must be correct and according to the drawings It is critical that DC b
126. speed A1 Contract Mir Spd Motor Speed at elevator contract speed Motor Full load RPM A1 Response 20 Sensitivity of the speed regulator A1 Inertia 2 System inertia This parameter will be adjusted during the adaptive tuning of the drive in Section 4 8 3 Adaptive Tuning A2 Accel Rate 0 3 0 A2 Decel Rate 0 3 0 A3 Multistep Ref Inspection Level High Level Intermediate and High speed must be set to the valid speed settings described in Section 4 6 1 Table 4 4 A5 Motor parameters Must be verified with the motor name plate and the parameter sheet filled out for the specific controller and shipped with the controller C2 Log In 1 TB1 1 Drive Enable C2 Log In 2 TB1 2 Run UP C2 Log In 3 TB1 3 Run DOWN C2 Log In 4 TB1 4 Fault reset C2 Log In 5 TB1 5 Step Ref BO Inspection speed input C2 Log In 6 TB1 6 Step Ref B1 Level speed input C2 Log In 7 TB1 7 Step Ref B2 High Level speed input C2 Log In 8 TB1 8 Step Ref B3 High speed input C2 Log In 9 TB1 9 S Curve Sel 0 C3 Relay Coil 1 Fault C3 Relay Coil 2 Speed Reg Ris This parameter is very critical for the operation of the brake terminal 54 and 55 contact be START UP 42 02 2P21 3 5 3 MOVING THE CAR ON INSPECTION OPERATION HPV 900 42 02 2P21 WARNING The motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied to the controller even when the motor is not rotating Do not open the drive cover for 5 10 minu
127. terminal insufficient Turn ON the power and check terminal voltage again If no voltage is present on the terminal a Check the jumper plug header on the HC CI O Call board The jumper plug socket is located on the right hand side near the call indicators If a Call board is replaced this jumper plug must be transferred to the new board and stay in the same board position more than one Call board on the controller b Verify that the correct incoming power is on terminals marked PS1 PS2 and PS3 NOTE Power will exist on at least one and possibly more of these terminals Call LED is ON even 1 Reset the computer Computer Reset pushbutton on Swing Panel though the field wire is 2 Run the car to the nearest landing to reset PI removed It may be necessary to reset the computer in the Group Supervisor other car in a duplex system in order to reset a latched hall call If the call does not cancel under these conditions replace the call board Cannot register a hall To discover whether the problem is with the call board or the field wiring call at the call board First remove the resistor fuse and disconnect the field wire s Verify that the HCDD Hall Call Disconnect Computer Variable Flag is OFF address 2C LED 6 For PTC or PHC controllers verify that the HCDX flag is OFF address 2C LED 4 Verify that there is proper voltage on the call terminal Register a call by shorting the call terminal to terminal 1 or GND
128. terminals 2 and 15 Trip open the electrical OVER SPEED switch contact manually and verify that the main safety circuit drops out Use which ever method is most familiar to verify the actual electrical and mechanical tripping speeds 4 7 5 2 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY OVERSPEED TEST WITH FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a Move the fully loaded car to the top terminal landing and turn the power OFF b Pull the coil of the FLT relay from its socket as described in Section 4 7 4 1 a The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car C If the HC ACIF board is used in this controller remove relays AS and ETL from their sockets d Bypass the Governor OVER SPEED switch by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and 15 on the HC RB4 VFAC board e In order to observe the loss of traction when the safety mechanism sets connect a jumper between terminals 16 and 17 on the HC RB4 VFAC board to bypass the safety plank SOS switch f Turn the power ON and verify that the controller is functional g Set the AC drive parameter A1 Overspeed Mult to 125 or to the required tripping speed If the trip point is greater than 150 of contract speed it will be necessary to increase the A1 Contract Mtr Speed parameter as well note the original value h Enable the over speed test by setting the U4 OVERSPEED TEST parameter to YES using the drive keypad see Section 3 6 4 3 Overspeed Test via Operator in the Magne
129. the DET terminal removed The car should stop when it reaches 95 of contract speed Reconnect the wires removed from controller terminals UET and DET when the test is complete 4 13 4 CONTRACT SPEED BUFFER TEST YASKAWA F7 4 13 4 1 COUNTER WEIGHT BUFFER TEST WITH EMPTY CAR GOING UP 0 NOTE The car should be at the bottom landing with the TEST NORM switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position To conduct the empty car buffer test going UP a number of functions need to be bypassed using jumpers Follow the steps below 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 55 a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fom on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car b Disconnect the Step Up STU input by removing the wire from terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting C Bypass the Emergency Terminal Up Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and UET on the HC ACIF board d Bypass the Up terminal slowdown and Up Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 on the HC RB4 VFAC board e Register a car call for the top terminal landing from the controller The counter weight will strike the buffer f Put the elevator on Inspection and pick
130. the Npushbutton If the button is pressed the selected digit is incremented by one The data display will also change as the address changes For example if the 2 of the address 1234 is blinking pressing the pushbutton once will change the address from 1234 to 1334 Pressing the pushbutton several more times will change the address to 1434 1534 1634 etc up to 1F34 and then back to 1034 FUNCTION OF PUSHBUTTON The pushbutton see Figure 5 1 modifies the digit of the computer memory address selected by the N pushbutton If the pushbutton is pressed the selected digit is decreased by one The data display will also change as the address changes For example If the 2 in the address 1234 is blinking pressing the pushbutton once will change the address from 1234 to 1134 Pressing the pushbutton several more times will change the address to 1034 1F34 1E34 etc THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 5 6 TROUBLESHOOTING USING EXTERNAL MEMORY MODE By using the computer s External Memory mode it is possible to find out if the controller is receiving call signals as well as spare input and output signals correctly 5 5 6 1 The following example illustrates how to use Table 5 6 to check a signal in the computer s external memory Example The DHLD Door Hold Open Switch input will not cause the doors to stay open DHLD is programmed for the Spare 5 input Step 1 Find SP5 in Table 5 6 Notice that the Ad
131. the controller and drive are normal but the controller wiring is not done as described above and one of the input power wires is disconnected then the drive will trip on fault PF Input open phase provided that the drive out current is greater than 30 of the drive full load current The adjustments and tests are complete Now is the time to fine tune any areas that may require touching up Make sure that all of the appropriate data has been properly documented and that all of the jumpers have been removed before the car is returned to service WARNING Before the Elevator can be turned over to normal use it is very important that no safety circuit is bypassed The items to be checked include but are not limited to Relays FLT on HC ACI board and AS and ETL on the HC ACIF board if provided must be installed properly in their sockets Wire connected to panel mount terminal DCL Wire connected to terminal 47 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present No jumpers between terminals 2 and UET or DET No jumper between terminals 2 and 15 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 4 and 8 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 8 and 10 or 12 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 10 and 11 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 12 and 13 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between termi
132. the data If there is a full load in the car and there is trouble slowing in the down direction or if the VFAC Drive Unit is tripping off and there is an OV over voltage fault displayed it may mean that there is a problem with the regeneration braking resistors and or the braking unit if supplied separately Check for DC bus voltage There are two methods to check the DC bus voltage as described below 1 Through the drive display When the drive is in Operation mode press the up arrow until Monitor function U1 is displayed press enter and then use the up arrow to access the U1 07 DC bus voltage Then run the elevator and watch the voltage reading Actual measurement of voltage Use extreme care when measuring the DC voltage across the drive power terminals and 2 or 3 under the above conditions If the bus voltage is 325 VDC for a 230 VAC motor or 650 VDC for 460 VAC motor and if there is no voltage measured across the braking resistors while the car is slowing with a full load going down or empty car up there may be a wiring problem or a defective braking unit if provided Be sure to investigate this thoroughly These resistors perform the task of regulating car speed during a full load down or empty car up run regeneration FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 13 4 4 A 4 4 1 4 4 2 FINAL ELEVATOR INSPECTION PROCEDURE G5 GPD515 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7
133. the down direction to move the car g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 and reconnect the wire to terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Reseat the FLT relay 4 13 4 2 CAR BUFFER TEST WITH A FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fom on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car b Disconnect the Step Down STD input by removing the wire from terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting C Bypass the Emergency Terminal Down Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and DET on the HC ACIF board d Bypass the Down terminal slowdown and Down Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 on the HC RB4 VFAC board e Position the elevator several floors above the bottom landing with a full load in the car Then register a car call for the bottom landing The car will strike the buffer f Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the up direction to move the car g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 and reconnect the wire to terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Remove all of the jumpers installed in this section Reseat the FLT relay 4 13 5 GOVERNOR AND
134. the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation The PTC Series M controller uses drive parameters for setting the five speed levels described in Table 4 6 and Figure 4 4 The controller selects the desired speed using the TORQMAX F4 drive logic inputs The Speed Command parameters should be set as shown in Table 4 6 in preparation for running the elevator at High speed TABLE 4 6 __ TORQMAX F4 Drive Speed Levels TORQMAX F4 Drive Speed Levels Speed Speed Drive Preferred setting in preparation for running the car p parameter at High speed Inspection This speed can be increased to 66 of Contract ftm LF Speed if required 2 to 5 of Contract Speed High Level High ET EH 5 to 10 of Contract Speed ft m Intermediate 42 of Contract Speed This speed can be increased to Intermediate 91 if required but must be less than Contract Speed t m Hioh High speed 50 of Contract Speed This parameter will be f m g LF 42 changed to Contract Speed during final adjustment When parameter LF 86 is selected the drive display indicates which speed is selected Inspection Leveling Speed High Leveling Speed High Speed 6 Intermediate Speed 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 31 FIGURE 4 4 S Curve Parameters and Recommended Speed Settings TORQMAX F4 Speed S Curve Speed Command Parameters Parameters High Speed Contract Speed LF 42 Intermediate Speed LF 45 High Level Speed LF 55 LF 56 LF 53
135. the empty car releveling operation by placing a jumper between terminals 18 and 26 to cause an up level after which the car will stop due to picking the LD Down Level switch Remove the jumper from terminals 18 and 26 and the car will level down against the counterweight Make sure that it does not stall If the car stalls you might have to increase the leveling speed 4 3 5 LOAD TESTING G5 GPD515 a Begin adding test weights to the car in 100 or 200 pound increments all the way up to the rated load Observe the VFAC Drive Unit current on its display and check to see if there is an OC Over Current error indication as the car accelerates to full speed If so this indicates that the VFAC unit is being pushed close to its limits and may require one or more of the following actions 1 The requested acceleration rate may be excessive Try reducing the acceleration rate by increasing parameter C1 01 The more time spent in acceleration the lower the current demand 2 A more gradual transition from acceleration to high speed may be made by increasing drive parameter P1 17 for contact speed and P1 13 for intermediate speed 3 For Open loop applications Adjust parameter C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain between 1 0 2 0 The maximum setting for this parameter is 2 5 Display the output current on the drive key pad in the Operation mode by pressing the up arrow twice The drive keypad will display OUTPUT CURRENT U1 03 0 0A The G5 drive
136. the wiring duct inside the control cabinet The terminals are located conveniently near wiring ducts C When routing field wiring or power hookups avoid the left side of the HC CI O E and HC PCI O boards 2 4 INSTALLATION 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 2 2 42 02 2P21 FIELD WIRES TO rd LEFT SIDE OF CONTROLLER ROSIN ee HC CI O E Ps HC PCI O N TERMINALS MC PCAI AVOID BRINGING R Field Wiring of Controller TERMINALS VVVF DRIVE TRANSFORMER POWER CONTACTOR S CUT HOLES AND BRING WIRES INTO BOTTOM OR SIDE OF CONTROL CABINET D N 3398 R1 Call terminals are located on the HC PCI O board and if more than four stops on the HC CI O E board All position indicators arrows and gong enable terminals are located on HC PCI O board and if more than four stops on the HC CI O E board or if a gong board is provided position indicators are also provided on the gong board HC GB Terminals 1 72 and 85 86 87 88 and 89 are located on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board Terminals for the door operator are on respective door boards or on separate terminal blocks Several 1 and 2 bus terminals are provided in different locations Other terminals may be supplied on separate terminal blocks When it is time to hook up the wires to the controller proceed to interconnect wires ac
137. time 1 Flux Vector only S 0 00 10 0 200 B 0 20 C5 03 ASR P Gain2 ASR proportional gain 2 Flux Vector only 0 00 300 0 20 0 B 20 0 C5 04 ASR ITime2 ASR integral time 2 Flux Vector only S 0 0 10 0 0 50 B 0 50 C6 Carrier Freq C6 01 Carrier Freq Max Carrier frequency upper limit kHz 0 4 15 0 PE B 10 D Reference Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows D1 Preset Reference D1 01 Reference 1 Preset reference 1 Not used Hz 0 0 0 0 B 0 0 D1 02 Reference 2 Preset reference 2 H Speed Hz 0 0 80 30 B D1 03 Reference 3 Preset reference 3 H Level Hz 0 0 15 8 0 B D1 04 Reference 4 Preset reference 4 Not used Hz 0 0 0 0 B 0 0 D1 05 Reference 5 Preset reference 5 Level Hz 0 10 1 3 B D1 06 Reference 6 Preset reference 6 Not used Hz 0 0 0 0 B 0 0 D1 07 Reference 7 Preset reference 7 Intermediate Speed Hz 0 55 25 B D1 08 Reference 8 Preset reference 8 Not used Hz 0 0 0 0 B 0 0 D1 09 Reference 9 Pesa rieien S soo Hz 0 40 10 B D2 Reference Limits D2 01 Ref Upper Limit Reference upper limit 0 0 100 0 100 0 B 100 D2 02 Ref Lower Limit Reference lower limit 0 0 100 0 0 0 B 0 D3 Jump Frequencies not used set at drive defaults VOLTAGE A Vmax E1 05 Vmid E1 08 Vmin i ey l i l gt FREQUENCY Fmin Fmid FA Fmax E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 7
138. to normal or the time interval that the car must wait for the in car switch to be turned ON expires ae A th a ae Pe oe a N S FUNCTION SWITCHES a F8 F7F8 F5 F4 F3 F2F1 If you do not have Hospital Emergency Service Operation set this option to NO by pressing the S pushbutton Then press the N pushbutton to exit this option If you have Hospital Emergency Service Operation set this option to YES by pressing the S pushbutton Press the Npushbutton to continue The following display will appear Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 41 5 42 If you want Hospital Emergency Service to this landing then set this option to YES by pressing the S pushbutton press S again to set the option to NO Press the pushbutton to scroll through the available landings Press the N pushbutton to continue If this car has rear doors then the following will be displayed Press the pushbutton to scroll through the available landings The computer will continue to present these options for each floor up to the top floor Press the N pushbutton to exit the Hospital Emergency Service option 5 4 9 20 FIRE BYPASSES HOSPITAL Set this option to YES if Hospital Service is used for VIP Priority or Commandeering Service Set this option to NO if Hospital Service is truly used for Hospital Service 5 4 9 21 HIGH SPEED DELAY AFTER RUN Setting this option will insert a fixed delay 3 seconds between the completion of a
139. to passengers with a valid security code MCE s elevator security options include Basic Security and Basic Security with CRT Basic Security provides a means to prevent registration of unauthorized car calls Basic Security with CRT provides a means to prevent registration of unauthorized car calls and or hall calls and additional programming options are available via the CRT terminal Refer to MCE s Elevator Security User s Guide part 42 02 S024 for additional information and instructions for using the CRT terminal The Appendix Elevator Security Information and Operationin this manual provides instructions for passengers who will be using the elevator while Security is ON For both Basic Security and Basic Security with CRT the security codes for each floor are programmed as described below The Security code for each floor may consist of one to eight characters where each character is one of the floor buttons found in the elevator car With Basic Security any floor with a programmed security code is a secured floor when Security is ON Refer to the Elevator Security User s Guide for information on turning Basic Security with CRT ON or OFF Basic Security without CRT is turned ON or OFF by the Building Security Input BSI in combination with the Master Software Key parameter in the Extra Features Menu Program mode There are 3 possible settings for the Master Software Key ACTIVATED ENABLED and DEACTIVATED e If setto ACTIVATED Security is
140. value for D1 09 is 40 Hz The ILO tripping speed should not exceed 140 fpm If the red ILO light on the HC ACI board is lit push the FAULT RESET button and the light should go out Turn the ILO trimpot fully CCW Run the car in the UP direction on Inspection while very slowly turning the ILO trimpot clockwise until the ILO indicator just turns ON After stopping push the FAULT RESET button on the HC ACI board and then set D1 09 to a lower value Run the car on Inspection and increase the inspection speed by increasing parameter D1 09 to show that this low speed safety monitor circuit will trip at no higher than 140 fpm or no higher than the maximum available inspection speed if it is less than 140 fpm The circuit should trip when D1 09 14Hz or above Check this in both directions The overspeed monitor is now calibrated for less than 150 fom for Access Inspection and Leveling Turn the IN speed back to the value recorded in Step b TERMINAL SLOWDOWN LIMIT SWITCHES G5 GPD515 Make sure that the terminal slowdown limit switches are working properly by doing the following a Place the TEST NORMAL switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position b Disconnect and label the wires from terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board C Register calls for the terminal landings top and bottom from the controller The car should make a normal slowdown at both terminal landings except that there may be a 4 14 FINAL AD
141. 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovld Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 100 150 110 110 Ovid Time Out Time that defines motor overload curve sec 5 0 120 0 60 0 60 0 Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change point 0 100 75 75 Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low fluxes 0 200 0 0 0 Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high fluxes 0 200 0 50 50 Configure CO C1 User Switches Analog input Spd Command Src Speed Command Source Multi step Multi step Multi step Serial External TB Run Command Src Run Command Source Serial External TB External TB Serial extern External TB Hi Lo Gain Src Migny lowgain nange Switeh Source Serial Internal Internal Internal 7 Elev spd reg Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Pi speed reg Elev spd reg Elev spd reg Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of motor 7 Forward Forward Forward or rotation Reverse Reverse Determines when speed reference release _ Reg release Spd Ref Release is Asconed Brake picked Reg release Reg release Determines if an external logic input is used _ None Cent Gontirm Ste for contactor confirmation External TB None None Determines if a pre torque command is None Pre Torque Source used and if used it determines the source Analog inpu
142. 0 0 Slip Comp Gain Slip Compensation Gain Slip Comp Time Primary Time Delay N A to Flux Vector Slip Comp Regen Torque Comp Gain Slip Compensation During Regen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled NA to Flux Vector Torque Compensation Gain N A to Flux Vector 0 00 2 50 Torque Comp Time ASR P Gain 1 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time N A to Flux Vector ASR Proportional Gain 1 Flux Vector only 0 10000 0 00 300 00 ASR Time 1 ASR Integral Time 1 Flux Vector only 0 0 10 000 ASR P Gain 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Flux Vector only 0 00 300 00 ASR I Time 2 Heavy Normal Duty ASR Integral Time 2 Flux Vector only Drive Duty Selection 0 Heavy 1 Normal 1 2 Normal 2 0 0 10 000 Carrier Freq Sel 0 Low noise 3 8 0 kHz 6 15 0 kHz Carrier Frequency Selection 1 2 0 kHz 2 5 0 kHz 4 10 0 kHz 5 12 5 kHz kVA dependent Carrier Freq Max The upper limit is the max FPM value set by 01 03 Set this parameter Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Preset Reference kVA dependent Field Adjustable Parameters a before setting D1 01 thru Reference 1 Preset Reference 1 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 High High Speed must be gt D1 07 FPM 0 0 50 0 High Level High Level must be gt D1 05 and lt D1 07 FPM 0 0 30 0 13 0 Reference 4 Preset Reference 4 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0
143. 0 4 00 4 00 Deceleration Jerk used for the transition from 2 0 LF 53 contract speed to deceleration ft s 0 30 32 00 4 50 4 50 0 LF 54 Deceleration rate ft s 0 30 12 00 3 50 3 50 0 LF 55 Approach Jerk used for the transitions at the end ft s 0 30 32 00 2 50 250 of deceleration Stop Jerk used for the final transitions from 3 3 LF 56 leveling speed to zero speed ft s off 0 30 32 00 1 00 1 50 Speed parameters LF 42 High speed ft m 0 100 0 LF 45 Intermediate speed ft m 0 91 0 LF 44 High Leveling speed ft m 0 25 0 LF 41 Leveling speed ft m 0 16 0 LF 43 Inspection speed ft m 0 66 0 The speed setting range is described in percentage of the contract speed but the actual entered value of the speed is in FPM The drive will not accept any speed higher than the defined values 4 15 4 15 1 42 02 2P21 The output response of the drive can be seen on an oscilloscope when the car is running by looking at the voltage between terminals X2A 6 Motor torque and X2A 8 Com on the TORQMAX F5 drive The input can be seen at terminal X2A 5 Actual speed and X2A 8 Com The output signals are 10V for X2A 6 and 0 10V for X2A 5 The High Level speed LF 44 Level speed LF 41 Deceleration rate LF 54 and Jerk rate parameters LF 53 and LF 55 should be adjusted for correct approach to the floor The Acceleration deceleration and the Jerk rates parameters can be adjusted for smooth sta
144. 07 to reach the correct intermediate speed Do not change any other parameter except P1 13 or P1 14 if required as described in Figure 4 1 When the elevator slows down to leveling speed and travels to door zone the speed command will drop to zero before the brake drops This is adjustable by the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot For open loop applications the car stop will be accomplished with injection braking current supplied by the VFAC Drive Unit at the end of the run The strength and duration of this DC braking current is programmable using parameters B2 02 and B2 04 on the VFAC Drive Unit and to start with should be set at 50 and 0 5 respectively 50 current and 0 5 second duration A sharper and stronger electric stop is provided by increasing B2 02 and a softer stop by decreasing B2 02 The duration of the DC injection braking must be less than the dropout time of the contactor s which disconnect the motor from the VFAC Drive Unit This assumes that the contactor s will open under zero current conditions For Flux Vector applications DC injection braking is not required for stopping All B2 parameters must be set to the factory default settings FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 11 With the method of providing an electric stop as indicated above provide a delay in dropping the brake by turning the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot clockwise The idea is to hold the brake up long enough to allow the motor to be stopped electrically and then
145. 0Hz This should run the car at approximately 133 of the motor contract speed if the motor is designed for 60Hz Turn the power OFF and pull the coil of the FLT relay from its socket as described in Section 4 4 4 1 a The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car If the HC ACIF board is used in this controller remove relays AS and ETL from their sockets Bypass the Governor OVER SPEED switch by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and 15 on the HC RB4 VFAC board In order to observe the loss of traction when the safety mechanism sets connect a jumper between terminals 16 and 17 on the HC RB4 VFAC board to bypass the safety plank SOS switch Turn the power ON and verify that controller is functional Register a car call in the down direction but not for the bottom landing The car should travel at 133 of contract speed The governor should trip and set the safety and stop the car Put the car on Inspection Change parameters E1 04 60Hz and D1 02 60 Hz for motors designed for 60Hz the original values of the parameters Reset the mechanical governor and inspect the hoist ropes to make sure they are in the proper grooves Move the car UP on Inspection to release the flexible guide clamp safety or release the car safety by hand if it is a wedge clamp type Remove the jumper from terminals 2 and 15 which bypasses the governor overspeed switch Remove the jumper from term
146. 1 Invalid Parameter Preset speed reference D1 02 gt D1 07 gt D1 03 gt D1 05 gt 0 0 condition is Cc Case Fault 2 D1 01 D1 17 parameters not met Motor Faults f a motor fault occurs consult the Motor Faults and Corrective Actions table in the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive manual and take the corresponding corrective actions The following motor faults are addressed in this table Motor does not rotate Motor rotation reverses Motor rotates but variable speed not available Motor RPM too high or too low e Motor RPM not stable during operation If taking the corrective actions described does not solve the problem contact your Yaskawa representative immediately 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 41 6 9 TROUBLESHOOTING THE TORQMAX F5 DRIVE The drive s digital operator display should have the normal display If there is any drive fault displayed refer to the fault section in TORQMAX F5 Drive Technical Manual 6 9 1 CAR THE DOES NOT MOVE ON INSPECTION The TORQMAX F5 drive software has been modified for use in MCE controllers Some of the parameters in the drive are different from those listed in the standard drive manual If a drive has been replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller e Pick or Picked relay energized e Drop or dropped relay de energized If the car does not move on INSPECTION chec
147. 16 6 5 3 Car Overshoots or the Drive Trips Over Voltage on Acceleration 6 16 6 5 4 Drive Trips Over Voltage or the Car Overshoots on Deceleration 6 16 6 5 5 Oscillations in the Car at Contract Speed Closed Loop System Only Flux Vector Applications 6 17 6 5 6 Oscillations in the Car Open Loop System 0000000 6 17 6 5 7 Drive Trips Over Voltage by Clipping the Door Locks 6 17 6 5 8 Alarms and Faults Sirr Aia cele ene e Sra E geal wale ee seule cas 6 18 6 6 Troubleshooting the MagneTek HPV900 Ac Drive 20 0c ee eee 6 19 6 6 1 Car Does Not Move on Inspection 00 00 eee ee 6 19 6 6 2 Car Does Not Reach Contract Speed 0002 6 20 6 6 3 Car Overshoots or the Drive Trips Over Voltage on Acceleration 6 21 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 6 4 Drive Trips Over Voltage or the Car Overshoots on Deceleration 6 21 6 6 5 Oscillations in the Car at Contract Speed 0002 6 21 6 6 6 Drive Trips Over Voltage by Clipping the Door Locks 6 22 6 6 7 Alarms and Faults 0 i2 lt siau0see beeetne bape ee SEs Ge eew eins 6 22 Troubleshooting the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive 00 0 cece eee 6 22 6 7 1 Car the Does Not Move on Inspection 000 0 eee eae 6 22 6 7 2 Car Does Not Run Reach Contract Speed 00000 6 24 6 7 3 Car Overs
148. 19 and 0 10V for X2 18 The High Level speed LF 44 Level speed LF 41 Deceleration rate LF 53 and Jerk rate parameters LF 52 and LF 54 should be adjusted for correct approach to the floor The Acceleration deceleration and the Jerk rates parameters can be adjusted for smooth starting and transition to High speed This will be addressed in the final adjustment section 4 9 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS TORQMAX F4 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 4 9 1 FINAL PREPARATION FOR RUNNING ON AUTOMATIC OPERATION TORQMAX F4 a Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LED display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 33 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 9 4 4 34 b Move the car to the bottom terminal landing Check to see if the DZ relay is picked If not move the car on Inspec
149. 2 Actual measurement of voltage Use extreme care when measuring the DC voltage across the drive power terminals and 3 or 4 under the above conditions If the bus voltage is 325 VDC for a 230 VAC motor or 650 VDC for 460 VAC motor and if there is no voltage measured across the braking resistors while the car is slowing with a full load going down or empty car up there may be a wiring problem or a defective braking unit if provided Be sure to investigate this thoroughly These resistors perform the task of regulating car speed during a full load down or empty car up run regeneration FINAL ELEVATOR INSPECTION PROCEDURE HPV 900 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 WARNING The following tests should be performed only by the qualified elevator personnel skilled in final adjustment and inspections INSPECTION LEVELING OVER SPEED TEST HPV 900 The HC ACI board is equipped with an independent low speed monitoring system which can trip and open a fault contact if the car runs faster than a preset speed 150 fom max on Car Top Inspection Hoistway Access or Leveling operation The monitoring system is active when the Leveling L relay is picked or when the Access Inspecti
150. 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Fire Bypasses Hospital Yes No Yes No High Seed Delay After Run Yes No Yes No Single Speed A C Option Yes No Yes No Sabbath Operation Yes No Yes No UP Front Call 1234567891011 12131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 UP Rear Call 1234567891011 1213 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 DOWN Front Call 234567891011 1213141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 234567891011 1213 141516171819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 DOWN Rear Call 234567891011 1213 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 234567891011 1213 14151617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Intermediate Speed between Firs Place an X in between the floors that require independent speed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Leveling Sensors ___Enabled Disabled _ Enabled ___ Disabled KCE _ Enabled Disabled _ Enabled ___Disabled
151. 20 0 B x E2 Motor Setup Motor E2 01Motor Rated FLA Motor rated current A 0 00 1500 0 rated ELA B x Motor rated slip frequency Note Refer to the VA E2 02 Motor Rated Slip attached table to calculate the slip frequency hi O 120 pepe a E2 03 No load current Motor No Load Current A 0 150 Sea Motor FLA E2 04 Number of Poles Number of Motor Poles Flux Vector only 2 48 6 F Option Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows F1 PG Option Setup Flux Vector only F1 01 PGpulse Rev PG constant Flux Vector only 0 60000 1024 B 1024 PG Feedback Loss Stoping method at PG line brake detection F1 02 selection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 0 3 1 B 1 Flux Vector only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG overspeed Stoping method at OS detection F1 03 selection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 0 3 1 B 1 Flux Vector only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Deviation Stoping method at DEV detection F1 04 selection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 0 3 1 B 1 Flux Vector only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only F1 05 PG Rotation sel PGrotation 0 CCW 1 CW Flux Vector only 0 1 0 B Oor1 F1 06 PG output ratio PG division rate Flux Vector only 1 132 1 B 1 F1 07 thru Flux Vector only Set to drive defaults B F1 13 A 8 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 La A MCE V f Field No Digital Operator Parameter Description Unit setting Drive MCE Display Range Defaults
152. 21 c8 D N 3559 R3 TRIMPOTS Brake Drop Delay CW increases delay fully CCW 0 1 sec fully CW 0 7 sec Speed Pick Delay CW increases delay fully CCW 002 sec fully CW 0 450 sec Inspection Leveling Overspeed CCW sets the speed threshold higher Not used on ASMEA17 1 2000 compliant controllers Set the ILO trimpot on the HC ACI board fully CCW Use the ILO trimpot on the SC BASE or SC BASER board to adjust the ILO speed threshold 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 45 HC ACIF Additional Flux Vector Drive Interface Board Quick Reference 42 QR HC ACIF HC ACIF QUICK REFERENCE BOARD 52
153. 38 5 4 9 2 Floor Encoding Inputs s 4 0 csee deka ee dea ew ie 5 38 5 4 9 3 Encode All Floors occ occkccd ace cena weeakeae eee eee 5 38 5 4 9 4 Intermediate Speed 002 cee es 5 38 5 4 9 5 Emergency Power Operation Emergency Power Return Floor 5 38 5 4 9 6 Light Load Weighing Light Load Car Call Limit 5 38 5 4 9 7 Photo Eye Anti nuisance Consec Stops W O PHE Limit 5 38 5 4 9 8 Earthquake Operation 0 00 5 39 5 4 9 9 Counterweighted Drum Machine 2 2000e 5 39 5 4 9 10 MG Shutdown Operation MGS Return Floor 5 39 5 4 9 11 Peripheral Device idee eile e bee eee me ele es ied 5 40 5 4 9 12 Automatic Floor Stop Option 0002s 5 40 5 4 9 13 CC Cancel W dir Reversal 0 000 cee eee 5 40 5 4 9 14 Cancel Car Calls Behind Car 0 0002s 5 40 5 4 9 15 CE Electronics Interface 0 00 e eee 5 40 5 4 9 16 Massachusetts Ems Service Ems Service Floor 5 40 5 4 9 17 Master Software Key 0000 ees 5 40 5 4 9 18 PI Turned off If No Demand 000 2 eee 5 41 5 4 9 19 Hospital Emerg Operation 0 000 eee eee 5 41 5 4 9 20 Fire Bypasses Hospital 00 0c eee eee 5 42 5 4 9 21 High Speed Delay after Run 000005 5 42 5 4 9 22 Single Speed A C Option 00 002 eee 5 42 5 4 9 23 Sabbath Operation 00 00 ee 5 42 5 4 9 24 Intermediate S
154. 4 A higher value of this parameter will cause the car to overshoot at terminal landings and may drop the SAF relay Also on Inspection operation the smoothness in the stop at intermediate landings is controlled by the normal deceleration parameter C1 02 h Test the safety by hand to make sure that it will hold the car 3 1 0 START UP 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 n If an ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed problem is detected by the HC ACI board the ILO indicator will turn ON and the FLT relay will pick which will drop the RDY relay and shut down the controller Reset the fault by pressing the Fault reset button on the HC ACI board and adjust the ILO trimpot for the proper Inspection Leveling Overspeed trip threshold To make sure that the Car Top Inspection switch is working properly turn OFF the main disconnect remove the jumper between terminals 18 and 59 from step 3 3 1 j and reinstall the wire into terminal 59 Turn ON the main disconnect Make sure that there is 115VAC on terminal 59 with respect to terminal 1 when the car top inspection switch is inthe NORMAL position There should be no power on terminal 59 when the car top inspection switch is in the INSP position Stop the car so that the car top is accessible from the top hall door Remove jumpers from the safety circuit Run the car from the car top Inspection station Verify that the SAF relay drops out and the car stops when the Car Top Emergency Stop Switch is rel
155. 4 14 thru 4 16 4 3 1 FINAL PREPARATION FOR RUNNING ON AUTOMATIC OPERATION G5 GPD515 a Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LCD display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection b Move the car to the bottom terminal landing Check to see if the DZ relay is picked If not move the car on Inspection to place it in the Door Zone 4 3 2 SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION G5 GPD515 Place the Relay Panel Inspection switch in the OFF position If the car is not at a landing it will move to a landing If the car is at a landing but not in the door zone relays L and either LU or LD should pick and the car should perform a relevel If the relevel in not successful check the following If the brake picks and the car is trying to level but is not able to it may be necessary to adjust the Level Speed parameter D1 05 on the G5 GPD515 AC Drive to get the car to move If relays L and LD are picked but the brake and other relays are not the down direction limit switch may be preventing the leveling down operation 4 8 FINAL ADJ
156. 4 and Figure 4 3 The controller selects the desired speed using the HPV 900 Logic Inputs as described in Section 3 5 2 C2 parameters The Speed Command parameters should be set as shown in Table 4 4 in preparation for running the elevator at High speed TABLE 4 4 HPV900 Speed Levels HPV 900 SPEED LEVELS Speed A3 Multistep Ref Preferred setting in preparation for running the car p Parameter at High speed Inspection This speed can be increased to 66 of Contract Level High Level 5 High Level Speed Comimandia 5 to 10 of Contract Speed Intermediate 42 of Contract Speed This speed can be increased to Intermediate Speed Command 6 91 if required but must be less than Contract Speed Hioh High speed 50 of Contract Speed This parameter will be f m 9 Speed Command 8 changed to Contract Speed during final adjustment 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 19 4 5 2 ADJUSTING ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RATES The acceleration and deceleration rates are programmed in feet per second per second ft s using the A2 S Curve parameters see Figure 4 3 and Table 4 5 The acceleration rate is set using the A2 Accel Rate 0 parameter The deceleration rate is set using the A2 Decel Rate Oparameter Increasing the value increases the acceleration deceleration rate steeper curve The default value is 3 00 ft s 4 5 3 ADJUSTING THE JERK PARAMETERS The jerk parameters adjust the rate of change transition smoothness at the sta
157. 42 02 2P21 TABLE 4 8 Yaskawa F7 Drive Speed Levels YASKAWA F7 SPEED LEVELS Preferred setting in preparation for running the car at Jog This speed can be increased to 66 of Contract Speed if D1 05 2 to 5 of Contract Speed High Level D1 03 High Level 5 to 10 of Contract Speed Intermediate D1 07 Combination 42 of Contract Speed This speed can be increased to 91 ftim if required but must be less than Contract Speed 50 of Contract Speed This parameter will be changed pie to Contract Speed during final adjustment um FIGURE 4 5 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters Yaskawa F7 Velocity Hz Velocity High Speed __ 2222M De af ae AEE ON eee a Le D1 02 A P1 17 P1 18 C1 01 Acceleration C1 02 Deceleration Intermediate High Level Zero Speed Time 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 45 4 11 2 ADJUSTING ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RATE The acceleration and deceleration rate is programmed in f s This value is the amount of time to accelerate from Zero Speed to High Speed or decelerate from High Speed to Zero Speed The drive has the capability to use a two sectioned acceleration deceleration curve as shown in Figure 4 6 However in this application parameter C1 11 Acceleration Deceleration Switching Level is set to 0 0 Therefore parameter C1 01 defines the acceleration rate from Zero Speed to High Speed and parameter C1 02 defines the deceleration rate from H
158. 5 FIGURE 6 2 Door Sequence of Operation Door Sequence of Operation H Picked Car Call Active Call cancelled at point of slow down CC CCT HC HCT CD HD DPM ON DCL OFF LC LOT PHE SE SDT logical AND At floor Car Decelerates CCT DZ H DOI DOI DOF ON DO ON CD HD OFF DPM OFF DCL ON DOORS FULLY OPEN DOL OFF DOF DO OFF CCT Starts CCT OFF DOI DOI OFF DCF ON DCL OFF 6 6 TROUBLESHOOTING CC Car Call CCT Car Call Time CD Car Door Lock DC Door Close Relay DCF Door Close Function DCL Door Close Limit DCP Door Close Power DLK Door Lock DO Door Open Relay DOF Door Open Function DOI Door Open Intent DOL Door Open Limit DPM Door Position Monitor DZ Door Zone H High Speed H High Speed Dropped HC Hall Call HCT Hall Call Time HD Hall Door Locks LC Lobby Call LOT Lobby Time door dwell time PHE Photo Eye SE Safety Edge SDT Short Door Time NOTE hyphen Results In For example if a car call is set CC then at the point of slowdown this results in the setting of the CCT dwell time Goma Yes DCP ON No DONE Note that DPM must make prior to establishing door lock CD or HD DONE 42 02 2P21 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 CALL LOGIC NORMAL OPERATION In the MCE call input structure calls are input to the system by grounding the appropriate call input as labeled on t
159. 5 25 MASSACHUSETTS EMS SERVICE option 5 40 MASTER SOFTWARE KEY option 5 40 MC PA Peripherals Adapter Board 1 5 1 6 Quick Reference 6 60 setting parameters to default values 5 19 MC PCA Main Computer Board 1 4 1 5 5 1 3 Quick Reference 6 59 setting parameters to default values 5 19 MECHANICAL SAFETY EDGE option 5 26 MG SHUTDOWN OPERATION option 5 39 MGR OUTPUT TIMER option 5 30 MGR Motor generator run flag 5 16 MGS Motor Generator Shutdown Input option 5 34 MISV Mechanically In Service Output option 5 37 MLT data trap using for troubleshooting 6 56 MLT Motor Limit Timer Elapsed Output option 5 37 MLT Motor limit timer flag 5 16 MOMENT D C B TO CLOSE DOORS option 5 29 MOMENT D O B DOOR OPENING option 5 27 Motor Limit Timer anti stall Elapsed message 5 12 Motor Limit Timer message 5 12 6 14 MOTOR LIMIT TIMER option 5 30 MOUNTED IN HALL OR CAR option 5 31 N NCD Car Not Done with Emergency Power Return Output option 5 37 NDGBPS Nudging bypass flag 5 16 NDGBPSR Nudging bypass flag rear 5 16 NDGF Nudging function flag 5 16 NDS Hall door timer non shorten flag 5 16 NDSR Hall door timer non shorten rear flag 5 16 NEW YORK CITY FIRE PHASE 2 AND ANSI 89 option 5 25 nomenclature for PC boards A 24 Normal operation G5 GPD515 Drive 4 8 4 13 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 22 4 26 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 33 4 38 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 61 4 66 l 6 e INDEX Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 48 4 53 Nor
160. 5 b for more details regarding over voltage trip 6 5 4 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE OR THE CAR OVERSHOOTS ON DECELERATION If the drive trips on over voltage during deceleration or overshoots the floors then check the following 1 Verify that all the items described in Section 6 5 3 items 2 3 and the counter weight are set properly 6 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 O Verify that parameters D1 03 High Level speed D1 05 Level speed and D1 07 Intermediate speed if required are set as described in section 4 2 4 1 Verify that parameters H1 04 H1 05 are set according to the drive parameter sheet Adjust the deceleration time Parameter C1 02 C1 08 and verify that the High Level and Level speeds are adjusted to provide a smooth transition from high speed to leveling speed A very low leveling speed less than 7 fom might cause this overshoot problem These speed settings are very sensitive and should be adjusted in small increments 0 01 and carefully A value that is too high in a deceleration S curve parameter P1 18 P1 11 P1 10 P1 07 or P1 06 can cause the car to overshoot and relevel The coordination of the dropping of the brake and DC injection is very critical The dropping of the brake is adjusted by trimpot BDD on the HC ACI board and the DC injection is adjusted by the drive parameters B2 01 B2 02 and B2 04 Refer to drive parameter sheet for the correct settings Increasing B2 02 will increase the DC injecti
161. 510 DC10 110R CC10R 110 CC10 611R UC11R 611 UC11 511R DC11R 511 DC11 111R CC11R 111 CC11 612R UC12R 612 UC12 512R DC12R 512 DC12 112R CC12R 112 CC12 613R UC13R 613 UC13 513R DC13R 513 DC13 113R CC13R 113 CC13 614R UC14R 614 UC14 514R DC14R 514 DC14 114R CC14R 114 CC14 615R UC15R 615 UC15 515R DC15R 515 DC15 115R CC15R 115 CC15 616R UC16R 616 UC16 516R DC16R 516 DC16 116R CC16R 116 CC16 617R UC17R 617 UC17 517R DC17R 517 DC17 117R CC17R 117 CC17 618R UC18R 618 UC18 518R DC18R 518 DC18 118R CC18R 118 CC18 619R UC19R 619 UC19 519R DC19R 519 DC19 119R CC19R 119 CC19 620R UC20R 620 UC20 520R DC20R 520 DC20 120R CC20R 120 CC20 621R UC21R 621 UC21 521R DC21R 521 DC21 121R CC21R 121 CC21 622R UC22R 622 UC22 522R DC22R 522 DC22 122R CC22R 122 CC22 623R UC23R 623 UC23 523R DC23R 523 DC23 123R CC23R 123 CC23 624R UC24R 624 UC24 524R DC24R 524 DC24 124R CC24R 124 CC24 625R UC25R 625 UC25 525R DC25R 525 DC25 125R CC25R 125 CC25 626R UC26R 626 UC26 526R DC26R 526 DC26 126R CC26R 126 CC26 627R UC27R 627 UC27 527R DC27R 527 DC27 127R CC27R 127 CC27 628R UC28R 628 UC28 528R DC28R 528DC28 128R CC28R 128 CC28 629R UC29R 629 UC29 529R DC29R 529 DC29 129R CC29R 129 CC29 630R UC30R 630 UC30 530R DC30R 530 DC30 130R CC30R 130 CC30 631R UC31R 631 UC31 531R DC31R 531 DC31 131R CC31R 131 CC31 532R DC32R 532 DC32 132R
162. 60 to 75 of Contract Speed 5 to 10 of Contract Speed LF 44 Level Speed J ee Ler 2 to 5 of Contract Speed Ne LF 41 Zero speed LF 50 LF 54 Time 4 8 2 ADJUSTING ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RATES 4 8 3 4 32 The acceleration and deceleration rates are programmed in feet per second per second ft s using the S Curve parameters see Figure 4 4 and Table 4 7 The acceleration rate is set using the LF 57 parameter The deceleration rate is set using the LF 53 parameter Increasing the value increases the acceleration deceleration rate steeper curve The default value is 3 00 ft s ADJUSTING THE JERK PARAMETERS The jerk parameters adjust the rate of change transition smoothness at the start and end of acceleration and deceleration known as jerk points see Figure 4 4 The jerk parameter values are in feet per second per second per second ft s Decreasing the value decreases the rate of change and causes a smoother longer transition The parameters used for the jerk points at the start and during acceleration are LF 50 and LF 55 The parameters used for the jerk points during deceleration and stop are LF 52 LF 54 and LF 56 Parameter LF 55 is used for the transition from acceleration to contract speed and parameter LF 56 is used for the transition from contract speed to deceleration FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 TABLE 4 7 TORQMAX F4 S Curve Parameters A MCE
163. AC board No jumper between 2 bus and terminal 36 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper between 2 bus and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper between 2 bus and panel mount terminal EPI if present No jumpers between terminals 2 and UET or DET No jumper between terminals 2 and 15 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 4 and 8 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 8 and 10 or 12 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 10 and 11 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 12 and 13 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 16 and 17 HC RB4 VFAC Speed Command 8 and Overspeed Level parameters must be set to original value for high speed Parameters LF 20 and LF 42 set to 100 of contract speed FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 71 SECTION 5 THE COMPUTER 5 0 5 1 ABOUT THE PTC SERIES The computer on the PTC Series elevator controller has been designed for easy communication between the mechanic and the controller and between the controller and other computers or data terminals The computer will be used see Figure 5 1 for diagnostic troubleshooting and for programming the controller THE MC PCA COMPUTER PANEL YOUR TOOL FOR PROGRAMMING DIAGNOSTICS AND DATA COMMUNICATION Figure 5 1 shows the indicators switches and terminals on the computer panel INDICATORS 5 1 1 1 COMPUTER ON LIGHT When steadily lit this light shows that the computer is functioning normally a
164. ACI board The drive key pad should display the commanded speed and the drive RUN DRO indicators should turn ON when direction is picked on Inspection If this is not true then check the following a Verify that the CNP and RDY relays are picked when the direction is not picked If the RDY relay is not picked then check for a fault displayed on the drive keypad If there is no fault in the AC drive unit then check the wiring for the RDY circuit Relays PT1 PT2 UA or DA on the HC ACI board should pick when the direction relays are picked If the relays are not picking check for 36VAC between terminals XC1 XC2 and 15 and 15 on the HC ACI board If there is no voltage check the fuse on the primary side of the 30 VA transformer shown in drawing 3 of the job prints Also check the wiring from the secondary of the same transformer to terminal XC1 XC2 on the HC ACI board b Check for the correct direction enable signal by measuring the DC voltage between terminals COM and UP or DN on the HC ACI board In the down direction the voltage between COM and DN should be zero In the up direction the voltage between COM and UP should be zero The floating voltage between these points is approximately 24 VDC when the direction relays are not picked The voltage between the COM and INS terminals should be zero when direction relays are picked on Inspection If all the functions described in the above steps are working properly and the car still does not
165. AMETERS 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX D QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX F4 DRIVE PARAMETERS SERIES M PRODUCT ONLY WARNING Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running Incorrect values of drive parameters can cause erratic elevator operation WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific motor machine job Refer to the adjustment manual for detailed information Digital Parameter Description Unit Setting MCE Field MCE Operator Range Drive Set Display Defaults LF 00 Password 5 read amp write 4 read only 0 9999 5 5 LF 01 User defined Password 0 9999 440 440 LF 02 Operating Mode 2 Input coded terminals 1 4 2 2 LF 03 Incremental Encoder output Not used 1 128 1 1 LF 04 Motor selection 1 Synchronous 0 Induction 0 1 0 0 LF 05 Drive Fault Auto Reset z 0 10 3 10 LF 07 Unit system SI US US US LF 08 Electronic Motor Protection a off 1 4 off E LF 09 Electronic Motor Protection Current A 1 0 110 Rtd 8 0 LF 10 IM Rated Motor Power HP 0 00 100 00 5 00 LF 11 IM Rated Motor speed rpm 75 6000 1165 1 0 110 LF 12 IM Rated Motor current A Drive rated 8 LF 13 IM Rated Motor Frequency Hz 5 100 60 LF 14 IM Rated Motor voltage V 1 650 230 460 LF 15 IM Rated power factor 0 01 1 00 0 83 0 83 0 90 LF 16 IM Field Weakening Speed rpm 0 0
166. BPS input being seen as activated during three consecutive runs indicating the brake is not fully picked BPS is high Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and check to see if any spare inputs are programmed as BPS Then check to see if that particular input is activated CAPTURE FOR TEST Description CTST input has been activated Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode Check the spare inputs to see if any are programmed as CTST Ensure that this input is NOT activated CAR CALL BUS IS DISCONNECTED Bus Fuse Blown 2C Description Usually indicates a problem in the wiring or fuses There is no power to the Car Call circuits on the HC Cl O E and HC PCI O board s Troubleshooting Check the Car Call Bus fuse Check the wires that go to the Car Call Power inputs on the HC PCI O amp HC Cl O E board s in the controller CAR IN TEST MODE Description The spare input TEST has been activated Troubleshooting Check the TEST NORM switch on the Relay Board Check voltage level at the TEST input r Out of Svc w DLK not scrolled Event Calendar only Car Out of Svc w DLK Description The car was delayed from leaving a landing for a significant period of time and the doors were locked Troubleshooting Check the door locks PHE and DOB circuits r Out of Sve w o DLK not scrolled Event Calendar only Car Out of Svc w o DLK Description The car was delayed from leaving a landing for a significant period of time and
167. CAR SAFETY TESTS YASKAWA F7 4 56 4 13 5 1 GOVERNOR ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED SWITCH TEST Make sure that there are no jumpers between terminals 2 and 15 Trip open the electrical OVER SPEED switch contact manually and verify that the main safety circuit drops out Use which ever method is most familiar to verify the actual electrical and mechanical tripping speeds e FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 4 13 5 2 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY OVERSPEED TEST WITH FULL LOAD GOING DOWN NOTE If the governor overspeed trip point is less than 133 of contract speed then perform the test as described below If the trip point is greater than 133 of contract speed then use other means to overspeed the car Move the fully loaded car to the top terminal landing Note and record the value of parameters D1 02 High Speed E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and 01 03 Display Scaling which are set to run the car on High speed These parameters will be reset to their original value later in the adjustments Set parameter E1 04 80Hz parameter D1 02 governor tripping speed fpm and parameter 01 03 1XXX00 where XXX governor trip speed This should run the car at mechanical governor tripping speed if the motor is designed for 60Hz Turn the power OFF and pull the coil of the FLT relay from its socket as described in Section 4 13 4 1 a The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car If the
168. CI O y C IOX TO C CI O E COMPUTE DUPLEXING C RB4 VFAC PERIPHERALS ODEMS PRINTERS A TERMINALS y PROGRAMMING CMC CAR MOTION CONTROL C AC CPC C ACIF CAR POWER CONTROL VVVEF VARIABLE VWE VOLTAGE e VARIABLE DRIVE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNIT motor amp ENCODER 4 K L E 7 OVERSPEED MONITORING a DEVICE CAB ENCODER MOUNTED TO MOTOR SHAFT D N 3396 R1 ENCODER REQUIRED FOR FLUX VECTOR APPLICATIONS 42 02 2P21 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 9 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 10 CAR OPERATION CONTROL COC Normal Operation Normal car operation consists of responding to hall and car call demands and operating the doors as required Special Operations The following are special operations controlled by the COC Inspection Access Independent Service Fire Service Emergency Power For details of each operation see MCE Specifications for Elevator Products The special features and options are discussed in Section 5 of this manual Discussion of Car Operation Control COC The Car Operation Control COC performs the elevator logic operations for the individual car These functions are performed by the following circuit boards HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board MC PCA Main Processor board HC PCI O Power Input Output board HC CI O E Call Input Output board optional HC RD Rear Door board optional HC IOX Input Output Expander board optional HC 140 Input Output Expander board optional The heart of th
169. CTION TESTS HPV 900 The VFAC Drive Unit is programmed to detect a motor phase loss To test for proper tripping of the drive output phase loss connection between the drive and motor attempt to run the elevator on Inspection with one motor lead disconnected The Drive should trip off dropping the RDY relay and the brake The drive should display Curr Reg Flt Current Regulation Fault A manual reset of the Drive on the HC ACI board will be needed to return to Normal operation Reconnect the motor lead and return the controls to Normal operation The adjustments and tests are complete Now is the time to fine tune any areas that may require touching up Make sure that all of the appropriate data has been properly documented and that all of the jumpers have been removed before the car is returned to service WARNING Before the Elevator can be turned over to normal use it is very important that no safety circuit is bypassed The items to be checked include but are not limited to Relays FLT on HC ACI board and AS and ETL on the HC ACIF board if provided must be installed properly in their sockets Wire connected to panel mount terminal DCL Wire connected to terminal 47 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present No jumpers between terminals 2 and UET or DET No jumper b
170. Car Operation Control COC 6 9 6 10 Critical Drive Parameters TORQMAX F4 drive 6 29 6 48 door logic 6 3 6 4 Door Sequence of Operation 6 6 duplexing 5 54 E LC Fault TORQMAX F4 drive 6 35 6 54 Encoder Fault TORQMAX F4 drive 6 34 6 53 excessive electrical noise TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 38 excessive electrical noise TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 66 Excessive motor noise TORQMAX F4 drive 6 36 6 55 External Memory mode 5 45 HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board Quick Reference 6 62 HC ACIF Board Quick Reference 6 63 HC CI O Call Input Output Board 6 9 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 6 19 22 PM Contactor does not pick TORQMAX F4 drive 6 30 6 49 the G5 GPD515 Drive 6 14 18 the Yaskawa F7 Drive 6 37 40 TORQMAX F4 Drive 6 22 26 6 28 TORQMAX F5 Drive 6 42 6 44 6 45 tracing signals 6 1 using computer internal memory 5 15 using the CRT terminal 6 12 6 13 using the MLT Data Trap 6 56 U UC Up call flag 5 17 UCA Up call above flag 5 17 UCR Up call flag rear 5 17 UDF Up and Down Direction Relay Fault Input option 5 35 UDP Up direction preference flag 5 17 UFP Upper parking floor flag 5 17 UFQ Up first qualifier flag 5 17 UPD Up previous direction flag 5 17 UPDO Up direction output flag 5 17 UPI Up Input Attendant Service 5 35 UPO Up Output Attendant Service option 5 37 UPS Up direction sense input flag 5 17 USD Up slow down input flag 5 17 V Valve Limit Timer Anti stall Elap
171. D1 05 so that the car levels into the floor and stops Level speed should be 7 12 fom ora reasonable leveling speed use personal judgement If the car re levels frequently once Level speed is adjusted satisfactorily soread apart the LU and LD sensors or switches in the landing system to provide enough Dead Zone NOTE The active speed will show on the drive key pad corresponding to the setting of the D parameters d Adjust the SPD Speed Pick Delay trimpot by first turning it far enough clockwise so that the empty car rolls back in the direction of the counterweight if it can Then adjust SPD so that the brake is fully picked just as the motor first moves The goal is to delay long enough to avoid moving the motor before the brake is fully lifted but not so long as to allow the car to roll back e Run the car again and verify that the car will start accelerate decelerate and run at High Level and Level speeds into the floor and stop Place calls for all of the landings Verify that all of the calls work Verify the operation and placement of all vanes or magnets and vane or magnet switches and verify that the car steps the Position FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 49 Indicators correctly The slowdown distance for the elevator is measured from the point where the STU sensor or STD sensor if going down is activated by a metal vane or magnetic strip to the position where the car is stopped at the floor with the DZ sensor centered on the leve
172. DO LD DPD and DDP signals are ON and the UPDO LU UPD and UDP signals are OFF TABLE 5 3 Computer Internal Memory Chart FLAGS AND VARIABLES ADDRESS 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 DOLMR PHER DZR DOLR DBCR DOBR GEUR GEDR 11 TFAR DCR UCR CCR NDSR FDCR DHOR DOIR 12 DCFR DCPR DOFR LOTR GHTR HCTR CCTR SDTR 13 DOCR SER DCLCR CSBR DCCR NUDGR NDGBPSR DSHTR 20 DOLM PHE DZ DOL DBC DOB GEU GED 21 TFA DC UC CC NDS FDC DHO DOI 22 DCF DCP DOF LOT GHT HCT CCT SDT 23 DOC SE DCLC CSB DCC NUDG NDGBPS DSHT 24 INT FRA FCS FRS DNS UPS STD RO STU R1 25 SCE FCCC FCHLD HLI LEF HDLYE FWI PIC 26 LFP UFP NYDS CCH DIN DPR GTDE GTUE 27 HD FCOFF DHLD IND IN DLKS DELSIM YSIM 28 LLW DLK DDF REL ISR INCF REAR LLI 29 DNDO LD DPD DDP UPDO LU UPD UDP 2A DMD DCB UCB CCB DMU DCA UCA CCA 2B TOS MLT MGR H HSEL DSH RUN 2C DZP STC SAF HCR HCDX CCD ISV ISRT 2D TEMPB UFQ DZORDZ FCSM FRM FRSS FRAS FRC 2E SD SDA DSD BFD SU SUA USD TFD 2F FRBYP FRON HYD1_TRCO ECC CD ECRN EPR PFG 30 R4 ISTD R2 ISTU R3 FREE DEADZ DHLDI PH1 NDGF 31 CTLDOT CTLF CTL ALV EPSTP AUTO EPRUN EPI 33 API SAB TEST DHENDR DHEND CTST HOSPH2 HOSP 38 HML SLV CCC CNFG DLI DLW LWCE HLW 5 14 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 FLAGS AND VARIABLES 42 COMMUNICATION TIME OUT ERROR COUNT 43 COMMUNICATION CHECKSUM ERROR COUNT 5 3 7 TROUBLESHOOTING U
173. DOT BY RESISTOR INDICATES ASME 17 1 2000 SERIES CONTROLLER TOP OR LEFT SIDE AS MOUNTED MICROCOMPUTER INPUT PATTERN GENERATOR OUTPUT BOX INDICATES UNUSED ITEM RELAY COIL aa PATTERN GENERATOR SAFETY INPUT FORCE GUIDED RELAY COIL POWER TERMINAL aT eT NORMALLY OPEN N O Pad RELAY CONTACT NUMBER SIDE PANEL MOUNT TERMINAL NORMALLY CLOSED N C NuMBER ae RELAY CONTACT x EYELET ON PC BOARD N C NO CONNECTION SCREW TERMINAL ON PC BOARD IDC CONNECTOR ON PC BOARD WIRE GAUGES SYMBOL SIZE RIBBON CABLE CONNECTOR 03 3 0 AWG o2 2 0 aw TPX WIRE SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION X AWG THHN WIRE 90 C amp X AWG PVC WIRE 105 C 12 12 AWG 14 14 AWG X AWG PTL WIRE 125 C 16 16 AWG 18 18 AWG X AWG TEFLON WIRE 200 C Motion Control UNLESS NOTED ALL WIRES ARE 18 AWG PVC ME ncincoring inc NOMENCLATURE E e a l l WITH EXCEPTION TO THE PC BOARD WIRING WHICH IS DETERMINED BY ENGINEERING 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX E NOMENCLATURE A 25 APPENDIX F ELEVATOR SECURITY INFORMATION AND OPERATION Building name Building location Security activation Key switch Mon from to or Tue from to Time clock Wed from to Thu from to Fri from to Sat from to Sun from to Instructions To gain access to secured floors follow the steps below while in the elevator car The steps may be taken while the car is moving or standi
174. Deceleration C1 02 1 to 3 seconds Set initially to 2 0 seconds C1 08 C1 02 Acceleration Deceleration Switching Level C1 11 0 0 Hz 4 2 3 ADJUSTING THE S CURVES G5 GPD515 The S curve parameters P1 04 thru P1 19 adjust the transition S curve smoothness at the start and end of acceleration and deceleration jerk point smoothing known as jerk points see Figure 4 1 The S curve parameter values are in seconds Increasing the value causes a smoother longer transition Note Setting deceleration S curves too high sol will cause the car to overshoot S curve time Smooth operation of the elevator requires that different S curves be used at different points on the velocity curve The factor determining which S curve is used is the velocity range There are four velocity ranges defined by parameters P1 01 P1 02 and P1 03 see Figure 4 1 It is important that the correct S curve be selected for adjustment see Table 4 2 and Figure 4 1 4 6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 TABLE 4 2 G5 GPD515 S Curve Selection Table Table for Selection of S Curves Range Velocity Hz ____ Start Accel End Accel Start Decel End Decel D Less than P1 01 P1 04 P1 05 P1 06 P1 07 Eom Between P1 01 and P1 02 P1 08 P1 09 x P1 10 x P1 11 Between P1 02 and P1 03 P1 12 P1 13 P1 14 P1 15 Greater than P1 03 P1 16 P1 17 P1 18 P1 19 These are the only S curve parameters that require field adjustment
175. Door Zone switch or sensor on the landing system car top unit Incorrect hoistway wiring Bad termination of hoistway wiring to the DZ terminal inside the controller A defect on the HC RB4 VFAC Relay board or HC PCI O board Ne The first step is to determine if the problem is inside or outside of the controller To do so use a voltmeter to probe the Door Zone terminal 27 on the Relay board This terminal is in Area 3 of the Job Prints areas of the Job Prints are marked on the left hand side of the pages and certain signals may be in locations different from the print area mentioned in this guide Moving the car in the hoistway should cause the voltmeter to read 120VAC when the car is at Door Zone If the signal read by the voltmeter does not change when the car passes the Door Zone then the problem must be external to the controller and items 1 2 or 3 should be examined If the signal read by the voltmeter does change as the car passes the Door Zone the problem must be internal to the controller and item 4 must be examined From the print notice that this input goes to the right hand side of the DZ relay and to a 47K 1W resistor The 47K 1W resistor conducts the signal to pin 8 of the C2 connector on the top of the HC RB4 VFAC Relay board Next a 20 pin ribbon cable conducts the signal to pin 8 of the C2 connector on the HC PCI O board FIGURE 6 1 _ HC PCI O Input Output Board Quick Reference gortcrciore 1 HC PCI O QUICK REFE
176. E landing system box remove the 2 thumbscrews on the 2 guide assemblies insert the tape and reinstall the guides with the thumbscrews tighten firmly If the installation has the LS QUTE car top selector with the additional sensor bracket on the rear of the tape first remove the three 8 32 screws holding the protective 1 wide channel This channel covers the back of the Door Zone sensors on the upper tape guide bracket Remove the single standoff that is in the way of the thumbscrew holding the tape guide Remove the thumbscrews holding the upper and lower tape guides insert the tape and reinstall the guides with the thumbscrews tighten firmly Reinstall the standoff do not over tighten and the protective channel After inserting the steel tape into the tape guides check the location of the landing system box The car should be at the top of the hoistway to make it easier to see if the alignment is causing any stress or binding on the tape guides Make sure that the box is vertical and plumb with the tape This allows for easy tape movement and avoids excessive wear on the tape guides using a level is helpful Be careful so as to avoid premature failure of the tape guides e Move the elevator to the top and bottom of the hoistway to check for smooth tape movement and to make sure that there is no excessive pressure on the tape guides Correct any problems immediately INSTALLING THE MAGNETIC STRIPS ON THE STEEL TAPE a Carefully r
177. ECTRICAL NOISE TORQMAX F4 If the motor emits excessive electrical noise at Inspection or Contract speeds or if the motor draws higher than normal current perform the following a Verify the actual traction sheave diameter Enter the measured value in parameter LF 21 b Verify the gear reduction ratio parameter LF 22 C Verify the Rated Motor speed parameter LF 11 This value is the full load motor RPM NOTE The Imperial motors name plate has full load RPM information which should be entered in parameter LF 11 Full load RPM information may not be available for Reuland motors The motor name plate lists the Synchronous RPM i e 900 1200 1500 or 1800 In flux vector applications Reuland motors have slip between 1 8 and 2 0 Set LF 11 Motor Synchronous RPM 0 018 x Motor Synchronous RPM This calculation gives a very reasonable value for LF 11 Its effect can be verified by observing the motor current parameter ru 09 If ru 09 is normal compared to the motor FLA when the car is running at contract speed the motor slip is correct If required LF 11 can be adjusted in small increments 5 10 RPM However higher values close to the Synchronous RPM will trip the E ENC drive fault d Lower the Speed Prop Gain LF 31 do not set below 1200 Refer to section 3 6 3 g of this manual for more detailed information 4 38 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 10 FINAL ELEVATOR INSPECTION PROCEDURE TORQMAX F4 For controllers wi
178. ERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 19 FIGURE C 1 ms oe W x HPV 900 Parameter Menu Trees Disp 1 Adjust Configure gt Utility Faults Display 2 DO _ N A uw O A Do Elevator a 5 CiUser gt Password Adve levator Drive A1 paar FP J A whs S Pur P Fats FP Data J Power AN a S Curves N qe Logic N Hidden oN M 7 Fault N Pa Power gt wan J FP nn e l tesu gt HistoryF2 Data F Multistep N A Logic N wo ian s FP Ref A3 A M Outputs C3 7 nme J m coeta A Outputsca M Tetu gt vooras E mS Dfits U5 J cra Hx Monitor U7 For more information refer to Section 3 Parameter Adjustments in the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Vector Elevator Drive Technical Manual FIGURE C 2 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters HPV 900 software version A2950 C 10304 Velocity Hz A3 Multistep Ref Speed Command Parameters High Speed A2 S Curve Parameters Contract Speed eee re Decel Jerk In 0 Accel Jerk Out 0 Accel Rate 0 Decel Rate 0 Intermediate Speed 60 to 75 of Contract Speed Speed Command 6 Decel Jerk In 0 Accel Jerk Out 0 Decel R a ecel Rate 0 Decel Jerk Out 0 i Decel Jerk In 0 High Level Speed Speed Command 4 Level Speed 2 to 5 of Contract Speed Decel Rate 0 Speed Command 2 5 to 10 of Contract Speed Zero Speed Accel Jerk In 0 Decel Jerk Out 0 Time A 20 APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PAR
179. F 20 LF 40 to LF 53 Speed and S curves LF 57 to LF 59 Speed error detection E HSD fault LF 70 Speed pick delay Delay to turn on the DRO 6 48 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 35 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart PM Contactor does not pick PM Contactor does not pick Series M TORQMAX No Follow the controller drawing and check the safety circuit Yes Put the car on Inspection operation Reset the drive fault No AC Drive by pressing drive Fault reset button on the HC ACI board CNP and RDY relays on HC ACI board are ON Refer to the fault section in the drive manual to find the cause and 1 Verify that the main SAF relay is ON and there te clear the Ault is 120VAC between terminals 1 and 4 2 Verify 15VDC on the HC ACI board IDC terminals If no voltage is present refer to the job prints and verify 36VAC between XC1 and XC2 on Pick UP or DN the HC ACI board direction No Refer to the job prints to determine why the Directional relays U1 U2 or D1 D2 relays are not picking Go to page 2 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 49 PM Contactor does not pick Series M TORQMAX Page 2 Continued from page 1 Relay UA2 or DA2 amp UAX Verify 120VAC between terminal 1 and terminals 8 10 11 85 UP and ene 8 12 13 87 DN Relays PT1 and PT2 do not have indicators Relays Ob esse ifv th eve PT1 and PT2 serve the relay
180. GHT MADE 1993 IN USA US HC 140 S REV 1 0 C41 C40 My C37 A RPE 521 Q5 Q6 Q7 C88 Rp2 c21 D5 c5 RP 7e 4 D28 IRPSp2s C28 C29 132 10 pisRP3q C12 C13 OUTPUTS ouT2 p4 02 0UT4 OUTi ps L21OUTS SP17 SP9 SP16 SP8 J2 SP15 SP7 SP14 SP6 SP13 SP12 SP5 JS SP4 SP3 J4 SP11 SP10 INPUTS SP2 O DN 4089 RO O jj S N C39 O1 D36 c36 D20 10 c20 HC I40 Input Output Expander Board This is a multi purpose input output board designed to accommodate additional inputs and outputs as required 2 MC PCA Main Computer Board This board is mounted on the top of the HC PCI O board see Figure 1 6 The main computer board is responsible for e Car Operation Control Car Communication Control Duplexing Programming and Diagnostic Tools 1 4 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 1 6 MC PCA Computer Board
181. Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input as a percentage of max output frequency E1 04 0 0 1000 0 Terminals A1 Bias Sets the output level when OV is input as a percentage of max output frequency E1 04 100 0 100 0 Term A3 Signal Sets the signal level of terminal A3 0 0to10VDC 1 10 to 10VDC 0 1 Terminal A3 Sel Terminal A3 Function Selection 1F Not Used 0 1F Terminal A3 Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input 0 0 1000 0 Terminal A3 Bias Terminal FM Sel Sets the frequency reference when OV is input Terminal FM Monitor Selection 1 Frequency Ref 100 0 100 0 1 99 Terminal FM Gain Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 100 0 0 1000 0 Terminal FM Bias Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 0 110 0 to 110 0 Terminal AM Sel Terminal AM Monitor Selection 2 Output Freq 1 99 Terminal AM Gain Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 100 out 0 0 1000 0 Terminal AM Bias Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 to 110 0 AO Level Select 1 Selects the signal level of terminal FM 0 0to10Vdce 1 10to 10V 2 4to 20mA 0 2 AO Level Select 2 MOL Fault Select Selects the signal level of terminal AM 0 0to10Vde 1 10to 10V 2 4to 20mA Motor Overl
182. HC ACIF board is used in this controller remove relays AS and ETL from their sockets Also place a jumper between F7 Drive terminals SN and S3 Bypass the Governor OVER SPEED switch by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and 15 on the HC RB4 VFAC board In order to observe the loss of traction when the safety mechanism sets connect a jumper between terminals 16 and 17 on the HC RB4 VFAC board to bypass the safety plank SOS switch Turn the power ON and verify that controller is functional Register a car call in the down direction but not for the bottom landing The car should travel at governor tripping speed The governor should trip and set the safety and stop the car Put the car on Inspection Change parameters E1 04 60Hz D1 02 contract speed fom and 01 03 original recorded value for motors designed for 60Hz Reset the mechanical governor and inspect the hoist ropes to make sure they are in the proper grooves Move the car UP on Inspection to release the flexible guide clamp safety or release the car safety by hand if it is a wedge clamp type Remove the jumper from terminals 2 and 15 which bypasses the governor overspeed switch Also remove the jumper between F7 Drive terminals SN and S3 Remove the jumper from terminals 16 and 17 which bypasses the safety plank SOS switch FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 57 O Properly reinstall the relays FLT on the HC ACI and AS and ETL on HC ACIF board These relays were removed
183. HC RB4 VFAC board In order to observe the loss of traction when the safety mechanism sets connect a jumper between terminals 16 and 17 on the HC RB4 VFAC board to bypass the safety plank SOS switch Turn the power ON and verify that the controller is functional Note write down the value of drive parameters LF 20 and LF 42 Torun the car at 125 of its original speed set parameters LF 20 and LF 42 to 125 of the original setting If the trip point is greater than 150 skip steps g h and i and use other means to over speed the car Register a car call in the down direction but not for the bottom landing The car should travel at 125 of Contract Speed The governor should trip and set the safety and stop the car Put the car on Inspection Reset the AC drive parameters LF 20 and LF 42 to their original value contract speed value Reset the mechanical governor and inspect the hoist ropes to make sure they are in the proper grooves Move the car UP on Inspection to release the flexible guide clamp safety or release the car safety by hand if it is a wedge type clamp Remove the jumper from terminals 2 and 15 which bypasses the governor overspeed switch FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 16 6 42 02 2P21 o Remove the jumper from terminals 16 and 17 which bypasses the safety plank SOS switch p Properly reinstall the relays FLT on the HC ACI and AS and ETL on HC ACIF board These relays were removed or partia
184. HC RB4 VFAC board Reseat the FLT relay 4 7 4 2 CAR BUFFER TEST WITH A FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car Disconnect the Step Down STD input by removing the wire from terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting Bypass the Emergency Terminal Down Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and DET on the HC ACIF board Bypass the Down terminal slowdown and Down Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Position the elevator several floors above the bottom landing with a full load in the car Then register a car call for the bottom landing The car will strike the buffer Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the up direction to move the car FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 7 5 42 02 2P21 g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 and reconnect the wire to terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Remove all of the jumpers installed in this section Reseat the FLT relay GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY TESTS HPV 900 4 7 5 1 GOVERNOR ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED SWITCH TEST Make sure that there are no jumpers between
185. INDFRC output to cut out hall calls For duplex operation the dispatching scheme is always Selective Collective Therefore the Operation option message will not appear on the display if the Duplex option was selected 5 4 2 3 TOP LANDING SERVED simplex TOP LANDING FOR THIS CAR duplex Set this option to the highest floor served by this car 5 4 2 4 CAR DOORS ARE WALK THRU simplex THIS CARS DOORS WALK THRU duplex Set this option to YES if independent walk through doors are served by this car 5 4 2 5 CAR SERVES FRNT FLR 1 simplex THIS CAR SERVES FRNT FLR 1 duplex Setting this option to YES indicates that this car is eligible to serve a front opening at this floor This option will continue to be asked until the top landing is reached Press the pushbutton to scroll through the available landings Press the N pushbutton for the next option 5 4 2 6 CAR SERVES REAR FLR 1 simplex THIS CAR SERVES REAR FLR 1 duplex Setting this option to YES indicates that this car is eligible to serve a rear opening at this floor This option will not be displayed if option 5 4 2 4 is set to NO This option inquiry will continue until the top landing is reached Press the pushbutton to scroll through the available landings Press the N pushbutton for the next option Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 23 5 4 3 5 24 For a duplex option inquiries for 5 4 2 3 through 5 4 2 6 must be answered for both cars
186. IONS in the car at contract speed then verify the following 1 Are the gain parameters set two high LF 31 and LF 32 2 Are the Motor parameters set correctly 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 25 3 Is the encoder properly mounted If it is properly mounted it should not oscillate 6 7 6 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE BY CLIPPING THE DOOR LOCKS If the drive trips on over voltage by clipping the door locks check the dynamic braking circuit 6 7 7 ALARMS AND FAULTS Following are some of the faults and drive errors For more details and corrective actions refer to the drive manual TABLE 6 8 TORQMAX F4 Drive Fault Messages Eson o Eror arveoverneat moror overheats and prevaro inerasrunait 4 Error prohibited rotation forward error in the software limit switch when the set direction of rotation is forward the software limit switch for forward is inactive Error prohibited rotation reverse error in the software limit switch when the set direction of rotation is reverse the software limit switch for reverse is inactive Er s2 Enor hybrid enornmeoncodermpra OO Oo O y O pe e fararen O reset only possible with Power On Reset EOH 8 Error overheated overheating of the inverter E OH2 Error overheat 2 electronic motor overload protection E nOH 36 Error no overheat overheating no longer present can be reset valid for malfunction E OH or E OH2 Error overload continuous overload for cooling down t
187. Input is activated refer to Section 5 4 7 LLI spare input To program this option activate the LLI input Then set LIGHT LOAD WEIGHING to NOor press S to select the maximum number of car calls registered before all the car calls are canceled If Sis pressed the display will read LIGHT LOAD CAR CALL LIMIT Press S until the desired number is displayed 5 4 9 7 PHOTO EYE ANTI NUISANCE CONSEC STOPS W O PHE LIMIT When this option is ON the car calls will cancel if the Photo Eye input has not been activated after a programmed number of consecutive stops The number of consecutive stops must be programmed before the car calls will cancel To program this option set PHOTO EYE ANTI NUISANCE to NO or press Sto select the number of consecutive stops If Sis pressed the THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 display will read CONSEC STOPS W O PHE LIMIT Press S until the desired number is displayed 5 4 9 8 EARTHQUAKE OPERATION The controller should be equipped with the proper circuitry before selecting the inputs needed for Earthquake Operation This option can be set to ANSI EARTHQUAKE OPERATION or CALIFORNIA EARTHQUAKE OPERATION Descriptions of these options follow 1 ANSI EARTHQUAKE OPERATION When ANSI Earthquake Operation is selected upon activation of a Seismic switch EQI input the elevator in motion will continue to the nearest available floor at a speed of not more than 150 ft min 0 76 m s open the doors and shut down I
188. Inspection station Verify that the SAF relay drops out and the car stops when the Car Top Emergency Stop Switch is released Also by opening the Emergency Stop Switch while the car is moving up or down verify that the brake stops and holds the car k Run the car through the hoist way checking clearance and the door locks When all of the doors are closed remove the jumpers from terminals 4 and 8 and from terminals 18 and 59 if present Correct any problem with the door locks and the door closed contacts Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LED display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection NOTE If the car is not completely wired temporary check the following e wire removed from panel mount terminal DCL wire removed from terminal 47 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present m Check the counter weight balance Make whatever corrections are necessary to make the counter weight cor
189. JUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 slight relevel which is okay If the car goes more than an inch past the floor move the slowdown limit until the approach is normal Reconnect the wires to terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board and return theTEST NORMAL switch to the NORMAL position The final adjustments are now complete 4 4 3 EMERGENCY TERMINAL LIMIT SWITCH MONITOR G5 GPD515 All jobs under the requirements of ANSI A17 1 SECTION 209 4 B ASME A 17 1b 1992 ADDENDA must have a means to insure that the car speed is below 95 of the contract speed after opening the associated ETS limit switches The emergency terminal limit switch monitor performs this function Normally the jobs which come under the above requirements will have the HC ACIF or HC ETS board installed in the controller Both boards have the ETS monitor circuit This circuit receives the signal from the hall effect sensor and the magnets installed on the motor shaft or brake drum as described in Section 2 2 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor a b Make sure that all the wiring from the speed sensor to the HC ACIF board is complete Turn the ETS trimpot on the HC ACIF HC ETS board fully CW On a multi floor run adjust the speed of the car to 95 of the contract speed by adjusting the H speed Drive parameter D1 02 Remove the wire from the Up Emergency Terminal Limit Switch where it connects to the controller at terminal UET Start the car at the bo
190. L PROGRAMMED VALUES AND RECORD OF CHANGES A 1 DOOR OPERATION Moment D O B for Hall Calls Car Calls All Calls OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES D C B Cancels Door Time Yes No Yes No Leave Doors Open on MGS Yes No Yes No Leave Door Open on PTI ESS Yes No Yes No Nudging During Fire Phase 2 Yes No Yes No Dir Preference Until DLK Yes No Yes No Fully Manual Doors Yes No Yes No Cont D C B to Close Doors Yes No Yes No Cont D C B for Fire Phase 1 Yes No Yes No Moment D O B door opening No No Moment D O B for ____ Front Rear ___ Both Calls Front Rear Both Calls Hall Calls Car Calls All Calls Doors to open if parked None Front Rear Both None Front Rear Both Doors to Open on Main Fire Front Rear Both Front Rear Both Doors to Open on Alt Fire Front Rear Both Front Rear Both Leave Doors Open on CTL Yes No Yes No Limited Door Re Open Option Yes No Yes No Reduce HCT with Photo Eye Yes No Yes No Leave Doors Open on EPI Yes No Yes No Doors to open if No demand None Front Rear Both None Front Rear Both Const Press Op Bypass PHE Yes No Yes No Door Type is Horizontal Vertical
191. LATIONS in the car at contract speed then verify the following 1 Are the gain parameters set two high A LF 31 d LF 31 A LF 32 and d LF 32 2 Are the Motor parameters set correctly 3 Is the encoder properly mounted If it is properly mounted it should not oscillate DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE BY CLIPPING THE DOOR LOCKS If the drive trips on over voltage by clipping the door locks check the dynamic braking circuit ERROR MESSAGES AND THEIR CAUSES Refer to the table titled Error Messages and Their Causes in the TORQMAX F5 Drive manual for a listing of messages and suggested cause and solution TROUBLESHOOTING 6 45 TABLE 6 8 TORQMAX F5 Drive Inverter State Display 76 base block time runs out power modules are blocked for 3s always when control release is cleared forward acceleration Fcon 66 forward constant running forward deceleration noP f 0 no operation terminal X2 1 is not set LS 70 low speed control release is switched but no direction of rotation is adjusted modulation disabled rAcc reverse acceleration rCon 69 reverse constant running rdEc 68 reverse deceleration 6 46 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 6 9 8 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS TORQMAX F5 DRIVE FIGURE 6 33 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart Drive Key Pad 42 02 2P21 Drive Key Pad Series MTORQMAX How to change and save drive parameters There are four push buttons on the drive key pad Enter F R Sav
192. LF 45 Intermediate speed 1 fpm 0 91 of LF 20 0 0 0 0 LF 46 Intermediate speed 2 fpm 0 0 LF 20 0 0 0 0 LF 47 Intermediate speed 3 fpm 0 0 LF 20 0 0 200 0 0 LF 50 Starting jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 3 00 3 00 0 LF 51 Acceleration ft s 0 30 12 00 3 30 gt x 3 50 0 LF 52 Acceleration jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 4 00 4 00 0 LF 53 Deceleration jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 4 50 4 50 0 LF 54 Deceleration fts 0 30 12 00 3 50 3 50 0 LF 55 Approach jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 2 50 2 50 A 48 APPENDIX L QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 Digital Fas k Default Factor Dies Parameter Description Unit Setting Range Setting Setting 1 LF 50 Starting jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 3 50 3 50 1 LF 51 Acceleration ft s 0 30 12 00 3 50 3 50 1 LF 52 Acceleration jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 4 50 4 50 1 LF 53 Deceleration jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 5 50 x 5 50 1 LF 54 Deceleration ft s 0 30 12 00 3 50 3 50 1 LF 55 Approach jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 3 50 3 50 2 LF 50 Starting jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 1 50 1 50 2 LF 51 Acceleration ft s 0 30 12 00 1 50 1 50 2 LF 52 Acceleration jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 1 50 x 1 50 2 LF 53 Deceleration jerk ft s 0 30 32 00 1 50 x 1 50 2 LF 54 Deceleration ft s 0 30 12 00
193. LF 88 is selected the drive key pad should display the inspection speed Motor RPM value If LF 86 is selected the drive keypad should display a four 4 6 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 To verify the direction input signal display parameter LF 99 and pick UP direction on Inspection The drive keypad display should change from nOP no operation to Face forward acceleration and then to Fcon forward constant running Pick DOWN direction on Inspection The drive keypad display should change from nOP no operation to rAcc reverse acceleration and then to rCon reverse constant running When direction is picked on Inspection the DRO relay should pick If this is not true check the following a Verify that the CNP and RDY relays are picked when the direction is not picked If the RDY relay is not picked then check for a fault displayed on the drive keypad If there is no fault in the AC drive unit then check the wiring for the RDY circuit Relays PT1 PT2 UA or DA on the HC ACI board should pick when the direction relays are picked If these relays are not picking check for 36VAC between terminals XC1 XC2 and 15 and 15 on the HC ACI board If there is no voltage check the fuse on the primary side of the 30 VA transformer shown in drawing 3 of the job prints Also check the wiring from the secondary of the same transformer to terminal XC1 XC2 on the HC ACI board To verify the UP DN Enable and speed in
194. LF 96 Peak DC voltage V LF 97 Actual output frequency Hz O LF 98 Last error 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX L QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 49 Digital a 3 Default Factory oa Parameter Description Unit Setting Range Setting Setting US Parameters US 1 Password Used to accessed different parameter groups for advanced programming Load defaults Select LoAd and press ENTER to US 3 cause all LF parameters to be reset to the drive LoAd default values US 4 Load configuration Select LoAd and press ENTER to load the setting selected in US 10 g OR g Select configuration Selects the drive mode ICLSd ICLSd Closed loop induction I9LSS US 10 I9LSS Closed loop induction gearless PCLSd PCLSd Closed loop permanent magnet PM P9LSS P9LSS Closed loop PM gearless Parameters are motor machine job dependent KK Recommended but field adjustable The value is automatically calculated from the motor data or other parameter values Parameters for Drive Software Version LF 80 Drive Software 1 51 LF 81 date code 1005 7 Speed S Curve Speed Command Parameters Parameters High Speed Contract Speed LF 42 LF 52 LF 53 LF 54 Intermediate Speed 60 to 75 of Contract Speed LF 45 High Level Speed 5 to 10 of Contract Speed LF 44 Level Speed ____ _____f________2 to 5 of C
195. MCE Set column WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific motor machine job Refer to the adjustment manual for detailed information MCE Defaults Field MCE Set Digital Operator Display Setting Parameter Description R ange Initialization Selects the language for the Digital Operator 0 English 3 Francais 6 Portugues 1 Japanese 4 Italiano 2 Deutsch 5 Espanol Sets parameters accessible by Digital Operator 0 Operation Only 1 User Level A2 parameters must be set 2 Advanced Level Selects the drive control method 0 V F without PG 2 Open Loop Vector 1 V F with PG 3 Flux Vector closed loop te V F Control open Sets parameters to default values see Note 1 0 No Initialize 2220 2 Wire Initial 1110 User Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initial If A1 04 does not match A1 05 parameters A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 01 thru A2 32 cannot be changed Select Language Access Level Control Method 0 3 0 te loop 0 Flux Vector closed loop 3 Init Parameters 0 3330 Enter Password Select Password 0 9999 0 9999 Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 4 Pulse Input 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB Selects the run command input source 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB Selects the stopping method 0 Ramp to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 3 Coast with Time
196. MOTION CONTROL ENGINEERING INC 11380 WHITE ROCK ROAD RANCHO CORDOVA CA 95742 TELEPHONE 916 463 9200 FAX 916 463 9201 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION MANUAL VFMC 1000 PTC SERIES M OPEN LOOP VFMC 1000 PTC SERIES M FLUX VECTOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY PROGRAMMABLE TRACTION CONTROLLER Applicable to EMS IDM Yaskawa MagneTek GPD515 G5 MagneTek HPV 900 Yaskawa F7 and TORQMAX AC Drives Me PART 42 02 2P21 REVISION D 7 SEPTEMBER 2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS IMPORTANT NOTES amp PRECAUTIONS 000005 xi SECTION 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 0 General Information c 55 4 0c eh545 eee bee e debe ee dave bee ede seks 1 1 1 1 Car Controller Physical Description 0 000 cee eee 1 2 1 2 Car Controller Functional Description 0 0 cee 1 9 1 2 1 Car Operation Control COC 0 0 00 ee 1 10 1 2 2 Car Communication Control CCC 0 0 02 ee 1 10 1 2 3 Programming and Diagnostics Tools 0000 cece eee 1 11 12 Ay DUDIEXING prt coe oe Bares Sie ian Aaland Mle Pee eed Miata 1 11 1 2 5 Car Motion Control CMO nett eue eae gee ete eae See Sale 1 11 lee VV DING vias cen one eee ee deun a a tee td tee heres 1 11 1 2 7 Typical Sequence of Operation 00 000 eee 1 11 1 3 kanding Systems sinna tele res Seg tem el an elie oie cc T ae rca ee A e a tal ie 1 12 Lec LS SVAN ieec cere bes adens iaro ient ieo taae bee eee eee ex 1 13 1 3 2 CS QUTE nien eh tee ania
197. ND THEORY OF OPERATION The Flex Talk board is designed for use on any MCE controller to provide flexibility in audio announcement The TPI FT board is installed inside the controller and hooked up to the last board of the daisy chain The TPI FT receives such needed information as door status nudging PI etc from the MCE bus A 5V power supply runs the digital circuitry and a 15V supply operates the analog circuitry of the speaker There are eight LED s used for diagnostic purposes in conjunction with the dip switches The input and output connectors J1 and J2 are used for the MCE bus however it is unlikely that the output will be used as the Flex Talk board is typically the last in the daisy chain The exception being a duplex where there are two Flex Talk boards FIGURE G 1 Flex Talk Board
198. NDANCY FAULT Description Monitors the BAB relay for proper operation If the BAB relay is ON the RBAB input will be OFF RBAB should always be the opposite of BAB otherwise the BAB Redundancy Fault is logged and the elevator shuts down Troubleshooting Check the BAB relay for proper operation Also check the prints to see where the input RBAB comes in and check 47 K resistor swap ribbon cable and finally try replacing the associated board w relay or HC IOX BOTH USD AND DSD INPUTS ARE ACTIVE Both USD and DSD are Open Description Usually indicates a problem with the up slow down or the down slow down switch Troubleshooting Inspect both switches and associated wiring The down slow down switch should be closed unless the car is at the bottom then it should be open The up slow down switch should be closed unless the car is at the top then it should be open 5 6 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message BOTTOM FLOOR OR TOP FLOOR DEMAND Bottom Floor Demand Top Floor Demand Description The controller is trying to establish the position of the car by sending it to either the top or the bottom Usually associated with bottom floor demand Bottom Floor Demand has four possible causes 1 A change from Inspection to Automatic operation 2 Pressing the COMPUTER RESET button 3 Initial Power up 4 If the car is at the top floor and the co
199. ODE REQUEST MENU O 5 50 The Passcode Request Operation can be used to require a password to be entered in order to run the car on any mode of operation other than Inspection NOTE If a passcode has not been programmed for this controller the Passcode Request Menu will not appear If a passcode has been programmed the LCD screen will flash the PASSCODE REQUEST message when Passcode Request Operation is activated In order to clear or set the Passcode Request Operation the controller must first be placed into the System Mode as described in Section 5 6 By pressing the N pushbutton when the display reads BUILDING SECURITY MENU the Passcode Request Menu will appear Screen 1 CLEARING THE PASSCODE With Screen 1 displayed press the S pushbutton If Passcode Request Operation is activated the following screen appears Screen 2 The first character of the passcode to be entered will blink The and pushbuttons will scroll through the numbers 0 9 and letters A Z for each character of the passcode The N pushbutton will advance to the next character position of the passcode Pressing the S pushbutton will cause the program to verify that the passcode entered was correct If it was not correct the following screen will appear Screen 3 Pressing the S pushbutton will display Screen 2 Pressing the N pushbutton from this screen will return the display back to Screen 1 If the correct pass
200. OR VALVE LIMIT TIMER Motor Limit Timer has elapsed Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 1 FIGURE 5 1 MC PCA Computer Panel Board Layout 5 2 COMPUTER a CONTROLLER CHIP ON LIGHT JP17 JP4 JP5 COMPUTER oN COMPUTER RESET COM PU TER qa RESET re POWER SUPPLY BUTTON TERMINALS So yi COMMUNICATION ya gt PORTS FOR 2 8 DUPLEXING AND SAFETY ONC FOR CONNECTION DOORS aoe TO THE OPTIONAL HIGH SPEED MC PA BOARD IND SERVICE ACNE 5 PIN CIRCULAR INSP ACCESSC ee DIN CONNECTOR FIRE SERVICE TIMED QUTC NOTOR VALVE LIMIT TIMER cc LCD DISPLAY z D NIORIMAIL MODULE a PHI 12 120l olol 1oloo 1 FUNCTION SWITCHES N S AND PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES LCD CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT TRIMPOT COPYRIGHTQ1993 MADE IN USA D N 3784 R2 5 1 1 3 DIAGNOSTICS LCD DISPLAY The 32 character LCD Liquid Crystal Display displays various information depending on the positions of the F1 F8 switches Diagnostic mode is accessed when all of the switches are in the down position The LCD display shows an elevator status message the car position the contents of the computer s internal memory and communication status SWITCHES BUTTONS amp ADJUSTMENTS 5 1 2 1 COMPUTER RESET PUSHBUTTON Pressing the RESET button will cause the computer to reset If the elevator is running the controller will drop the safety relay and bring the elevator to an immediate s
201. PS Door Power Supply Board HC PIX Position Indicator Expander Board Car A HC PIX Position Indicator Expander Board Car B HC SRT Suicide Relay Timing Board HC SCR SCR Interface Board HC EQ Earthquake Board HC IOX 1 0 8 Input 8 Output Expander Board Car A HC IOX 1 0 8 Input 8 Output Expander Board Car B HC IOX Additional 1 O 8 Input 8 Output Expander Board Car A HC IOX Additional 1 O 8 Input 8 Output Expander Board Car B HC DYNA Dynalift Interface Board MC ACFR AC Feedback Relay Board IMC GIO General Turbo DF I O Board IMC RB Turbo DF Relay Board HC DB MOM H Front G A L MOM MOH Door Interface Board HC DB MOM H R Rear G A L MOM MOH Door Interface Board HC OA Output Adapter Board IMC RI M G Relay Interface Board IMC PRI M G Power Relay Interface Board IMC DIO Digital I O Board IMC DAS Data Acquisition Board HC l40 1 O 16 Input 4 Output Expander Board Car A HC l40 1 O 16 Input 4 Output Expander Board Car B HC l40 Additional 1 O 16 Input 4 Output Expander Board Car A HC l40 Additional 1 O 16 Input 4 Output Expander Board Car B SCR RI SCR AC Relay Interface Board SCR PRI SCR AC Power Relay Interface Board HC LB Lock Bypass Board HC GB Gong Board HC GB Additional Gong
202. Phase 1 Alternate floor will be changed Similar steps can be taken to change any option TABLE 5 5 Using the Program Mode Example Changing Fire Phase 1 Alternate floor from 1 to 3 STEPS TO TAKE DISPLAY MENUS AND SUB MENUS SECTION OF MANUAL Put car on Inspection S nen Press N button for Next Pa Press S button for Select Press N button for Next Press N button for Next Press S button to select next available value If you press S 5 too many times continue to press it until the desired value appears again Press N button for Next Press N button for Next Press N button to scroll through any remaining Fire Service sub menus PreseNoatontrnen Eo T ra Press N button for Next eae a A Press N button for Next s Pa Press N button for Next Pat Press N button for Next a Press N button for Next l e P Press N button for Next a Press N button for Next rr a Press S button to Save H a Press N button for Next H S Flip F1 switch Down and take zaroffot Inspection The new options are stored and are now in effect 5 22 g THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 2 BASIC FEATURE MENU OPTIONS 5 4 2 1 SIMPLEX OR DUPLEX The controller has been programmed at the factory for either simplex or duplex capability If the controller has simplex capability it can only operate a single car as a simplex The Simplex Duplex option message will not appear on the display If the controller has du
203. QMAX Drive parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation LF 02 2 Operating mode e LF 22 Gear Reduction ratio LF 04 0 Induction motor LF 23 Roping Ratio LF 07 US Unit selection LF 24 Load LBS LF 10 Rated motor power HP LF 30 2 Closed loop 0 open loop LF 11 Rated motor speed RPM e LF 31 Speed Prop gain LF 12 Rated motor current Amp e LF 32 Speed Int gain LF 13 Rated motor frequency Hz e LF 42 High Speed FPM LF 14 Rated motor voltage LF 43 Inspection speed FPM LF 17 Encoder pulse number PPR closed loop e LF 44 High level speed FPM LF 20 Rated speed FPM LF 45 Intermediate speed FPM LF 21 Traction sheave diameter inches e LF 51 Acceleration ft s s e LF 53 Deceleration ft s s 3 6 3 MOVING THE CAR ON INSPECTION OPERATION TORQMAX F4 is applied to the controller even when the motor is not rotating Do WARNING The motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power not open the drive cover for 5 10 minutes after removing the AC power to allow the capacitors to discharge Use extreme caution Do not touch any circuit board power device or electrical connection without ensuring that high voltage is not present Once all the steps described in Sections 3 3 1 3 6 1 and 3 6 2 are accomplished then proceed with the following a Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Turn ON the main pow
204. R ARRIVAL GONG MAIN EGRESS FLOOR To program this option Michigan Code set one of the spare outputs to EFG Then set EGRESS FLOOR ARRIVAL GONG to NO no gong or press S to select the floor number where the gong should activate after the door locks break If S is pressed the display will read MAIN EGRESS FLOOR 1 Press S until the desired floor number is displayed SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS There is 1 additional or spare input terminal available on the Relay board marked SP1 There are also 8 spare input terminals on the HC IOX board s and 16 spare input terminals on the HC l40 board s The maximum number of terminals possible is 49 Any of these spare inputs SP1 SP2 may be used for any of the input signals listed below SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS Monitoring input for the 2AB relay coil Alarm Bell Input This input monitors the car through the CRT or with CMS software There are three conditions that will display a warning on the screen First if the Alarm Button is pressed when the car is stopped outside of the door zone Next if the Alarm Button is pressed four times in 60 seconds without the car moving And lastly if the car fails to complete an LSA movement check after being idle for 10 minutes at a landing All of these failures will alert the monitoring station through the PA board Alive Input This input is used in a duplex configuration and is received from the other car If the input is on for this car it state
205. RENCE F THERE IS A PROBLEM WITH THE CALL CIRCUIT CHECK THE TRIAC O ZENER DIODE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY i Is 603 C 603 60a C 602 4 60l TT tt 504 O C 504 y 503 c roe 50a C 502 104 C 104 103 C 103 102 4 102 101 7 101 Mok rian aie PIO DD4 Z DO4PI3I Position HC PCI 0 Pla Doe poeple indicators REV 8 0 COPYRIGHT 1994 MADE IN USA PIYDOL 2D01A IL 184 Qs 183 2 Piss Gongs aa y me ang a 8 wes lanterns PFG PSE aiPSsl uie il p 1 On 5VDC 1 Off OVDC T 87654321 120VAC SPARE 2 DCP CSB eS BR1 NUDG x FWI SST MGR outputs to HC RBX
206. RT Terminal or PC Jumper Settings Jumper Setting Description rr 8 oea re 8 asenon B Te aMDERROM 6 60 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 43 HC RB4 Quick Reference 42 02 HC RB4 Rev 1 HC RB4 QUICK REFERENCE CARD When active 5VAC Voltage dropping resistors Inputs to HC PI O HC PCI O Outputs from HC PI O HC PCI O oF 2 4 6 8101214161820 2 4 6 8101214161820 z c1 135 7 9 1113151719 135 7 9 1113151719 c2 T RRSO gt 2Pyy i cla Q 2P When active D1 Ele Ces 5 120VAC pea eT Te D01 slo lje 2 Doz o s1 t Machine room Independent service switch disables door open Test message is displayed on MP Diagnostics when in test position 4 od sueevedpoeue0e os08 TT 42 ot FS er cso mee E34 35 E36 OO 0 DZ apaga ee tede 0e 020208 0a 0a Osart s02020s02 020202 02 0s 0 theleletethateten INSPECTION Machine ON AA B Be Room OFF e000 0000 Inspection 0000 DAA G Operation 000 5 ECCE o o o E i Y g G U O
207. S WITHOUT ABSOLUTE FLOOR ENCODING If the car is in the middle of the hoistway when power is turned ON the controller will not know where the car is and must send the car to the bottom landing to get in step with the floor Position Indicator It does so by generating an internal BFD Bottom Floor Demand flag in the computer When the BFD flag is present no car calls will be accepted until the car reaches the bottom terminal The BFD flag will be cleared when the DSD Down Slow Down cam operated switch has opened dropping power to terminal 13 if DZ Door Zone and DLK Door Locked are both active If the car is on Automatic Operation and if a home floor has been designated the car will move to the home landing at this time If the car is put on Relay Panel Inspection or Car Top Inspection operation and then is returned to Automatic operation and if the car is not at a terminal landing the controller will create the BFD flag and will act as described above If the BFD flag is present and the TEST NORMAL switch is on TEST it will be necessary to place a jumper between terminals 2 and 45 Door Close input to move the car It may be necessary to hold the jumper on the terminals for several seconds 4 2 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 JOBS WITH ABSOLUTE FLOOR ENCODING If the car is not at a landing when power is turned ON the controller will generate a down direction command and the car will move toward the closest landing provided that all
208. SERVICE PHASE 2 Fire Service Phase 2 Description The FCS controller input is ON Troubleshooting Inspect the phase 2 switch and wiring In some cases to exit Fire Service Phase 2 the car must be at the fire floor at which Fire Phase 2 was activated the doors must be fully open and the phase 2 switch must be off the FCOFF input must be activated to get out of phase 2 ONT DOL AND DLK ARE BOTH ACTIVE Description A critical failure has caused both the Door Open Limit and Door Lock inputs to both be active at the same time DOL 0 amp DLK 1 A problem with DOL and or DLK circuitry or wiring Troubleshooting Inspect the Door Open Limit and the Door Lock circuitry and wiring When this error is generated the car will shutdown with the doors open and will not answer any calls The only way to reset this error condition is to put the car on Inspection operation ONT DOOR IS LOCKED BUT NOT FULLY CLOSED Description Doors Open DCL 1 and Locked DLK 1 A problem with DCL and or DLK circuitry or wiring Troubleshooting Inspect the Door Closed Limit and the Door Lock circuitry and wiring When this error is generated the car is not allowed to run Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 9 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message FRONT DOOR LOCK SWITCH FAILURE NYCHA Description The front door lock contacts have failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the front ho
209. SING THE COMPUTER S INTERNAL MEMORY Examining the computer memory as in the example above is a useful step in troubleshooting elevator problems It s possible to check if the controller is receiving input signals correctly and if it is sending out the proper output signals It is also possible to look up each of the computer output and input signals shown in the Job Prints The following example illustrates how to use Tables 5 3 and 5 4 to check a signal in the computer internal memory Example problem the photo eye will not cause the doors to reopen Step 1 Look at Table 5 4 Find the abbreviation or mnemonic for Photo Eye input Table 5 4 shows that the mnemonic for Photo Eye input is PHE Step 2 Look for PHE on Table 5 4 Table 5 4 gives an Address ADDR and Position for each signal This will show where to look for the signal on Table 5 3 and on the computer display Table 5 4 shows that the Address of PHE is 20 and the Position is 7 Step 3 Notice on Table 5 3 that PHE is indeed in Position 7 on row 20 Step 4 Now that the Address and Position have been determined look up the PHE signal on the computer First change the address on the display to address 20 see Sections 5 3 2 and 5 3 3 for an explanation Then look at data bit number 7 from the right which is highlighted and underlined in the following display This digit represents the computer s interpretation of the PHE signal If the digit is 1 the computer thinks th
210. START UP 3 7 TABLE 3 1 Critical G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters CRITICAL G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS Parameter Digital Operator Parameter Description Units Setting MCE drive Field MCE Display Range default settings H1 06 Terminal 8 Sel Multi function input 0 82 6 6 terminal 8 6 Jog Ref In speed Number H2 Digital Outputs H2 01 Terminal 9 sel Multi F output 1 Ter 9 10 37 During Run 2 H2 02 Terminal 25 sel Multi F output 2 Ter 25 27 4 Freq Det 1 x These values should be doubled for the 460 volt application TABLE 3 2 Additional G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters Applicable to Flux Vector Applications ADDITIONAL G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS APPLICABLE TO FLUX VECTOR Parameter Digital Operator Parameter Description Units Setting MCE Field Number Display Range drive MCE default settings c5 ASR TUNING ASR P Gain1 ASR proportional gain 1 0 0 300 20 0 20 0 ASR Time 1 ASR integral time 1 0 00 10 0 0 50 0 20 ASR P Gain 2 ASR proportional gain 2 0 00 300 0 20 0 20 0 ASR I Time 2 ASR integral time 2 0 0 10 0 0 50 0 50 PG Option Setup PG pulse Rev PG constant 0 60000 1024 1024 PG Fdbk Loss sel Stopping method at PG line brake 0 3 1 1 detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG overspeed sel Stopping method at OS detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Deviation sel Stopp
211. Service Operation a hospital emergency call switch will be installed at each floor where this service is desired When the hospital emergency momentary call switch is activated at any floor the hospital emergency call registered light will illuminate at that floor only and the nearest available elevator will respond to the hospital emergency call All car calls within the selected car will be canceled and any landing calls which had previously been assigned to that car will be transferred to the other car If the selected car is traveling away from the hospital emergency call it will slow down and stop at the nearest floor without opening the doors reverse direction and proceed nonstop to the hospital emergency floor If the selected car is traveling toward the hospital emergency floor it shall proceed nonstop to that floor At the time of selection if the car happens to slow down for a stop it will stop without opening the doors and then start immediately toward the hospital emergency floor When the car reaches the hospital emergency floor it will remain with doors open for a pre determined time interval After this interval has expired if the car has not been placed on in car Hospital Emergency Service Operation the car will automatically return to normal service A hospital emergency key switch will be located in each car operating station for selecting in car Hospital Emergency Service Operation Upon activation of the key switch the
212. Set H Terminal H1 Digital Inputs Terminal 3 selection Ref to H1 01 in drive manual H1 01 Terminal 3 Sel 7 Multi Accel Decel 1 0 7F 7 B 7 Multi function input terminal 4 i i H1 02 Terminal 4 Sel 14 Fault Reset 0 7F 14 B 14 3 Multi function input terminal 5 i 7 H1 03 Terminal 5 Sel 80 Mult step spd 1F 0 7F 80 B 80 T Multi function input terminal 6 i 7 H1 04 Terminal 6 Sel 81 Mult step spd 2F 0 7F 81 B 81 Multi function input terminal 7 i i H1 05 Terminal 7 Sel 82 mult step spd 3F 0 7F 82 B 82 s Multi function input terminal 8 i i H1 06 Terminal 8 Sel 6 Jog Ref Inspection speed 0 7F 6 B 6 H2 Digital Outputs Multi function input terminal 9 terminal 10 7 H2 01 Terminal 9 Sel same as F5 01 37 During Run 2 0 3F 37 B 37 Multi function input terminal 25 terminal 27 7 F H202 Terminal 23 Sel same as F5 01 4 Freq Detection 1 0 3F 4 5 4 Multi function input terminal 26 terminal 27 z p H2 03 Terminal 26 Sel same as F5 01 F potused 0 3F F B F H3 Analog Inputs Signal selection terminal 13 H3 01 Term 13 Signal 0 0 to 10VDC 1 10 to 10VDC 0 1 0 B Le H3 02 Terminal 13 Gain Reference gain terminal 13 0 0 1000 0 100 0 B 100 H3 03 Terminals 13 Bias Reference bias term
213. T on the HC ACI and AS and ETL on HC ACIF board These relays were removed or partially removed from their respective sockets q Put the car on Normal operation by taking the car off Inspection After the elevator finds a floor verify the operation of the elevator by registering calls and checking the speed 4 10 6 PHASE LOSS DETECTION TESTS TORQMAX F4 The VFAC Drive Unit is programmed to detect a motor phase loss To test for proper tripping of the drive output phase loss connection between the drive and motor attempt to run the elevator on Inspection with one motor lead disconnected The Drive should trip off dropping the RDY relay and the brake The drive should display E LC no current flows to the motor A manual reset of the Drive on the HC ACI board will be needed to return to Normal operation Reconnect the motor lead and return the controls to Normal operation The adjustments and tests are complete Now is the time to fine tune any areas that may require touching up Make sure that all of the appropriate data has been properly documented and that all of the jumpers have been removed before the car is returned to service WARNING Before the Elevator can be turned over to normal use it is very important to verify that no safety circuit is bypassed The items to be checked include but are not limited to Relays FLT on HC ACI board and AS and ETL on the HC ACIF board if provided must be installed properly in their sockets Wir
214. TLDOT Car to lobby door open timer flag 5 16 CTLDOT Car to Lobby Door Open Timer Output option 5 35 CTLF Car to lobby function flag 5 16 CTST Capture for test input flag 5 16 CTST Capture for Test Input option 5 32 D D C B CANCELS DOOR TIME option 5 27 DB Dynamic Braking fault 3 5 DBC Door close button input flag 5 16 DBCR Door close button rear flag 5 16 DBZF Front Door Buzzer output option 5 35 DBZR Rear Door Buzzer output option 5 35 DC Down call flag 5 16 DCA Down call above flag 5 16 DCB Down call below flag 5 16 DCC Door close complete flag 5 16 DCCR Door close complete flag rear 5 16 DCF Door close function output flag 5 16 DCFR Door close function output rear flag 5 16 2 e INDEX DCL Door Close Limit Input option 5 32 DCLC Doors Closed Contact Input option 5 32 DCLCR Door close contact input rear flag 5 16 DCP Door close power output flag 5 16 DCPR Door close power output rear flag 5 16 DCR Down call flag rear flag 5 16 DDF Double ding function flag 5 16 DDP Down direction preference flag 5 16 DEADZ Dead zone flag 5 16 default parameter values 5 19 DELSIM Delta simulation flag 5 16 DFI Drive Fault Input option 5 32 DHEND Door hold end flag 5 16 DHEND Door Hold End Output option 5 35 DHEND2 Door hold end rear flag 5 16 DHENDR Door Hold End Rear Output option 5 36 DHLD Door hold input flag 5 16 DHLD Door Hold Input for Normal Service op
215. TU NT d os k4 D CMD ZA oa Z km 8 a CMB K10 K11 p c11 K12 c12 K13 ae eo ae ey a 1 k ps7 R28 1 ae D63 YZ 7 aa BAe eg C o C o 7 Yle in 2 per D64 M Ssg s ALS 20D D54 base IN D58 ne D53 R S g R25 D62 5 151 N N Ls AS DA D74 D76 AE el m A a R30 DBF FAULT D7 D7 K17 x Sys K15 K16 L N a e AS FAULT N rg Nn 9 Be tare C s Fap m9 CO es spy d7 3 FLT Eee C18 U2 a OB J7 z R34 4 Am S43 eS ETS FAULT ISN c16 HC ACIF D7g C19 D87 gt a Abed R38 D54 Qi REV 2 s3 E R35 C20 C22 x R48 H ke ya R36 R39 R44 d s COPYRIGHT 1997 R40 R45 D89 MADE IN USA D R41 R46 R42 gt C27 RA C7 ES D81 D N 3560 R1 8 RELAYS FUSES TERMINAL BLOCKS ETC This space contains any door operator circuitry terminal blocks for customer wiring fuse holders fuses and any other circuitry needed for a specific job 9 TRANSFORMERS Transformers are provided as necessary according to the power requirements of each individual car load and the available AC line voltage Transformers are usually in the lower part of the cabinet 10 POWER TERMINAL For input power connections 11 RFI FILTER optional To reduce RFI noise 12 VVVF DRIVE UNIT Provides a synthesized variable frequency variable voltage three phase AC output to run the hoist motor in response to speed and direction signals from the HC ACI board 13 POWER CONTACTORS These contactors are a code requirement to disconnect the
216. Tek HPV 900 Drive Manual This setting changes back to NO immediately after the test run It is necessary to repeat this step if another test run is required i Register a car call in the down direction but not for the bottom landing The car should travel at 125 of Contract Speed the value of the A1 Overspeed Mult parameter The governor should trip and set the safety and stop the car j Put the car on Inspection k Reset the AC drive parameter A1 Overspeed Mult to 100 and verify that the U4 OVERSPEED TEST parameter NO Return the A1 Contract Mtr Speed parameter to the original value if changed Reset the mechanical governor and inspect the hoist ropes to make sure they are in the proper grooves FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 29 4 7 6 4 30 m Move the car UP on Inspection to release the flexible guide clamp safety or release the car safety by hand if it is a wedge clamp type n Remove the jumper from terminals 2 and 15 which bypasses the governor overspeed switch o Remove the jumper from terminals 16 and 17 which bypasses the safety plank SOS switch p Properly reinstall relay FLT on the HC ACI and relays AS and ETL on HC ACIF board These relays were removed or partially removed from their respective sockets q Put the car on Normal operation by taking the car off Inspection After the elevator finds a floor verify the operation of the elevator by registering calls and checking the speed PHASE LOSS DETE
217. The BDD trimpot controls the dropping of the brake through the BE relay Move the LU and LD sensors or switches closer together or further apart so the car stops at the same location up or down Then move the floor leveling magnet strips or vanes so the car stops accurately at each floor h The adjustment is almost complete The acceleration rate parameter setting should be at least as great as the deceleration rate parameter but it should not be so high that it substantially exceeds the value of the deceleration rate parameter Excessive acceleration may cause the AC Drive circuits to saturate and thereby lose control of the 4 36 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 car Ideally the slope of the acceleration in volts per second should be equal to the slope of the deceleration Note the present value of the deceleration parameter LF 53 and run the car Continue to decrease the value of LF 53 until the car overshoots the floor requiring a relevel operation Observe the response of the car to verify a stable releveling operation Return the value of the LF 53 parameter to its original value so that the approach to the floor is the same as before After the car stops check the empty car releveling operation by placing a jumper between terminals 18 and 26 to cause an up level after which the car will stop due to picking the LD Down Level switch Remove the jumper from terminals 18 and 26 and the car will level down against the counterweight Make s
218. The value should change from 0 to 5 or 9 when a direction is picked on Inspection 0 No signal 5 Enable and Forward UP inputs are ON 9 Enable and Reverse DN inputs are ON If this is not true the drive is not getting the enable and direction input signals Select LF 84 The value should change from 0 to 16 when direction is picked on Inspection 0 No speed 16 Inspection speed If this is not true the drive is not receiving the speed input To verify the drive input signals refer to the job prints and measure the DC voltage between drive common X2 11 and the respective input X2 3 Forward X2 4 Reverse X3 5 Inspection speed The voltage should read 18VDC when the respective input is ON Select LF 85 The value should change to 5309 when direction on inspection is picked Drive is running below High or INT speed If all the above are true follow the drawings and verify the voltage at various points in the DRO coil circuit e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 29 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Car does not move Car does not move Series M TORQMAX Put the car on Inspection operation and pick UP or DN direction No Refer to flow chart PM contactor does not pick Verify inspection speed parameter LF 43 Normal setting is 10 of contract speed Pick UP or DN direction Main contactor PM picks Yes DRO and BR turn ON No Refer to flow chart Brake Does not Pick Y
219. USTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 3 3 4 3 4 42 02 2P21 If the car is trying to level it will not leave the landing for a call until the leveling is complete Move the limit switch if necessary The Status Indicator lights should now display the indication for Independent Service operation At this time the Position Indicator should match the actual car location Note that all of the Position Indicators and direction arrows are conveniently displayed on the controller All the calls are also displayed on the controller BRAKE ADJUSTMENT FOR 125 LOAD G5 GPD515 Put the car on Inspection at the bottom landing Put 2 3 of a contract load in the car Begin adding weights in 50 or 100 pound increments and move the car up and down on Inspection each time Adjust the brake tension to stop and hold 125 of a contract load by tripping a stop switch open while running down on Inspection Hold the DOWN button in while tripping open the stop switch preferably on the Inspection station KEEP THE CAR NEAR THE BOTTOM AS IT IS LIKELY TO SLIDE THROUGH THE BRAKE ONTO THE BUFFERS If the VFAC Drive Unit trips off when the car is going down but not while it is going up refer to the manual for the VFAC Drive Unit and look up the failure indicated on the Drive display If an over voltage fault is indicated there may be a problem in the regeneration or braking resistors the braking module if one is provided or in the fuses that may be in series with the wires
220. UTER SOCUIIY sas vince neue eaters eee Meee ee eae Mea eee ea 5 3 5 2 1 PASSWORD ce Bo ruta os Sa ah ia ge San Sah anak ne Sa at ae wae Som hal Sata Soe ara hd 5 4 Diagnostic Mode 2 o 12 8 ect Ste 3S eek ee eee tO eB tO tate ee 5 4 5 3 1 Getting into Diagnostic Mode 000 ees 5 4 5 3 2 Function of N Pushbutton 2 54 2 2 2s040 402 se Sede eee eee es 5 4 5 3 3 Function of S Pushbutton 24 nck tet ees ee he eat he ce 2 5 5 5 3 4 Function of Pushbutton a o ared ao Pewee Coie e eaceeue de wees so 5 5 5 3 5 Function of Pushbutton ices ae Aare ee naar is ie reife ta lea ri 5 5 5 3 6 Format of LCD Display 324 agent eng lak hat tol Ne eek Gee ee 5 5 5 3 6 2 Status Message ic ncn ine eee Nice naka See e eee eewency 5 6 5 3 6 3 Elevator Position 2 c aac s ete ta eee alee Bette ote 5 13 5 3 6 4 Computer Internal Memory 00 00 cee eee 5 14 5 3 7 Troubleshooting Using the Computer s Internal Memory 5 15 5 3 8 Troubleshooting Specific Problems 0 000 ee eee eae 5 17 5 3 8 1 Problem the BFD TFD Error Message Is Flashing on the Display5 17 5 3 8 2 Problems with Call ose og 2 hos ote b cae ae tao deges ae 5 19 5 3 8 3 Problems with Doors 2 4 22 sesd sada weaned ee aed 5 19 5 3 9 Setting Parameters Options to Default Values 5 19 Program MCG Co cc reece iea Geta Bede wo Beadle Pee E O wie hain ek 5 20 5 4 1 General Description of Program Mode 000 e eee aes 5 20 5 4 1 1 V
221. V f Field Display Range Drive MCE Defaults Set S Ov Change Pt Frequency reference for S Curve 1 selection Hz 0 400 40 B 40 S Crv Change P2_ Frequency reference for S Curve 2 selection Hz 0 400 105 e 1085 S Crv Change Pa_ Frequency reference for S Curve 3 selection Hz 0 400 aso B 400 Scr Ace Start S Cuve at the Stan ofAcceleraion Sec oor 25 2 S Crv Acc End S Curve 1 atthe End of Acceleration Sec 001 25 o2 8 02 oor 26 o2 eB 02 ze z UlU a aja ojojo Wwj NJ v U U U ojojojlo NIOJ eA 01 2 5 S Crv Dec End 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Deceleration Sec 001 25 10 e S Crv Acc Stat 2_ S Curve 2 atthe Start of Acceleration Sec 001 25 o2 8 02 S Crv Acc End 2 S Curve 2 atthe End of Acceleration Sec o0re5 o2 8 o2 2 5 2 5 2 5 B Q OjO S Crv Dec Start 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Deceleration Sec 001 25 15 e S Crv DecEnd2 S Curve 2 at the End of Deceleration Sec 001 25 10 e IS Crv Acc Start3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Acceleration Sec 0 01 25 02 B 0 2 IS Crv Accend3 S Curve 3 at the End of Acceleration Sec Pre 12 B IS Crv Dec Start 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Deceleration Sec 001 25 o5 B 5 nuna a i a U a i m O v U U na S N 5 _ A 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 7 Digital Operator Parameter Description Setting MCE V f Field Displ
222. VELING DOWN Description The Level Down computer input is ON Comes ON normally when the car is just above a floor If the car is level with the floor and a message appears it is usually the result of a switch or sensor problem Troubleshooting Inspect the LD switch or sensor on the landing system and the placement of the landing system vane or magnet for that floor LEVELING SENSOR FAILED OFF POSITION Leveling Input is absent Description One of the leveling sensor inputs LU or LD appears to have failed in the inactive state The controller computer did not detect the appropriate leveling signal LU or LD during the last approach to the floor Probable causes may be 1 A faulty leveling sensor or associated circuitry within the landing system assembly 2 Faulty wiring from the landing system to the controller 3 Faulty computer input circuit main relay board or HC PCI O board Troubleshooting Check operation of the leveling sensors and associated wiring place car on inspection move above and below a landing noting the transitions in the leveling signal s coming from the landing system e Verify that the computer diagnostic display of LU and LD matches the state of the sensor signals at the main relay board LEVELING SENSOR FAILED ON POSITION Stuck Leveling Input Description One of the leveling sensor inputs LU or LD appears to have failed in the active state The controller computer detected that both the LU
223. When the drive is in Operation mode press the up arrow until Monitor function U1 is displayed press enter and then use the up arrow to access the U1 07 DC bus voltage Then run the elevator and watch the voltage reading Actual measurement of voltage Use extreme care when measuring the DC voltage across the drive power terminals and 2 or 3 under the above conditions If the bus voltage is 325 VDC for a 230 VAC motor or 650 VDC for 460 VAC motor and if there is no voltage measured across the braking resistors while the car is slowing with a full load going down or empty car up there may be a wiring problem or a defective braking unit if provided Be sure to investigate this thoroughly These resistors perform the task of regulating car speed during a full load down or empty car up run regeneration FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 53 4 13 A 4 13 1 4 13 2 4 54 FINAL ELEVATOR INSPECTION PROCEDURE YASKAWA F7 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 WARNING The following tests should be performed only by the qualified elevator personnel skilled in final adjustment and inspections INSPECTION LEVELING OVER SPEED TEST YASKAWA F7 The HC ACI board is equip
224. ZZ ORI E016 Foose S J ECRIs Ecis Floor 18 ZZ Eon Ec20 Fioor 20 A 7 ECR22 EC22 Fioor 22 AAA S cores ECA Floor 24 Z ZNA L EcR5 EC25 Flioor 25 ZZAZZ s 026 Foor 26 J ECR28 EC28 Floor 28 ASSL EcR3o Ec30 Floor 30 SAAS Sf J ECR32 EC32 Floor 32 Legend for Table 5 7 e gt Registered hospital calls for the floor opening 1 call is registered 0 call is not registered LLLA Assigned hospital calls for the floor opening 1 Call is assigned 0 Call is not assigned The car is eligible for Hospital Emergency Service Operation for the floor opening 1 Hospital emergency call can be entered for the floor opening 0 Hospital emergency call cannot be entered for the floor opening Software Revision 6 03 THE COM PUTER 5 47 5 6 5 6 1 5 48 SYSTEM MODE FUNCTION SWITCHES System mode allows the user to change certain system D A EER wide options that do not require the car to be on Inspection To enter System mode move the F3 switch to the up position Press the N pushbutton to select the desired System Mode item e Building Security Menu see Section 5 6 1 System mode Passcode Request Menu see Section 5 6 2 e Load Weigher Thresholds see Section 5 6 3 e Analog Load Weigher Learn Function see Section 5 6 4 BUILDING SECURITY MENU Elevator Security is typically used to prevent access to specific floors via the elevators or to limit access
225. _ security code a ee re ee ee 8 Floor ___ security code mea Ned ae ae eee hee eet leet 9 Floor ___ security code Se ie oe aa 10 Floor _____ security code n Se ee a ee a Oe ee 11 Floor _____ security code Se ee 12 Floor ____ security code E re ee E a a a 13 Floor _____ security code a a 14 Floor ____ security code Zo ea a 15 Floor ___ security code Sae E ee a 16 Floor ____ security code E ee E EN 17 Floor ___ security code B oai opea ng o 18 Floor _____ security code ga a 19 Floor ____ security code Se ee ee 20 Floor ___ security code ie ee eG Se 21 Floor ____ security code Se eee 22 Floor ____ security code ee a E a 23 Floor ____ security code Z O a 24 Floor ____ security code o eea ee a 25 Floor ___ security code me ee es a 26 Floor _____ security code a ae ec oe 27 Floor ___ security code Sgt a et 28 Floor ___ security code a a ee 29 Floor _____ security code Euo eaa e e a 30 Floor _____ security code o e o o ee e 31 Floor ___ security code me A 32 Floor _____ security code a ce eo nT 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX F ELEVATOR SECURITY INFORMATION AND OPERATION A 27 APPENDIX G FLEX TALK OPTION The following is a listing of diagnostic tools available on a controller if the Flex Talk option is provided Use this addendum in conjunction with the manual The addendum provides information regarding the diagnostics and volume adjustments for the TPI FT option on the Flex Talk unit G 1 INTRODUCTION A
226. a Begin adding test weights to the car in 100 or 200 pound increments all the way up to the rated load Observe the AC Drive Unit current on its display LF 93 and check to see if there is an E OL or E OL2 Overload error indication as the car accelerates to full speed If so it is an indication that the AC drive unit is being pushed close to its limits and may require one or more of the following actions 1 The requested acceleration rate may be excessive Try reducing the acceleration rate by decreasing the LF 51 parameter The lower the rate of acceleration the lower the current demand 2 A more gradual transition from acceleration to high speed may be made by decreasing the LF 52 Acceleration Jerk parameter 3 Verify that LF 38 0 PWM 8KHz The drive gains parameters LF 31 and LF 32 may need to be increased 4 The motor may be underrated It may be possible to get excellent results if the speed is reduced slightly 5 The elevator may be improperly counter weighted This possibility should be thoroughly investigated 6 Make a copy of the table in Appendix D Quick Reference for TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Use the digital operator on the Drive Unit to look up and write down every parameter value as programmed in the unit Use this as a reference when calling MCE to review the data If there is a full load in the car and there is trouble slowing in the down direction or if the AC Drive Unit is tripping off and there i
227. a delay before dropping the brake the control system will release its control of the motor and the motor will drift briefly in the direction of the load before the brake is forced to drop by the PT relay The BDD trimpot controls the dropping of the brake through the BE relay Move the LU and LD sensors or switches closer together or further apart so the car stops at the same location up or down Then move the floor leveling magnet strips or vanes so the car stops accurately at each floor h The adjustment is almost complete The acceleration rate parameter setting should be at least as great as the deceleration rate parameter but it should not be so high that it substantially exceeds the value of the deceleration rate parameter Excessive acceleration may cause the VFAC Drive circuits to saturate and thereby lose control of the car Ideally the slope of the acceleration in volts per second should be equal to the slope of the deceleration Note the present value of the A2 Decel Rate 0 parameter Increase the value of A2 Decel Rate 0 and run the car Continue to increase the value of A2 Decel Rate 0 until the car overshoots the floor requiring a relevel operation Observe the response of the car to verify a stable releveling operation Return the value of the A2 Decel Rate 0 parameter to its original value so that the approach to the floor 4 24 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 6 5 4 6 6 42 02 2P21 is the same as before After th
228. adjustment but m ust be less than D1 02 for proper operation Jog ref Jog reference Inspection speed Hz 0 40 10 10 Input volt Drive input voltage Vek Drive input voltage V F Selection Pattern selection N A to flux vector F 0 F F Max Freq Maximum frequency Hz 0 80 60 Max volt Motor voltage V Motor name plate voltage Base Freq Maximum volt output freq Hz 40 50 60 Motor rated 60 Mid Freq Mid out put frequency N A to flux vector Hz 0 80 3 Mid volt Mid out put voltage N A to flux vector V 17 2 16 0 25 0 4 Min freq Minimum out put frequency N A to flux vector 0 80 0 5 0 5 Min volt Minimum out put volt N A to flux vector 0 255 10k Motor FLA Motor Full load amp 0 1500 Motor dependent Motor slip Motor Rated slip 0 15 Motor dependent No load current Motor no load current 30 40 of Motor FLA Terminal 3 Sel Multi function input terminal 3 7 Mult Accell Decel 1 7 Terminal 4 Sel Multi function input terminal 4 14 Fault Reset Terminal 5 Sel Multi function input terminal 5 80 Mult step spd 1F Terminal 6 Sel Multi function input terminal 6 81 Mult step spd 2F Terminal 7 Sel 42 02 2P21 Multi function input terminal 7 82 mult step spd 3F
229. al option 5 36 DSHTR Door shortening flag rear 5 17 DSHTR Door Time Shortening Front Output rear option 5 36 DSTI Door Stop Input option 5 33 DSTIR DSTI for rear doors option 5 33 duplexing 1 11 5 54 DZ Door zone input flag 5 17 DZORDZ Front or rear door zone input flag 5 17 DZP Door zone previous flag 5 17 DZR Door zone input rear flag 5 17 E Earthquake Reduced Speed Operation message 5 9 Earthquake message 5 8 6 13 Earthquake Operation message 5 8 EARTHQUAKE OPERATION option 5 39 ECC Excess car calls flag 5 17 ECRN Emergency Car Freeze Input option 5 33 ECRN Emergency car run flag 5 17 ECRN Emergency Power Car Run Output option 5 36 EDS Earthquake Direction Switch Input option 5 33 EDTLS Earthquake Direction Terminal Limit Switch option 5 33 EFG Egress Floor Gong Output option 5 36 EGRESS FLOOR ARRIVAL GONG option 5 31 elevator security A 26 A 27 Elevator Shutdown Switch Active message 5 9 Emergency Medical Service message 5 9 Emergency Power message 5 9 6 13 Emergency Power Operation message 5 9 EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION option 5 38 emergency terminal limit switch monitor G5 GPD515 Drive 4 15 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 27 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 40 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 68 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 55 EMSB Emergency Medical Service Buzzer Output option 5 36 42 02 2P21 EMSC Emergency Medical Switch Car option 5 33 EMSH Emergency Medical Switch Hall option 5
230. al Switch ETS Fault AS DBF RESET This switch resets the At Speed Fault AS and or the Dynamic Braking Fault DBF INSPECTION OPERATION G5 GPD515 DRIVE For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 drive see Section 3 5 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 drive see Section 3 6 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 drive see Section 3 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 drive see Section 3 8 DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS Each controller is shipped with completed parameter sheets and all of the field adjustable parameters have been entered into the drive unit based upon the provided field information However it is essential to verify all drive parameter settings before start up The drive software has been modified for this application therefore some of the parameters on the parameter sheet shipped with the controller are different from those shown in the drive manual If a drive is replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Refer to the instruction manual for the VFAC drive unit which is provided along with this manual as part of the documentation Become familiar with the VFAC Drive Manual particularly with the operation of the Digital Operator keypad operation Note that the way this VFAC drive unit START UP 3 5 is being used ignores many of its functions Pages D and DX of the job prints show the
231. am Mode and see if any of the inputs are programmed as PTI Then check to see if that particular input is activated POWER UP SHUT DOWN DUE TO EARTHQUAKE Traction only Description The CWI and or EQI input was detected high at power up Used for ASME Earthquake Operation only Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and check to see if any spare inputs are programmed as EQI or CWI Then check to see if those particular inputs are activated The elevator may be returned to normal service by means of the momentary reset button on the HC EQ2 board If both the EQI and CWI input were activated at power up the MC PCA board would need to be reset as well ESSURE SWITCH ACTIVATED Description This message is displayed when the Pressure Switch Input PSS is programmed and activated low Troubleshooting Check the associated hardware device and take appropriate action AR DOL amp DLK ARE BOTH ACTIVE Description The Door Open Limit Rear and the Door Lock inputs are both active DOLR 0 and DLK 1 A problem with DOLR and or DLK circuitry or wiring Troubleshooting Inspect the Door Open Limit Rear and the Door Lock circuitry and wiring When this error is generated the car will shutdown with the doors open and will not answer any calls To reset this error condition put the car on Inspection operation AR DOOR IS LOCKED BUT NOT FULLY CLOSED Description Rear Doors Open DCLR 1 and Locked DLK 1 Indicates a problem with
232. ame plate rated voltage a PM No load phase to phase back EMF rms 1 PM 1 eS voltage at LF 11 32000V krpm LF 15 Power factor PM not applicable 1 0 50 1 00 0 90 0 90 LF 16 Field weakening speed PM not applicable rpm 0 0 6000 0 E Rated motor torque IM read only auto calc _ IM calc IM x ERIL PM enter motor name plate torque bit Te 10080 PM 18 PM LF 18 Motor stator resistance IM not applicable ohm 0 0 49 999 49 999 PM only Motor resistance value 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX L QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 47 Digital Operator Parameter Description Unit Setting Range root ene Display Motor leakage inductance PM only motor Bele winding ee inductance from Mig data sheet PRT EARD LOY LF 20 Contract speed fpm 0 1600 0 LF 21 Traction sheave diameter measured value inch 7 00 80 00 24 00 x LF 22 Gear reduction ratio 1 1 00 99 99 30 00 x LF 23 Roping ratio 1 1 8 1 LF 24 Load weight Ibs 0 30000 0 LF 25 Estimated gear ratio Read only auto calc 01 1 00 99 99 KK 0 LF 26 Encoder feedback displays feedback type KKK LF 27 Encoder pulse number ppr 256 16384 1024 x Reverse encoder 0 nothing reversed 1 encoder A lt gt B swapped LF 28 l2 motor rotation Beet i ae g r 3 motor rotation revers
233. and make adjustments if necessary The response of the car can be monitored using an oscilloscope by measuring the voltage on the drive terminals X2 18 and X2 19 with respect to X2 13 These signals are 10V and 0 10 V respectively Terminal X2 18 is assigned to the drive input speed reference and terminal X2 19 is assigned to the drive output frequency g The car should be running well now except possibly for the final stop Since the speed reference goes to zero when the car stops the VFAC Drive Unit will cause the machine to stop electrically Enough delay in the setting of the brake BDD will have to be provided to allow the sheave to stop turning before setting the brake firmly on the sheave Q NOTE During High speed if the speed change over can be felt in the car increase parameter LF 33 in steps of 100 This will help in achieving a smoother transition When the elevator slows down to leveling speed and travels to door zone the speed command will drop to zero before the brake drops This is adjustable using the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot The idea is to hold the brake up long enough to allow the motor to be stopped electrically and then drop the brake immediately the instant the motor has stopped If there is too long of a delay before dropping the brake the control system will release its control of the motor and the motor will drift briefly in the direction of the load before the brake is forced to drop by the PT relay
234. and verify with EOD If the call does not register under these conditions replace the call board If the call circuit works with field wires removed before connecting wires jumper the wire s to ground or terminal 1 and press the call pushbutton If a fuse blows there is a field wiring problem If connecting the call wires causes a problem the call board may be damaged Call remains latched Remove the associated resistor fuse If call cancels replace the bad resistor fuse even though the car arrives at that landing TROUBLESHOOTING THE CALL INDICATORS NOTE Before troubleshooting the call indicators ensure that the call circuit is working correctly the field wires are connected and the resistor fuses are plugged in If the board is arranged for neon or LED indicators HC Cl O N board the board indicators are not affected by the fixture bulbs When working correctly a call indicator glows brightly when a call is registered and not at all when a call is not registered Problem Recommended steps to resolve the problem No call is registered yet the Call Incandescent bulb in the fixture for the call is burned out or missing Replace the Indicator on the HC CI O board is dimly bulb lit Call indicator glows bright whether or not Bad triac or triac driver transistor Check triac with power OFF and field wire there is a call registered removed Failed triac usually measures a short circuit from the metal back collector to te
235. ar in 100 or 200 pound increments all the way up to the rated load Observe the VFAC Drive Unit current on its display and check to see if there is an OC Over Current error indication as the car accelerates to full speed If so this indicates that the VFAC unit is being pushed close to its limits and may require one or more of the following actions 1 The requested acceleration rate may be excessive Try reducing the acceleration rate by increasing parameter C1 01 The more time spent in acceleration the lower the current demand 2 A more gradual transition from acceleration to high speed may be made by increasing drive parameter P1 17 for contact speed and P1 13 for intermediate speed 3 For Open loop applications Adjust parameter C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain between 1 0 2 0 The maximum setting for this parameter is 2 5 Display the output current on the drive key pad in the Operation mode by pressing the up arrow twice The drive keypad will display OUTPUT CURRENT U1 03 0 0A The F7 drive can provide 150 of its full load rated current for 1 minute Run the car and monitor the current on the drive keypad If the motor is stalling but does not trip on OC faults and if the value of the output current is more than or close to the motor rated current but less than the maximum drive output current check the motor winding configuration Most elevator motors are connected in Y configuration But sometimes the DELTA configuration is use
236. ard X2A 15 Reverse X8A 11 5 Inspection speed The voltage should read 18VDC when the respective input is ON If all the above are true follow the drawings and verify the voltage at various points in the DRO coil circuit 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 51 FIGURE 6 37 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart Car does not move Car does not move Series M TORQMAX Put the car on Inspection operation and pick UP or DN direction No Refer to flow chart PM contactor does not pick Verify inspection speed parameter LF 43 Normal setting is 10 of contract speed Pick UP or DN direction No Refer to flow chart Brake Does not Pick Main contactor PM picks Yes DRO and BK turn ON Yes tries to move Change Encoder channel parameter LF 28 from its original value see TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference Turn OFF the power and interchange two of the motor leads Direction of ravel is correct Yes The car should move in the correct direction LF 88 commanded motor speed in RPM and LF 89 actual motor speed in RPM should match If they are not matching verify the Encoder PPR To verify the motor current display drive parameter LF 93 Run the car on Inspection The current reading should be close to 50 of the motor FLA when the Inspection speed is 10 of the rated speed 6 52 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 38 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowcha
237. ariable delay in the application of the speed signal has been provided by adjusting trimpot SPD Speed Pick Delay Trimpot SPD must be adjusted to let the brake just clear the brake drum before attempting to accelerate the car Do this with an empty car The correct setting will be obvious by watching the Drive sheave This was adjusted previously however check trimpot SPD again and make adjustments if necessary The response of the car can be monitored using an oscilloscope by measuring the voltage on the drive terminals 33 and 35 with respect to 34 These signals are 0 10 and 0 8 volts respectively Terminal 33 is programmed for the drive input speed reference and terminal 35 is programmed for the drive output frequency g The car should be running well now except possibly for the final stop Since the speed reference goes to zero when the car stops the VFAC Drive Unit will cause the machine to stop electrically Enough delay in the setting of the brake BDD will have to be provided to allow the sheave to stop turning before setting the brake firmly on the brake drum When the elevator slows down to leveling speed and travels to door zone the speed command will drop to zero before the brake drops This is adjustable by the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot The idea is to hold the brake up long enough to allow the motor to be stopped electrically and then drop the brake immediately the instant the motor has stopped If there is too long of
238. askawa F7 0 000 eee 4 52 4 13 Final Elevator Inspection Procedure Yaskawa F7 000e ee eee 4 54 4 13 1 Inspection Leveling over Speed Test Yaskawa F7 4 54 4 13 2 Terminal Slowdown Limit Switches Yaskawa F7 4 54 4 13 3 Emergency Terminal Limit Switch Monitor Yaskawa F7 4 55 4 13 4 Contract Speed Buffer Test Yaskawa F7 200 0c eee eee 4 55 4 13 5 Governor and Car Safety Tests Yaskawa F7 0000005 4 56 4 13 6 Phase Loss Detection Tests Yaskawa F7 000 eee eee 4 58 4 14 Explanation of TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters and S Curves 4 59 4 14 1 Setting the Speed Levels 0 00 0 es 4 59 4 14 2 Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Rates 4 60 4 14 3 Adjusting the Jerk Parameters 000 c eee eee 4 60 4 15 Final Adjustments TORQMAX F5 0 00 ee 4 61 4 15 1 Final Preparation for Running on Automatic Operation TORQMAX F5 4 61 4 15 2 Switching to Automatic Operation TORQMAX F5 4 62 4 15 3 Brake Adjustment for 125 Load TORQMAX F5 4 62 4 15 4 Bringing the Car up to High Speed TORQMAX F5 4 62 4 15 5 Load Testing TORQMAX F5 0000 eee 4 65 4 16 Final Elevator Inspection Procedure TORQMAX F5 000000 ee 4 67 4 16 1 Inspection Leveling over Speed Test TORQMAX F5 4 67 4 16 2 Terminal Slowdown Limit Sw
239. at least 1 4 of an inch of the sensor extending beyond the edge of the bracket Take care not to over tighten the nuts on the sensor Position the face of the sensor so there is 1 32 to 1 16 79 to 1 6 mm clearance from the magnets To wire the sensor note there may be one of two sensors supplied a MICROSWITCH SR3G A1 or 450FY12 1 The wiring is similar except for the lead wire color code See Figure 2 7 for the wiring detail for both sensors 2 8 INSTALLATION 42 02 2P21 Q NOTE A shielded 2 conductor cable must be used for the wiring from the sensor to the controller This cable must be placed in a separate grounded conduit FIGURE 2 7 Speed Sensor Wiring Detail SENSOR AREA IN DASHED BOX IS IN MCE S CONTROLLER CABINET aes WHITE SOFY12 1 BLACK OR GREEN SR3G A1 MC ACFA HC ACI ae SHIELD J S_wHITE BLACK On CLEAR Se on BLACK j 193 ae SHIELD SN Ol ai eo we EYA SHIELDED PAIR CABLE a RUN IN CONDUIT TO CONTROLLER FIELD WIRING MAY HAVE DIFFERENT COLORS KY TYPICAL EXAMPLE IS SHOWN WHITE BLACK SHIELD S22 ANININ 2 g JNN I NOTE SHIELD IS COVERED WITH BLACK HEATSHRINK TUBING D N 3487 RO 2 2 4 INSTALLING THE BRAKE SWITCH All controllers have been set up with a BPS input that is fed directly by a Brake Contact or a Micro s
240. at the MG Shutdown Operation Option is set correctly If MG Shutdown is not required set this option to NO and ensure that the MGS Input is not programmed If it is required set this option to the floor that the car should return to on MG Shutdown and program the MGS Input SYNCHRONIZATION OPERATION Hydro only Description The SYNCI input has been activated Troubleshooting Ensure that the synchronization function is required This function is used on PHC controllers used on jobs with two jacks or telescopic jacks e Ifthe SYNCI Input option is programmed and has been activated the SYNC function will be performed as soon as all demand is serviced Ensure that the circuit connected to SYNCI input is not activating the input inappropriately System Out of Service not scrolled Event Calendar only System Out of Service Description The supervisor has lost communication with the cars or the hall call common bus 2H has failed TIME OUT OF SERVICE Time Out of Service Description The T O S timer has expired Troubleshooting See Section 5 4 5 6 VALVE LIMIT TIMER ANTI STALL ELAPSED Hydro only Valve Limit Timer Description Indicates a problem with the valve or valve solenoids Troubleshooting Inspect the valves amp valve solenoids and associated wiring VISCOSITY CONTROL FUNCTION Hyaro only Description The Viscosity Control Input VCI is ON The computer is periodically running the motor to warm the
241. at the PHE signal is ON If the digit is 0 as shown the computer thinks that the PHE signal is OFF This information can be used to find the source of the problem The diagnostic display will show that the PHE input is ON when an obstruction is present interrupting the photo eye beam If this is the case checking the voltage present on the PHE terminal will show if the problem is inside or outside the controller TABLE 5 4 Alphabetized Flags Variables and Their Locations FLAG Definition Addr Position FLAG Definition Addr Position ALV Other car alive output 31 5 GED Gong enable down output 20 1 API Alternate Parking Input 33 8 GEDR ___ Gong enable down output rear 10 1 AUTO _ Emergency power auto output 31 3 GEU Gong enable up output 20 2 BFD Bottom floor demand flag 2E 5 GEUR Gong enable up output rear 10 2 CC Car call flag 21 5 GHT Gong hold timer flag 22 4 CCA Car call above flag 2A 1 GHTR ___ Gong hold timer flag rear 12 4 CCB Car call below flag 2A 5 GTDE Gong timer down enable 26 2 CCC Car call cancel input 38 6 GTUE Gong timer up enable 26 1 CCD Car call disconnect flag 2C 3 H High speed output 2B 4 CCH Car call hold 26 5 HCDX __ Hall call disconnect flag 2C 4 CCR Car call flag rear 11 5 HCR Hall call reject flag 2C 5 Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 15
242. at the drive receives the direction enable and inspection speed command signals from the HC ACI board The drive key pad should display the commanded fpm parameter D1 17 value and the DRIVE and FWD or REV indicator should turn ON when direction is picked on Inspection If this is not true then check the following a Verify that the CNP RDY relays are picked when the direction is not picked If the RDY relay is not picked then check for a fault displayed on the drive keypad If there is no fault in the AC drive unit then check the wiring for the RDY circuit Relays PT1 PT2 UA or DA on the HC ACI board should pick when the direction relays are picked If the relays are not picking check for 36VAC between terminals XC1 XC2 and 15 and 15 on the HC ACI board If there is no voltage check the fuse on the primary side of the 30 VA transformer shown in drawing 3 of the job prints Also check the wiring from the secondary of the same transformer to terminal XC1 XC2 on the HC ACI board b Check for the correct direction enable signal by measuring the DC voltage between terminals COM and UP or DN on the HC ACI board In the down direction the voltage between COM and DN should be zero In the up direction the voltage between COM and UP should be zero The floating voltage between these points is approximately 15VDC when the direction relays are not picked The voltage between the COM and INS terminals should be zero when direction relays are picked
243. at the same floor If a second parking floor is not needed choose NONE when the Secondary Park Floor option message is on the display Then the first free car will go to the first parking floor but the second car will stay at the last call answered 5 4 2 10 LOBBY FLOOR Any landing can be selected to be the Lobby Floor When the car answers either a hall or car call at this floor the doors will stay open until the Lobby Door Timer elapses the Lobby Door Timer is adjustable see Section 5 4 5 4 NOTE The Lobby Floor is also used for CTL input 5 4 2 11 CAR IDENTIFIER This option is for duplex systems only Its purpose is to specify which controller is assigned to car A and which controller is assigned to car B This is primarily used for controllers that use a peripheral device such as a CRT 5 4 2 12 NUMBER OF IOX BOARDS Program the number of HC IOX boards installed in the controller valid range is 0 to 4 5 4 2 13 NUMBER OF 140 BOARDS Program the number of HC I40 boards installed in the controller valid range is 0 to 3 5 4 2 14 NUMBER OF AIOX BOARDS Program the number of HC AIOX boards installed in the controller valid range is 0 or 1 FIRE SERVICE MENU OPTIONS 5 4 3 1 FIRE SERVICE OPERATION If Fire Service operation is not required then this option should be set to NO Otherwise if set to YES the options below will appear on the LCD display 5 4 3 2 FIRE PHASE 1 MAIN FLOOR Any landing can be selected to
244. ata digits at different addresses GETTING INTO EXTERNAL MEMORY MODE FUNCTION SWITCHES External Memory mode is initiated by placing the F2 switch F8 F7F6FS F4 F3 F2F1 in the up position see Figure 5 1 The following is a description of the LCD display format and the function of the N S and pushbuttons during External Memory mode External Memory mode FUNCTION OF N PUSHBUTTON The N pushbutton see Figure 5 1 allows for the advancement of the computer memory address which is displayed on the second line of the LCD display For example for this display pressing the N pushbutton once hold it for 1 2 seconds will cause the 1 in the address 1234 to begin blinking By continuing to press the N pushbutton the 2 in the address 1234 will begin to blink The cycle will continue while the N pushbutton is being pressed Once the digit needed to be changed is blinking the address can then be modified The data 8 digits that correspond to the external memory address is displayed to the right of the address This data display will change as the memory address changes FUNCTION OF S PUSHBUTTON The S pushbutton see Figure 5 1 ends the ability to change the address by stopping the digit from blinking If the S pushbutton is not pressed the selected digit will stop blinking automatically after 20 seconds FUNCTION OF PUSHBUTTON The pushbutton see Figure 5 1 modifies the digit of the computer memory address selected by
245. ation Rate and LF 50 Acceleration Jerk Increase the drive gains by increase parameters LF 31 and LF 32 Turn OFF the power and wait for 5 minutes so the DC bus voltage is not present in the dynamic braking circuit Using a voltmeter verify that no voltage is present Then verify the value of the dynamic braking resistor with the job prints and check for any loose connection 6 7 4 DRIVE TRIPS E OP OR THE CAR OVERSHOOTS ON DECELERATION If the drive trips on E OP during deceleration or overshoots the floors then check the following 1 Verify that all the items described in Section 6 8 3 and the counter weight are set properly 2 Verify that the High Level speed Level speed and Intermediate speed if required are set as described in Sections 4 8 1 and 4 9 4 c 3 Increase the deceleration parameter LF 53 and verify that the High Level and Level speeds are adjusted to provide a smooth transition from high speed to leveling speed If the value of parameter LF 52 is too high it can cause the car to overshoot and relevel If all the items above are set properly and the car still overshoots consult the Drive manual If the problem still exists then increase the slow down distance on a couple of floors so that you can run the car between these floors at high speed and stop the car properly 6 7 5 OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR AT CONTRACT SPEED The HPV 900 series drive is used for Flux Vector applications If there are OSCILLAT
246. atisfactorily soread apart the LU and LD sensors or switches in the landing system to provide enough Dead Zone Adjust the SPD Speed Pick Delay trimpot by first turning it far enough clockwise so that the empty car rolls back in the direction of the counterweight if it can Then adjust SPD so that the brake is fully picked just as the motor first moves The goal is to delay long enough to avoid moving the motor before the brake is fully lifted but not so long as to allow the car to roll back Run the car again and verify that the car will start accelerate decelerate and run at High Level and Level speeds into the floor and stop Place calls for all of the landings Verify that all of the calls work Verify the operation and placement of all vanes or magnets and vane or magnet switches and verify that the car steps the Position Indicators correctly The slowdown distance for the elevator is measured from the point where the STU sensor or STD sensor if going down is activated by a metal vane or magnetic strip to the position where the car is stopped at the floor with the DZ sensor centered on the leveling target with LU or LD sensors not engaged This slowdown distance was chosen to give a reasonable deceleration rate Continue to make two floor runs and slowly increase High speed until Contract Speed is reached It may be necessary to adjust the Deceleration rate A2 Decel Rate 0 and Deceleration Jerk A2 Decel Jerk In 0 A2 Decel Jer
247. ator Parameter Description Unit setting Drive i MCE Display Range Defaults Set O2 Key Selections O02 01 Local Remote Key Local Remote Key 0 1 0 B 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled O2 02 Oper Stop Key Stop key during external terminal operation 0 1 1 B 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled O2 03 User Default User MCE defined default value settings z 0 2 0 B 1 ae 0 Nochange 1 Setdefaults 2 Clear all ree P Elevator Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows P1 S Curve Control REFER SECTION 4 2 3 S CURVE ADJUSTMENTS FOR MORE DETAILS P1 01 Scrv Change P1 Frequency reference for S curve 1 selection Hz 0 400 4 0 B 4 0 P1 02 Scrv Change P2 Frequency reference for S curve 2 selection Hz 0 400 10 5 B 10 5 P1 03 Scrv Change P3 Frequency reference for S curve 3 selecting Hz 0 400 48 0 B 48 0 P1 04 Scrv Acc Start 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 1 2 P1 05 Scrv Acc End 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P1 06 S CrvDec Start 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P1 07 S Crv Dec End 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 1 10 B x P1 08 S Crv Acc Start 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P1 09 S Crv Acc End 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P1 10 S Crv Dec Start 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 1 5 B x P1 11 S Crv Dec End2__ S Curve 2 at the End of Decelerat
248. ault on the drive keypad If a fault is indicated refer to the Drive Manual or Section 6 5 for G5 GPD515 Drive Section 6 6 for HPV 900 Drive Section 6 7 for TORQMAX Drive or Section 6 8 Yaskawa F7 Drive in this manual The Drive Faults section of the Drive Manual provides a list of faults and recommended corrective action f Turn OFF the power and replace fuse F4 If door fuses are provided DO NOT replace them at this time g Before moving the car check for obstructions or hazards Take whatever steps are necessary to make sure that there is sufficient brake tension to stop the car during any situation that may be encountered h Check the pit switch buffer switches if present car and car top stop switches and any other safety switches to make sure that they are ON i If a field wire is connected to terminal 59 on the HC RB4 VFAC board temporarily remove the wire label and insulate it This will disable the Car Top Inspection switch Close the car door Leave the hall doors closed and lock the doors that are accessible to the public j Install a temporary jumper between terminals 18 and 59 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Turn ON the power and verify that relay RPI is picked thereby placing the car on Inspection operation If the RPI relay is not picked check the connections in the Safety String k Install a temporary jumper wire between terminals 4 and 8 on the HC RB4 VFAC board to bypass the door locks f the car is o
249. ave these resistor fuses NOTE The resistor fuse is an assembly made up of a 10 Volt zener diode anda Q 22 ohm Watt resistor NOTE Number 3 below relates to only those jobs that have more than 4 floors and therefore have a HC CI O board included 3 If the job has more than four floors the controller will include at least one HC CI O E Call Input Output board If the problem terminal is on this board and the necessary voltage does not read on the terminal make sure the jumper plug or header is in position on the Call board The jumper plug socket is on the right hand side of the Call board near the call indicators If a Call board is replaced this jumper plug must always be transferred to the new board and stay in the same position If this plug is not installed any calls on the new board may become registered if the field wiring is not connected so make sure the jumper plug is in place see Figure 6 3 4 For both the HC PCI O board and the HC Cl O E board s make sure that the correct voltage is coming into the terminals on the board marked PS1 PS2 and PS3 Note that there may be power on all three of these terminals only two or at least one depending on the type of calls on the board 5 Once the proper voltage is on the call terminal in question use External Memory mode and Table 5 6 to examine the call in the computer memory The call should not be ON If it is reset the computer for that car Let the car find itself or
250. ay Range Drive MCE Defaults Set P1 15 S Crv Dec End3_ S Curve 3 at the End of Deceleration 0 01 2 5 o9 eal P1 16 S Crv Ace Start 4_ S Curve 4 atthe Start of Acceleration Sec 001 25 o2 e 02 P1 t7 S Crv Acc End 4 S Curve 4 atthe End of Acceleration Sec 01 25 12 e Pi t9 S Crv Dec Stan 4 S Curve 4 atthe Start of Deceleration Sec 00r 26 05 e P1 19 8 Crv Dec End 4 S Curve 4 atthe End of Deceleration Seo 00125 02 B 02 The output response of the drive can be seen on an oscilloscope when the car is running by looking at the voltage between terminals 23 Output Frequency and 22 Com on the drive terminals The input can be seen at terminal 21 Speed Reference and 22 Com These two signals are 0 10VDC The High Level speed D1 03 Level speed L1 05 Deceleration time C1 02 and S curve parameters P1 11 P1 10 P1 06 P1 07 should be adjusted for correct approach to the floor The Acceleration time C1 01 and the S curve parameters P1 04 and P1 17 can be adjusted for smooth starting and transition to High Speed This will be addressed in the final adjustment section 4 3 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS G5 GPD515 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections
251. be the Main Fire Return Floor for Fire Service 5 4 3 3 FIRE PHASE 1 ALT FLOOR Any landing can be selected to be the Alternate Fire Return Floor for Fire Service THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 4 5 4 3 4 FIRE SVCE CODE The Fire Service Operation will conform to the selected fire service code There are fourteen different codes to choose from 1 CHICAGO OLD 9 CITY OF HOUSTON 2 VET ADMIN Veterans Administration 10 AUSTRALIA 3 NYC RS 18 11 CITY OF DETROIT 4 ANSI A17 1 89 gt 12 MASSACHUSETTS 5 CALIF TITLE 8 13 ANSI A17 1 85 88 6 HAWAII 14 CITY OF DENVER 7 CSA B44 M90 15 CHICAGO 2001 8 34 PA CODE CH 7 16 ANSI A17 1 2000 5 4 3 5 FIRE PHASE I 2ND ALT FLOOR This option is only available when the FIR SVCE CODE option is set to City of Detroit Any landing can be selected to be the 2 alternate fire return floor 5 4 3 6 BYPASS STOP SW ON PHASE 1 This option was added to keep the stop switch from being bypassed on Fire Phase With this option set to NO the CSB output will not come on as the car is returning on Fire Phase I 5 4 3 7 HONEYWELL FIRE OPERATION YES NO This option is only available if the FIRE SVCE CODE option is set to AUSTRALIA see section 5 4 3 4 If this option is set to YES then the Australia fire code will conform to Honeywell s requirements If this option is set to NO then the controller will conform to standard Australia code 5 4 3 8 NEW YORK CITY FIRE
252. cabinet ground If it is not substantial ground loop current may flow between the negative probe and the power plug grounding pin which can ruin the oscilloscope i CAUTION Most oscilloscopes have a grounding pin on their power plug We g To achieve a proper start without rollback or snapping away from the floor a variable delay in the application of the speed signal has been provided by adjusting trimpot SPD Speed Pick Delay Trimpot SPD must be adjusted to let the brake just clear the brake drum before attempting to accelerate the car Do this with an empty car The correct setting will be obvious by watching the Drive sheave This was adjusted previously however check trimpot SPD again and make adjustments if necessary The response of the car can be monitored using an oscilloscope by measuring the voltage on the drive terminals FM and AM with respect to AC These signals are 0 10 volt Terminal FM is programmed for the drive input speed reference and terminal AM is programmed for the drive output frequency 4 50 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 For flux vector applications only To improve the car s response the following drive parameters can be adjusted as described below provided that the Motor data slip parameter E2 02 and Motor No load current E2 03 are set correctly 1 ASR Proportional Gain 1 C5 01 The ASR Proportional Gain 1 controls the response of the car to the speed command Increasing C5 01 res
253. can provide 150 of its full load rated current for 1 minute Run the car and monitor the current on the drive keypad If the motor is stalling but does not trip on OC faults and if the value of the output current is more than or close to the motor rated current but less than the maximum drive output current check the motor winding configuration Most elevator motors are connected in Y configuration But sometimes the DELTA 4 12 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 configuration is used in order to pick the full load The motor manufacturer s recommendations must be taken into consideration If the field survey data was inaccurate the Drive Unit may be undersized in relation to the motor Call MCE Technical Support so that the job data can be reviewed For Flux Vector Applications The Torque Compensation Gain parameter is not available for flux vector applications ASR Tuning C5 parameters as described in Section 4 3 4 g can be adjusted to pick the full load The motor may be underrated It may be possible to get excellent results if the speed is reduced slightly The elevator may be improperly counter weighted This possibility should be thoroughly investigated Make a copy of the Table in Appendix B Quick Reference for G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters and use the digital operator on the VFAC Drive Unit to look up and write down every parameter value as programmed in the unit Use this as a reference when calling MCE to review
254. car will be ready to accept a call for any floor and after the doors are closed will proceed nonstop to that floor Returning the key switch to the normal position will restore the car to normal service Either car selected to respond to a hospital emergency call will be removed from automatic service and will accept no additional calls emergency or otherwise until it completes the initial hospital emergency function If both cars are out of service and unable to answer an emergency call the hospital emergency call registered light will not illuminate Four outputs are available on the first HC Cl O E board used for the hospital emergency service calls Hospital Emergency Operation HEO will flash once the car has been selected to respond to a hospital emergency call and will remain flashing until the in car hospital switch is returned to normal or the time interval that the car must wait for the in car switch to be turned ON expires Hospital Emergency Warning Indicator HWI will remain steadily ON for a car on Independent Service when the hospital call is registered Hospital Emergency Select HSEL will remain steadily ON indicating that the car has been selected to answer a hospital call until the in car hospital switch is turned ONor the time interval expires Hospital Emergency Phase 2 HOSPH2 will remain ON indicating that the car has arrived at the floor where the hospital call was registered until the in car hospital switch is returned
255. cation of the speed command with the picking of the brake so that the car does not move under the brake or rollback at the start g At this time the adjustment of the BDD trimpot on the HC ACI board is also necessary Otherwise the car may be stopping under the brake causing a lot of current to be applied to the motor that might cause arcing on the main contactor during the stop Q NOTE If an ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed problem is detected by the HC ACI board the ILO indicator will turn ON and the FLT relay will pick which will drop the RDY relay and shut down the controller Reset the fault by pressing the Fault reset button on the HC ACI board and adjust the ILO trimpot for the proper Inspection Leveling Overspeed trip threshold h Test the safety by hand to make sure that it will hold the car i To make sure that the Car Top Inspection switch is working properly turn OFF the main disconnect remove the jumper between terminals 18 and 59 from step 3 3 1 j and reinstall the wire into terminal 59 Turn ON the main disconnect Make sure that there is 115VAC on terminal 59 with respect to terminal 1 when the car top inspection switch is inthe NORMAL position There should be no power on terminal 59 when the car top inspection switch is in the INSP position j Stop the car so that the car top is accessible from the top hall door Remove jumpers from the safety circuit Run the car from the car top Inspection station Verify
256. ck at all an immediate brake pick failure will be generated upon completion of the run Building Security Input This input is used to activate MCE Security when the Master Software Key in the Extra Features Menu is set to ENABLED Car Calls Cancel Input Activation of this input will unconditionally cancel car calls Because this input has no logical qualification in the software it is highly suggested that necessary qualification be done in external circuitry e g disable the signal feeding this input when on fire phase Il Contactor Proof Input This input is used for redundancy checking It monitors the main power contactors If any of these relays fail to open in the intended manner the CFLT relay will pick dropping the safety relays Car to floor Input This input is used to return the car to a previously selected floor The return floor is selected using the parameter CAR TO FLOOR RETURN FLOOR in the EXTRA FEATURES MENU When activated this input will cause the car to immediately become non responsive to hall calls and will prevent the registration of new car calls The car will be allowed to answer all car calls registered prior to activation of the CTF input Once all car calls have been answered the car will travel to the return floor perform a door operation and will be removed from service Car to Lobby Input When activated this input will cause the car to immediately become non responsive to hall calls and will preve
257. ck to OFF Note On software version 5 19 0002 or later the data is not cleared on power up or reset The data is overwritten each time a new MLT occurs However the data may be cleared and the MLT counter reset by placing the F1 F2 F7 and F8 switches in the up position On the MC PCA board place the F2 switch up ON to select External Memory All other switches should be down OFF The LCD display shows the default address DA 0100 address 0100H followed by the eight memory bits at that location Use the DATA TRAP MEMORY CHART to determine the addresses where the saved data is stored The section in the Controller Installation Manual titted EXTERNAL MEMORY MODE provides a complete description of how to use the External Memory Mode Briefly use the N pushbutton to select the digit to be changed digit blinks on and off Press or to change the digit Record the data displayed on the LCD for all rows shown on the chart It helps if you have a few photocopies of the chart Simply mark the positions in the chart that are shown as a 1 on the LCD display Addresses 0480H thru 0493H contain car status flags Address 0494H contains the car s position indicator value at the instant the MLT or VLT condition occurred and address 0495H contains the MLT counter ver 5 19 0002 or later Only the labeled positions are important to mark Once all of the addresses have been marked you may reset the computer to clear the recorded memory area
258. code was entered the following screen appears Pressing the N pushbutton will return the display to Screen 1 Screen 4 The car may now be run on Normal operation mode ACTIVATING THE PASSCODE With Screen 1 displayed press the S pushbutton If Passcode Request Operation is not activated the following display appears Screen 5 Pressing the S pushbutton will toggle the display from NO to YES Pressing the N pushbutton while NO is displayed will return the display back to the Screen 1 Pressing the N pushbutton while YES is displayed will activate the Passcode Request Operation and return the display back to Screen 1 With Passcode Request Operation activated the passcode must be entered in order to run the car on any mode of operation other than Inspection THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 6 3 LOAD WEIGHER THRESHOLDS The load weigher isolated platform or crosshead deflection provides a signal that corresponds to the perceived load in the car This signal is brought to the control system where it is conditioned sampled and digitized and the value is used to calculate the actual load inside the elevator This load value is then used for logical dispatching operations The load thresholds are user programmable and determine when each of these logical operations should be performed LIGHT LOAD WEIGHER LLW This value is used to define the load at which a limited number of car calls is to be reg
259. control system Using hand held communication devices in close proximity to the computers may also cause interference Power line fluctuation should not be greater than 10 RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT For proper installation use the following tools and test equipment A digital multimeter Fluke series 75 76 77 or equivalent An oscilloscope preferably storage type or a strip chart recorder A hand held tachometer A clamp on AC ammeter A DC loop ammeter Hand held radios A telephone Test weights Assorted soldering tools rosin flux solder electronic side cutters and long nose pliers a flashlight and the MCE screwdriver provided with controller DIGITAL MULTIMETER AMP PROBE MEGOHMETER 2 2 INSTALLATION 42 02 2P21 2 0 4 WIRING PRINTS 42 02 2P21 Become familiar with the following information as well as the wiring prints provided with this control system DRAWING NUMBER FORMAT Each print has a drawing number indicated in the title block The drawing number is comprised of the job number car number and page number see examples In this manual the drawings will often be referred to by the last digit of the drawing number page number The following is the drawing number format currently in use Car Number Job Number _ 2001012345 2 1 Page Number Car Number G Group Controller Page Number D Drive page an X after the page numbe
260. cording to the hoistway and car wiring prints If the car controller is part of a duplex system a separate conduit or wiring trough must be provided for the high speed serial link between the MC PCA computers in each controller cabinet The main AC power supply wiring size must be determined by the electrical contractor Proper motor branch circuit protection must be provided according to applicable electrical code by using a fused disconnect switch or a circuit breaker for each elevator Each disconnect or breaker must be clearly labeled with the elevator number INSTALLATION 2 5 g If the car is part of a duplex system there are a number of details relating to the wiring of the interconnects between the individual cars They are as follows 1 The wiring details for the high speed communication link are fully detailed in the drawing titled Instructions for Connection of High Speed Communication Cables in the job prints Follow these instructions exactly Again note the requirement for routing the high speed interconnect cables through a separate conduit or wiring trough 2 If applicable also wire according to the drawing titled Duplex Interconnects to Individual Car Cabinets in the job prints Make sure to ground all of the cabinets according to Section 2 2 1 2 2 GENERAL WIRING GUIDELINES Basic wiring practices and grounding requirements are discussed in this section 2 2 1 GROUND WIRING To obtain proper ground
261. ctions Local Remote Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Stop key during external terminal operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled User Defaults User MCE defined default value settings see Note 1 0 No change 1 Set defaults 2 Clear all See Section 4 11 3 S Curve Control Adjustable Parameters are shaded Jerk Change P1 Frequency reference for S curve 1 selection 0 400 Jerk Change P2 Frequency reference for S curve 2 selection 0 400 Jerk Change P3 Frequency reference for S curve 3 selecting 0 400 Accel Jerk In 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk In 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk Out2 S Curve 2 at the End of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk Out3 S Curve 3 at the End of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel Jerk Out 3 IS Curve 8 at the End of Deceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Accel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Acceleration 0 01 30 00 Decel
262. ctors PM Main and BR Brake pick when the direction relays U1 and U2 or D1 and D2 are picked If PM and BR do not pick check the related circuit as shown in the controller drawings Check for any fault that is displayed on the drive keypad before and after picking the direction on Inspection When the direction is picked on Inspection relays PT1 and PT2 on the HC ACI board should be picked If these relays are not picked check for 120VAC on terminals 8 10 and 12 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board If there is no voltage on these terminals refer to the controller drawings to find the problem Note that relays CNP and RDY should also be picked 6 14 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 2 Verify that the drive receives the direction enable and inspection speed command signals from the HC ACI board The drive key pad should display the commanded Hz Parameter D1 09 value and the DRIVE and FWD or REV indicator should turn ON when direction is picked on Inspection If this is not true then check the following a Verify that the CNP RDY relays are picked when the direction is not picked If the RDY relay is not picked then check for a fault displayed on the drive keypad If there is no fault in the AC drive unit then check the wiring for the RDY circuit Relays PT1 PT2 UA or DA on the HC ACI board should pick when the direction relays are picked If the relays are not picking check for 36VAC between terminals XC1 XC2 and 15 and 15 on the
263. d 2 00000 2 12 2 3 7 Door Position Monitor Switch If Used 2 00 000 ee eee 2 13 SECTION 3 START UP 3 0 General Information 2 222255 s 4eceh5 ea de eee ee hac eee ea dad ee ee dees 3 1 3 1 Ground GHGGK Sa Secsea ts ahs tk tele a a deca De tele a el ie enacts eta te alee a ae del 3 1 3 2 Before Applying Power kc che cet Poneto tee A ph rie aieg Oe geht hals sg areatty 3 2 3 3 Applying Power Preparing to Move the Car on Inspection 3 2 3 3 1 initial PGWeEUp s 2d c cau os eeak Gee ted eels s oe ie e E tedeue pes 3 3 3 3 2 Drive Interface Board Details 0 0 00 eee 3 4 3 4 Inspection Operation G5 GPD515 Drive 2 eee 3 5 3 4 1 Drive Parameter Settings 00 0 0 ee 3 5 3 4 2 Verifying the Critical G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters 3 6 3 4 3 Moving the Car on Inspection Operation G5 GPD515 3 9 3 5 Inspection Operation MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 0005 3 12 3 5 1 Drive Parameter Settings 0 0 eee 3 12 3 5 2 Verifying the Critical MagneTek HPV 900 Drive Parameters 3 12 3 5 3 Moving the Car on Inspection Operation HPV 900 3 13 3 6 Inspection Operation TORQMAX F4 Drive 00000 eee 3 15 3 6 1 Drive Parameter Settings au ow esheetn ee kere ae owe celite we me wt 3 15 3 6 2 Verifying the Critical TORQMAX F4 Drive Parameters 3 16 3 6 3 Moving the Car on Inspectio
264. d Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No Automatic Floor Stop Option No Floor for Car to Stop at No Floor for Car to Stop at CC Cancel w Dir Reversal _ Yes ____No Yes No Cancel Car Calls Behind Car _ _ Yes __ No Yes No CE Electronics Interface Yes No Yes No Massachusetts EMS Service No EMS Service Floor No EMS Service Floor __ Master Software Key _ Activated ___ Deactivated ___ Enabled _ Activated ____ Deactivated ___ Enabled PI Turned off if No Demand Yes __ No Yes No Hospital Emergency Operation _ _ Yes __ No Yes No Car A Set Hospital Calls Car A Yes No Yes No Hospital Calls Frnt Fir Car A 1234567891011 12131415 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Hospital Calls Rear Fir Car A 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Hospital Emergency Operation Yes No Yes No Car B Set Hospital Calls Car B Yes No Yes No Hospital Calls Frnt Flr Car B 1234567891011 12131415 1617 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1234567891011 121314151617 1819 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Hospital Calls Rear Fir Car B 1234567891011 1213 141516 17 1819 20 21 2
265. d 15 months and determined by manufacturer to be defective The giving of or failure to give any advice or recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon the manufacturer This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and the exclusive liability of the manufacturer AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PURPOSE SOLD DESCRIPTION QUALITY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER In no event will the manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in performance of this warranty Products that are not manufactured by MCE such as drives CRT s modems printers etc are not covered under the above warranty terms MCE however extends the same warranty terms that the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product refer to the warranty terms for such products in their respective manual 42 02 2P21 TABLE OF CONTENTS xiii SECTION 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 0 GENERAL INFORMATION MCE s VFMC 1000 PTC Programmable Traction Controller for AC Elevators is designed to exhibit the characteristics listed below in a traction elevator installation The PTC controller has been designed to save time in installation and troubleshooting but it is still very important that the field personnel who work with this equipment familiarize themselves with this manual before a
266. d in order to pick the full load The motor manufacturer s recommendations must be taken into consideration If the field survey data was inaccurate the Drive Unit may be undersized in relation to the motor Call MCE Technical Support so that the job data can be reviewed For Flux Vector Applications The Torque Compensation Gain parameter is not available for flux vector applications ASR Tuning C5 parameters as described in Section 4 12 4 g can be adjusted to pick the full load 4 The motor may be underrated It may be possible to get excellent results if the speed is reduced slightly FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 b The elevator may be improperly counter weighted This possibility should be thoroughly investigated Make a copy of the Table in Appendix J Quick Reference for Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters and use the digital operator on the VFAC Drive Unit to look up and write down every parameter value as programmed in the unit Use this as a reference when calling MCE to review the data If there is a full load in the car and there is trouble slowing in the down direction or if the VFAC Drive Unit is tripping off and there is an OV over voltage fault displayed it may mean that there is a problem with the regeneration braking resistors and or the braking unit if supplied separately Check for DC bus voltage There are two methods to check the DC bus voltage as described below 1 Through the drive display
267. d make sure the orientation of the HC IPLS board is correct Use the chassis ground and the LEDs shown in the figure below for an orientation reference FIGURE H 1 LS QUTE Enclosure Assembly ENCLOSURE NOTE CHASSIS ORIENTATION GROUND LUG SHOULD BE ON THIS SIDE 8 SPLIT WASHER 8 32 X 1 Ta PAN HEAD SCREW L LEDs Hinged Standoffs l 8 32 X he ROUND HEAD 8 SCREW D N 1207 R 2 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX H LS QUTE LANDING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS A 31 FIGURE H 2 LS QUTE Wiring Diagram 1 8 DIA X 3 8 LONG HEATSHRINK PULL 1 WIRE FROM EACH DZ SENSOR WIRE PAIR FROM THE BUNDLE STRIP BACK INSULATION BY 1 4 AND TWIST THE WIRES TOGETHER SOLDER THE WIRES AND INSTALL HEATSHRINK HEAT TO SHRINK a INSTALL 4 TIE WRAPS ONE EVERY 2 1 2 NUT DZX is between N DZ1 and DZ2 D N 1206 R 2 Hinged Standoffs SENSOR HCIPLS BOARD TERMINALS 2 One 2 inch jumper A 32 APPENDIX H LS QUTE LANDING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX POWERBACK R4 REGENERATIVE DRIVE 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 42 02 2P21 GENERAL The following information pertains to the POWERBACK R4 Regenerative Drive used with IMC AC R and VFMC Series M controllers REGENERATIVE DRIVE INTERFACE The following is an explanation of the POWERBACK R4 Regenerative Drive interface DRIVE INPUTS Drive Enable Terminal 8 This input enables the R4 drive and
268. d now move in the correct direction and draw the normal value of current 2 Ifthe car moves in the opposite direction and draws higher current than normal a Turn the controller power OFF Interchange two of the motor leads b Turn the controller power ON and check the direction and current If the car moves in correct direction but still draws higher than normal current go to step 3 3 Ifthe car moves in the correct direction and draws higher current than the Motor FLA and the value of current keeps increasing stop the car and set parameter F1 05 CCW if its original setting is CW If the original setting is CCW then set F1 05 to CW The car should now move in the correct direction and draw the normal value of current NOTE If the elevator does not run on Inspection refer to Section 6 8 Troubleshooting the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive The inspection speed in FPM should show on the drive key pad whenever the car moves at inspection speed Adjust drive parameter D1 09 for a comfortable inspection speed For proper brake operation adjust the SPD trimpot on the HC ACI board to coordinate the application of the soeed command with the picking of the brake so that the car does not move under the brake or rollback at the start At this time the adjustment of the BDD trimpot on the HC ACI board is also necessary Otherwise the car may be stopping under the brake causing a lot of current to be applied to the motor that might cause arcing on th
269. d pressing the S and pushbuttons at the same will reset the option to NOT USED To return directly to the Menu Message while the values or options are displayed press the N and pushbuttons at the same time Going back to the previous example in which the Nudging option was on the display Pressing the S pushbutton to changes Nudging to NO 5 4 1 4 SAVING THE NEW VALUES Whenever options or values are changed in Program mode this information must be saved in the computer s memory When the changes are complete press the N pushbutton until the following message appears Press the Spushbutton to save the changes and the following display will appear Now press the N pushbutton and the Start Message will appear again When programming is complete move the F7 switch back to the down position 0 NOTE If the values have not been saved they will be lost when F7 is switched back to OFF down position Make sure to keep an account of saved changes on the record provided in Appendix A Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 21 5 4 1 5 RESTORING ORIGINAL VALUES When using Program mode if some values have been changed but then you decide to go back to the old values exit Program mode without saving the changes Move the F7 switch back to the down position and the original values will be restored 5 4 1 6 STEP BY STEP EXAMPLE Table 5 5 is a step by step example of using Program mode In this example the Fire
270. described in section 4 11 3 and Figure 4 9 For Flux Vector applications adjust the gain parameters as described in Section 4 12 4 g 3 Turn the power OFF and wait for at least 5 minutes so that the DC BUS voltage is not present in the dynamic braking circuit Verify this by using a multi meter to check the fuse the value of the resistance and to check for any open or loose connections in the dynamic braking circuit Verify the voltage jumper setting inside the braking unit If MCE s ACBU L50 or ACBU L75 braking unit is provided then the jumper must be set at a value 10 volts less than the incoming AC line voltage to the drive unit If Yaskawa s braking unit is provided then the voltage selector jumper should be set to the same value as that of incoming AC line voltage to the drive unit Q NOTE Refer to Section 4 12 5 b for more details regarding over voltage trip 6 8 4 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE OR THE CAR OVERSHOOTS ON DECELERATION If the drive trips on over voltage during deceleration or overshoots the floors then check the following 1 Verify that all the items described in Section 6 8 3 items 2 3 and the counter weight are set properly 2 Verify that parameters D1 03 High Level speed D1 05 Level speed and D1 07 Intermediate speed if required are set as described in section 4 11 1 Verify that parameters H1 04 H1 05 are set according to the drive parameter sheet 3 Adjust the deceleration rate Parameter C1 02 C1
271. display should have the normal display If there is any drive fault refer to the fault Section 3 7 of the MatneTek HPV 900 AC Drive Technical Manual 6 6 1 CAR DOES NOT MOVE ON INSPECTION NOTE The drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in the parameter sheet are different and are not available in the drive manual If a drive has been replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Pick or Picked relay energized e Drop or dropped relay de energized If the car does not move on INSPECTION check the following 1 Verify that contactors PM Main and BR Brake pick when the direction relays U1 and U2 or D1 and D2 are picked If PM and BR do not pick check the related circuit as shown in the controller drawings Check for any fault that is displayed on the drive keypad before and after picking the direction on Inspection When the direction is picked on Inspection relays PT1 and PT2 on the HC ACI board should be picked If these relays are not picked check for 120VAC on terminals 8 10 and 12 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board If there is no voltage on these terminals refer to the controller drawings to find the problem Note that relays CNP and RDY should also be picked 2 Verify that the drive receives the direction enable and inspection speed command signals from the HC
272. doors are closed but not necessarily locked and all hoistway and machine room wiring is complete The car safety must be adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications the governor installed and the governor rope attached to the car safety Correct any malfunction before proceeding further 42 02 2P21 START U P bd 3 1 3 2 BEFORE APPLYING POWER AN WARNING These instructions assume the elevator mechanic has adequate electrical troubleshooting experience Follow the procedures carefully and if the elevator does not respond correctly check the circuits and use the troubleshooting section in this manual Section 6 Proceed cautiously To become familiar with the procedure read these instructions all the way through before starting the work Before applying power to the controller perform the following a Physically check all of the power resistors and any other components located in the resistor enclosure and inside the controller Any components loosened during shipment may cause damage b Remove one side of the ribbon cable connecting the HC RB4 VFAC board to the HC PCI O board at connector C1 by pushing open the two latches C Unplug the screw terminal blocks from the HC PCI O and any HC CI O E HC IOX or HC 140 boards by moving the blocks to the right This is done to avoid damaging the boards by accidentally shorting one of the output devices to one of the power buses terminals 2 3 or 4 during the initial power up of
273. dress of SP5 is O2AF and the Position is 4 Step 2 Look up the signal on the computer Change the address on the display to Address 02AF see Section 5 5 Look at data bit number 4 from the right which is underlined in the following display This digit represents the computer s interpretation of the Spare 5 input signal If the digit is 1 the computer thinks that the SP5 signal is ON If the digit is 0 the computer thinks that the SP5 signal is OFF This information can be used to determine the source of the problem If the Spare 5 input is programmed for the DHLD Door Hold input and the doors are not staying open the diagnostic display will show that the SP5 input is OFF If this is the case checking the voltage on the SP5 terminal will show whether the problem is inside or outside the controller Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 45 TABLE 5 6 Computer External Memory Chart HALL CALLS CAR CALLS 8 7 2 1 601R UC1R 601 UC1 101R CC1R 101 CC1 602R UC2R 602 UC2 502R DC2R 502 DC2 102R CC2R 102 CC2 603R UC3R 603 UC3 503R DC3R 503 DC3 103R CC3R 103 CC3 604R UC4R 604 UC4 504R DC4R 504 DC4 104R CC4R 104 CC4 605R UC5R 605 UC5 505R DC5R 505 DC5 105R CC5R 105 CC5 606R UC6R 606 UC6 506R DC6R 506 DC6 106R CC6R 106 CC6 607R UC7R 607 UC7 507R DC7R 507 DC7 107R CC7R 107 CC7 608R UC8R 608 UC8 508R DC8R 508 DC8 108R CC8R 108 CC8 609R UC9OR 609 UC9 509R DC9R 509 DC9 109R CC9OR 109 CC9 610R UC10R 610 UC10 510R DC10R
274. drive The input can be seen at terminal 33 Speed Reference and 34 Com The output signal is 0 10VDC The High Level speed A3 Speed Command 4 Level speed A3 Speed Command 2 Deceleration rate A2 Decel Rate 0 and Deceleration Jerk A2 Decel Jerk In 0 A2 Decel Jerk Out 0 parameters should be adjusted for correct approach to the floor The Acceleration rate A2 Accel Rate 0 and the Acceleration Jerk A2 Accel Jerk In 0 A2 Accel Jerk Out 0 parameters can be adjusted for smooth starting and transition to High speed This will be addressed in the final adjustment section FINAL ADJUSTMENTS HPV 900 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 FINAL PREPARATION FOR RUNNING ON AUTOMATIC OPERATION HPV 900 a Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LED display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 21 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 0 4 22 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper
275. drive is used to pick the RDY relay This contact opens if there is a fault in the VFAC drive unit The fault can be reset by pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the drive reset button on the drive keypad All of the speed commands acceleration deceleration and the S curves are adjusted by setting drive parameters using the drive key pad A complete listing of the HPV 900 Drive Parameters is found in Appendix C A parameter sheet listing the parameter settings as programmed by MCE is shipped with each controller If required install a temporary jumper between terminals 4 and 8 to bypass the door locks f the car is on a final limit switch place a jumper between terminals 2 and 16 to bypass the main safety string Remember to remove these jumpers as soon as possible At this time the encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft and its connections must be complete according to the job prints The Inspection Speed is set by the A3 Inspection Speed Command 1 parameter in ft min Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Run the car by toggling the UP DN toggle switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the desired direction using constant pressure The PM contactor and the BR contactor should pick and the car should move Make sure that the car moves in the appropriate direction and the brake works properly START UP 3 13 If the car moves in the opposite direction displa
276. drop the brake immediately the instant the motor has stopped If there is too long of a delay before dropping the brake the control system will release its control of the motor and the motor will drift briefly in the direction of the load before the brake is forced to drop by the PT relay The BDD trimpot controls the dropping of the brake through the BE relay Move the LU and LD sensors or switches closer together or further apart so the car stops at the same location up or down Then move the floor leveling magnet strips or vanes so the car stops accurately at each floor i The adjustment is almost complete The acceleration rate setting on drive parameter C1 01 should be at least as great as the deceleration rate parameter C1 02 but it should not be so high that it substantially exceeds the value of C1 02 Excessive acceleration will probably cause the VFAC Drive Unit circuits to saturate and therefore lose control of the car Ideally the slope of the acceleration in volts per second should be equal to the slope of the deceleration Note the present value of the C1 02 parameter Increase the value of C1 02 and run the car Continue to increase the value of C1 02 until the car overshoots the floor requiring a relevel operation Observe the response of the car to verify a stable releveling operation Return the value of the C1 02 parameter to its original value so that the approach to the floor is the same as before After the car stops check
277. e When the top floor has been reached the car will move back to the floor at which the Analog Load Weigher Learn Function was begun and the computer will display the scrolling message e FULL CAR LEARN PROCESS COMPLETED PRESS S TO CONT If the Extra Features Menu Option Analog Load Weigher is set to MCE the car will learn the full car value and then display the message e FULL CAR LEARN PROCESS COMPLETED PRESS S TO CONT Press the S pushbutton place the F3 switch in the down position and take the car off of Independent service To verify that the Load Weigher Learn Function has been performed slecessty place the F8 switch in the up position With the test weights ob Per in the car the following should be displayed If the Load Weigher Learn Function has not been performed successfully the following will be displayed The Load Weigher Learn Function empty or full values may be aborted at any time by pressing the N pushbutton The computer will display the message e LEARN PROCESS ABORTED PRESS S TO CONT When the S pushbutton is pressed the computer displays the scrolling message e ANALOG LOAD WEIGHER LEARN FUNCTION PRESS S TO START At this point you may exit System Mode by placing the F3 switch in the down position or you may re start the learn function by moving the car back to the floor where the test weights are located and press S to start go to step d If the empty car values have been lear
278. e 1 flag 5 17 FRM Fire Service Phase 1 Output option 5 36 FRMR Fire Sensor Machine Room option 5 33 FRON Fire phase 1 on input flag 5 17 FRON Fire Phase 1 Switch ON Position Input option 5 33 FRON2 Fire Phase 1 Switch ON Position Input option 5 33 Front DOL amp DLK are Both Active message 5 9 FRONT DOOR CAM IS RETIRING FIXED TYPE option 5 29 Front Door is Locked but not fully closed message 5 9 Front Door Lock Switch Failure message 5 10 FRONT DOOR MECH COUPLED option 5 29 Front Door Open Limit Failure message 5 10 Front Gate Switch Failure message 5 10 FRS Fire phase 1 input flag 5 17 FRSA Alternate Fire Service input option 5 33 FRSM Main Fire Service input option 5 33 FRSS Fire phase 1 flag 5 17 FSA Fire Service Alternate Output option 5 36 FSM Fire Service Main Output option 5 36 FSO Fire Service On Output option 5 36 FSVC True Fire Service Output option 5 36 FULLY MANUAL DOORS option 5 27 FWI Fire warning indicator output flag 5 17 FWL Fire Warning Light Output option 5 36 G G5 GPD515 Drive acceleration deceleration rates 4 6 alarms and faults 6 18 buffer tests 4 15 4 16 critical parameters 3 6 3 8 drive parameters table A 6 A 13 emergency terminal limit switch monitor 4 15 Final Adjustments 4 13 Final Inspection Procedure 4 18 flux vector applications 4 11 4 13 governor overspeed tests 4 16 4 17 High speed 4 9 Inspection Leveling Overspeed te
279. e COC is the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board which makes it possible to move the car without computers and satisfies code required safety functions and redundant relay backup functions All computer functions can fail in an ON condition and the car will not move if the door lock circuits are not closed Except for calls most of the individual elevator inputs and outputs are handled through the Main Relay board and are routed to the HC PCI O board which is the main interface to the computer Provisions for 4 position indicator outputs are on the HC PCI O board If additional position indicators are required HC CI O E boards are added as required If independent walk through rear doors are required the HC RD board acts as the interface between the computer and the Rear Door Relay board which handles all functions associated with the rear doors Some additional inputs and outputs such as load weighers are handled through the HC PCI O board Car calls and hall calls are interfaced to the computer through the HC PCI O board and HC CI O E boards which can handle up to 4 landings per board Therefore all the input output boards HC PCI O HC RD HC IOX HC 140 and HC CI O E act as the interface between the MC PCA Main Computer board and the user These input output boards are linked to the HC PCI O board through a ribbon cable A connector on the back of the MC PCA board plugs into the HC PCI O board The MC PCA board contains the main elevator logic pro
280. e Disable Disable Enable Brk Hold FIt Ena Brake hold fault enable Disable Disable Disable When Speed Reg Type External Reg this _ None Ext Torg Cmd Sre sets the source of the torque command Serial Nene mene Confirms proper analog signal polarity when Enabled Dir Confirm Ena set to Enable and a logic input is Disabled Disabled Disabled programmed to Run Up and Run Down Addresses how the S Curve Speed Reference Generator handles a reduction in Enabled F S Cure Aber the speed command before the S Curve i Disabled pisabied n Disabied Generator has reached its target speed Reduces starting takeoff time by reducing i Enabled Fast Flux motor fluxing time Disabled Disable Enaneg Enables the Mains DIP Speed A1 Enable Main DIP Ena parameter which reduces speed whena UV Disable Disable f Disable alarm low voltage is declared Dynamic braking protection fault or alarm i Fault DB Protection ealention Alarm Fault Fault Encoder Fault Temporarily disables the Encoder Fault E para Enable Enable Determines the stopping mode when Immediate Stopping Mode Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop uate tea HEE late Alarm Fit Motor Ovrld Sel Motor overload selection Fit Immediate Alarm immediate Fault at stop Disable f Auto Stop Auto stop function enable Enable Disable Disable None Mode1 Serial Mode Serial protocol selection E Mode 2 Mode 1 None Mode 2 test Defines the reaction to a serial Immediate Ser2 Fit Mode commu
281. e car stops check the empty car releveling operation by placing a jumper between terminals 18 and 26 to cause an up level after which the car will stop due to picking the LD Down Level switch Remove the jumper from terminals 18 and 26 and the car will level down against the counterweight Make sure that it does not stall If the car stalls then you might have to increase the leveling speed ADAPTIVE TUNING HPV 900 To tune this drive for optimum performance follow the procedure in Section 5 5 in the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Technical Manual Adaptive tuning automatically adjusts the no load current slip RPM to run at Contract speed and inertia tunes up the speed regulator Note In the adaptive tuning procedure to achieve 70 of contract speed adjust only the High Speed parameter to 70 of contract speed A3 Multistep Ref NOTE After performing the test in Section 5 5 1 2 TUNING MOTOR NO LOAD CURRENT the motor torque reading may not equal 15 If so proceed to the next step in the test LOAD TESTING HPV 900 a Begin adding test weights to the car in 100 or 200 pound increments all the way up to the rated load Observe the VFAC Drive Unit current on its display and check to see if there is an OC Over Current error indication as the car accelerates to full speed If so this indicates that the VFAC unit is being pushed close to its limits and may require one or more of the following actions 1 The reques
282. e car stops at the same location up or down Then move the floor leveling magnet strips or vanes so the car stops accurately at each floor h The adjustment is almost complete The acceleration rate parameter setting should be at least as great as the deceleration rate parameter but it should not be so high that it substantially exceeds the value of the deceleration rate parameter Excessive 4 64 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 acceleration may cause the AC Drive circuits to saturate and thereby lose control of the car Ideally the slope of the acceleration in volts per second should be equal to the slope of the deceleration Note the present value of the deceleration parameter LF 54 and run the car Continue to decrease the value of LF 54 until the car overshoots the floor requiring a relevel operation Observe the response of the car to verify a stable releveling operation Return the value of the LF 54 parameter to its original value so that the approach to the floor is the same as before After the car stops check the empty car releveling operation by placing a jumper between terminals 18 and 26 to cause an up level after which the car will stop due to picking the LD Down Level switch Remove the jumper from terminals 18 and 26 and the car will level down against the counterweight Make sure that it does not stall If the car stalls then you might have to increase the leveling speed 4 15 5 LOAD TESTING TORQMAX F5 42 02 2P21
283. e connected to panel mount terminal DCL Wire connected to terminal 47 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper between 2 bus and terminal 36 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper between 2 bus and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper between 2 bus and panel mount terminal EPI if present No jumpers between terminals 2 and UET or DET No jumper between terminals 2 and 15 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 4 and 8 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 8 and 10 or 12 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 10 and 11 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 12 and 13 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 16 and 17 HC RB4 VFAC Speed Command 8 and Overspeed Level parameters must be set to original value for high speed Parameters LF 20 and LF 42 set to 100 of contract speed 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 43 4 11 EXPLANATION OF YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS AND S CURVES For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 Before attempting to bring the car up to contract speed or making any adjustments it is important to verify the following control parameters in the VFAC Drive Unit It is very important to become familiar with driv
284. e data If there is a full load in the car and there is trouble slowing in the down direction or if the AC Drive Unit is tripping off and there is an E OP over voltage fault displayed it may mean that there is a problem with the regeneration braking resistors and or the braking unit if supplied separately Verify the DC bus voltage Two methods to check the DC bus voltage as described below 1 Through the drive keypad display When the drive is in Operation mode access parameter ru 11 DC bus voltage or parameter ru 12 Peak DC bus voltage You can then run the elevator and watch the voltage reading 2 Actual measurement of voltage Use extreme care when measuring the DC voltage across the drive power terminals and PA or under the above conditions FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 37 The 230V drive will trip on E OP Over voltage in the DC bus circuit if the ru 12 reading is close to 400VDC The 460V drive will trip on E OP if the ru 12 reading is close to 800VDC If the DC bus voltage reading ru 11 is 325 VDC for a 230 VAC motor or 650 VDC for 460 VAC motor and if there is no voltage measured across the braking resistors while the car is slowing with a full load going down or empty car up there may be a wiring problem or a defective braking unit if provided Be sure to investigate this thoroughly These resistors perform the task of regulating car speed during a full load down or empty car up run regeneration 4 9 6 EL
285. e direction preference is maintained only until the door dwell time expires 5 4 4 15 FULLY MANUAL DOORS When set to YES this option will allow the MGR output to turn OFF when the MG timer elapses even if the doors are left open Usually having DCF ON is one reason to leave the MG running 5 4 4 16 CONT D C B TO CLOSE DOORS When this option is set to YES the doors will remain open while the car is at a landing until the Door Close button is pressed While the Door Close button is pressed the doors will continue to close If the Door Close button is released before the doors have closed fully the door will reopen 5 4 4 17 CONT D C B FOR FIRE PH 1 When set to YES the doors will remain open when the car goes on Fire Phase 1 until constant DCB forces them closed 5 4 4 18 MOMENT D O B DOOR OPENING This option is used to require the momentary pressure on the Door Open Button DOB to open the doors If set to NO momentary pressure on the DOB is not required to open the doors when the car reaches a landing The doors open automatically in response to a call 5 4 4 18 1 MOMENT D O B FOR FRONT CALLS REAR CALLS BOTH CALLS Choose whether front calls rear calls or both calls need momentary D O B FRONT CALLS this option necessitates that DOB be pressed when the car responds to front door calls Rear door calls are not affected REAR CALLS this option necessitates that DOB be pressed when the car responds to
286. e door requires aconstant door close button signal to close In this case the door will close at full speed Rear Infra Red Cutout This is a normally active input When this input goes low the infra red detector signal is ignored for the rear door only and the door will always close atreduced torque and speed i e nudge closed unless the door requires a constant door close button signal to close In this case the door will close at full speed Light Load Input A load weigher device can be connected to this input see Section 5 4 9 6 for more details Landing System Redundancy Input This input is used for redundancy checking It monitors DZ Door Zone LU Level Up and LD Level Down The LSR input will go low at least once during a run If however the DZ sensor has failed closed power will be present on the LSR input and the car will not be able to restart The LSR FAIL message will be displayed Load Weigher Bypass This input is used to bypass the load weigher inputs LLI HLI OVL and DLI Motor Generator Shutdown Input see Section 5 4 9 10 Non Stop Input Attendant Service Overload Input Overload 2 Input While on Fire Phase II when the car is stopped at a landing with the doors open activation of this input will hold the doors open until the overload condition is cleared by deactivating the input only used for the ANSI A17 1 2000 fire code Passing Floor Gong Enable Input see Section 5 4 6 3 Pressure Switch In
287. e input speed reference and terminal 23 is programmed for the drive output frequency For flux vector applications only To improve the car s response the following drive parameters can be adjusted as described below provided that the Motor data slip parameter E2 02 and Motor No load current E2 03 are set correctly 1 ASR Proportional Gain 1 C5 01 The ASR Proportional Gain 1 controls the response of the car to the speed command Increasing C5 01 results in tighter control A low value may result in a speed deviation error A too high value may result in oscillation 2 ASR Integral Time 1 C5 02 The ASR Integral Time 1 adjusts the amount of time for the drive to respond to a change in speed command Response time is increased when the C5 02 is decreased However the car may become unstable if the ASR Integral Time is set too low 3 Parameters C5 03 ASR P Gain 2 and C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 are not used and must be set to the factory default values The car should be running well now except possibly for the final stop Since the speed reference goes to zero when the car stops the VFAC Drive Unit will cause the machine to stop electrically Enough delay in the setting of the brake BDD will have to be provided to allow the sheave to stop turning before setting the brake firmly on the brake drum If the job has Intermediate Speed first adjust the multi floor runs Then make one floor runs and adjust parameter D1
288. e inspection speed using parameter LF 43 For proper brake operation adjust the SPD trimpot on the HC ACI board to coordinate the application of the speed command with the picking of the brake so that the car does not move under the brake or rollback at the start d At this time the adjustment of the BDD trimpot on the HC ACI board is also necessary Otherwise the car may be stopping under the brake causing a lot of current to be applied to the motor that might cause arcing on the main contactor during the stop If an ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed problem is detected by the HC ACI board the ILO indicator will turn ON and the FLT relay will pick which will drop the RDY relay and shut down the controller Reset the fault by pressing the Fault reset button on the HC ACI board and adjust the ILO trimpot for the proper Inspection Leveling Overspeed trip threshold e Test the safety by hand to make sure that it will hold the car 3 30 bs START UP 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 To make sure that the Car Top Inspection switch is working properly turn OFF the main disconnect remove the jumper between terminals 18 and 59 from step 3 3 1 j and reinstall the wire into terminal 59 Turn ON the main disconnect Make sure that there is 115VAC on terminal 59 with respect to terminal 1 when the car top inspection switch is in the NORMAL position There should be no power on terminal 59 when the car top inspection switch is in the INSP position
289. e keypad operation to access the drive program Review the use of the Digital Operator drive keypad in the VFAC Drive manual 4 11 1 SETTING THE SPEED LEVELS CAUTION Verify the critical drive parameter settings as described in Section 3 7 2 Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation CAUTION Itis very important that drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation The Programming mode has to be accessed in order to change a drive parameter The drive will not function in Programming mode it must be in Operation mode to run the elevator There are five speed levels D1 parameters that can be set in the drive software see Table 4 8 and Figure 4 5 The drive software will not accept data entry to any D1 parameters other than those listed in Table 4 8 If you change a drive parameter and there is an OPE40 fault the only way to correct this fault is to access the PROGRAM mode again and access the particular D1 D9 parameter You must enter a correct value and then reset the drive by pushing the drive fault reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the drive reset button on the drive key pad CAUTION The drive will trip on OPE40 or OPE41 fault if the following conditions are not met while setting the D1 D9 parameters D1 02 gt D1 07 gt D1 03 gt D1 05 gt 0 0 but less than the maximum specified value 4 44 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
290. e left at factory defaults E E a NOT USED BY MCE Must be left at factory defaults Monitor Parameters Read only parameters LF 25 Estimated gear ratio LF 80 Software version LF 81 Software date LF 82 Terminal X2 Input states refer to table x x LF 83 Terminal X2 output states refer to table x x LF 84 Terminal X3 input states refer to table x x LF 85 Terminal X2 output states refer to table x x LF 86 Selected speed LF 87 Actual inverter load LF 88 Actual set speed commanded motor RPM rpm LF 89 Actual speed actual motor RPM rpm LF 90 Elevator speed fpm LF 91 Rated motor torque Ibft A 22 APPENDIX D QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 Digital Parameter Description Unit Setting MCE Field MCE Operator Range Drive Set Display Defaults LF 92 Positioning drive inch LF 98 Starting sequence state LF 99 Inverter state ru 09 Phase Current actual motor current A ru 11 Actual DC Voltage DC bus voltage ru 12 Peak DC Voltage max DC bus voltage measured Fr 0 Parameter reset 0 init 0 KKK 0 The speed setting range is described in percentage of the contract speed but the actual entered value of the speed is in FPM The drive will not accept any speed higher than the defined values x Parameters are motor machine job dependent Recommended but field adjustable Parameters for Drive Software Version C31A LF 81 date code 0209 4 V V
291. e main contactor during the stop On Inspection operation how quickly the car stops at the terminal landings is controlled by drive parameter C1 04 A higher value of this parameter will cause the car to overshoot at terminal landings and may drop the SAF relay Also on Inspection operation the smoothness in the stop at intermediate landings is controlled by the normal deceleration parameter C1 02 Test the safety by hand to make sure that it will hold the car START UP 3 25 If an ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed problem is detected by the HC ACI board the ILO indicator will turn ON and the FLT relay will pick which will drop the RDY relay and shut down the controller Reset the fault by pressing the Fault reset button on the HC ACI board and adjust the ILO trimpot for the proper Inspection Leveling Overspeed trip threshold i To make sure that the Car Top Inspection switch is working properly turn OFF the main disconnect remove the jumper between terminals 18 and 59 from step 3 3 1 j and reinstall the wire into terminal 59 Turn ON the main disconnect Make sure that there is 115VAC on terminal 59 with respect to terminal 1 when the car top inspection switch is in the NORMAL position There should be no power on terminal 59 when the car top inspection switch is in the INSP position j Stop the car so that the car top is accessible from the top hall door Remove jumpers from the safety circuit Run the car from the car top
292. ead and follow the Magnet Installation instructions in the job prints but read the rest of these instructions before proceeding b Before installing the magnets clean the steel tape thoroughly with an appropriate solvent No oil should be left on the tape as it will interfere with the adhesive backing on the magnets Gc There are normally five lanes of magnets installed on the side of the tape facing the car One lane consists of only the LU DZ LD and requires that a 6 inch magnet be installed at each floor The other lanes have magnets which initiate slow downs d If the installation has rear doors it may have an LS QUTE landing system which has additional Door Zone sensors on the rear of the upper tape guide assembly Follow the Magnet Installation instructions in the job prints and install the front and rear Door Zone magnets on the steel tape as shown TM SWITCH WIRING AND ADJUSTMENT IF USED Refer to the drawing titled Elevator Car Wiring Print in the job prints for details on the wiring and setting of each contact in the TM switch Carefully examine the functioning of this switch especially if copper to carbon contacts are used The current levels are quite low and may not be enough to burn the oxide off the contacts DOOR OPERATOR DIODE INSTALLATION IF USED Certain door operators such as G A L models MOM or MOH require the installation of diodes in the door operator on the car top See the drawing titled Elevator Car Wiri
293. eased Also by opening the Emergency Stop Switch while the car is moving up or down verify that the brake stops and holds the car Run the car through the hoist way checking clearance and the door locks When all of the doors are closed remove the jumpers from terminals 4 and 8 and from terminals 18 and 59 if present Correct any problem with the door locks and the door closed contacts Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LED display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection NOTE If the car is not completely wired temporary check the following wire removed from panel mount terminal DCL wire removed from terminal 47 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present Check the counter weight balance Make whatever corrections are necessary to make the counter weight correct Check to see what the counter weighing should be before making any changes If a drum machine is being used follow the ma
294. eck for a short circuit between the metal base of the triac to any pad area around a mount ing screw hole On the HC CI O E board the bottom most triac corresponds to the bottom most terminal and terminals and triacs are corresponding from there on up see Figure 6 3 On the HC PCI O board the triacs are labeled the same as the call terminals see Figure 6 1 If the call has passed all of the previous tests then it should be working properly while the field wires are not attached Before reconnecting the field wires jumper the wire or wires to terminal 1 and go out to that hall or car call push button and press it If a fuse blows then a field wiring problem exists If everything seems okay then connect the call wires and test it If connecting the call wires causes a problem the board may have again been damaged In any event once the board checks out okay any other problems will probably be field wiring problems and should be investigated TROUBLESHOOTING 6 11 6 4 USING THE OPTIONAL CRT FOR TROUBLESHOOTING 6 4 1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY OF ELEVATOR F3 SCREEN The F3 screen shows the hoistway graphic display see Figure 6 4 a HOISTWAY GRAPHIC DISPLAY shows the car position direction arrows car calls and assigned hall calls and the position of the doors b CAR STATUS DISPLAY This portion of this display describes the current status of the Car FIGURE 6 4 Graphic Display of Elevator F3 Screen Color CRT 98 05 08 14 26
295. econds This is the length of time the doors will stay open after being reopened by the Photo Eye Safety Edge or Door Open button 5 4 5 2 CAR CALL DOOR TIMER Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds This is the length of time the doors will stay open when the car stops to answer a car call 5 4 5 3 HALL CALL DOOR TIMER Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds This is the length of time the doors will stay open when the car stops to answer a hall call 5 4 5 4 LOBBY DOOR TIMER Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds This is the length of time the doors will stay open when the car stops to answer either a hall call or a car call at the Lobby Floor The location of the Lobby Floor is programmable see Section 5 4 2 9 5 4 5 5 NUDGING TIMER Range 10 240 Seconds This timer is used only if the Nudging option is selected Door Nudging Operation will begin when the Nudging Timer elapses The Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 29 5 30 Nudging Timer will start when the regular door timer elapses see Section 5 4 4 1 for more details 5 4 5 6 TIME OUT OF SVCE TIMER Range 15 240 Seconds or NONE This timer is used to take a car out of service when the car is held at one floor excessively when there are calls registered at other floors The timer will start when there is a call registered at another floor If the timer expires before the car closes its doors and begins to move then the car will become out of service Typically this occurs when the doors are held ope
296. ed The ILO trimpot establishes the speed setting that will shut down the elevator in case of an overspeed condition during inspection or leveling operation If ILO should trip the ILO indicator will light and the FLT relay will pick thereby shutting down the elevator To restore operation press the Fault Reset button on the HC ACI board Turning the trimpot CCW will result in a higher trip speed threshold and turning it CW will cause a lower speed threshold For this trimpot to function a sensor must be wired to the terminals SP SS and SN The speed sensor installation and wiring is explained in Section 2 2 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor Indicator ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed indicator This indicator comes ON when the car speed exceeds the threshold set by the ILO trimpot during Access Leveling or Inspection operation If the ILO indicator is ON then the FLT relay will be picked and the elevator will not move To restore operation press the Fault Reset button on the HC ACI board and investigate any problems before returning the car to service Push Buttons FAULT RESET If the ILO indicator is ON this push button turns the fault indicator OFF and drops out the FLT relay DRIVE RESET This push button resets VFAC drive faults Drive faults will be displayed on the drive keypad and can also be reset directly by pushing the drive reset button on the drive keypad The Drive Reset button on the HC ACI board is prov
297. ed and A lt gt B swapped LF 29 Encoder sample time rae 0 5 32 4 4or8 recommend gearless 4 geared 8 Control method 0 1 Open loop induction motor operation 2 Closed loop speed control LF 2 A Spd Er30 3 Closed ee see control ne Tie d os a 4 Closed loop torque control 5 Close loop with synthesized pre torque A LF 31 Kp speed accel Proportional gain accel amp run 1 1 32767 3000 3000 d LF 31 Kp speed decel Proportional gain decel 1 1 32767 3000 xx 3000 A LF 32 Ki speed accel Integral gain accel amp run 1 1 32767 350 350 d LF 32 Ki speed decel Integral gain decel 1 1 32767 250 250 A LF 33 Ki speed offset accel Gain at low speed accel 1 0 8000 3000 3000 d LF 33 Ki speed offset decel Gain at low speed decel 1 0 8000 1000 x x x 1000 LF 34 Kp current Proportional gain auto calculated 1 1 32767 Calculated KIRK LF 35 Ki CUrrent Integral gain auto calculated 1 1 32767 Calculated KK 0 LF 36 Maximum torque Auto calc by the drive Ib ft 0 23590 Calculated KK 1 LF 36 Maximum torque emergency operation LF 17 lb ft 0 23590 Calculated KK LF 37 Open loop torque boost Open loop op only 0 25 5 5 0 5 0 Carrier frequency 0 8 KHz 1 16KHz cree Note eves 0 if E OL2 error on drive 1 On 0 0 LF 41 Leveling speed fpm 0 25 0 0 oat LF 42 High speed fpm 0 0 LF 20 0 0 LF 43 Inspection speed fpm 0 0 150 0 0 LF 44 High leveling speed fpm 0 25 of LF 20 0 0 ate
298. edundancy Front Gate Switch Failure message 5 13 Redundancy Rear Gate Switch Failure message 5 13 Regenerative drive R4 drive parameters quick reference A 35 PowerBack R4 A 33 36 PowerBack R6 A 44 46 PowerBack R6 drive parameters table A 46 PowerBack R6 parameter adjustments A 45 REL Releveling flag 5 16 REO Re Open Input option 5 34 RETIRING CAM OPTION option 5 26 RGS Gate Switch Relay Redundancy option 5 34 RGSR Gate Switch Relay Redundancy Rear Input option 5 34 RINAX INAX relay contact redundancy monitoring input option 5 34 RUN Run flag 5 16 S S curve parameters G5 GPD515 Drive 4 6 4 7 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 20 4 21 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 61 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 46 4 47 SAB Sabbath input flag 5 16 SAB Sabbath Operation Input option 5 34 Sabbath Operation Active message 5 13 SABBATH OPERATION option 5 42 SAFC Car Safety Input option 5 34 Safety Circuit is Open message 5 13 Safety String Open message 5 13 6 14 SAFH Hoistway Safety Input option 5 34 SCE Stepping correction enable flag 5 16 SCROLLING SPEED SLOW NORMAL FAST option 5 43 SD Supervisory down flag 5 16 SDA Down direction arrow flag 5 16 SDT Short door time flag 5 16 SDTR Short door time flag rear 5 16 SE Safety edge input flag 5 16 42 02 2P21 SECONDARY PARKING FLOOR option 5 24 Selective Collective option 5 23 sequence of operation 1 11 SEQUENTIAL DOOR OPER F R option 5 26 SER Safety edge input
299. el End Accel Start Decel End Decel Less than P1 01 P1 04 P1 05 P1 06 P1 07 Oe Between P1 01 and P1 02 P1 08 P1 09 P1 10 P1 11 Between P1 02 and P1 03 P1 12 P1 13 P1 14 P1 15 Greater than P1 03 P1 16 P1 17 P1 18 P1 19 These are the only S curve parameters that require field adjustment for smoothing the elevator ride All the other parameter values are set to the MCE Drive defaults The S curve parameters listed below also listed in the shaded area in Table 4 9 are the only S curve parameters which require field adjustment for smoothing the elevator ride Parameters P1 05 P1 08 P1 09 P1 12 P1 16 and P1 19 should be set to the MCE default values P1 04 2 50 adjusts Speed Pick Delay at the start of motion P1 13 2 50 adjusts the transition from Acceleration to Intermediate speed P1 17 2 50 adjusts the transition from Acceleration to High Speed P1 18 6 00 adjusts the transition from High Speed to Deceleration P1 14 6 00 adjusts the transition from Intermediate Speed to Deceleration P1 11 3 00 adjusts the transition from Deceleration to High Level Speed P1 10 2 00 adjusts the transition from High Level Speed to Level Speed P1 06 5 00 adjusts the smoothness at the start of Level Speed P1 07 3 00 adjusts the smoothness at the end of Level Speed P1 15 3 50 Preferred setting lower value might cause spotting before the stop Yaskawa F7 S Curve Parameters YASKAWA F7 S C
300. elay and connector The relay on the lower left hand side RPI has the legend describing which pad corresponds to which contact of the relay or its coil To see if the input from terminal 27 is making its way to the relay coil use the test pad on the lower right hand side of the DZ relay the right hand side of the relay coil symbol on the job print corresponds to the right hand side on the board If 120VAC is present across the relay coil and the relay is not picked then the relay may be defective It is therefore not necessary to remove the relay or access the back of the HC RB4 VFAC board to trace the signals on the board The signals can also be traced on the HC PCI O board See Figure 6 1 for details If the signal gets to the HC PCI O board but does not get to the computer it would be safe to assume that the problem is on the HC PCI O board 6 2 DOOR LOGIC As complex as it is the Door Logic portion of the software answers one simple question Should the doors be open The computer looks at certain inputs and then calls upon specific logic to determine the answer to this basic question All of these inputs and all of the flags generated by the specific logic are available for viewing through Diagnostic mode on the computer When troubleshooting a door problem inspecting the action and sequence of these flags and inputs is very important When the meaning of the flags becomes more familiar the state of these flags will generally serve to po
301. ellation of acar call and remains active until the car call door dwell time elapses or is canceled Car Call Disconnect Enable Output This output comes ON when the car calls are canceled during PHE anti nuisance operation cD Car Done on Emergency Power Output This output is active when the car has finished returning on emergency power or when it has been determined thatthe car cannot lower CFLT This outputis currently used for Canadian Standards Association CSA code only If this is the applicable code for the installation please refer to the Compliance Report included with the job CGED Car Gong Enable Down Output CGEDR CGED for rear doors Output CGEU Car Gong Enable Up Output CGEUR CGEU for rear doors Output CGF Car Generated Fault Output CSB Car Stop Switch Bypass Output CSEO Code Sequence Enable Output Formerly called SCE Security Code Enable This output will be ON during the time a security code is being entered to register a car call while on MCE s Standard Security CSR Car Selected to Run Output This output is generated when the car is selected to run on emergency power phase 2 via the AUTO or EPRUN input CTLDOT Car to Lobby Door Open Timer Output This output is generated upon completion of the car to lobby function the car has returned to the lobby landing the doors have opened and the CTL door timer has expired DBZF Front Door Buzzer Prior to automatic closing of the front doors this output will
302. em PA COM 1 Device Personal Computer CMS____ Graphic Personal Computer CMS___ Graphic Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No PA COM 2 Media None Serial Cable None Serial Cable Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem PA COM 2 Device Personal Computer CMS Graphic Personal Computer CMS Graphic Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No PA COM 3 Media None Serial Cable None Serial Cable Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem PA COM 3 Device Personal Computer CMS Graphic Personal Computer CMS Graphic Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No A 4 APPENDIX A ORIGINAL PROGRAMMED VALUES AND RECORD OF CHANGES 142 02 2P21 EXTRA FEATURES OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES PA COM 4 Media None Serial Cable None Serial Cable Line Driver Modem Line Driver Modem PA COM 4 Device Personal Computer CMS Graphic Personal Computer CMS Graphic Display CRT No Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No CRT and Keyboard Color CRT __ Yes __ No Display CRT No Keyboar
303. en and DLK Active message 6 13 DOL Door open limit input flag 5 16 DOLM Door open limit memory flag 5 16 DOLMR Door open limit memory flag rear 5 16 DOLR Door open limit rear flag 5 16 DOOR BUZZER TIMER option 5 31 Door Close Protection message 5 8 6 13 Door Close Protection Timer Elapsed message 5 8 DOOR HOLD INPUT TIMER option 5 30 door logic troubleshooting 6 3 6 4 DOOR OPEN PROTECTION TIMER option 5 30 42 02 2P21 DOOR OPERATION MENU OPTIONS 5 25 door operator diode installation of 2 12 Door Position Monitor switch 2 13 Door Sequence of Operation Flowchart 6 6 DOOR TYPE IS HORIZONTAL VERTICAL option 5 29 Door Zone Sensor Failure OFF Position message 5 8 DOORS TO LATCH DCF option 5 29 DOORS TO LATCH DOF option 5 29 DOORS TO OPEN IF NO DEMAND option 5 28 DOORS TO OPEN IF PARKED option 5 28 DOORS TO OPEN ON ALT FIRE option 5 28 DOORS TO OPEN ON MAIN FIRE option 5 28 DOUBLE STRIKE ON DOWN option 5 31 DPD Down previous direction flag 5 17 DPM Front Door Position Monitoring Input option 5 32 DPMR Rear Door Position Monitoring Input option 5 33 DPR Door protection timer flag 5 17 drawing numbers 2 3 Drive Failed to Respond message 5 8 Drive Fault message 5 8 DSD Down slow down input flag 5 17 DSH Door shortening flag 5 17 DSH Door Time Shortening Output intermediate option 5 36 DSHT Door shortening flag 5 17 DSHT Door Time Shortening Front Output fin
304. en pressing UP DOWN only the display is changed but not the value stored in the R6 When the display value is different from the stored value in the R6 it is marked by a point in the display By pressing ENTER the display value is stored in theR6 and the point is deleted The displayed value of an Enter parameter always starts with the stored value ERROR MESSAGES If a drive fault occurs during operation the display is overwritten with an error message Press ENTER to clear the error message NOTE Pressing ENTER resets only the error message in the display To reset the actual error and return the unit to normal operation the cause of the error must be removed and a reset done on terminal 11 or power off reset Refer to the R6 drive manual for a listing of error messages PARAMETER SETTING ADJUSTMENT The R6 drive parameters listed below are set at MCE and no field adjustments are necessary The parameter explanation is only for reference APPENDIX J POWERBACK R6 REGENERATIVE DRIVE A 45 QUICK REFERENCE FOR POWERBACK R6 REGENERATIVE AC DRIVE PARAMETERS WARNING Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running Incorrect values of drive parameters can cause erratic elevator operation Digital Parameter Description Unit Setting MCE Field MCE Operator Range Drive Set Display Defaults CP Parameters
305. er LF 43 in increments of 2 feet per minute to trip the ILO The ILO tripping speed should not exceed 140 fom If the red ILO light on the HC ACI board is lit push the FAULT RESET button and the light should go out C Turn the ILO trimpot fully CCW Run the car in the UP direction on Inspection while very slowly turning the ILO trimpot clockwise until the ILO indicator just turns ON After stopping push the FAULT RESET button on the HC ACI board and then set LF 43 parameter to a lower value Run the car on Inspection and increase the inspection speed by increasing the parameter LF 43 to verify that this low speed safety monitor circuit will trip at no higher than 140 fpm or no higher than the maximum available inspection speed if it is less than 140 fpm The circuit should trip when parameter LF 43 equals 23 of Contract Speed or above Check this in both directions The overspeed monitor is now calibrated for less than 150 fpm for Access Inspection and Leveling Turn the Inspection speed parameter LF 43 back to the value recorded in 4 10 1 b 4 10 2 TERMINAL SLOWDOWN LIMIT SWITCHES TORQMAX F4 Make sure that the terminal slowdown limit switches are working properly by doing the following a Place the TEST NORMAL switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position b Disconnect and label the wires from terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 39 Register calls for the terminal
306. er disconnect Under normal conditions there should be no fault message on the drive key pad display If there is a drive fault message refer to the fault 3 1 6 START UP 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 section in the AC drive manual The drive key pad should be adjusted to display the speed The RPI relay will pick and after a few seconds the SAF relay should pick the LED on the relay will be lit On the HC ACI board relays RDY and CNP must also be picked If none of the relays have been picked inspect fuse F4 on the controller s back plate Verify that there is 120 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 on the HC RB4 VFAC main relay board If no problems are found then briefly place a jumper between terminals 2 and 20 on the HC RB4 VFAC board and confirm that the SAF relay turns ON after four seconds If the SAF relay turns OFF after removing the jumper there is a problem with the safety string Note that the RDY relay will turn ON as long as the VFAC drive is normal and there is 15DVC present on the HC ACI board The N C contact of the fault tripping output on the drive is used to pick the RDY relay This contact opens if there is a fault in the VFAC drive unit The fault can be reset by pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the drive reset button on the drive keypad All of the speed commands acceleration deceleration and the S curves are adjusted by setting drive parameters using the drive key pad A complete
307. erminals UET and DET when the test is complete FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 27 4 7 4 CONTRACT SPEED BUFFER TEST HPV 900 O 4 28 4 7 4 1 COUNTER WEIGHT BUFFER TEST WITH EMPTY CAR GOING UP NOTE The car should be at the bottom landing with the TEST NORM switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position To conduct the empty car buffer test going UP a number of functions need to be bypassed using jumpers Follow the steps below a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car Disconnect the Step Up STU input by removing the wire from terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting Bypass the Emergency Terminal Up Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and UET on the HC ACIF board Bypass the Up terminal slowdown and Up Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Register a car call for the top terminal landing from the controller The counter weight will strike the buffer Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the down direction to move the car Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 and reconnect the wire to terminal 72 on the
308. ers terminal 2H and the fuse that powers terminal 2F if present b Check for shorts to ground on all terminals on the bottom of the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board The only terminals that should be grounded are terminals 1 and 89 G Check for shorts to ground on all terminals on the HC PCI O and HC CI O E boards d Check for shorts to ground on terminals F1 F2 A1 A2 and D5 If a G A L MOD door operator is provided remove door fuses F7 and F8 For other door operators consult the prints as to which fuses to remove then check the appropriate terminals for shorts to ground e Check for shorts to ground on motor power terminals T1 T2 and T3 Also check for ground on brake terminals B1 and B2 Q If existing rotating equipment is being reused it is strongly recommended to disconnect all of the wires from the terminals on the AC hoist motor and brake This is to guarantee that the controller is dis connected from the rotating equipment before the insulation test is performed Using a Megohmmeter check for insulation breakdown between the frame of each piece of equipment and it s associated stator terminals and the brake field terminals A reading of 100K ohms or above is considered acceptable Any insulation problems must be corrected before proceeding as this may be an indication of a serious problem with the equipment In the following instructions it is assumed that the hoist ropes are attached to the car sling all hoistway
309. ers with EMS IDM Yaskawa or MagneTek G5 GPD515 AC drive Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 e MagneTek HPV 900 AC drive Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 e TORQMAX F4 AC drive Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 e Yaskawa F7 AC drive Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 TORQMAX F5 AC drive Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 4 1 PREPARING TO RUN ON HIGH SPEED AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION Move the car to the bottom landing on Inspection operation and turn OFF the main disconnect Reinsert connector C1 into receptacle C1 on the HC PCI O board if previously removed NOTE Pin 1 on both the ribbon cable connector and the header on the HC PCI O board must match These are designated with arrows on the connector and header Press the connector in until the latches snap securing the connector in place 4 1 1 DOOR OPERATOR If the door operator is not working pull the door fuses and close the doors so the door clutch will not hit any of the door lock rollers Take whatever steps are necessary to keep the installation safe but make sure that the car top is still accessible after closing all of the doors Turn ON the AC power to the elevator 4 1 2 HC ACI AND HC ACIF BOARD ADJUSTMENTS In the process of preparing for running the elevator on high speed and automatic operation the following trimpots may require adjustment e SPD trimpot Speed Pick Delay This trimpot was adjusted in Section 3 on Inspection operation to coordinate the application of the speed command with the picki
310. es Brake picks and car tries to move Change Encoder channel parameter from its original value LF 18 to ON or OFF Turn OFF the power and interchange two of the motor leads Direction of ravel is correct Yes The car should mowe in the correct direction LF 88 commanded motor speed in RPM and LF 89 actual motor speed in RPM should match If they are not matching verify the Encoder PPR To verify the motor current display drive parameter ru 09 Run the car on Inspection The current reading should be close to 50 of the motor FLA when the Inspection speed is 10 of the rated speed 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING FIGURE 6 30 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Encoder Fault Encoder Fault Series M TORQMAX E ENC Fault occurs when the drive is ready Drive trips to move the car but either the brake is not E ENC Fault lifting or the encoder signals are incorrect Swap encoder channel parameter LF 18 ON or OFF change from previous value If the car moves in the wrong direction turn OFF power and change two of the motor leads If the car moves a little and then trips on E ENC fault verify that brake picks and encoder coupling and encoder connections are correct Refer to job prints to verify the connections voltage readings and LF 17 PPR mpe S If brake does not pick refer to Flow chart Car does not move on Inspection ae Inspection operation If the problem persists c
311. es the selected parameter In addition itis also used for selecting parameter groups UP Star Increases the selected parameter value In addition itis also used to find the parameter group DN STOP Decreases the selected parameter value In addition itis also used to find the parameter group FUNC SPEED Displays reads the parameter value Select the parameter group Press the Enter key The blinking dot next to the parameter number should flash Use UP or DNarrow to select the desired LF xx parameter Press the FUNC key to see the parameter value Use the UP or DN arrow to change the parameter value Press Enter to save the parameter value Important without this step parameter will not be saved TROUBLESHOOTING 6 47 FIGURE 6 34 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart Critical Drive Parameters Critical Drive Parameters Series M TORQMAX Write down the motor name plate information Motor Voltage FLA Full Load RPM Frequency It is always best to write down the values of all drive parameters using drive key pad This will ensure that the drive parameter settings are not the cause of the problem Always verify that the motor encoder and machine data are set accurately This may take 3 5 minutes but it is time worth spending LF 02 LF 04 Operating mode motor selection LF 10 to LF 17 LF 18 Motor Encoder data LF 21 to LF 25 Machine data LF 30 to LF 32 Control method Gains L
312. ese parameters are called Enter Parameters since they must be confirmed by ENTER When pressing UP DOWN only the display is changed but not the value stored in the R4 When the display value is different from the stored value in the R4 it is marked by a point in the display By pressing ENTER the display value is stored in theR4 and the point is deleted The displayed value of an Enter parameter always starts with the stored value 1 2 5 ERROR MESSAGES If a drive fault occurs during operation the display is overwritten with an error message Press ENTER to clear the error message Q NOTE Pressing ENTER resets only the error message in the display To reset the actual error and return the unit to normal operation the cause of the error must be removed and a reset done on terminal 11 or power off reset Refer to the R4 drive manual for a listing of error messages 1 2 6 PARAMETER SETTING ADJUSTMENT The R4 drive parameters listed below are set at MCE and no field adjustments are necessary The parameter explanation is only for reference A 34 APPENDIX I POWERBACK R4 REGENERATIVE DRIVE 42 02 2P21 QUICK REFERENCE FOR POWERBACK R4 REGENERATIVE AC DRIVE PARAMETERS WARNING Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running Incorrect values of drive parameters can cause erratic elevator operation Digi
313. eshooting To clear the condition the car must be put on Inspection then back into Normal operation or the RESET button must be pressed Immediately check the starter and thermal overloads and all circuitry associated with the motor NORMAL OPERATION Description The elevator and controller are operating normally Troubleshooting None OVERLOAD CONDITION Description The car appears to be overloaded as indicated by the load weigher input OVL Troubleshooting Check the OVL input If power is present on the OVL input the load weigher contact associated with this input is closed This contact being closed indicates to the elevator computer that the car is overloaded PASSCODE REQUEST Description The Passcode Request Option has been activated from the System Mode Menu Troubleshooting The system can be run on Inspection operation only The passcode must be entered correctly in the System Mode Menu in order to deactivate this option and allow the controller to run normally see Section 5 6 2 oto Eye Failure not scrolled Event Calendar only Photo Eye Failure Description The Photo Eye input has been continuously active for a considerable period of time Troubleshooting Check for abnormal blockage of the optical device frayed or defective photo eye relating cable or failure of the photo eye input circuit POWER TRANSFER INPUT ACTIVE Description The PTI input has been activated Troubleshooting Go into Progr
314. ets and vane or magnet switches and verify that the car steps the Position Indicators correctly The slowdown distance for the elevator is measured from the point where the STU sensor or STD sensor if going down is activated by a metal vane or magnetic strip to the position where the car is stopped at the floor with the DZ sensor centered on the leveling target with LU or LD sensors not engaged The slowdown distance was chosen to give a reasonable deceleration rate Continue to make two floor runs and slowly increase High speed until Contract Speed is reached It may be necessary to adjust the Deceleration rate parameters C1 02 and C1 08 to get the car to approach the floor correctly as the car speed increases Adjust the Acceleration rate parameters C1 01 and C1 07 until the desired acceleration is achieved Several runs may be required to obtain optimum acceleration The acceleration rate should be about the same as the deceleration rate f If the job is a modernization contract speed should correspond to a VFAC Drive output frequency of 60 Hz 8 Hz The frequency may vary with direction and load Arrange the VFAC Drive Unit to display the output frequency to verify this Q To observe the commanded speed and the drive output with an oscilloscope or a chart recorder monitor drive terminals 21 and 23 with respect to 22 These are 0 10 VDC signals Take all necessary precautions while measuring the voltage signals recommend defeating t
315. etween terminals 2 and 15 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 4 and 8 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 8 and 10 or 12 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 10 and 11 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 12 and 13 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 16 and 17 HC RB4 VFAC FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 8 EXPLANATION OF TORQMAX F4 DRIVE PARAMETERS AND S CURVES For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 Before attempting to bring the car up to contract speed or making any adjustments it is important to verify the following control parameters in the VFAC Drive Unit It is very important to become familiar with drive keypad operation to access the drive program NOTE In order to access the parameter values review the use of the Digital Operator in Section 3 Parameter Adjustments in the TORQMAX F4 Drive Technical Manual 4 8 1 SETTING THE SPEED LEVELS 3 6 2 Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic l CAUTION Verify the critical drive parameter settings as described in Section elevator operation CAUTION Itis very important that drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and
316. ety devices e g governor overload over travel limit switches and car stop switches and SAF input Stop Sw Safety Relay Ckt In Car Stop switch activated or the Safety Relay Circuit opened System Out of Service Car s out of service due to Hall Call common bus 2H failure Top Floor Demand Car PI indicates bottom terminal landing but car is not there Check bottom terminal landing slowdown switches and DSD input Time Out of Service Elevator abnormally delayed in reaching destination in response to a call demand Doors cannot close and lock or motor stalled 6 5 TROUBLESHOOTING THE G5 GPD515 AC DRIVE The VFAC drive s digital operator display must read as follows during power up Frequency reference U1 01 0 If any fault or problem is detected then turn off the power and refer to the Alarms and Fault Displays section of the EMS Yaskawa AC Drive Manual 6 5 1 CAR DOES NOT MOVE ON INSPECTION NOTE The drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in the parameter sheet are different and are not available in the drive manual If a drive has been replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Pick or Picked relay energized e Drop or dropped relay de energized If the car does not move on INSPECTION check the following 1 Verify that conta
317. f the Counterweight Displacement switch is not activated CWI the elevator will be allowed to run at reduced speed on Automatic Operation If the elevator is in motion when the Counterweight Displacement switch is activated CWI input an emergency stop is initiated and then the car will proceed away from the counterweight at reduced speed to the nearest available floor open the doors and shut down For this operation the Earthquake Direction Switch input EDS must be selected see Section 5 4 7 An elevator may be returned to Normal service by means of the Momentary Reset button on the HC EQ2 board provided that the Displacement switch CWI is no longer activated 2 CALIFORNIA EARTHQUAKE OPERATION When CALIF Earthquake Operation is selected upon activation of a Seismic switch EQI input the elevator if in motion will proceed to the nearest available floor at a speed of not more than 150 ft min 0 76 m s open the doors and shut down When a Counterweight Displacement switch is required and the Counterweight Displacement switch CWI input has been activated the elevator if in motion will initiate an emergency stop and proceed away from the counterweight at reduced speed to the nearest available floor open the doors and shut down For this operation the Earthquake Direction Switch EDS input must be selected see Section 5 4 7 An elevator may be returned to Normal service by means of the Momentary Reset button on the HC EQ2 board
318. for smoothing the elevator ride All the other parameter values are set to the MCE Drive defaults The S curve parameters listed below also listed in the shaded area in Table 4 2 are the only S curve parameters which require field adjustment for smoothing the elevator ride Parameters P1 05 P1 06 P1 08 P1 09 P1 12 P1 16 and P1 19 should be set to the MCE Drive default values P1 04 1 2 adjusts Speed Pick Delay at the start of motion 0 2 2 5 P1 13 1 2 adjusts the transition from Acceleration to Intermediate speed 0 2 2 5 P1 17 1 2 adjusts the transition from Acceleration to High Speed 0 2 2 5 P1 18 0 5 adjusts the transition from High Speed to Deceleration 0 2 2 5 P1 14 0 5 adjusts the transition from Intermediate Speed to Deceleration 0 2 2 5 P1 11 1 0 adjusts the transition from Deceleration to High Level Speed 0 2 2 5 P1 10 1 5 adjusts the transition from High Level Speed to Level Speed 0 2 2 5 P1 06 0 2 adjusts the smoothness at the start of Level Speed preferred 0 2 P1 07 1 0 adjusts the smoothness at the end of Level Speed 0 2 2 5 P1 15 0 9 Preferred setting lower value might cause spotting before the stop For more information about the S curve parameters refer Table 4 3 TABLE 4 3 G5 GPD515 S Curve Parameters G5 GPD515 S Curve Parameters The Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows Digital Operator Parameter Description Setting MCE
319. for this option are FRONT REAR and BOTH This option determines which door s should open once the car has completed an Alternate Fire return only if option 5 4 2 4 is set to YES 5 4 4 22 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON CTL When set to YES and the CTL car to lobby input is active once the car returns to the lobby the doors will remain open instead of cycling closed 5 4 4 23 LIMITED DOOR RE OPEN OPTION Once the doors begin to close after a door dwell time has expired if a re opening device input PHE or SE is seen this option will allow the doors to re open as long as the re opening device is active Once the re opening device is inactive the doors will immediately begin to close again Without this option set in this same case the doors will re open fully for a short door time and then close 5 4 4 24 REDUCE HCT WITH PHOTO EYE This option will cause a normal hall call time to be shortened to a short door time if a photo eye input is seen 5 4 4 25 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON EPI When set to YES and EPI Emergency Power input is active once the car returns to the emergency power return floor the doors are left open instead of cycling closed 5 4 4 26 DOORS TO OPEN IF NO DEMAND NONE FRONT REAR BOTH When set to NONE the doors remain closed when the car is at a landing with no demand When set to FRONT REAR or BOTH the corresponding doors automatically open and remain open when the car is at a landing with no demand BOTH option is n
320. fpm If the red ILO light on the HC ACI board is lit push the FAULT RESET button and the light should go out C Turn the ILO trimpot fully CCW Run the car in the UP direction on Inspection while very slowly turning the ILO trimpot clockwise until the ILO indicator just turns ON After stopping push the FAULT RESET button on the HC ACI board and then set LF 43 parameter to a lower value Run the car on Inspection and increase the inspection speed by increasing the parameter LF 43 to verify that this low speed safety monitor circuit will trip at no higher than 140 fpm or no higher than the maximum available inspection speed if it is less than 140 fpm The circuit should trip when parameter LF 43 equals 23 of Contract Speed or above Check this in both directions The overspeed monitor is now calibrated for less than 150 fpm for Access Inspection and Leveling Turn the Inspection speed parameter LF 43 back to the value recorded in 4 16 1 b 4 16 2 TERMINAL SLOWDOWN LIMIT SWITCHES TORQMAX F5 Make sure that the terminal slowdown limit switches are working properly by doing the following a Place the TEST NORMAL switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position b Disconnect and label the wires from terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 67 Register calls for the terminal landings top and bottom from the controller The car should make a normal slowdown at both terminal landi
321. from the Up Emergency Terminal Limit Switch where it connects to the controller at terminal UET Start the car at the bottom of the hoist way and while running the car in the up direction slowly turn the ETS trimpot CCW until the ETS indicator turns ON and trips the FLT2 FLT relay on the HC ACIF HC ETS board and the car stops Press the ETS reset push button on the HC ACIF HC ETS board to drop the FLT2 FLT relay The ETS indicator should turn OFF and the car should be able to run Repeat d and e in the down direction with the wire from the DET terminal removed The car should stop when it reaches 95 of contract speed Reconnect the wires removed from controller terminals UET and DET when the test is complete FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 10 4 CONTRACT SPEED BUFFER TEST TORQMAX F4 42 02 2P21 4 10 4 1 COUNTER WEIGHT BUFFER TEST WITH EMPTY CAR GOING UP NOTE The car should be at the bottom landing with the TEST NORM switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position To conduct the empty car buffer test going UP a number of functions need to be bypassed using jumpers Follow the steps below a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car Disconnect the Step Up STU
322. g rear SU Supervisory up flag DZ Door zone input Up direction arrow DZORDZ Front or rear door zone input Temporary bit DZP Door zone previous Test switch input DZR Door zone input rear Timing function active ECC Excess car calls flag Timing function active rear ECRN Emergency car run flag Top floor demand flag EPI Emergency power input flag Timed out of service flag EPR Emergency power return Up call flag EPRUN Emergency power run input Up call above flag EPSTP Emergency power stop input Up call below flag FCCC Fire phase 2 car call cancel Up call flag rear FCHLD Fire phase 2 hold Up direction preference FCOFF Fire phase 2 off Upper parking floor flag FCS Fire phase 2 input Up first qualifier flag FCSM Fire service phase 2 input memory Up previous direction FDC Door fully closed phase 2 Up direction output FDCR Door fully closed phase 2 rear Up direction sense input FRA Alternate Fire service phase 1 input Up slow down input FRAS Alternate fire flag Wye simulation bit NIW BH PM IN IN P M JOO JO M jw FRBYP Fire phase 1 bypass input flag FRC Fire phase 2 flag FREE No demand and in service FRM Fire service phase 1 flag FRON Fire phase 1 on input flag FRS
323. g the door approximately 1 inch will remove power from the DPM input due to the switch breaking 5 32 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS Rear Door Position Monitoring Input Makes when the car door is approximately 1 inch from being closed DPMR input will be active once the door fully closes Moving the door approximately 1 inch will remove power from the DPMR input due to the switch breaking DSTI Door Stop Input DSTIR DSTI for rear doors ECRN Emergency Car Freeze Input This input is used with EMP OVL product and will cause the car to freeze allowing others cars to return on emergency power EDS Earthquake Direction Switch Input This input is received from the Direction Switch and is activated when the car is beside the counterweight EDTLS Earthquake Direction Terminal Limit Switch When active this input indicates that the car is above the counterweight When not active this input indicates that the car is below the counterweight EMSC Emergency Medical Switch Car EMSH Emergency Medical Switch Hall EPI Emergency Power Input See Section 5 4 9 5 for more details EPR Emergency Power Return Input This input is used with the EMP OVL product and allows the car to return to the lobby landing on emergency power EPRUN Emergency Power Run Input EPSTP Emergency Power Stop Input EQI Earthquake Input see Section 5 4 9 8 for more detai
324. g troubleshooting steps should be taken Step 1 Check the Communication Time Out Error Counter shown in Table 5 3 Address 42 If the counter is actively counting errors the slave computer is not responding to the dispatcher s request for information If the cause is a communication problem complete Steps 1 4 above Step 2 Check the Communication Checksum Error Counter shown in Table 5 3 Address 43 If the counter is actively counting errors the data being received is bad or does not have integrity and cannot be used by the computer If the cause is a communication problem complete Steps 1 4 above THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 SECTION 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 0 6 1 42 02 2P21 GENERAL INFORMATION MCE s PTC controllers are equipped with certain features that can help field personnel speed up troubleshooting The system is designed so that tracing signals from the field wires onto various boards and into the computer can be achieved without the need for mechanical removal of any components or for rear access to the boards The following pages will describe how to use these features and speed up the troubleshooting process Overall the computer MC PCA board and the program are the most reliable parts of the system The Diagnostic mode on the computer is the most helpful tool for troubleshooting Therefore it is best to start with the computer Refer to Section 5 3 of this manual for instructions on using Diagnostic m
325. ges and Table 5 3 ASME A17 1 2000 Status and Error Messages for a complete listing of these messages including a description and troubleshooting suggestions TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message 2AB REDUNDANCY FAULT Description Monitors the 2AB relay for proper operation If the 2AB relay is ON the R2AB input will be OFF R2AB should always be the opposite of 2AB otherwise the 2AB Redundancy Fault is logged and the elevator shuts down Troubleshooting Check the 2AB relay for proper operation Also check the prints to see where the input R2AB comes in and check 47 K resistor swap ribbon cable and finally try replacing the associated board w relay or HC IOX Alarm 4 times in 60 secs not scrolled Event Calendar only Alarm 4 times in 60 secs Description The alarm has been activated four times in one minute and the car is not moving see ABI Alarm Bell Input option Alarm Car not in DZ not scrolled Event Calendar only Alarm Car not in DZ Description The alarm has been activated while the car is stopped outside of the landing door zone see ABI Alarm Bell Input option ATTENDANT SERVICE OPERATION Description The car is on attendant operation The attendant service input ATS is activated Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and check to see if any spare inputs are programmed as ATS Then check to see if that particular input is activated BAB REDU
326. gh Level speed input C2 Log In 8 TB1 8 Step Ref B3 High speed input C2 Log In 9 TB1 9 S Curve Sel 0 C3 Relay Coil 1 Fault C3 Relay Coil 2 Speed Reg Rls This parameter is very critical for the operation of the brake terminal 54 and 55 contact If the parameters are set at the correct values and the car still does not move then call MCE Technical Support CAR DOES NOT REACH CONTRACT SPEED If the car was operational on Inspection operation but does not reach CONTRACT SPEED verify that the following drive parameters are set correctly C2 Log In TB1 8 Terminal 8 selection Step Ref B3 High speed input A1 Contract Car Spd Elevator contract speed Contract speed in ft min A1 Contract speed RPM Motor Spd at contract speed Motor Full load RPM A3 High speed Speed command 8 Contract speed ft min The above described parameters are for High speed selection When the H relay on the HC RB4 VFAC board is picked the HX relay on the HC ACI should also pick and the drive keypad should display the contract speed If not verify that the voltage between the COM and H terminals on the HC ACI board should be zero when the HX relay is picked Also check the wiring between the HC RB4 VFAC board and the HC ACI board and the wiring between the HC ACI board and the drive unit e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 6 6 3 CAR OVERSHOOTS OR THE DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE ON ACCELERATION If during acceleration the car OVERSHOOTS or tr
327. gram CAR COMMUNICATION CONTROL CCC The Car Communication Control CCC coordinates communication between the individual car controllers in a duplex configuration as well as peripheral devices such as modems printers CRT terminals etc These functions are performed by the MC PCA Main Computer board e PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 42 02 2P21 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 PROGRAMMING AND DIAGNOSTICS TOOLS The PTC is a versatile traction controller and is compatible with most applications This means it allows the user to customize the controller to the building requirements after the unit has been installed The Programming Tool is part of the processing unit MC PCA computer board The list of all of the programmable functions and variables are provided in Section 5 of this manual DUPLEXING Each car is capable of seeing the hall calls and at any time performing the duplexing functions but only one of the cars can process the hall calls and make hall call assignments If the car that is performing the duplexing operation goes out of service the other car will take over the hall call registration and assignment CAR MOTION CONTROL CMC The Car Motion Control CMC develops the speed command which dictates the car s speed The speed signal is in the form of step input signals which are applied to the drive unit The drive responds to the commanded step inputs and runs the elevator at predefined speed settings stored in the drive unit
328. h set The unit will announce each of the floor messages the direction nudging and the fire service messages the special messages are not included in the self test This test does not require the connection of the MCE bus FIGURE G 2 Diagnostic Table DIP SWITCHES DIAGNOSTIC LEDS H OR NOT STC Dip switches switches S2 S3 S4 S5 and S6 are used to select which flags on the TPI are to be displayed switch S2 is used for self test switch S1 is current not used 0 switch is Off and 1 switch is On D2thruD9 diagnostic leds located on the processor board Lit LEDs indicate that one of of the flags listed below D2 thru D9 on the above chart are read as active Example if all switches are off D4 amp D6 are turned on then nudging and main fire service flags are on 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX G FLEX TALK OPTION A 29 G 3 VOLUME CONTROL The trimpots R32 and R33 adjust the main and alternate volume The main volume adjustment R32 controls the floor announcements such as First Floor The alternate volume R33 controls all other announcements such as going up Turning either trimpot fully counter clockwise gives maximum volume The adjustments are easily made with diagnostics switch S2 ON This will activate the messages and allow the time necessary to adjust volume These two trimpots do not effect any music volume that may be connected on J8 Music volume is set external of this unit
329. hat can be damaged this way Note miswiring terminal 39 into 40 can damage the fire warning indicator triac Your HC PCI O and HC CI O E boards are equipped with quick disconnect terminals During the original installation you may want to remove the terminal connector hook up your field wires to it test it for no shorts to ground 1 bus and to terminals 2 3 and 4 before plugging these terminals back into the PC boards The controller should be installed nearest to the hoist motor so that length of the connecting wires should not exceed more than 100 feet If the wire from the controller to the hoist motor is more than 100 feet contact MCE ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS Keep the machine room clean Controllers are generally in NEMA 1 enclosures Do not install the controller in a dusty area Do not install the controller in a carpeted area Keep room temperature between 32 F to 104 F 0 to 40 C Avoid condensation on the equipment Do not install the controller in a hazardous location and where excessive amounts of vapors or chemical fumes may be present Make sure power line fluctuations are within 10 CONTROLLER OR GROUP ENCLOSURES WITH AIR CONDITIONING If your controller or group enclosure is equipped with an air conditioning unit observe the following precautions failure to do so can result in water condensation inside the enclosure e Ensure the integrity of the NEMA 12 or 4 enclosure is maintained by using sealed
330. he and pushbuttons to change the floor Rae number The pushbutton increments the value that al ee is being displayed to the next eligible value The ne a pushbutton decrements the value Press the S pushbutton to move the cursor to the first character of the Security code Press the and pushbuttons to change the value of the first character Repeat these steps pressing the S pushbutton followed by the and pushbuttons until the desired number of characters are programmed maximum of 8 characters The S pushbutton moves the position of the blinking cursor according to the Cae are diagram at the right If any character is left blank or afterall os s s s s eight characters have been programmed and the S 7 E pushbutton is pressed the cursor returns to the floor number Repeat these steps Section 5 6 1 2 to program the Security codes for all the floors You may exit the Building Security Menu at any time during programming by pressing the N pushbutton When the N pushbutton is pressed the LCD will display the following Press the S pushbutton to exit or the N pushbutton to return to the previous display If Sis pressed the following will appear only if changes have been made Press S to save the changes or N to exit without saving any pz original codes will remain in effect if the changes are not saved Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 49 5 6 2 PASSC
331. he HC PCI O board with more than four floors both the HC PCI O board and one or more HC CI O E Call boards The act of physically grounding the call input terminal will illuminate the corresponding call indicator LED on the Call board Latching of the call by the computer recognition and acceptance will cause the indicator to remain lit on the board Cancellation of the call will cause the indicator to turn OFF With the MCE call input output structure the single input output terminal on the HC PCI O or HC Cl O E board will accept a call input from the call fixture and serves as the output terminal which illuminates the call fixture to show registration of the call This means that the field wiring is identical to that which would be used for a standard relay controller Calls may be prevented from latching by the computer in certain circumstances If none of the car calls are allowed to be registered the computer may be purposely preventing these calls from being registered for some reason When the computer prevents car call registration it sets turns ON the Car Call Disconnect CCD flag for that car Inspection of this flag using Diagnostic mode will show if it is the computer itself that is preventing the registration of these calls If the CCD flag is set ON the reason for this CCD condition must be discovered There are many reasons for a CCD condition Fire Service Motor Limit Timer elapsed condition bottom or top floor demand etc
332. he HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board If no problems are found then briefly place a jumper between terminals 2 and 20 on the HC RB4 VFAC board and confirm that the SAF relay turns ON after four seconds If the SAF relay turns OFF after removing the jumper there is a problem with the safety string Note that the RDY relay will turn ON as long as the VFAC drive is in normal condition and there is 15DVC present on the HC ACI board The N C contact of the fault tripping output on the drive is used to pick the RDY relay This contact opens if there is a fault in the VFAC drive unit The fault can be reset by pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the drive reset button on the drive keypad All of the speed commands acceleration deceleration and the S curves are adjusted by setting drive parameters using the drive key pad A complete listing of the G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters is found in Appendix B A parameter sheet listing the parameter settings as shipped from MCE is shipped with each controller If required install a temporary jumper between terminals 4 and 8 to bypass the door locks f the car is on a final limit switch place a jumper between terminals 2 and 16 to bypass the main safety string Remember to remove these jumpers as soon as possible For Flux Vector applications the encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft and its connections must be complete according to the job prints at this time The inspecti
333. he address from 20 to 21 Pressing the pushbutton several more times will change the address to 22 23 24 etc up to 2F and then back to 20 again If the 2 of the address 20 is blinking pressing the pushbutton once will change the address from 20 to 30 Pressing the pushbutton several more times will change the address to 40 50 60 etc up to FO Once the address has reached FO pressing the pushbutton will cause the address to begin back at 00 FUNCTION OF PUSHBUTTON The pushbutton see Figure 5 1 also modifies the digit of the computer memory address selected by the Npushbutton If the pushbutton is pressed the selected digit is decremented by one The data display will also change as the address changes For example If the 0 of address 20 is blinking pressing the pushbutton once will change the address from 20 to 2F Pressing the pushbutton several more times will change the address to 2E 2D 2C etc back to 20 again If the 2 in the address 20 is blinking pressing the pushbutton once will change the address from 20 to 10 Pressing the pushbutton several more times will change the address to 00 FO E0 etc back to 00 Once the address has reached 00 pressing the pushbutton will cause the address to start over at FO FORMAT OF LCD DISPLAY The multi functional alphanumeric LCD display shows the car s status and can also be used for diagnostic purposes to display the contents of the compute
334. he following information pertains to VVMC 1000 PTC Series M controllers with the addition of the POWERBACK R6 Regenerative Drive REGENERATIVE DRIVE INTERFACE The following is an explanation of the POWERBACK R6 Regenerative Drive interface DRIVE INPUTS Drive Enable Terminal 12 This input enables the R6 drive and puts the drive in standby mode Drive parameter ru 0 reads stby during motoring condition and Active during deceleration overhauling conditions A voltage between drive terminals 12 amp 17 of 18 VDC ON 0 VAC OFF Drive Reset Terminal 13 This input resets an R6 drive fault Pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board activates the reset input and clears regenerative drive faults A voltage between drive terminal 13 amp 17 of 18 VDC ON 0 VAC OFF DRIVE OUTPUT Drive ready contact The contacts between terminals 24 and 26 on the R6 drive remain closed under normal condition and open during a fault which drops the RDY relay on the HC ACI board Pressing the Drive Reset button on the HC ACI board should clear the R6 drive fault and should turn ON the RDY relay POWER CONNECTIONS Make sure synchronization cable is connected between the commutation choke and the R6 drive The DC bus connections must be correct and according to the drawings It is critical that DC bus connections be correct Incorrect connections will damage the drive units The line inductor ground connection to the R6 Drive and F5 D
335. he grounding pin with one of the commonly available ground isolation adapter plugs so that the case of the oscilloscope is not at ground potential but at whatever potential the negative probe lead is connected to TREAT THE CASE OF THE OSCILLOSCOPE AS A LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD DEPENDING ON WHERE THE NEGATIVE PROBE IS CONNECTED This recommendation is being made because the ground potential on the grounding pin of the power outlet may not be the same as the controller cabinet ground If it is not substantial ground loop current may flow between the negative probe and the power plug grounding pin which can ruin the oscilloscope t CAUTION Most oscilloscopes have a grounding pin on their power plug We 4 10 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 To achieve a proper start without rollback or snapping away from the floor a variable delay in the application of the speed signal has been provided by adjusting trimpot SPD Speed Pick Delay Trimpot SPD must be adjusted to let the brake just clear the brake drum before attempting to accelerate the car Do this with an empty car The correct setting will be obvious by watching the Drive sheave This was adjusted previously however check trimpot SPD again and make adjustments if necessary The response of the car can be monitored using an oscilloscope by measuring the voltage on the drive terminals 21 and 23 with respect to 22 These signals are 0 10 volt Terminal 21 is programmed for the driv
336. he inverter has to stay supplied with power the cooling time depends on the previous overload time E OL2 Error overload overloading of the inverter at output frequency lt 3 Hz Error no overload cooling time has run out error can be reset Error over potential overvoltage in the DC voltage circuit Error overspeed overspeed can only be reset with Power On Reset Error power unit code invalid power circuit recognition E SEt Error set set selection error check LF 02 Error under potential undervoltage in DC voltage circuit E hSd Error this error occurs when there is a difference between the commanded speed and the actual motor speed for a certain period of time Verify parameter LF 58 and LF 59 Lower Speed Prop LF 31 and Integral Gain LF 32 parameters Verify LF 17 Encoder pulse count Verify LF 11 Motor soeed RPM Reaching Torq limit caused by higher acceleration Load is too high lower the value of LF 36 ee no current flows to the motor check the wiring between motor and inverter 6 26 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 TABLE 6 9 TORQMAX F4 Drive Error State StOP no speed selection speed selection without contactor control TABLE 6 10 TORQMAX F4 Drive Inverter State base block time runs out power modules are blocked for 3s always when control release is cleared ees forward acceleration Foon 66 forward constant running forward deceleration nop o no operation terminal X2 1 is not set
337. heck the encoder feed back by setting LF 30 0 Open loop mode and displaying LF 89 Actual Motor speed in RPM Run the car on Inspection LF 89 should display ve value in one direction and ve value in the other direction The reading should be a steady number and the sign should match that of LF 88 set motor speed in RPM If not change LF 18 to ON or OFF change from previous value Set LF 30 2 Closed loop mode Verify Speed Pick delay Drive parameter LF 70 to Yes ensure that car does not move under brake Trips at start or stop Verify brake picking and holding voltages No If drive trips during acceleration verify that there is enough speed pick Trips on delay drive parameter LF 70 setting so that car does not move under the Normal brake operation If brake is dragging veri and holding voltage No Yes Call MCE No 6 34 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 31 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart E LC Fault E LC Fault Series M TORQMAX E LC fault occurs when the drive is enabled but the main contactors are not closed Verify that the PM contactor picks when direction is picked If the motor is a dual voltage or configurable motor verify that the motor windings are connected correctly for the E LC fault on correct voltage inspection operation Verify that all power connections between the drive contactor and motor are tight Refer to the MCE drawings Verify from
338. hile measuring the voltage signals FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 63 CAUTION Most oscilloscopes have a grounding pin on their power plug We recommend defeating the grounding pin with one of the commonly available ground isolation adapter plugs so that the case of the oscilloscope is not at ground potential but at whatever potential the negative probe lead is connected to TREAT THE CASE OF THE OSCILLOSCOPE AS A LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD DEPENDING recommendation is being made because the ground potential on the grounding pin of the power outlet may not be the same as the controller cabinet ground If it is not substantial ground loop current may flow between the negative probe and the power plug grounding pin which can ruin the oscilloscope ON WHERE THE NEGATIVE PROBE IS CONNECTED This f To achieve a proper start without rollback or snapping away from the floor a variable delay in the application of the speed signal is provided using drive parameter LF 70 Speed Pick Delay Parameter LF 70 must be adjusted to let the brake just clear the brake drum before attempting to accelerate the car Do this with an empty car The correct setting will be obvious by watching the Drive sheave This was adjusted previously however check parameter LF 70 again and make adjustments if necessary The response of the car can be monitored using an oscilloscope by measuring the voltage on the drive terminals X2A 5 and X2A 6 with respect to X2A 8 These signals
339. hoist motor from the Drive when the car is at the floor and stopped with the doors open 14 DYNAMIC BRAKING UNIT optional Whenever required a dynamic braking module will be provided to dissipate the power generated by the car in case of overhauling load 15 POWER RESISTOR CAGE Any power resistors that generate significant heat such as door resistors or Drive system resistors are located in the power resistor cage so their heat does not affect other electrical components Drive System resistors dissipate the power fed back into the VVVF Drive during regeneration i e when the elevator is holding back the load during a full load down operation 1 8 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 42 02 2P21 1 2 CAR CONTROLLER FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Functionally the Control Unit is divided into six sections Figure 1 11 shows these functional blocks and the printed circuit board types associated with each functional block e Car Operation Control e Car Communication Control e Programming and Diagnostics Tools e Duplexing Car Motion Control e VVVF Drive FIGURE 1 11 Car Controller Functional Layout CIRCUIT BOARD COC TYPES TO CAR LANDING OPERATION SYSTEM a TO lt GCC OTHER CAR CAR COMMUNICATION C PCA CONTROL C_PA 3 C P
340. hoots or the Drive Trips on E Ol or E Op on Acceleration 6 25 6 7 4 Drive Trips E op or the Car Overshoots on Deceleration 6 25 6 7 5 Oscillations in the Car at Contract Speed 0002 6 26 6 7 6 Drive Trips Over Voltage by Clipping the Door Locks 6 26 Get Alarms and Pauls eneen Sure orate eet x eae gE ea le Se 6 26 6 7 8 Troubleshooting Flowcharts TORQMAX F4 Drive 6 28 Troubleshooting the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive 000 cece eee eee 6 37 6 8 1 Car Does Not Move on Inspection 0000 eee ee ee 6 37 6 8 2 Car Does Not Reach Contract Speed 0c eee eee 6 38 6 8 3 Car Overshoots or the Drive Trips Over Voltage on Acceleration 6 39 6 8 4 Drive Trips Over Voltage or the Car Overshoots on Deceleration 6 39 6 8 5 Oscillations in the Car at Contract Speed Closed Loop System Only Flux Vector Applications 24 6 0 2s060ad sh dee ek head ew ee ses 6 40 6 8 6 Oscillations in the Car Open Loop System 00 2 000 6 40 6 8 7 Drive Trips Over Voltage by Clipping the Door Locks 6 40 6 8 8 Alarms and Faults 14 wecd nade Goethe wage tod Lede ade Bedehee 6 40 Troubleshooting the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive 0 0c eee eee 6 42 6 9 1 Car the Does Not Move on Inspection 2 000 ee eee ee 6 42 6 9 2 Car Does Not Run Reach Contract Speed 0055 6 44 6 9 3 Car Overshoots or the Drive Trip
341. housing be electrically insulated from the motor machine or other grounds if the encoder is manufactured by BEI An insulated encoder mount has been furnished with the BEI encoder This type of mount however may not be practical for this application Predicting which type of mounting will work best for all installations is impossible therefore the best method for mounting the encoder and coupling it to the motor must be determined at the job site The Encoder wiring must use a separate grounded conduit Make sure that the encoder housing is electrically isolated from the machine ground To check this place one ohmmeter lead on the frame of the machine and one lead on the case of the encoder FIGURE 2 8 Typical Encoder Installations HOIST MOTOR 5 TYPICAL MOUNTING 9 PIN BRACKET D CONNECTOR VELOCITY ENCODER HOIST MOTOR HOIST MOTOR ISOLATOR SHAFT VELOCITY ENCODER SHAFT BUSHING PHENOLIC ISOLATOR FLEXIBLE COUPLING DN 4271 RO DNaiOT nO Connect the Encoder to the Flux Vector Drive Unit using the shielded cable provided see drawing D in the job prints Run this cable to the controller in a separate conduit Connect the cable to the Encoder using the connector provided Connect the other end of the cable to the AC Drive using the phoenix terminals provided The cable shield will not be connected to any ground or case but connected as shown on print 1 D 2 10 INSTALLATION 42 02
342. hronization Operation message 5 13 System Mode 5 48 5 50 System Out of Service message 5 13 6 14 T TEMPB Temporary bit flag 5 17 terminal slowdown limit switches G5 GPD515 Drive 4 14 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 27 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 39 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 67 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 54 Test mode 4 3 4 4 TEST Test switch input flag 5 17 INDEX l 7 TEST Test Switch Input option 5 35 TFA Timing function active flag 5 17 TFAR Timing function active rear flag 5 17 TFD Top floor demand flag 5 17 Time Out of Service message 5 13 6 14 TIME OUT OF SVCE TIMER option 5 30 TIMER MENU OPTIONS 5 29 TM switch installation of 2 12 Top Floor Demand message 5 7 6 14 TOP LANDING SERVED option 5 23 TORQMAX F4 Drive 6 30 6 32 36 6 49 6 51 6 53 55 acceleration deceleration rates 4 32 alarms and faults 6 26 6 28 Brake does not pick troubleshooting flowchart 6 32 6 51 buffer tests 4 41 Car does not move troubleshooting flowchart 6 33 Critical Drive Parameters troubleshooting flowchart 6 29 6 48 critical parameters 3 16 Drive Key Pad flowchart 6 28 drive parameters table A 21 A 23 E LC Fault troubleshooting flowchart 6 35 6 54 emergency terminal limit switch monitor 4 40 Encoder Fault troubleshooting flowchart 6 34 6 53 excessive electrical noise 4 38 Excessive motor noise troubleshooting flowchart 6 36 6 55 Final Adjustments 4 38 Final Inspection Procedure 4 43 governor over
343. ic and selects the type of learn operation to be performed depending on the type of load weigher installed 5 4 9 29 IND BYPASS SECURITY YES NO This option determines if Elevator Security is bypassed when the car is on Independent Service available only when Security is enabled 5 4 9 30 ATS BYPASS SECURITY YES NO This option determines if Elevator Security should be bypassed when the car is on Attendant Service available only when Security and Attendant Service are enabled 5 4 9 31 CAR TO FLOOR RETURN FLOOR This option determines the floor to which the car will be returned when the CAR TO FLOOR input is activated see CTF in Spare Inputs Menu Options 5 4 9 32 SCROLLING SPEED SLOW NORMAL FAST Menu options which are too long to be fully displayed on the LCD display are scrolled This option determines the scrolling speed 5 4 9 33 OFRP BETWEEN FLRS This option indicates the floors in between which the OFRP spare output would trigger Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 43 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 44 EXTERNAL MEMORY MODE External Memory mode can be used to view memory addresses in the external RAM on the MC PCA board The external memory address is denoted by the letters DA Data Address The ability to view the external memory can also be helpful for diagnosing and troubleshooting the elevator system The Computer External Memory Chart Table 5 6 shows the meaning of the d
344. ided for convenience 3 4 s START UP 42 02 2P21 3 4 3 4 1 O 42 02 2P21 HC ACIF BOARD DETAILS This board is only used for vector applications or jobs with intermediate speed Trimpots ETS Emergency Terminal limit Speed adjust This trimpot sets the emergency terminal limit speed threshold which will shut down the elevator in case the elevator s speed at terminal limits is greater than the threshold speed Turning the trimpot CCW sets the threshold speed lower Turning CW sets the threshold speed higher This trimpot functions based on feedback from the speed sensor which is also used for the ILO fault Indicators ETS FAULT Emergency Terminal limit overspeed fault When the elevator operates opens either ETS switch and detects car speed in excess of the threshold speed set by the ETS trimpot an ETS fault is generated This causes the ETS fault indicator to turn ON and picks the FLT2 relay which shuts down the elevator To restore operation press the ETS Fault reset push button on the HC ACIF board and investigate any problems before returning the car to the service AS FAULT At Speed Fault indicator This indicator will turn ON if the elevator s speed exceeds the maximum or minimum limits set for contract speed DBF FAULT Dynamic Braking Fault This indicator will turn ON if the dynamic braking temperature exceeds its threshold Push Buttons ETS RESET This switch resets the Emergency Termin
345. iewing Menus on the LCD Display 5 20 5 4 1 2 Viewing Options Within a Menu 00200 cea 5 21 5 4 1 3 Changing a Value aana ee es 5 21 5 4 1 4 Saving the New Values 0 00 5 21 5 4 1 5 Restoring Original Values 0 00000 e eee eee 5 22 5 4 1 6 Step by step Example 00 0 es 5 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS v 5 4 2 Basic Feature Menu Options 020 c eee ee 5 23 5 4 2 1 Simplex or Duplex ssc geen cr ee ae ae te el ee ee a 5 23 5 4 2 2 Operation Dispatching Operation 0000 5 23 5 4 2 3 Top Landing Served 0 2 5 23 5 4 2 4 Car Doors Are Walk thru 0 0 0 2 0000 e eee ee 5 23 5 4 2 5 Car Serves Frnt flr 1 ace iods ctnn ota deere ea auc ca 5 23 5 4 2 6 Car Serves Rear flr1 0 0 5 23 5 4 2 7 Parking Floor coeeis es iaeag Sale na eit wena a healed 5 24 5 4 2 8 Alt Parking Fl00rs 2283 Sees ecuhacae ew ace sada Ss eowcaa wake 5 24 5 4 2 9 Secondary Parking Floor 2uwsa swss ewan ewiese eae be Se ee 5 24 5 4210 lobby FIOO ccc aramee dh desaacandesnarand eabatandee 5 24 5 4 2 11 Car Identifier 250 6 taGan ace bavanedehavanecebavaraee 5 24 5 4 2 12 Number of IOX Boards 0000 eee ee 5 24 5 4 2 13 Number of 140 Boards 0 00000 eee 5 24 5 4 2 14 Number of AIOX Boards 0000 eee ee 5 24 5 4 5 Fire Service Menu Options so 2 5 8 me ces Seb Se we Baws 5 24 5 4 3 1 Fire Service Operati
346. igh Speed to Zero Speed With parameter C1 11 set to 0 0 Hz parameters C1 07 and C1 08 have no affect on acceleration or deceleration FIGURE 4 6 Acceleration and Deceleration Rate Parameters Yaskawa F7 Acceleration C1 01 3 00 f s default range 0 01 to 8 00 C1 07 C1 01 Deceleration C1 02 3 00 f s default range 0 01 to 8 00 C1 08 C1 02 Acceleration Deceleration Switching Level C1 11 0 0 4 11 3 ADJUSTING THE S CURVES YASKAWA F7 The S curve parameters P1 04 thru P1 19 adjust the transition S curve smoothness at the start and end of acceleration and deceleration known as jerk points see Figure 4 5 The S curve parameter values are in ft s Decreasing the value decreases the rate of z change and causes a smoother longer transition Note m vee Setting deceleration S curves too low will cause the car to Seu ane overshoot jerk point smoothing Smooth operation of the elevator requires that different S curves be used at different points on the velocity curve The factor determining which S curve is used is the velocity range There are four velocity ranges defined by parameters P1 01 P1 02 and P1 03 see Figure 4 5 It is important that the correct S curve be selected for adjustment see Table 4 9 and Figure 4 5 4 46 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 TABLE 4 10 TABLE 4 9 Yaskawa F7 Curve Selection Table Table for Selection of S Curves Range Velocity Hz Start Acc
347. inal 13 Tesi ana o0 B 0 i Signal selection terminal 16 7 Be Os Tem Ie Signal 9 010 10VDG 1 10 to 10VDC ne 0 ele Multi function analog input selection terminal x H3 05 Terminal 16 Sel 16 1F Not Used 0 1F 1F B 1F H3 06 Terminal 16 Gain Reference gain terminal 16 0 0 1000 0 100 0 B 100 H3 07 Terminal 16 Bias Reference bias terminal 16 z eee oo B 0 H4 Analog Outputs 2 Analog output selection terminal 21 7 H4 01 Terminal 21 Sel same as F4 01 1 Frequency Ref 1 31 1 B 1 H4 02 Terminal 21 Gain Analog output gain terminal 21 0 00 2 50 1 00 B 1 0 H4 03 Terminal 21 Bias Analog output bias terminal 21 10 0 10 0 0 0 B 0 0 i Analog output selection terminal 23 7 a H4 04 Terminal 23 Sel 2 Output Freq 1 31 2 B 2 H4 05 Terminal 23 Gain Analog output gain terminal 23 0 00 2 50 1 00 B 1 0 H4 06 Terminal 23 Bias Analog output bias terminal 23 10 0 10 0 0 0 B 0 0 Analog output level selection P H4 07 AO Level Select 0 Oto 10V 1 10 to 10V 0 1 0 B 0 PROTECTION L1 Motor Overload Motor protection fault selection OL1 i L1 01 MOL Fault Select 0 Disabled 1 Coast to Stop 0 1 0 B 1 L1 02 MOL Time Const _ Motor protection time constant min 1 0 20 0 1 0 B 1 0 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 9 is 3 MCE V f Field No ear ee Parameter Description Unit aes Drive MCE isp ay ange Defaults Set
348. inals 16 and 17 which bypasses the safety plank SOS switch FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 17 n Properly reinstall the relays FLT on the HC ACI and AS and ETL on HC ACIF board These relays were removed or partially removed from their respective sockets O Put the car on Normal operation by taking the car off Inspection After the elevator finds a floor verify the operation of the elevator by registering calls and checking the speed 4 4 6 PHASE LOSS DETECTION TESTS G5 GPD515 The VFAC Drive Unit is programmed to detect a motor phase loss Parameters L8 05 and L8 07 are enabled which will activate the drive input and output phase loss detection To test for proper tripping of the drive output phase loss connection between the drive and motor attempt to run the elevator on Inspection with one motor lead disconnected The Drive should trip off dropping the RDY relay and the brake The drive should display LF Output phase loss A manual reset of the Drive on the HC ACI board will be needed to return to Normal operation Reconnect the motor lead and return the controls to Normal operation If input phase loss is required disconnect any one of the three legs of the three phase MCE controller When either L1 or L2 is removed the drive will not function because the drive s control supply comes from L1 and L2 If either L2 or L3 is removed then the MCE controller will not function because the controller transformer is supplied by L2 and L3 If
349. ing Bypass the Emergency Terminal Up Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and UET on the HC ACIF board Bypass the Up terminal slowdown and Up Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Register a car call for the top terminal landing from the controller The counter weight will strike the buffer Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the down direction to move the car Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 and reconnect the wire to terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Reseat the FLT relay 4 16 4 2 CAR BUFFER TEST WITH A FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car Disconnect the Step Down STD input by removing the wire from terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting Bypass the Emergency Terminal Down Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and DET on the HC ACIF board Bypass the Down terminal slowdown and Down Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Position the elevator several floors above the bottom landing
350. ing quality wiring materials and methods should be used All grounding in the elevator system must conform to all applicable codes Proper grounding is essential for system safety and helps to reduce noise induced problems The following are some grounding guidelines FIGURE 2 3 The grounding wire to the equipment cabinet should be as large as or larger than the primary AC power feeders for the controller and should be as short as possible The grounding between equipment cabinets may be branching or a daisy chain but the wire must terminate at the last controller and NOT loop back see Figure 2 3 Ground Wiring to Controller Cabinets a Acceptable b Acceptable c Not Acceptable Direct solid grounding must be provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and the motor see Figure 2 4 Indirect grounding such as the building structure or a water pipe may not provide proper grounding and could act as an antenna radiating RFI noise thus disturbing sensitive equipment in the building Improper grounding may also render an RFI filter ineffective The conduit containing the AC power feeders must not be used for grounding 2 6 INSTALLATION 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 2 4 Ground Wiring Note Grounding of the WYE secondary Drive Isolation Transformer if used of the Drive Isolation Transformer should be accomplished according to the drive Primary Secondary manufacturer s recommendations vas AC Dri
351. ing method at DEV detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Rotation sel PG rotation 0 CCW 1 CW PG output ratio PG division rate Set at drive defaults Ref detection Spd Agree Level Speed agree det level L4 01 E1 06 Spd Agree width Speed agree det width Torque limits Set at Factory defaults 3 8 e START UP 42 02 2P21 3 4 3 MOVING THE CAR ON INSPECTION OPERATION G5 GPD515 42 02 2P21 WARNING The motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied to the controller even when the motor is not rotating Do not open the drive cover for 5 10 minutes after removing the AC power to allow the capacitors to discharge Use extreme caution Do not touch any circuit board power device or electrical connection without insuring that high voltage is not present Once all the steps described in Sections 3 3 1 3 4 1 and 3 4 2 are accomplished then proceed with the following a Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Turn ON the main power disconnect The RPI relay will pick and after few seconds the SAF relay should pick the LED on the relay will be lit On the HC ACI board relays RDY and CNP must also be picked If none of the relays have been picked inspect fuse F4 on the controller s back plate Verify that there is 120 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 on t
352. ing the associated ETS limit switches The emergency terminal limit switch monitor performs this function Normally the jobs which come under the above requirements will have the HC ACIF or HC ETS board installed in the controller Both boards have the ETS monitor circuit This circuit receives the signal from the hall effect sensor and the magnets installed on the motor shaft or brake drum as described in Section 2 3 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor a Make sure that all the wiring from the speed sensor to the HC ACIF board is complete b Turn the ETS trimpot on the HC ACIF HC ETS board fully CW C On a multi floor run adjust the speed of the car to 95 of the contract speed by adjusting the High speed A3 Speed Command 8 parameter d Remove the wire from the Up Emergency Terminal Limit Switch where it connects to the controller at terminal UET Start the car at the bottom of the hoist way and while running the car in the up direction slowly turn the ETS trimpot CCW until the ETS indicator turns ON and trips the FLT2 FLT relay on the HC ACIF HC ETS board and the car stops e Press the ETS reset push button on the HC ACIF HC ETS board to drop the FLT2 FLT relay The ETS indicator should turn OFF and the car should be able to run f Repeat d and e in the down direction with the wire from the DET terminal removed The car should stop when it reaches 95 of contract speed Reconnect the wires removed from controller t
353. input This timer determines the amount of time that the doors will stay open when the door hold open button is pressed The timer will be canceled and the doors will begin to close if either the Door Close button or a Car Call button is pressed If a Door Hold Key switch instead of a button is connected to the DHLD input this timer value should be set to 0 so that the doors will close when the switch is turned to the OFF position 5 4 5 10 PARKING DELAY TIMER Range 0 0 6 0 Minutes This timer is used only if a parking floor is selected see Sections 5 4 2 7 and 5 4 2 8 The timer starts when the car is free of call demand The car will not park until the timer elapses 5 4 5 11 FAN LIGHT OUTPUT TIMER Range 1 0 10 0 Minutes Used with the FLO output This timer sets the amount of time that will pass before the FLO output will be activated The time will start when the car becomes inactive The FLO output should be connected to a relay that when activated will turn OFF the fan and light within the car 5 4 5 12 HOSPITAL EMERG TIMER Range 0 0 10 0 Minutes This timer sets the amount of time that the car will remain at the hospital emergency floor with the doors open before automatically returning to normal service refer to Section 5 4 9 19 5 4 5 13 DOOR OPEN PROTECTION TIMER Range 8 30 Seconds This timer determines how long the door operator will attempt to open the doors If DOL does not go low within this time the door
354. int to the root of the problem Once the computer has determined the answer to the door status question the appropriate outputs are turned ON and or OFF to attempt to cause the doors to be in the desired state The computer looks at the following inputs DBC Door Close Button Input DCLC Door Closed Contacts Input Retiring Cam only DLK Door Locks Input DOB Door Open Button Input DOL Door Open Limit Input DZ Door Zone Input PHE Photo Eye Input SE Safety Edge Input The computer generates the following outputs DCF Door Close Function Output DCP Door Close Power Output DOF Door Open Function Output 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 3 6 4 Associated important computer generated logic flags CCT Car Call Time Flag DOI Door Open Intent Flag DSH Door Shortening Intermediate Flag DSHT Door Shortening Final Flag HCT Hall Call Time Flag LOT Lobby Call Time Flag SDT Short Door Time Flag The computer uses the flags and inputs listed above to make a decision concerning the desired state of the doors This decision has only two possible goals doors open or doors closed The computer s answer to this question is reflected in the state of the Door Open Intent DOI flag If the computer recognizes a valid reason either to open the doors or keep the doors open it will set turn ON this internal flag This flag can be seen by using Diagnostic mode on the computer When inspecting this flag usi
355. ints is approximately 24 VDC when the direction relays are not picked If all the functions described in the above steps are working properly and the car still does not move then verify the drive parameters and compare them with the drive parameter sheet which was shipped with the controller The motor name plate values should match the entered motor parameters Some of the following parameters if not set properly can prevent the car from moving on Inspection CAUTION Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running The following are very critical TORQMAX F5 parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation LF 02 bnSPd Signal Operating Mode e LF 30 2 Closed loop 0 open loop LF 04 0 Induction motor A LF 31 Kp Speed Accel Proportional gain LF 10 Rated motor power HP d LF 31 Kp Speed Decel Proportional gain LF 11 Rated motor speed rpm e A LF 32 Ki Speed Accel Integral gain LF 12 Rated motor current Amp e d LF 32 Ki Speed Decel Integral gain LF 13 Rated motor frequency Hz e A LF 33 Ki Speed Offset Accel Low speed gain LF 14 Rated motor voltage d LF 33 Ki Speed Offset Decel Low speed gain LF 20 Contract speed fpm e LF 42 High Speed FPM LF 21 Traction sheave diameter inches e LF 43 Inspection speed FPM LF 22 Gear Reduction ratio LF 44 High leveling speed FPM LF 23 Roping Ratio LF 45 Intermediate speed FPM LF 24 Load Weight Ibs n LF 51 Accelerati
356. ion verify that there is enough speed pick Yes delay drive parameter LF 70 setting so that car does not move under the brake Trips on Normal operation If brake is dragging i icking and holding Yes Call MCE No No 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING s 6 53 FIGURE 6 39 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart E br Fault E br Fault Series M TORQMAX E LC fault occurs when the drive is enabled but the main contactors are not closed Verify that the PM contactor picks when direction is picked If it is dual voltage or configurable motor then verify motor windings are configured for the correct voltage E br fault on fy th d b inspection operation Verify t ere is no loose power connections between drive contactor and motor Refer to MCE drawings Verify from the drive interface that the PM Aux contact 4 is in series with the drive enable and direction inputs If not then call MCE for the PMX mod kit Normal operation and it still trips E br fault intermittently If all four items described above are correct then the PM contactor may be defective 6 54 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 40 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart Excessive motor noise Excessive Motor Noise Series M TORQMAX The overhauling energy is dissipated among the dynamic braking resistors Noise is due to the switching of the dynamic braking IGBT to dissipate excessive energy in power resistors during o
357. ion Sec 0 01 2 5 1 05 B x P1 12 S Crv Acc Start 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P1 13 S Crv Accend3__ S Curve 3 at the End of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 1 2 B x P1 14 S Crv Dec Start 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 5 B x P1 15 S Crv DecEnd3_ S Curve 3 at the End of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 9 B 0 9 P1 16 S Crv Acc Start 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P1 17 S Crv Acc End 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Acceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 1 2 B P1 18 S Crv Dec Start 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 5 B P1 19 S Crv Dec End 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Deceleration Sec 0 01 2 5 0 2 B 0 2 P2 Stop Start Do not change these parameters They are not used for elevator applications P3 Fault Auto Reset P3 01 Num Auto Resets Number of Automatic Resets 0 10 3 A 3 P3 02 Auto Reset Time Time Delay Between Automatic resets sec 0 5 10 0 3 0 A 3 0 NOTE The MagneTek and IDM drive software has been modified for this application some of the parameters in this sheet are different and are not available in the drive manuals If a drive has been replaced in the field then all the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to this parameter sheet A Advance B Basic kk kkkk kkkkk kkkkkk kkkkkkk Must be set correctly for your specific motor machine job Refer to the adjustment
358. ions the encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft and its connections must be complete according to the job prints at this time The inspection speed is set by drive parameter D1 17 in FPM For flux vector applications set D1 17 initial setting to slowly move the car amp to prevent arcing on the contactors during initial start up Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Verify that the drive is in OPERATION mode Run the car in the desired direction by toggling the UP DN toggle switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board The PM contactor and the BR contactor should pick and the car should move Make sure that the car moves in the appropriate direction and the brake works properly START UP 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 h If the car moves in the opposite direction e for open loop applications interchange two of the motor leads for flux vector applications display the OUTPUT CURRENT on the drive keypad by pressing the UP arrow twice Pick direction on Inspection and check the following 1 If the car moves in the opposite direction and draws a normal value of current less than the Motor FLA or approximately 30 to 40 of motor FLA then perform the following steps a Turn the controller power OFF Interchange two of the motor connections b Turn the controller power ON Set parameter F1 05 CCW if its original setting is CW If the original setting was CCW then set F1 05 to CW The car shoul
359. ips on OVER VOLTAGE then check the following Q NOTE Itis mandatory to have 40 counterweight 1 Decrease drive parameter A2 ACC Rate 0 to decrease the acceleration 2 Verify the parameters described in section 6 6 1 A1 Response A1 Inertia A1 Inner Loop Xover are set correctly 3 Turn off the power and wait for 5 minutes so the DC bus voltage is not present in the dynamic braking circuit Using an voltmeter verify that not voltage is present then verify the value of the dynamic braking resistor with the job prints and check for any loose connection 6 6 4 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE OR THE CAR OVERSHOOTS ON DECELERATION If the drive trips on over voltage during deceleration or overshoots the floors then check the following 1 Verify that all the items described in Section 6 6 3 items 2 and 3 and the counter weight are set properly 2 Verify that High Level speed Level speed Intermediate speed if required are set as described in Section 4 5 1 3 Increase the deceleration parameter A2 Decel Rate 0 and verify that the High Level and Level speeds are adjusted to provide a smooth transition from high speed to leveling speed 4 If the value of parameter A2 Lev Jerk Rate 0 is too high it can cause the car to overshoot and relevel 5 If all the items described above are set properly and the car still overshoots consult the Drive manual If the problem still exists then increase the slow down distance on a couple of
360. iption Unit Range Defaults Set E1 08 Mid Voltage A Mid Output Voltage N A to Flux Vector V 0 0 255 0 16 1 32 2 x E1 09 Min Frequency Minimum Output Frequency N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 0 5 0 5 E1 10 Min Voltage Minimum Output Voltage N A to Flux Vector V 0 0 255 0 10 0 20 0 x VOLTAGE A Vmax 1 05 Vmid E1 08 Vmin _ E1 10 gt FREQUENCY Fmin Fmid FA Fmax E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 Motor Rated FLA Motor Setup Set to motor nameplate full load amps This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded 0 00 1500 0 Motor rated FLA Motor Rated Slip Motor rated slip frequency Note Refer to the attached table to calculate the slip frequency 0 15 0 kVA dependent No Load Current Motor No Load Current 0 150 30 50 Motor FLA Number of Poles PG Pulse Rev Number of Motor Poles PG Option Setup Flux Vector only Encoder pulses per revolution Flux Vector only Flux Vector only 2 48 PG Fdbk Loss Sel Flux Vector only Stoping method at PG line brake detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Overspeed Sel Flux Vector only Stoping method at OS detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Deviation Sel Flux Vector only Stoping method at DEV fault detection 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fa
361. iption of normal and abnormal conditions When the LCD displays NORMAL in the car status field the system is ready for normal operation A complete listing of the status and error messages their meaning probable cause and needed response are found in Table 5 2 Error Status Messages and Response Chart The computer displays abnormal conditions in the same priority that the computer evaluates them For example if the safety string is open and the system is also on Fire Service the computer will first show that the safety string is open and will expect this problem to be corrected first When the safety circuit problem has been corrected and the computer has recognized the safety input the diagnostics will then show the Fire Service indication After successfully bringing in the Fire Service input the computer will then show NORMAL on the LCD display provided that the system is not on some other function such as Independent Service or Car Top Inspection operation The display will show NORMAL only if everything is normal If the LCD display is showing any other message an abnormal condition exists 4 1 4 A FEW WORDS ABOUT ABSOLUTE FLOOR ENCODING Absolute floor encoding is an option which allows the controller to read encoding vanes or magnets at each landing and thereby identify the floor If the absolute floor encoding option is provided the behavior of the car when power is turned ON is different than without absolute floor encoding JOB
362. ir sockets Bypass the Governor OVER SPEED switch by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and 15 on the HC RB4 VFAC board In order to observe the loss of traction when the safety mechanism sets connect a jumper between terminals 16 and 17 on the HC RB4 VFAC board to bypass the safety plank SOS switch Turn the power ON and verify that the controller is functional Note write down the value of drive parameters LF 20 and LF 42 Torun the car at 125 of its original speed set parameters LF 20 and LF 42 to 125 of the original setting If the trip point is greater than 150 skip steps g h and i and use other means to over speed the car Register a car call in the down direction but not for the bottom landing The car should travel at 125 of Contract Speed The governor should trip and set the safety and stop the car Put the car on Inspection Reset the AC drive parameters LF 20 and LF 42 to their original value contract speed value Reset the mechanical governor and inspect the hoist ropes to make sure they are in the proper grooves Move the car UP on Inspection to release the flexible guide clamp safety or release the car safety by hand if it is a wedge type clamp Remove the jumper from terminals 2 and 15 which bypasses the governor overspeed switch FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 o Remove the jumper from terminals 16 and 17 which bypasses the safety plank SOS switch p Properly reinstall the relays FL
363. istered anti nuisance If the programmed number of car calls is exceeded all car calls will be canceled Example LLW 20 If the measured load in the car is less than 20 the computer will only allow a certain number of car calls to be registered defined by the parameter LIGHT LOAD WEIGHING LIGHT LOAD CAR CALL LIMIT in the EXTRA FEATURES MENU OPTIONS If the limit is set to a value of three the computer will only allow three calls to be registered if the load is less than 20 If a fourth call is registered all car calls will be canceled DISPATCH LOAD WEIGHER DLW This value is used to define the load at which the lobby landing door timer is reduced This threshold should be set to a value defined in many specifications as 60 at which it is appropriate to initiate the process of moving the car out of the lobby HEAVY LOAD WEIGHER HLW This value is used to define the load value at which hall calls should be bypassed OVERLOAD WEIGHER OLW This value is used to define the load at which it is considered unsafe to move the elevator When this threshold is exceeded the car will remain at the floor with doors open Typically an application that requires OLW will use some type of visual and or audible indicator to alert elevator passengers that the car is overloaded This operation is overridden by Fire Service operation OVERLOAD 2 WEIGHER OLW2 When on Fire Service this value is used instead of the Overload Weigher value see
364. istway doors closed and locked there is power on the DLS input and no power present on the DCL input ONT DOOR OPEN LIMIT FAILURE Description The door open limit switch has failed open Troubleshooting Ensure that the car gate is open there is no power on the DOL input and no power is present on the DLS or CD inputs ONT GATE SWITCH FAILURE NYCHA Description The front car gate switch has failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the front car gate closed there is power on the GS input and no power present on the DCL input GOVERNOR SWITCH OPEN Traction only Governor Switch Open Description The overspeed governor has activated opening the safety circuit Troubleshooting Check the overspeed governor HALL AND CAR CALL BUSES DISCONNECTED Description A problem in the wiring or fuses There is no power to the call circuits on the HC Cl O E and HC PCI O board s Troubleshooting Check the Call Bus fuses Check the wires that go to the Call Power inputs on the HC PCI O amp HC CI O E board s in the controller HALL CALL BUS IS DISCONNECTED Bus Fuse Blown 2H Description A problem in the wiring or fuses There is no power to the Hall Call circuits on the HC Cl O E and HC PCI O board s Troubleshooting Check the Hall Call Bus fuse Check the wires that go to the Hall Call Power inputs on the HC PCI O amp HC Cl O E board s in the controller AVY LOAD WEIGHER CONDITION Description The HLI i
365. it at the end of the run The strength and duration of this DC braking current is programmable using parameters B2 02 and B2 04 on the VFAC Drive Unit and to start with should be set at 50 and 0 5 respectively 50 current and 0 5 second duration A sharper and stronger electric stop is provided by increasing B2 02 and a softer stop by decreasing B2 02 The duration of the DC injection braking must be less than the dropout time of the contactor s which disconnect the motor from the VFAC Drive Unit This assumes that the contactor s will open under zero current conditions For Flux Vector applications DC injection braking is not required for stopping All B2 parameters must be set to the factory default settings With the method of providing an electric stop as indicated above provide a delay in dropping the brake by turning the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot clockwise The idea is to hold the brake up long enough to allow the motor to be stopped electrically and then drop the brake immediately the instant the motor has stopped If there is too long of a delay before dropping the brake the control system will release its control of the motor and the motor will drift briefly in the direction of the load before the brake is forced to drop by the PT relay The BDD trimpot controls the dropping of the brake through the BE relay Move the LU and LD sensors or switches closer together or further apart so the car stops at the same location up or down
366. itches TORQMAX F5 4 67 4 16 3 Emergency Terminal Limit Switch Monitor TORQMAX F5 4 68 4 16 4 Contract Speed Buffer Test TORQMAX F5 2 0002 e ee 4 69 4 16 5 Governor and Car Safety Tests TORQMAX F5 4 70 4 16 6 Phase Loss Detection Tests TORQMAX F5 00000 eee 4 71 iv TABLE OF CONTENTS 42 02 2P21 SECTION 5 THE COMPUTER 42 02 2P21 5 0 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 About the PTC Series nnna anann 5 1 The MC PCA Computer Panel annaa a anaana 5 1 5 1 1 INGIGALONS iaa a a E ee R E E E 5 1 5 1 1 1 Computer on Light iiak tee weds islet nee sada eae teed 5 1 5 1 1 2 Vertical Status Indicator Lights 0 220 00 ea ee 5 1 5 1 1 3 Diagnostics LCD Display 2 0000 eee eee 5 2 5 1 2 Switches Buttons amp Adjustments 0 000 eee ees 5 2 5 1 2 1 Computer Reset Pushbutton 00000 ee aee 5 2 5 1 2 2 N S and Pushbuttons 0 00 0 5 2 5 1 2 3 Mode Selection F1 F8 Function Switches 5 3 5 1 2 4 LCD Contrast Adjustment Trimpot 00000 5 3 51 3 TermindlS ovsi5e08cacee wh gated oben E E abet eed tebdaawed ars 5 3 5 1 3 1 Power Supply Terminal 000 c eee ees 5 3 5 1 3 2 Communication Port for Duplexing 000 ae 5 3 513 3 Com Por Wand 2 2 seuraa ee ad wedded wink a ene 5 3 5 1 4 Status Displays fete ieee eee etl teh Oe ee Mere 5 3 COMP
367. ive actions To restart the inverter remove any run command and turn ON the reset input signal or press the RESET key on the digital operator or cycle power to reset the stop status If taking the recommended corrective actions described does not solve the problem contact MCE immediately Unlike faults alarms do not activate fault contact outputs After the cause of the alarm is corrected the inverter returns to its former operation status automatically In the Fault Diagnosis and Corrective Actions table in the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive manual faults and alarms are classified as follows e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FAULT AND ALARM CLASSIFICATIONS Motor coasts to a stop operation indicator lights and fault Major Fault contact output terminals MA amp MB is activated Operation continues operation indicator lights and multi Fault function fault signal is output when multi function output is selected Fault contact output is not activated Operation cannot be performed and operation indicator lights C Alarm warning but no fault signal is output TABLE 6 6 Fault Diagnosis and Corrective Actions supplement to table in Drive manual D1 02 gt D1 07 gt D1 03 gt D1 05 gt 0 0 and within the Maximum specified values Enter the correct value of the parameter while OPE40 Invalid Parameter Preset speed reference Ble LIMIT Drops parameters accessing the program mode and then reset the drive The fault should clear OPE4
368. k Out 0 parameters to get the car to approach the floor correctly as the car speed increases Adjust the Acceleration rate A2 Accel Rate 0 and Acceleration Jerk A2 Accel Jerk In 0 A2 Accel Jerk Out 0 parameters until the desired acceleration rate is achieved Several runs may be required to obtain optimum acceleration The acceleration rate should be about the same as the deceleration rate To observe the commanded speed and the drive output with an oscilloscope or a chart recorder monitor drive terminal 33 and 35 with respect to 34 Take all necessary precautions while measuring the voltage signals FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 23 CAUTION Most oscilloscopes have a grounding pin on their power plug We recommend defeating the grounding pin with one of the commonly available ground isolation adapter plugs so that the case of the oscilloscope is not at ground potential but at whatever potential the negative probe lead is connected to TREAT THE CASE OF THE OSCILLOSCOPE AS A LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD DEPENDING ON WHERE THE NEGATIVE PROBE IS CONNECTED This recommendation is being made because the ground potential on the grounding pin of the power outlet may not be the same as the controller cabinet ground If it is not substantial ground loop current may flow between the negative probe and the power plug grounding pin which can ruin the oscilloscope f To achieve a proper start without rollback or snapping away from the floor a v
369. k the following 1 Verify that relay CNP and RDY on the HC ACI board are ON if not refer to step 2 a below Contactors PM Main and BR Brake should pick when the direction relays U1 and U2 or D1 and D2 are picked If PM and BR do not pick check the related circuit as shown in the controller drawings Check to see if any fault is displayed on the drive keypad before and after picking direction on Inspection When direction is picked on Inspection relays PT1 and PT2 on the HC ACI board should pick If these relays are not picking check for 120VAC on terminals 8 10 and 12 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board If there is no voltage on these terminals refer to the controller drawings to find the problem 2 To verify that the drive receives the direction enable and inspection speed command signals from the HC ACI board do the following To verify the drive enable signal select parameter LF 99 and pick direction on Inspection The drive display should change from noP to Facc or rAcc If it does not display Facc or rAcc follow the controller drawings and verify the connection to terminal X2A 16 Enable terminal To verify the commanded speed signal select either parameter LF 88 or LF 86 and pick direction on Inspection If LF 88 is selected the drive key pad should display the inspection speed Motor RPM value To verify the direction input signal display parameter LF 99 and pick UP direction on Inspection The drive key
370. knockouts and by sealing any holes created during installation Do not run the air conditioner unit when the doors are open e To avoid damaging the compressor if the air conditioner is turned off while it is running wait at least five minutes before turning power on again e Observe the manufacture s recommended maintenance and optimum thermostat setting of 75 F see Operator s Manual e Ensure the air conditioner unit s drain hose remains open TABLE OF CONTENTS 42 02 2P21 LIMITED WARRANTY Motion Control Engineering manufacturer warrants its products for a period of 15 months from the date of shipment from its factory to be free from defects in workmanship and materials Any defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear Manufacturer however assumes no risk or liability for results of the use of the products purchased from it including but without limiting the generality of the forgoing 1 The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits systems assemblies or any other material or equipment 2 Unsuitability of this product for use in any circuit assembly or environment Purchasers rights under this warranty shall consist solely of requiring the manufacturer to repair or in manufacturer s sole discretion replace free of charge F O B factory any defective items received at said factory within the sai
371. l a Turn the controller power OFF Interchange two of the motor leads b Turn the controller power ON and check the direction and current If the car moves in correct direction but still draws higher than normal current go to step 3 3 If the car moves in the correct direction and draws higher current than the Motor FLA and the value of current keeps increasing stop the car and set parameter F1 05 CCW if its original setting is CW If the original setting is CCW then set F1 05 to CW The car should now move in the correct direction and draw the normal value of current NOTE If the elevator does not run on Inspection refer to Section 6 5 Troubleshooting the G5 GPD515 AC Drive f The inspection speed in Hz should show on the drive key pad whenever the car moves at inspection speed Adjust drive parameter D1 09 for a comfortable inspection speed For proper brake operation adjust the SPD trimpot on the HC ACI board to coordinate the application of the speed command with the picking of the brake so that the car does not move under the brake or rollback at the start g At this time the adjustment of the BDD trimpot on the HC ACI board is also necessary Otherwise the car may be stopping under the brake causing a lot of current to be applied to the motor that might cause arcing on the main contactor during the stop On Inspection operation how quickly the car stops at the terminal landings is controlled by drive parameter C1 0
372. l 3 Basic Level 4 Advanced Level 0 4 3 3 Control Method Control Method motor 1 0 V f Control 1 V f w PG Fdbk 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector 0 V f Control Open loop 3 Flux Vector Reference Source Reference selection 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB 0 Run Source Operation selection method 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB Accel time 1 Acceleration time 1 Decel time 1 Deceleration time 1 Accel time 2 Acceleration time 2 Decel time 2 Deceleration time 2 Accel time 4 Acceleration time 4 Decel time 4 3 6 START UP Deceleration time 4 42 02 2P21 TABLE 3 1 Critical G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters CRITICAL G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS Parameter Digital Operator Number Display Parameter Description Units Setting Range MCE drive default Field MCE settings D1 02 Ref 2 Preset reference 2 High speed Hz 0 80 30 30 This parameter will be changed to 60Hz later during final adjustment to run the car at H speed Ref 3 Preset speed 3 HL speed Hz 0 15 8 0 6 10 Ref 4 Preset speed 5 Level Hz 0 10 1 3 1 3 Ref 7 Preset speed 7 Intermediate If applicable to the job Hz 0 55 25 25 This parameter will be adjusted later during final
373. l Call Door Timer Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds 5 29 5 4 5 4 Lobby Door Timer Range 0 5 120 0 Seconds 5 29 5 4 5 5 Nudging Timer Range 10 240 Seconds 5 29 5 4 5 6 Time out of Svce Timer 00 ees 5 30 5 4 5 7 Motor Limit Timer Range 1 0 6 0 Minutes 5 30 5 4 5 8 Mgr Output Timer Range 0 27 Minutes 5 30 5 4 5 9 Door Hold Input Timer Range 0 240 Seconds 5 30 5 4 5 10 Parking Delay Timer Range 0 0 6 0 Minutes 5 30 5 4 5 11 Fan light Output Timer Range 1 0 10 0 Minutes 5 30 5 4 5 12 Hospital Emerg Timer Range 0 0 10 0 Minutes 5 30 5 4 5 13 Door Open Protection Timer Range 8 30 Seconds 5 30 5 4 5 14 CTL Door Open Timer Range 2 0 60 0 Seconds 5 30 5 4 5 15 Door Buzzer Timer Range 0 0 30 0 Seconds 5 31 5 4 6 Gongs lanterns Menu Options 002 cece ees 5 31 5 4 6 1 Mounted in Hall or Car s a anuna ne 5 31 5 4 6 2 Double Strike on Down 0000 ee 5 31 5 4 6 3 PFG Enable Button 3 4 24 ceed cab dant aa ee deed aed see 5 31 5 4 6 4 Egress Floor Arrival Gong 00 e eee 5 31 5 4 7 Spare Inputs Menu Options 00000 ee 5 31 5 4 8 Spare Outputs Menu Options 0 00 ee 5 35 5 4 9 Extra Features Menu Options 002 eee ees 5 38 5 491 PLOUPUt TYPE sridi ley etek ceca ix ewe eee ek Meer tated x eel 5
374. l ft s Rate when increasing elevator speed ae ee eA Accel Jerk Out 0 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero 3 4 when approaching elevator contract speed us era at eu Decel Jerk In 0 Rate of increase of deceleration to Decel 3 Rate when decreasing elevator speed ft s 0 205 ee ane Decel Jerk Out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero 3 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed ft s eee 2e ot A3 Multistep Ref Inspection Speed command 1 Inspection ft m 0 66 0 Level Speed command 2 Level ft m 0 16 0 Speed Command 3 Speed command 3 ft m 0 0 0 High Level Speed command 4 High Level ft m 0 25 0 Speed Command 5 Speed command 5 ft m 0 0 0 Intermediate Speed command 6 Intermediate ft m 0 91 0 Speed Command 7 Speed command 7 ft m 0 0 0 High Speed Speed command 8 High speed ft m 0 100 0 The maximum speed range is described as a Percentage of the contract speed The actual speed value entered is in FPM Any speed other than defined values will trip the drive SET UP FAULT 6 To clear this fault enter the correct value of the parameter and then reset the drive by pressing reset button on HC ACI board 4 6 4 6 1 42 02 2P21 The output response of the drive can be seen on an oscilloscope when the car is running by looking at the voltage between terminals 35 Output Frequency and 34 Com on the HPV 900
375. lag 2A 4 PHE Photo eye input 20 7 DNDO __ Down direction output 29 8 PHER _ Photo eye input rear 10 7 DNS Down direction sense input 24 4 PIC PI correction flag 25 1 DOB Door open button input 20 3 R4 Absolute floor encoding 4 30 8 DOBR __ Door open button input rear 10 3 REAR __ Rear door flag 28 2 DOC Door open command 23 8 REL Releveling 28 5 DOCR __ Door open command rear 13 8 RUN Run flag 2B 1 DOF Door open function output 22 6 SAB Sabbath input 33 7 DOFR _ Door open function output rear 12 6 SAF Safety string input 2C 6 DOI Door open intent flag 21 1 SCE Stepping correction enable 25 8 DOIR Door open intent flag rear 11 1 SD Supervisory down flag 2E 8 DOL Door open limit input 20 5 SDA Down direction arrow 2E 7 DOLM __ Door open limit memory flag 20 8 SDT Short door time flag 22 1 DOLMR _ Door open limit memory flag rear 10 8 SDTR___ Short door time flag rear 12 1 5 16 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 FLAG Definition FLAG Definition DOLR Door open limit rear SE Safety edge input DPD Down previous direction SER Safety edge input rear DPR Door protection timer flag SLV Stable slave flag DSD Down slow down input STC Stepping complete flag DSH Door shortening flag STD RO Step down input absolute floor encoding 0 DSHT Door shortening flag STU R1 Step up input absolute floor encoding 1 DSHTR Door shortening fla
376. ld MCE Operator Range Drive Set Display Defaults do Parameters do 0 out put logic 0 3 0 0 do 1 output condition 1 0 10 2 2 do 2 output condition 2 0 10 4 5 do 3 out put condition 3 0 10 3 3 do 9 select output 1 condition 0 7 1 1 do 10 select output 2 condition 0 7 2 2 do 11 select output 3 condition 0 10 4 4 do 17 out put 1 condition logic 0 7 0 0 do 18 out put 2 condition logic 0 7 0 0 do 19 Out put 3 condition logic 0 7 0 0 do 25 out condition logic 0 7 0 0 Le Parameters Le 8 Load Level 1 0 200 50 50 Le 9 Load Level 2 0 200 100 100 Le 10 Load Level 3 100 200 100 160 Le 12 Phase current level 1 A 0 370 370 0 Le 13 Phase current level 2 A 0 370 370 0 Le 14 Phase current level 3 A 0 370 370 0 Le 24 DC voltage level 1 V 0 1000 650 0 Le 25 DC voltage level 2 V 0 1000 650 Set to 250 for 230 VAC Drives Set to 500 for 480 VAC Drives Le 26 DC voltage level 3 V 0 1000 650 0 Le 32 OL warning level 0 100 80 80 Le 38 Current Hysteresis A 0 370 370 0 0 CS Parameters CS 27 Regen Voltage Level 100 200 110 106 CS 35 Line frequency window 2 30 10 5 Drive Model A 36 APPENDIX POWERBACK R4 REGENERATIVE DRIVE 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS SERIES M PRODUCT ONLY Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in shaded rows All other parameters should be set to the values shown below in the Field
377. learn the full car values press the N pushbutton go to step e To begin learning the empty car values press the Spushbutton The computer displays the message e LEARNING EMPTY CAR VALUES PRESS N TO ABORT If the Extra Features Menu Option Analog Load Weigher is set to K TECH the car will move to the bottom floor record the empty car value and then move up stopping at each floor to record the empty car value When the top floor has been reached the car will move back to the floor at which the Analog Load Weigher Learn Function was begun and the computer will display the scrolling message e EMPTY CAR LEARN PROCESS COMPLETED PRESS S TO CONT THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 Software Revision 6 03 If the Extra Features Menu Option Analog Load Weigher is set to MCE the car will learn the empty car value and then display the message e EMPTY CAR LEARN PROCESS COMPLETED PRESS S TO CONT Press the S pushbutton The computer displays the scrolling message e READY TO LEARN FULL CAR VALUES PRESS S TO START Place the full load test weights in the car and press the S pushbutton to begin learning the full car values The computer displays the message e LEARNING FULL CAR VALUES PRESS N TO ABORT If the Extra Features Menu Option Analog Load Weigher is set to K TECH the car will move to the bottom floor record the full car value and then move up stopping at each floor to record the full car valu
378. ling target with LU or LD sensors not engaged The slowdown distance was chosen to give a reasonable deceleration rate Continue to make two floor runs and slowly increase High speed until Contract Speed is reached It may be necessary to adjust the Deceleration rate parameters C1 02 and C1 08 to get the car to approach the floor correctly as the car speed increases Adjust the Acceleration rate parameters C1 01 and C1 07 until the desired acceleration is achieved Several runs may be required to obtain optimum acceleration The acceleration rate should be about the same as the deceleration rate f Arrange the VFAC Drive Unit to display the output speed parameter U1 02 to verify that contract speed is being reached Q To observe the commanded speed and the drive output with an oscilloscope or a chart recorder monitor drive terminals FM and AM with respect to AC These are 0 10 VDC signals Take all necessary precautions while measuring the voltage signals recommend defeating the grounding pin with one of the commonly available ground isolation adapter plugs so that the case of the oscilloscope is not at ground potential but at whatever potential the negative probe lead is connected to TREAT THE CASE OF THE OSCILLOSCOPE AS A LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD DEPENDING ON WHERE THE NEGATIVE PROBE IS CONNECTED This recommendation is being made because the ground potential on the grounding pin of the power outlet may not be the same as the controller
379. listing of the TORQMAX Drive Parameters is found in Appendix D A parameter sheet listing the parameter settings as programmed by MCE is shipped with each controller If required install a temporary jumper between terminals 4 and 8 to bypass the door locks f the car is on a final limit switch place a jumper between terminals 2 and 16 to bypass the main safety string Remember to remove these jumpers as soon as possible For Flux Vector applications the encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft and its connections must be complete according to the job prints at this time The Inspection Speed is set by drive parameter LF 43 Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Run the car by toggling the UP DN toggle switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the desired direction using constant pressure The PM and BR contactors should pick and the car should move If the car doesn t move select drive parameter LF 86 The value of LF 86 changes from zero 0 to four 4 when direction is picked on Inspection If the value remains zero 0 the drive is not receiving the Inspection speed command from the controller Refer to Section 6 7 for troubleshooting information Verify that the car moves in the appropriate direction and the brake works properly Open loop applications If the car moves in the opposite direction interchange two of the motor leads e Flux vector applications Display the MOTOR CURRENT on
380. lly removed from their respective sockets q Put the car on Normal operation by taking the car off Inspection After the elevator finds a floor verify the operation of the elevator by registering calls and checking the speed PHASE LOSS DETECTION TESTS TORQMAX F5 The VFAC Drive Unit is programmed to detect a motor phase loss To test for proper tripping of the drive output phase loss connection between the drive and motor attempt to run the elevator on Inspection with one motor lead disconnected The Drive should trip off dropping the RDY relay and the brake The drive should display E LC no current flows to the motor A manual reset of the Drive on the HC ACI board will be needed to return to Normal operation Reconnect the motor lead and return the controls to Normal operation The adjustments and tests are complete Now is the time to fine tune any areas that may require touching up Make sure that all of the appropriate data has been properly documented and that all of the jumpers have been removed before the car is returned to service WARNING Before the Elevator can be turned over to normal use it is very important to verify that no safety circuit is bypassed The items to be checked include but are not limited to Relays FLT on HC ACI board and AS and ETL on the HC ACIF board if provided must be installed properly in their sockets Wire connected to panel mount terminal DCL Wire connected to terminal 47 on the HC RB4 VF
381. ls ESS Elevator Shutdown Input When this input is activated the car stops at the next landing in the direction of travel cycles the doors and shuts down EXMLTC Complimented EXMLT Input This input provides reverse logic for the EXMLT function EXMLT operation is initiated when this input goes low FCCC Fire Phase 2 Call Cancel Button Input FCHLD Fire Phase 2 Switch HOLD Position Input FCOFF Fire Phase 2 Switch OFF Position Input FRAA Fire Phase 1 Alternate 2nd alternate Input FRAON Fire Phase 1 Alternate Switch ON Position Input FRBYP Fire Phase 1 Switch BYPASS Position Input FRHTW Fire Sensor Hoistway This input is used to indicate when a fire sensor placed in the hoistway has been activated This input is normally high and is considered active low When activated Fire Phase 1 is initiated and the FWL output will flash FRMR Fire Sensor Machine Room This input is used to indicate when a fire sensor placed in the machine room has been activated This input is normally high and is considered active low When activated Fire Phase 1 is initiated and the FWL output will flash FRON Fire Phase 1 Switch ON Position Input FRON2 Fire Phase 1 Switch ON Position Input additional input same as FRON FRSA Alternate Fire Service Normally active input When this input goes low Alternate Fire Service operation is initiated and the FWL output Fire Warning Light will flash FRSM Main Fire Service This is a normally active
382. lt is declared sec 0 5 00 0 00 0 00 Brake Hold Time Time before a brake hold fault is declared sec 0 5 00 0 00 0 00 Overspeed Level Threshold for detection of overspeed fault 100 0 150 0 125 0 125 0 Overspeed Time Time before an overspeed fault is declared sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 100 150 100 100 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Range around the speed reference for o i Spal Devy Lo Sh speed deviation low logic output 00i 100 10 19 Time before speed deviation low logic Spd Dev Time output is true sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Spd DevHi Level Level for declaring speed deviation alarm 0 99 9 20 0 20 0 __ Subtracts an effective voltage to actual Spd Command Bias speed command voltage volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 Spd Command Mult Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Subtracts an effective voltage to actual pre i Pre Torque Bias torque command voltage volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic output 0 99 99 0 00 0 00 A 14 e APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 Digital Operator eg F Setting Drive Field MCE No Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults
383. lusions is important If the control system is not doing what the logic intends it to do then determining what is preventing the desired function from being carried out is important bad relay bad triac etc Diagnostic mode on the MC PCA Computer board will help to determine which situation is present The output flags will show which outputs the computer is attempting to turn ON or OFF These flags can be compared with what is actually happening in the high voltage hardware Consider as an example this problem the doors are closed and locked on the car but the DC relay is always picked preventing the doors from opening when they should The cause of the problem must first be isolated If both the DCF and DCP flags are cleared turned OFF in the computer the DC relay should not be picked If the DC relay is picked then a problem obviously exists in the output string to the DC relay However if either the DCF or DCP flag is always set in the computer then the problem is not with the output circuit but possibly a problem with the door lock circuitry If the doors are truly physically locked inspecting the DLK flag in the computer would be wise If the flag is not set in the computer then there is obviously a fault in the input circuit from the door lock input A simple inspection of the computer s Diagnostic mode will substantially narrow down the cause of the problem Refer to Figure 6 2 Door Sequence of Operation TROUBLESHOOTING 6
384. m the machine name plate calculate the value by first measuring the motor revolutions using a marker on the motor shaft or brake drum Reduce the inspection speed by decreasing LF 43 then determine the number of motor shaft revolutions required to complete one revolution of the sheave Calculate the gear reduction ration using the formula Gear reduction ratio Motor RPM Sheave RPM Enter the calculated value in parameter LF 22 Note The drive has the capability of estimating the gear reduction ratio Run the car on inspection and read the value parameter LF 25 the gear ratio estimated by the drive The value of LF 25 can be used for LF 22 However the correct value of LF 22 is critical for overall system performance therefore MCE TORQMAX recommends calculating or measuring the gear reduction ratio and entering the calculated value in parameter LF 22 if it is not available from the machine name plate Adjust the Inspection Speed for a comfortable inspection speed using parameter LF 43 For proper brake operation adjust the SPD trimpot on the HC ACI board to coordinate the application of the speed command with the picking of the brake so that the car does not move under the brake or rollback at the start At this time the adjustment of the BDD trimpot on the HC ACI board is also necessary Otherwise the car may be stopping under the brake causing a lot of current to be applied to the motor that might cause arcing on the main contactor du
385. mal Operation message 5 12 NSI Non Stop Input Attendant Service option 5 34 NUDG Nudging output flag 5 16 NUDGING DURING FIRE PH 1 option 5 26 NUDGING DURING FIRE PHASE 2 option 5 27 NUDGING option 5 25 NUDGING OUTPUT BUZZER ONLY option 5 27 NUDGING TIMER option 5 29 NUDGR Nudging output rear flag 5 16 NUMBER OF AIOX BOARDS option 5 24 NUMBER OF 140 BOARDS option 5 24 NUMBER OF IOX BOARDS option 5 24 NYDS New York door shortening flag 5 16 O OFR One Floor Run Output option 5 37 OFRP BETWEEN FLRS option 5 43 OFRP One Floor Run Programmable option 5 37 OLW Overloaded Car Threshold Output option 5 37 options setting to default values 5 19 Overload Condition message 5 12 OVL Overload Input option 5 34 OVL2 Overload 2 Input 5 34 P parameters setting to default values 5 19 PARKING DELAY TIMER option 5 30 PARKING FLOOR option 5 24 PASS REQ Passcode Request message 5 3 5 4 passcode 5 3 5 4 Passcode Request message 5 12 Passcode Request Option 5 3 5 4 5 50 PC boards nomenclature for A 24 PFG ENABLE BUTTON option 5 31 PFG Passing floor gong output flag 5 16 PFGE Passing Floor Gong Enable Input option 5 34 PH1 Fire Service Phase 1 Return Complete Output option 5 37 PH1 Phase 1 return complete flag 5 16 phase loss detection test G5 GPD515 Drive 4 18 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 30 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 43 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 71 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 58 PHE Photo eye input flag
386. manual Do not initialize the drive in the field if it is not required Setting A1 03 1110 and pressing enter will initialize the Drive and will set all of the drive parameters to the MCE Drive default values Parameter A1 03 will display 0 after Initialization All the required advanced parameters are accessible in the Basic mode because of modified drive software OPE40 error will occur if D1 01 through D1 09 selected above MCE default values IDM drive will display Min ans Max values Refer to final adjustments or drive fault section in the MCE manual At the factory MCE will set the drive parameters to the values shown in the MCE Set column above and will save those values as User Default by setting parameter 02 03 1 In the field the drive parameters can be reset to the MCE Set values by setting parameter A1 03 1110 The Field Adjustable parameters can then be re entered To verify Open loop or Flux Vector Mode IDM drive use A1 02 MagneTek drive use U1 04 Two wire initialization on an IDM drive will select Flux Vector mode A1 02 3 For open loop controller after the two wire initialization verify set A1 02 0 Once all the above described steps are complete then all the modified parameters can be viewed and changed by accessing the modified constant 4202 2P21 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 11 FIGURE B 1 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters G5 GPD515 Velocity
387. me the car stops a non interference timer must elapse before the car can move again the car will not move unless there is another car call Note that after the timer has elapsed the car will move immediately as soon as the next car call is placed the car will not move if the system is a single button collective system and there is no jumper from terminal 2 to terminal 45 Placing a car call right after the car stops will require the non interference timer to elapse before the car can move again FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 3 b Simply having one or more car calls registered will not necessarily cause the car to move It will be necessary to jumper terminal 2 to terminal 45 to create a Door Close Button input to get the car to move If the car is not a single button collective but is a selective collective the jumper from terminal 2 to 45 will not be necessary Leave a jumper connected from terminal 1 to the last car call in the line of calls that have been placed This will create a constant pressure signal on the car call which is an alternate means of creating a Door Close Button signal to get a car that is on Independent Service to leave the landing However the jumper from terminal 2 to terminal 45 may be more convenient c If a jumper from terminal 1 is touched to the car call input for the floor where the car is located it will reestablish the non interference timer and it must elapse before the car can move again d If the elevator is t
388. mer elapses However if either the Mechanical Safety Edge or the Door Open button is activated the doors will stop and reopen fully If this option is not selected the doors will simply stop under these circumstances but will not reopen fully This option may be useful when only a nudging buzzer is required but the actual Nudging Operation is not needed see Section 5 4 4 1 for more details 5 4 4 10 D C B CANCELS DOOR TIME When the doors are fully open this option cancels any pre existing door time and causes the doors to start closing when the Door Closed button is pressed 5 4 4 11 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON MGS With this option set and the MG Shutdown Operation MGS input selected and active the doors will remain open instead of cycling closed once the car has returned to the return floor 5 4 4 12 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON PTI ESS With this option set and either the Power Transfer PTI input or the Elevator Shutdown Switch ESS input selected and active once the car has stopped at a floor the doors will remain open instead of cycling closed 5 4 4 13 NUDGING DURING FIRE PHASE 2 If this option is selected the controller will turn ON the NUDG output while the doors are closing during Fire Phase 2 The NUDG output signals the door operator to close the doors at a reduced speed 5 4 4 14 DIR PREFERENCE UNTIL DLK This option causes the car to maintain its present direction preference until the doors are fully closed Otherwise th
389. message 5 10 6 13 HSEL Hospital service select flag 5 16 j ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed trimpot 3 4 4 2 6 62 In Car Stop Switch Activated message 5 10 IN Inspection or access input flag 5 16 INA INAX relay coil monitoring input option 5 34 INAX Redundancy Fault message 5 10 INCF Independent service car call cancel flag 5 16 IND BYPASS SECURITY YES NO option 5 43 IND Independent service input flag 5 16 Independent Service message 5 10 6 14 Independent Service Operation message 5 10 INDFRC Independent Service Fire Service Phase 2 Output option 5 37 INSDN Inspection Down Input option 5 34 Inspection Leveling Overspeed test G5 GPD515 Drive 4 14 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 26 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 39 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 67 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 54 Inspection message 5 11 6 14 Inspection Operation message 5 11 INSUP Inspection Up Input option 5 34 INT Intermediate speed input flag 5 16 INT Intermediate Speed Input option 5 34 INTERMEDIATE SPEED BETWEEN FLOORS option 5 42 INTERMEDIATE SPEED option 5 38 INV DOOR CLOSE LIMIT option 5 29 IRCOF Front Infra Red Cutout input option 5 34 IRCOR Rear Infra Red Cutout input option 5 34 ISR In service and ready flag 5 16 ISRT In Service and Running Output option 5 37 ISRT In service truly flag 5 16 ISTD R2 Intermediate step down absolute floor encoding 2 flag 5 16 ISTU R3 Intermediate step up absolute floor encoding 3 flag 5 16 ISV In ser
390. minal EPI if present Check the counter weight balance Make whatever corrections are necessary to make the counter weight correct Check to see what the counter weighing should be before making any changes If a drum machine is being used follow the manufacturer s counterweighting recommendation and test the drum machine s limit switches On modernizations it is easy to overlook the typical 40 counter weighting Always put a 40 load in the car and check for equal motor current up verses down at Inspection speed in the middle of the hoistway Equal current readings on the keypad display indicate that the counterweight is close to the correct value Take whatever steps are necessary to achieve proper counterweighting This is especially important since many traction installations do not have compensation cables or chains Turn OFF the power and reinstall the fuses that power terminals 2H and 2F The elevator controller installation should now be complete Proceed to Section 4 Final Adjustment START UP 3 31 SECTION 4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 0 GENERAL INFORMATION At this point all the steps in Section 3 should have been completed Please read Section 5 before proceeding it explains the adjustment and troubleshooting tools available with the computer This section is divided into two main parts 1 Preparing to run on High Speed and Automatic operation Section 4 1 2 Final adjustment and testing procedures for controll
391. move then verify the drive parameters and compare them with the 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 19 6 6 2 6 20 drive parameter sheet which was shipped with the controller The motor name plate values should match the entered motor parameters Some of the following parameters if not set properly can prevent the car from moving on Inspection CAUTION The following are very critical HPV900 Drive parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation A1 Contract Car Spd Elevator contract speed A1 Contract Mir Spd Motor Speed at elevator contract speed Motor Full load RPM A1 Response 20 Sensitivity of the speed regulator A1 Inertia 2 System inertia This parameter will be adjusted during the adaptive tuning of the drive in Section 4 6 5 Adaptive Tuning A2 Accel Rate 0 3 0 A2 Decel Rate 0 3 0 A3 Multistep Ref Inspection Level High Level Intermediate and High speed must be set to the valid speed settings described in Section 4 5 1 Table 4 4 A5 Motor parameters Must be verified with the motor name plate and the parameter sheet filled out for the specific controller and shipped with the controller C2 Log In 1 TB1 1 Drive Enable C2 Log In 2 TB1 2 Run Up C2 Log In 3 TB1 3 Run Down C2 Log In 4 TB1 4 Fault reset C2 Log In 5 TB1 5 Step Ref BO Inspection speed input C2 Log In 6 TB1 6 Step Ref B1 Level speed input C2 Log In 7 TB1 7 Step Ref B2 Hi
392. n Torque detection 1 selection i 0 Disabled 1 Alarm at Speed Agree 5 Re ti Torq Deti Sel 2 Alarm at Run 3 Fault at Speed Agree os E B e 4 Fault at Run L6 02 Torq Det 1 Lvl Torque detection 1 level 0 300 150 B 150 L6 03 Torq Det 1 Time _ Torque detection 1 time Ss 0 0 10 0 0 1 B 0 1 L7 Torque Limits Flux Vector only cay Torque Limits Set to Factory Defaults 0 300 200 B 200 L7 04 Flux Vector only L8 Hdwe Protection L8 01 DB Resistor Prot Protection selection for internal DB resistor 0 1 0 B 0 Ph Loss In Sel Input phase loss protection L8 05 sn d Dieabled 1 enabled ga Sal A Ph Loss Out Sel Output phase loss protection aoe oe 0 Disabled i Enabled 0al d B Operator O1 Monitor Select O1 01 User Monitor Sel Monitor selection 6 Output voltage 4 28 6 B 6 Monitor selection after power up 01 02 Power On Monitor 1 Frequency reference 2 Output Frequency 1 1 4 1 B 1 3 Output Current 4 User monitor Scale units for setting and monitoring 01 03 Display Scaling freauene 0 39999 0 B 0 et ee ee EE ae eee eae eee A 10 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 ar MCE V f Field No Digital Oper
393. n Operation TORQMAX F4 3 16 3 7 Inspection Operation Yaskawa F7 Drive 000 cece ees 3 20 3 7 1 Drive Parameter Settings 0 c eee eee 3 20 3 7 2 Verifying the Critical Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters 3 20 3 7 3 Moving the Car on Inspection Operation Yaskawa F7 3 24 3 8 Inspection Operation TORQMAX F5 Drive 0 00 es 3 27 3 8 1 Drive Parameter Settings 00 c eee ee 3 27 3 8 2 Verifying the Critical TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters 3 27 3 8 3 Moving the Car on Inspection Operation TORQMAX F5 3 28 SECTION 4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 0 General Information ea i ety Seti ce ee tel aly letra tl they ee eit tl cat eure tales lla taal 4 1 4 1 Preparing to Run on High Speed and Automatic Operation 4 1 Aleit OOM Operator rae ome wed tewe eee ake Ae hee aes eh anew eee eae 4 1 4 1 2 HC ACI and HC ACIF Board Adjustments 00000 eee 4 1 4 1 3 Diagnostic Messages and Input output Signals 4 2 4 1 4 A Few Words about Absolute Floor Encoding 4 2 4 1 5 Registering Car Calls 2c cwdicaenad ised oka Goa hadaae eoaale os 4 3 4 1 6 Test Mode Operation 0 0 00 ee 4 3 i TABLE OF CONTENTS 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 Explanation of G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters and S Curves 4 4 4 2 1 Setting the Speed Levels
394. n a final limit switch place a jumper between terminals 2 and 16 to bypass the main safety string Remember to remove these jumpers as soon as possible START UP 3 3 3 3 2 DRIVE INTERFACE BOARD DETAILS The HC ACI board is the interface between the HC RB4 VFAC main relay board and the VVVF Drive Unit It performs a variety of functions including providing speed inputs and performing certain elevator code requirements such as Inspection Leveling overspeed detection as well as motor and brake contactor monitoring Other functions include an independent motor speed monitoring circuit plus brake and speed signal coordination see Figure 1 10 HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board HC ACI BOARD DETAILS Trimpots SPD Speed Pick Delay This trimpot controls the delay of the application of the Speed Command Signal from 002 seconds to 450 seconds Clockwise CW rotation of the trimpot increases the time This allows for proper coordination of the acceleration of the car with the picking of the brake Q NOTE Speed Pick Delay is not used on controllers with the TORQMAX drive Turn the SPD trimpot fully CCW and then set it 1 4 turn in the CW direction see Section 4 9 4 d and f BDD Brake Drop Delay Braking at the end of the run is delayed for a short time to allow the operation of the electric stop feature This delay is adjustable from a minimum of 0 1 second fully CCW to 0 7 second fully CW ILO Inspection Leveling Overspe
395. n arrow signal to the HC PCI O board which operates an up or down arrow triac output This illuminates the correct direction arrow in the car position indicator No further action can take place unless additional conditions are met Then if the doors are closed the MC PCA Computer board sends the correct direction output signal to the HC PCI O board which operates the correct direction triac This signal is sent to the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board which energizes the direction pilot relays This direction signal then goes to the HC ACI PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 11 1 3 board and to one or more auxiliary running relays The direction and high speed commands originate from the MC PCA board through the HC PCI O and the Main Relay board The CMC is ready to lift the brake and to provide VFAC Drive Unit control in response to a speed command that will be provided by the CMC In summary the call signal entered the COC and was processed into direction and high speed acceleration sequence commands The VFAC speed command and brake signals are then created by the CMC and the CPC moves the elevator according to the commanded speed LANDING SYSTEMS There are two different types of landing systems that can be used with VFMC 1000 PTC controllers depending on the customer s preference LS STAN and LS QUTE These landing systems are discussed separately throughout this manual FIGURE 1 12 LS STAN Car Top Control Box FIGURE 1 13 LS QUTE Car Top Control Box
396. n by continuous activation of the photo eye a call button or another reopening device When NONE is selected no Time Out of Service timing is performed When the timer expires the Timed Out of Service Indicator on the MC PCA board will turn ON The controller will ignore the PHE Photo Eye input if the Stuck Photo Eye Protection option is selected In duplexes the car s assigned hall calls will be assigned to the other car When the car closes its doors and begins to move again it will go back into Normal service 5 4 5 7 MOTOR LIMIT TIMER Range 1 0 6 0 Minutes This timer starts whenever the controller attempts to move the car and is reset when the car reaches its destination floor If the timer expires before the car reaches its destination the controller will stop trying to move the car to protect the motor The Motor Limit Timer Indicator on the MC PCA board will turn ON 5 4 5 8 MGR OUTPUT TIMER Range 0 27 Minutes This is the amount of time that the MGR output will stay ON after the car is at rest For elevators with MG sets the MGR output runs the MG set Thus this timer determines how long the MG set will run after the car is at rest If the MGR output is not used then this timer should be set to NONE 5 4 5 9 DOOR HOLD INPUT TIMER Range 0 240 Seconds This timer will be used only if there is a DHLD Door Hold input on the controller see Section 5 4 7 Usually a Door Hold Open button will be connected to this
397. n cause erratic CAUTION Itis very important that drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation The Programming mode has to be accessed in order to change a drive parameter The drive will not function in Programming mode it must be in Operation mode to run the elevator There are five speed levels D1 parameters that can be set in the drive software see Table 4 1 and Figure 4 1 The drive software will not accept data entry to any D1 parameters other than those listed in Table 4 1 If you change a drive parameter and there is an OPE40 fault the only way to correct this fault is to access the PROGRAM mode again and access the particular D1 D9 parameter You must enter a correct value and then reset the drive by pushing the drive fault reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the drive reset button on the drive key pad FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 CAUTION The drive will trip on OPE40 or OPE41 fault if the following conditions are not met while setting the D1 D9 parameters D1 02 gt D1 07 gt D1 03 gt D1 05 gt 0 0 but less than the maximum specified value TABLE 4 1 G5 GPD515 Drive Speed Levels SPEED LEVELS G5 GPD515 Speed Setting MCE Default Preferred setting in preparation for p uer Range Value ae the car at High speed D1 02 0 80Hz 300 300 i This parameter should be changed to 60Hz during final adjustment to run the car
398. n must exist that says to the logic that the doors should be open Some of these conditions are listed below Call demand at the current landing or a call has just been canceled Safety Edge Door Open button DOB input Emergency Independent Service conditions Photo Eye input When a call is canceled one of the following door time flags should be set turned ON CCT HCT or LOT When one of the reopening devices is active SE PHE or DOB the SDT flag should be set When an Emergency or Independent Service condition exists the presence of a particular condition will cause the DOI flag to be set Some of these conditions include the following Fire Service Emergency Power operation Independent Service Attendant Service etc Once the intention of the computer has been determined inspect the high voltage hardware to see if the appropriate functions are being carried out For example if the doors are closed and DOI is set the doors should be opening the DO relay picked If the doors are open and DOI is cleared turned OFF the doors should be closing the DC relay picked The trouble arises when the door control system is not doing what the mechanic thinks it should be doing However when troubleshooting it is vital to determine if the control system is doing what it thinks it should be doing If the control system high voltage section is doing what the logic intends it to do then determining how the logic is coming to its conc
399. n set D1 17 to a lower value Run the car on Inspection and increase the inspection speed by increasing parameter D1 17 to show that this low speed safety monitor circuit will trip at no higher than 140 fpm or no higher than the maximum available inspection speed if itis less than 140 fpm The circuit should trip when D1 17 140 fpm or above Check this in both directions The overspeed monitor is now calibrated for less than 150 fpm for Access Inspection and Leveling Turn the IN speed back to the value recorded in Step b TERMINAL SLOWDOWN LIMIT SWITCHES YASKAWA F7 Make sure that the terminal slowdown limit switches are working properly by doing the following a Place the TEST NORMAL switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position b Disconnect and label the wires from terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board e FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 Register calls for the terminal landings top and bottom from the controller The car should make a normal slowdown at both terminal landings except that there may be a slight relevel which is okay If the car goes more than an inch past the floor move the slowdown limit until the approach is normal Reconnect the wires to terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board and return the TEST NORMAL switch to the NORMAL position The final adjustments are now complete 4 13 3 EMERGENCY TERMINAL LIMIT SWITCH MONITOR YASKAWA F7 All jobs under the requirements
400. nO Rate when decreasing elevator speed iis ees el 2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero 3 f Deca Jerk Cui when slowing the elevator to leveling speed us Cee on 20 Acc Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 00 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 15 Digital Operator Shas Settin Drive Field MCE No g Display Parameter Description Unit nage Defaults Setting Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 2 60 3 00 Accel Jerk In 1 see Accel Jerk In 0 ft s 0 29 9 00 0 2 0 Accel Jerk Out 1 see Accel Jerk Out 0 ft s 0 29 9 00 0 2 0 Decel Jerk In 1 see Decel Jerk In 0 ft s 0 29 9 00 0 2 0 Decel Jerk Out 1 see Decel Jerk Out 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Acc Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 00 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 2 60 3 00 Accel Jerk In 2 see Accel Jerk In 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Accel Jerk Out 2 see Accel Jerk Out 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Decel Jerk In 2 see Decel Jerk In 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Decel Jerk Out 2 see Decel Jerk Out 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Acc Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 00 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 2 60 3 00 Accel Jerk In 3 see Accel Jerk In 0 ft s 0 29 9 8 0 4 0 Accel Jerk Out 3
401. nals 16 and 17 HC RB4 VFAC Drive parameter D1 02 and E1 04 must be set to original value for High speed 4 18 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 5 EXPLANATION OF HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS AND S CURVES For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 Before attempting to bring the car up to contract speed or making any adjustments it is important to verify the following control parameters in the VFAC Drive Unit It is very important to become familiar with drive keypad operation to access the drive program NOTE In order to access the parameter values review the use of the Digital Operator in Section 3 Parameter Adjustments in the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Vector Elevator Drive Technical Manual 4 5 1 SETTING THE SPEED LEVELS 3 5 2 Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic n CAUTION Verify the critical drive parameter settings as described in Section elevator operation CAUTION Itis very important that drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation The PTC Series M controller uses the A3 Multistep Ref parameters for setting the five speed levels described in Table 4
402. nd completing its program loop successfully Pressing the COMPUTER RESET button will cause the COMPUTER ON light to turn OFF and the light will stay OFF while the RESET button is depressed The computer is equipped with an auto reset feature that will cause the computer to reset if for any reason the program loop cannot be completed For example A very strong electromagnetic field or line noise may interrupt computer functioning The computer will automatically reset itself and go back to Normal operation The auto reset feature prevents unnecessary service calls The auto reset process will also cause the COMPUTER ON light to turn OFF briefly If the COMPUTER ON light is flashing continuously it means that the computer board is malfunctioning Inspect the controller chip see Figure 5 1 and EPROM chip to see if it is properly seated and to see if the pins are properly inserted into the socket 5 1 1 2 VERTICAL STATUS INDICATOR LIGHTS These lights show the status of the elevator Table 5 1 shows a list of these lights and their meanings TABLE 5 1 Status Indicators LIGHT NAME MEANING SAFETY ON Safety circuit is made DOORS LOCKED Door lock contacts are made HIGH SPEED Elevator is running at high speed IND SERVICE Elevator is on Independent Service INSP ACCESS Elevator is on Car Top Inspection or Hoistway Access operation FIRE SERVICE Elevator is on Fire Service operation TIMED OUT OF SERVICE Elevator Is Timed Out of Service MOT
403. ne at which the elevator stops Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode Check all of the values associated with stops amp special floors Save the values If the message still appears contact MCE CONTACTOR PROOFING REDUNDANCY FAILURE Description The main power contactors that provide power to the controller have not dropped out in their intended manner Troubleshooting Inspect the main power contactors to ensure that they are working as intended Ensure that there is power on the CNP input when the car is not in motion RECTION RELAY REDUNDANCY FAILURE Non ASME 2000 Description A failure in the up and down direction relays has been detected Troubleshooting Check to see if the UDF input is active without the computer s generation of the UPDO or DNDO outputs This is not required DOOR CLOSE PROTECTION TIMER ELAPSED Door Close Protection Description A failure to lock the doors is detected This failure condition exists when the doors have closed DCLC 1 or DCL 0 DPM 1 a demand exists for the car to move DCP 1 but the doors are not locked DLK 0 within 60 seconds Troubleshooting If the Retiring Cam option is set verify the Retiring Cam relay is activated DCP 1 DCL 0 DPM 1 or DCLC 1 and the doors lock DLK 1 If no Retiring Cam is used verify the door lock circuitry contacts are closed to provide power to the door lock input DLK 1 When a predetermined number of sequential failures is detected default set to
404. ned but the full load learn function was aborted you need not re learn the empty car values When the message READY TO LEARN EMPTY CAR VALUES is displayed press the Npushbutton The computer will display e READY TO LEARN FULL CAR VALUES PRESS S TO START Press the S pushbutton to begin learning the full car values go to step f THE COMPUTER e 5 53 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 5 7 3 5 54 DUPLEXING A great advantage of the PTC Series is how easily it can be duplexed Because the duplexing logic is completely internal to the computers it requires only a connecting cable and the selection of the Duplex option see Section 5 4 2 1 The duplexing logic provides for proper assignment of hall calls to cars and increases efficiency and decreases waiting time DISPATCHING ALGORITHM The dispatching algorithm for assigning hall calls will be real time based on estimated time of arrival ETA In calculating the estimated time of arrival for each elevator the dispatcher will consider but not be limited to the location of each elevator the direction of travel the existing hall call and car call demand door time MG start up time flight time lobby removal time penalty and coincidence call HARDWARE CONNECTIONS There are two critical items in duplexing hardware Proper grounding between the two controller subplates and proper installation of the duplexing cable The hall calls will be connected to both cars simultaneously Once in
405. ng Diagnostic mode notice that the DOI flag turns ON 1 when the computer decides that the doors should be open If the computer decides that the doors should be closed the DOI flag will be turned OFF 0 The DOI flag is a useful flag to inspect when troubleshooting door problems This flag shows the intention of the computer concerning the state of the doors Remember that if the DOI flag is ON 1 it will turn on the DOF output which should pick the DO relay The door will remain open until the DOL Door Open Limit input goes away This will shut OFF the DOF output while the doors are open and DOI is ON Turning OFF the DOI flag will turn ON the DCF output which will pick the DC relay and close the doors While there is no demand to go anywhere the signal that shuts OFF the DCF output is DLK Doors Locked or possibly DCLC if the car has a retiring cam However there is a 2 second delay before the DCF output turns OFF after the doors are locked If there is any demand as is evidenced by the DMU or DMD flags being ON and if the DOI flag is not ON 0 then the DCP output will be turned ON regardless of the position of the door The DCP output is used to provide door closing power for those door operators requiring power while the car is running such as those made by G A L Corporation The various values of door standing open time result from the type of call canceled or responded to A hall call cancellation will give an HCT flag and acar
406. ng Print in the job prints for any special instructions regarding these diodes e INSTALLATION 42 02 2P21 2 3 7 42 02 2P21 DOOR POSITION MONITOR SWITCH IF USED If you are in a jurisdiction where ASME A17 1 1996 or later is being enforced Door Position Monitor switch s connected to the DPM and or DPMR inputs must be added to monitor the position of the closed doors This must be a separate physical limit switch that makes up approximately 1 to 2 inches before the doors lock INSTALLATION 2 13 SECTION 3 START UP 3 0 GENERAL INFORMATION In this section the car will be prepared for use by construction personnel so that they may complete the elevator installation At this time the speed sensor must be properly installed as described in Section 2 2 3 This section will cover the sequence of applying power to the controller and associated components the AC hoist motor and brake and completing the initial adjustment of the system to get basic car movement on Inspection operation 3 1 GROUND CHECK Conduct a ground test before powering up the system Refer to Figure 1 2 and Figure 2 3 to help locate items as they are referred to in the ground check NOTE A short to ground is defined as having a resistance of less than 20 ohms between the 1 bus common and the terminal being checked a Remove fuse F4 in the individual car controller cabinet If the system is a duplex consult the schematics and remove the fuse that pow
407. ng input is activated Troubleshooting Ensure that Light Load Weighing is required If not set the Light Load Weighing option to NO and ensure that the LLI input is not programmed If Light Load Weighing is required ensure that the Light Load Car Call Limit is set to the correct number of stops Lost DLK During Run not scrolled Event Calendar only Lost DLK During Run Description The Door Lock input was deactivated while the car was traveling through the hoistway Troubleshooting Check the clearance between the door unlocking rollers and clutch W OIL SWITCH INPUT IS ACTIVATED Hydro only Description MLT shutdown with LOS The car was unable to move at the expected speed due to insufficient oil Troubleshooting Check the MLT VLT Data Trap Addr 495H bit 8 Ensure that there is sufficient oil in the reservoir Check the Low Oil switch and LOS input Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 11 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message LSA Movement Failure not scrolled Event Calendar only LSA Movement Failure Description The car has failed to complete an LSA movement check after being idle for 10 minutes at a landing see ABI Alarm Bell Input option MOTOR LIMIT TIMER ANTI STALL ELAPSED Motor Limit Timer Description The Starter Overload or the Thermal Overload has tripped or there is a mechanical problem that prevents or slows the motion of the car Troubl
408. ng of the brake This trimpot may require readjustment when the car is adjusted for High speed Q NOTE Speed Pick Delay is not used on controllers with the TORQMAX drive Turn the SPD trimpot fully CCW and then set it 1 8 turn in the CW direction see Section 4 9 4 d and f BDD trimpot Brake Drop Delay This trimpot may need readjustment BDD controls the delay in dropping the brake so that the brake drops just as car motion ceases 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 1 e ILO trimpot Inspection Leveling Overspeed This trimpot sets the Inspection Leveling Overspeed trip threshold Instructions for adjustment are provided later in this section ETS trimpot Emergency Terminal Limit This trimpot is located on the HC ACIF board which is only used for vector applications with speeds above 200 fpm Instructions for adjusting this trimpot are provided later in this section 4 1 3 DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND INPUT OUTPUT SIGNALS To speed up the final adjustment and troubleshooting become familiar with the Error Status Messages Table 5 2 and Input Output signals Flags and Variables Tables 5 3 and 5 4 NOTE Read Section 5 1 The MC PCA Computer Panel Your Tool for Programming Diagnostics and Data Communication and Section 5 3 Diagnostic Mode ON BOARD DIAGNOSTICS When the Elevator Controller s Computer MC PCA is in the DIAGNOSTIC MODE with switches F1 F8 in the down position the LCD display provides a descr
409. ng still Requests for a car from a hallway or corridor are answered without restriction 1 While in the car press the button for the desired floor If the destination floor is secured the button for that floor will flash on off If the button for that floor stays solidly lit that floor is unsecured While the destination floor button is flashing enter the security code for that floor within 10 seconds Enter the security code by pressing the corresponding buttons on the panel If the code was entered correctly and within the required time limit the car will immediately go to that floor If the code was not entered within the 10 second time limit or was entered incorrectly the destination floor button light will turn off after 10 seconds and the entire sequence must be repeated If a mistake is made while entering the security code simply wait until the destination floor button light stops flashing and start the entire sequence again A 26 APPENDIX F ELEVATOR SECURITY INFORMATION AND OPERATION 42 02 2P21 SECURITY CODES Maintain a record of the security codes by noting the floor name as found in the elevator cab and each floor s code Any floor with a security code is a secured floor 1 Floor _____ security code ee a 2 Floor ____ security code St ye 3 Floor ____ security code Bp a T 4 Floor _____ security code Sy a a a a a 5 Floor ____ security code yes ha E EE E 6 Floor ____ security code S a E a N 7 Floor ___
410. ngs except that there may be a slight relevel which is okay If the car goes more than an inch past the floor move the slowdown limit until the approach is normal Reconnect the wires to terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board and return the TEST NORMAL switch to the NORMAL position The final adjustments are now complete 4 16 3 EMERGENCY TERMINAL LIMIT SWITCH MONITOR TORQMAX F5 4 68 All jobs under the requirements of ANSI A17 1 SECTION 209 4 B ASME A 17 1b 1992 ADDENDA must have a means to insure that the car speed is below 95 of the contract speed after opening the associated ETS limit switches The emergency terminal limit switch monitor performs this function Normally the jobs which come under the above requirements will have the HC ACIF or HC ETS board installed in the controller Both boards have the ETS monitor circuit This circuit receives the signal from the hall effect sensor and the magnets installed on the motor shaft or brake drum as described in Section 2 3 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor a b Make sure that all the wiring from the speed sensor to the HC ACIF board is complete Turn the ETS trimpot on the HC ACIF HC ETS board fully CW On a multi floor run adjust the speed of the car to 95 of the contract speed by adjusting the High speed parameter LF 42 Remove the wire from the Up Emergency Terminal Limit Switch where it connects to the controller at terminal UET Start the
411. nication fault while in Serial Mode 2 5 Run remove Immediate Immediate only serial mode 2 Rescue Addresses how fast the drive responds to j Disable DRS Disable removal of drive enable logic input Enable Disable Disable F None Assigns multi step speed command to MLT Spd to DLY 1 Nie F a mspd1 None None recognition delay timer 1 mspd15 Assigns multi step speed command to None MLT Spd to DLY 2 nei mspd1 None None recognition delay timer 2 mspd15 Assigns multi step speed command to None MLT Spd to DLY 3 ie z mspd1 None None recognition delay timer 3 mspd15 Assigns multi step speed command to SE MLT Spd to DLY 4 z 5 mspd1 None None recognition delay timer 4 mspd15 A 18 APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 Digital Operator ary F Setting Drive Field MCE No Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults Setting dC2 Logic Inputs DRIVE DRIVE Log In 1 TB1 1 Terminal 1 Selection ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 2 Terminal 2 Selection d p RUN UP RUN UP RUN RUN Log In 3 TB1 3 Terminal 3 Selection DOWN DOWN FAULT FAULT Log In 4 TB1 4 Terminal 4 Selection 2 RESET RESET Log In 5 TB1 5 Terminal 5 Selection STEP REP STEP REF BO BO Log In 6 TB1 6 Terminal 6 Selection E e Log In 7 TB1 7 Terminal 7 Selection STEF REF STEP REF
412. nke Sages glee cdekee taeda 4 21 4 6 1 Final Preparation for Running on Automatic Operation HPV 900 4 21 4 6 2 Switching to Automatic Operation HPV 900 0045 4 22 4 6 3 Brake Adjustment for 125 Load HPV 900 04 4 22 4 6 4 Bringing the Car up to High Speed HPV 900 05 4 22 4 6 5 Adaptive Tuning HPV 900 0 eee ee 4 25 4 6 6 Load Testing HPV 900 iasa s es davaaa Py auana ee ean eas 4 25 Final Elevator Inspection Procedure HPV 900 e eee ee eee 4 26 4 7 1 Inspection Leveling over Speed Test HPV 900 4 26 4 7 2 Terminal Slowdown Limit Switches HPV 900 0 4 27 4 7 3 Emergency Terminal Limit Switch Monitor HPV 900 4 27 4 7 4 Contract Speed Buffer Test HPV 900 00 0000 4 27 4 7 5 Governor and Car Safety Tests HPV 900 008 4 29 4 7 6 Phase Loss Detection Tests HPV 900 00ers 4 30 Explanation of TORQMAX F4 Drive Parameters and S Curves 4 31 4 8 1 Setting the Speed Levels 0 ccc ee ee 4 31 4 8 2 Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Rates 4 32 4 8 3 Adjusting the Jerk Parameters 0000 cece eee eens 4 32 Final Adjustments TORQMAX F4 000 cee eee 4 33 4 9 1 Final Preparation for Running on Automatic Operation TORQMAX F4 4 33 4 9 2 Switching to Automatic Operation TORQMAX F4
413. not available in the drive manuals If a drive has been replaced in the field then all the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to this parameter sheet A 42 APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 FIGURE B 1 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters Yaskawa F7 Velocity Hz Velocity High Speed 2222M NOE EATER Sen OM RET ER TE ls D1 02 A P1 17 P1 18 C1 01 Acceleration C1 02 Deceleration Intermediate High Level Zero Speed ne P1 04 P1 07 Time Table for Selection of S Curves Increasing the value time of an S curve parameter causes a longer smoother transition Range Velocity Hz Start Accel End Accel Start Decel End Decer seweenroraarrae Proe Pros vemo een These are the only S curve parameters that require field adjustment for smoothing the elevator ride All the other parameter values are set to the MCE Drive defaults E2 02 f t N x P 120 f slip frequency Hz f motor rated frequency Hz N motor rated speed F L rpm KE Synchronous APH 8 6 eomz Motor sohzmotor Drive Software U 14 1200 1000 Tested By 1800 1500 4202 221 APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 43 APPENDIX K QUICK REFERENCE FOR POWERBACK R6 REGENERATIVE AC DRIVE PARAMETERS SERIES M and IMC AC R K 1 K 2 K 2 1 K 2 2 K 2 3 A 44 GENERAL T
414. nput has been activated Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and see if any spare inputs are programmed as an HLI input Then check to see if that particular input is activated HOISTWAY SAFETY DEVICE OPEN Description One of the hoistway safety devices has activated opening the safety circuit e g pit stop switch car and cwt buffers switches up down final limit switches Troubleshooting Check all hoistway safety devices Refer to controller wiring prints for applicable devices HOSPITAL PHASE 1 OPERATION Hospital Service Description A hospital emergency momentary call switch is activated at any floor Troubleshooting Ensure that the hospital emergency operation option is set correctly If hospital emergency operation is not required set this option to no If it is required set the floors eligible to answer a hospital call to yes HOSPITAL PHASE 2 OPERATION Description The car has answered a hospital emergency call or the in car hospital emergency key switch has been activated HOSP is high Troubleshooting Ensure that the hospital emergency operation option is set correctly Then check to see if any spare inputs are programmed as HOSP and if it is activated IN CAR STOP SWITCH ACTIVATED Stop SW Safety Relay Ckt Description The in car stop switch has been pulled opening the safety circuit Troubleshooting Check the status of the in car emergency stop switch INAX REDUNDANCY FAULT Description Monit
415. ns 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 FINAL PREPARATION FOR RUNNING ON AUTOMATIC OPERATION YASKAWA F7 a Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LCD display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection b Move the car to the bottom terminal landing Check to see if the DZ relay is picked If not move the car on Inspection to place it in the Door Zone SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION YASKAWA F7 Place the Relay Panel Inspection switch in the OFF position If the car is not at a landing it will move to a landing If the car is at a landing but not in the door zone relays L and either LU or LD should pick and the car should perform a relevel If the relevel in not successful check the following If the brake picks and the car is trying to level but is not able to it may be necessary to adjust the Level Speed parameter D1 05 on the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive to get the car to move If relays L and LD are picked but the brake and other relays are not the down direction limit switch may be
416. nsation o va 04 Torque compensation o __ Pos fasRuning S E iO ce carere o er Hunting prevention _ DuReference 01 _ Presetreference a E 2 __ Reterencetimt A ores fC P03 Jump frequency 00a SS ba sequence O S T o o o oecon 04 04 Vi patien 1 oo i T Motor set up 1 01 04 eol 05 09 e waa S S S Fs A Cd S Fa __ A0 08 12 setup E SS F5__ Do oasetup_ a ore e foose o Cd dT e Possa O O o H Terminal H1 Digitalinputs ooe S O e poao o f o CCS e A or07_ er ma Analog outputs Ooo o S s Sea communicationsetup OOOO oo o ooo o oo E a a CC S 12 _ Powerloss ridetwough oo vo E A a S 14 Reference detection a 0305s e fames OOO ooo o i T o S o Pte Torque detection E 0405 F t7__rorquetimt ora SSS Pte Hardware protection __ 01 02030507 __ O Operator Monitor select ooo o ow Key select DO d o 05 08 P Elevator Pi S Curve Control Be jome E 4202 2P21 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 13 APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS SERIES M PRODUCT ONLY Field adjustable parameters are shown in shaded rows All other parameters should be set to the values shown below in the Field MCE Set column A WARNING Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running Incorrect values of drive parameters can cause erratic elevat
417. nt the registration of new car calls The car will be allowed to answer all car calls registered prior to activation of the CTL input Once all car calls have been answered the car will travel to the lobby landing perform a door operation and will be removed from service Capture for Test Input Earthquake Counterweight Displacement Input Door Close Limit Input Breaks when the car door is approximately 1 inch from being closed DCL input will be low once the doors fully close Moving the door approximately 1 inch will reapply power to the DCL input due to the switch making up Needed for CSA code with door lock bypass Doors Closed Contact Input Drive Fault Input Door Hold Input for Normal Service not for Fire Service A Door Hold button or key switch can be connected to this input See Section 5 4 5 9 for more details DHLD for Rear Doors Dispatch Load Input A load weigher device can be connected to this input When the input is activated the door dwell time will be eliminated when the elevator has an up direction at the Lobby Floor Door Lock Sensor Input Monitors the state of the contacts in the landing door lock string Power will be present on the DLS input when all landing doors are closed and locked DLS for rear doors Down Input Attendant Service Front Door Position Monitoring Input Makes when the car door is approximately 1 inch from being closed DPM input will be active once the door fully closes Movin
418. ntered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller e Pick or Picked relay energized e Drop or dropped relay de energized If the car does not move on INSPECTION check the following 1 Verify that relay CNP and RDY on the HC ACI board are ON if not refer to step 2 a below Contactors PM Main and BR Brake should pick when the direction relays U1 and U2 or D1 and D2 are picked If PM and BR do not pick check the related circuit as shown in the controller drawings Check to see if any fault is displayed on the drive keypad before and after picking direction on Inspection When direction is picked on Inspection relays PT1 and PT2 on the HC ACI board should pick If these relays are not picking check for 120VAC on terminals 8 10 and 12 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board If there is no voltage on these terminals refer to the controller drawings to find the problem 2 To verify that the drive receives the direction enable and inspection speed command signals from the HC ACI board do the following To verify the drive enable signal select parameter LF 98 and pick direction on Inspection The drive display should change from STOP to RUN If it does not display RUN follow the controller drawings and verify the connection to terminal X2 1 Enable terminal To verify the commanded speed signal select either parameter LF 88 or LF 86 and pick direction on Inspection If
419. ntial to verify all drive parameter settings before start up The drive software has been modified for this application therefore some of the parameters on the parameter sheet shipped with the controller are different from those shown in the drive manual If a drive is replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Refer to the instruction manual for the VFAC drive unit which is provided along with this manual as part of the documentation Become familiar with the VFAC Drive Manual particularly with the operation of the Digital Operator keypad operation Note that the way this VFAC drive unit is being used ignores many of its functions Pages D and DX of the job prints show the drive interface and which external functions are being used VERIFYING THE CRITICAL TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS The AC drive parameters must be verified before moving the car on inspection operation The Caution box below lists critical drive parameters which must be verified before start up The remaining drive parameters must be verified with the Quick Reference for TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters for Series M product which was shipped with the controller This complete listing of drive parameters can also be found in Appendix L of this manual CAUTION Donot change drive parameters while the elevator is running The following are very critical TORQMAX D
420. ntroller gets an up slow down signal USD the controller will create a Bottom Floor Demand Troubleshooting Bottom Floor Demand should be cleared when all of the following conditions are met 1 The car is at the bottom and the down slow down DSD input to the controller is OFF because the switch should be open 2 The Door Zone DZ input to the controller is ON 3 The Door Lock DLK input to the controller is ON If the car is at the bottom and the message still flashes check the Down Slow Down switch amp associated wiring Also inspect the door zone landing system vane or magnet at the bottom floor and the door lock circuit Top Floor Demand should be cleared when all of the following conditions are met 1 The car is at the top and the up slow down USD input to the controller is OFF because the switch should be open 2 The Door Zone DZ input to the controller is ON 3 The Door Lock DLK input to the controller is ON If the car is at the top and the message still flashes inspect the Up Slow Down Switch amp associated wiring Also inspect the door zone landing system vane or magnet at the top floor and the door lock circuit NOTE If the controller has the absolute floor encoding feature then the Bottom and Top Floor Demands should be cleared when the car stops in any door zone The car does not have to travel to the top or bottom BRAKE PICK FAILURE Traction only Description The car is shut down due to the
421. nts this option is used to qualify the HDR Redundancy fault when the Retiring Cam Option Section 5 4 4 6 is set to YES and this option is set to YES 5 4 4 31 PREVENT DCP TIL DOORS CLOSE When this option is set to YES the DCP output will not be generated until the doors close and a demand is present Set this option to YES when it is required that the doors be fully closed before asserting DCP e g when DCP is used to power the retiring cam RC relay DCP should be asserted only after the doors have fully closed as indicated by the DCL input 5 4 4 32 MOMENT D C B TO CLOSE DOORS YES NO When this option is set to YES a momentary push on the door close button is required to allow the doors to close while on normal operation 5 4 4 33 DOORS TO LATCH DOF FRONT REAR BOTH NONE This option would maintain the Door Open Function on the selected doors continuously as long as a door closing command is absent 5 4 4 34 DOORS TO LATCH DCF FRONT REAR BOTH NONE This option would maintain the Door Close Function on the selected doors continuously as long as a door opening command is absent 5 4 4 35 INV DOOR CLOSE LIMIT NONE FRONT REAR BOTH Set this option for doors that require inverted door close limit input logic DCL and or DCLR When this option is set the DCL and or DCLR inputs must be active when the doors are closed and inactive when the doors are open TIMER MENU OPTIONS 5 4 5 1 SHORT DOOR TIMER Range 0 5 120 0 S
422. nufacturer s counterweighting recommendation and test the drum machine s limit switches On modernizations it is easy to overlook the typical 40 counter weighting Always put a 40 load in the car and check for equal motor current up verses down at Inspection speed in the middle of the hoistway Equal current readings on the keypad display indicate that the counterweight is close to the correct value Take whatever steps are necessary to achieve proper counterweighting This is especially important since many traction installations do not have compensation cables or chains Turn OFF the power and reinstall the fuses that power terminals 2H and 2F The controller installation should now be complete Proceed to Section 4 Final Adjustment START UP 3 11 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 12 INSPECTION OPERATION MAGNETEK HPV 900 DRIVE For controllers with the G5 GPD515 drive see Section 3 4 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 drive see Section 3 6 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 drive see Section 3 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 drive see Section 3 8 DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS Each controller is shipped with completed parameter sheets and all of the field adjustable parameters have been entered into the drive unit based upon the provided field information However it is essential to verify all drive parameter settings before start up The drive software has been modified for this application therefore some of
423. o kss E 3 Res O ce 0 os 17 Ce pes RSI C44 RB4 Q amp eA koo Mes I Des 1 R67 gt pat O 1A u3 1AF kaCoC me D28 pee Ree Ez RES u M kec CC meg D30 R53 C46 are REG DES g O 5 E Gee he D32 1 REP C gt O_ D66 O T a R54 C47 R87 P4 D33 R70 C gt cy ES R34 4 Qe D67 y Hea EZ z p34 ras 22 R71 C gt 255 O D68 O C49 R89 cal u4 RPE W a 235 R36 FSS R72 C gt pss D696 O 1H D36 R37 R57 T50 a u2 C a R73 NOTE FOR BOARD Q aa P37 R38 D71 O cS ei cD nes a6 CHANGE TRANSFER ff zla Lo pee Es a R h JUMPER PLUG TH D7 Q sH fee C c P39 R40 an OBSERVE NOTCH 273g O L u5 u6 ae a 4 p40 R41 co ORIENTATION 2744 bes 1 p4 R42 Roe R74 cst R30 D75 O ESO a p42 R43 R59 a A 1076 O ME hee j R75 5 Y a C1 0 D43 R44 RGO D77 O HC CI 0 CIC p07 co R76 oss R92 D77 REV 4i 107 D44 R45 1 c gt DSS O pa COPYRIGHT 1988 u7 kee Raa E R61 C54 R93 PSK 1 R22 gt D60 O 779 O MADE IN USA h29 5 B45 Ree REZ css Ras 7K p30 ES ps IY RA 1 RIB gt PST O De0 O es o car c pa7l Insel BES R7 Cos EE OS J cio C932 Be ES 1 pag iras p64 reo LS RS O KJ 15 R65 c58 R97 O crt T R81 Dez 42 02 2P21 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION DN 1071 R1 1 3 HC CI O E Call Input Output Board See Figure 1 3 This board provides the following 4 PI output terminals e 12 call input and output terminals HC RD Rear Door Logic Board This board not sho
424. oad Protection Selection OL1 0 Disabled 2 Blower Cooled 1 Fan Cooled 3 Vector Motor MOL Time Const PwrL Selection Motor Overload Protection Hime Momentary power loss ridethrough selection 0 Disabled 1 Ridethrough for time set in L2 02 2 Ridethrough while CPU has power PwrL RideThru t Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time A 40 PwrL Baseblock t e APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS Momntary Pwr Loss Minimum Base Block Time 42 02 2P21 No Digital Operator Display Parameter Description Unit Setting Range MCE Defaults Field MCE Set Stall Prevention StallP Accel Sel N A to Flux Vector Stall Prevention Selection During Acceleration 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent StallP Accel Lvl N A to Flux Vector Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent 3 Stall Prevention with Braking Resistor StallP Run Sel N A to Flux Vector Stall Prevention Selection During Running 0 Disabled 1 Decel Time 1 2 Decel Time 2 StallP Run Level N A to Flux Vector Spd Agree Level Stall Prevention Level During Running Speed Agreement Detection Level L4 01 E1 04 Flux Vector only Spd Agree Width Num of Restarts Speed Agreement Detection Width FV only Number of au
425. ode When viewing the diagnostic LCD display be observant of any contradictory information i e the High Speed light should not be ON while the Doors Locked light is OFF The troubleshooting section is arranged as follows Troubleshooting Topic O o o TO TRACING SIGNALS IN THE CONTROLLER Typically a malfunction of the control system is due to a bad input or output signal Inputs are signals generated outside the controller cabinet and are brought to the designated terminals inside the cabinet and then read by the computer Outputs are signals generated inside the computer and are usually available on terminal blocks inside the controller cabinet Since a fault on any input or output can be the cause of a system malfunction being able to trace these signals and find the source of the problem is essential The following is an example that shows how an input signal can be traced from its origination point to its destination inside the computer For example look at the Door Zone DZ input Using the Diagnostic mode instructions in Section 5 3 of this manual use the N and S push buttons to address and observe the Door Zone DZ flag which shows the status of the Door Zone DZ input Moving the car in the hoistway should cause this flag to turn ON 1 and OFF 0 whenever the car passes a floor If the status of the DZ flag does not change one of the following could be a cause of the problem TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 A defective
426. of ANSI A17 1 SECTION 209 4 B ASME A 17 1b 1992 ADDENDA must have a means to ensure that the car speed is below 95 of the contract speed after opening the associated ETS limit switches The emergency terminal limit switch monitor performs this function Normally the jobs which come under the above requirements will have the HC ACIF or HC ETS board installed in the controller Both boards have the ETS monitor circuit This circuit receives the signal from the hall effect sensor and the magnets installed on the motor shaft or brake drum as described in Section 2 2 3 Installing and Wiring the Speed Sensor a b Make sure that all the wiring from the speed sensor to the HC ACIF board is complete Turn the ETS trimpot on the HC ACIF HC ETS board fully CW On a multi floor run adjust the speed of the car to 95 of the contract speed by adjusting the H speed Drive parameter D1 02 Remove the wire from the Up Emergency Terminal Limit Switch where it connects to the controller at terminal UET Start the car at the bottom of the hoist way and while running the car in the up direction slowly turn the ETS trimpot CCW until the ETS indicator turns ON and trips the FLT2 FLT relay on the HC ACIF HC ETS board and the car stops Press the ETS reset push button on the HC ACIF HC ETS board to drop the FLT2 FLT relay The ETS indicator should turn OFF and the car should be able to run Repeat d and e in the down direction with the wire from
427. og reference Hz 4 10 Hz or as described in Section 4 2 1 E1 01 Input voltage Drive input voltage E1 03 V F pattern selection F User defined pattern E1 04 to V F pattern voltage at different Should be according to MCE setting but verify them E1 10 points E2 01 Motor rated FLA Motor name plate value E2 02 Motor rated slip frequency Should be according to MCE setting but verify Ref to the drive parameter sheet or the drive manual which explain how to calculate parameter E2 02 Motor rated No load current Normally 30 40 of Motor Full load current Inspection Jog reference 6 If the parameters are set at the correct values and the car still does not move call MCE Technical Support 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 15 6 5 2 CAR DOES NOT REACH CONTRACT SPEED If the car was operational on Inspection operation but does not reach CONTRACT SPEED verify that the following drive parameters are set correctly Parameter Setting Value D1 02 High speed reference 60 Hz or as described in Section 4 3 4 H1 03 Terminal 5 select 80 Mult step spd 1F for high speed input The D1 02 and H1 03 parameters are for High speed selection When the H relay on the HC RB4 VFAC board is picked the HX relay on the HC ACI should also pick If parameter D1 02 is set at 60Hz then the drive keypad should display 60Hz and the DRIVE FWD or REV indicator should be illuminated If not verify that the
428. oil in the system Troubleshooting Check the device that is wired to the input usually an oil temperature sensor 3 1 05 Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 13 5 3 6 3 ELEVATOR POSITION The underlined section in this display shows the current elevator position relative to the bottom The number 1 denotes the lowest landing in the elevator system 5 3 6 4 COMPUTER INTERNAL MEMORY The underlined section in this display shows the computer s internal memory address 2 digits and the data 8 digits at that address The colon character separates the address from the data The address can be changed by first pressing the Npushbutton then by using the and pushbuttons Each of the 8 data digits flags corresponds to a particular elevator signal or condition There are 8 pieces of information about the elevator at each address Each data digit is either 1 or 0 The 1 indicates the signal or condition is ON and 0 indicates the signal or condition is OFF The Computer Internal Memory Chart Table 5 4 indicates the meaning of these data digits at different addresses For example the internal memory display might look like this The address on the display is 29 the data at that address is 11110000 Table 5 5 is an alphabetized list with a description of each flag and variable Below is an example of how to interpret the display Display Data 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Row 29 DNDO LD DPD DDP UPDO LU UPD UDP Notice DN
429. ol 0 0 0 0 0 16 of 3 5 LF 41 Leveling speed fpm LF 20 0 LF 42 High Speed fom 0 LF 20 0 LF 43 Inspection speed fom 0 66 of LF 20 0 LF 44 High level Speed fom 0 25 of LF 20 0 MEOIR LF 45 Intermediate speed fom 0 91 of LF 20 0 Start Jerk used for the transitions at the start and 3 2 0 5 0 LPSO end of acceleration except see LF 55 fis Oi SEO a LF 51 Acceleration rate fts 0 30 8 00 ee 20 50 Flare Jerk used for the transitions at the start and 3 2 0 5 0 ee end of deceleration except see LF 56 ue OSA gt SEO SA LF 53 Deceleration rate fts 0 30 8 00 eee 2 0 5 0 Stop Jerk used for the final transitions from leveling 3 1 00 HPS to zero speed off LF 52 is used instead we ai 002 Be gi LF 55 Acceleration Jerk used for the transition from fts3 0 31 32 00 3 28 4 00 acceleration to contract speed Deceleration Jerk used for the transition from 2 5 x 4 00 Ress contract speed to deceleration fis 0 30 E00 S00 LF 57 Speed following error O off 1 on 2 alarm 0 2 1 1 LF 58 Speed Difference 0 30 10 10 LF 59 Following error timer sec 0 000 10 000 3 000 3 000 nang NOT USED BY MCE Must be left at factory defaults LF 67 Pretorque Gain 0 50 1 50 1 00 1 00 LF 68 Pretorque Offset 25 0 25 0 0 0 LF 69 Pretorque Direction 0 off 1 on 0 1 0 off 0 off LF 70 Brake Release Time Delay to turn on DRO sec 001 3 0 0 200 0 200 pos NOT USED BY MCE Must b
430. olated platform load weigher MCE the system simply learns the reference values of the empty and fully loaded car weight However with the crosshead deflection load weigher K Tech the system must learn the reference values at each floor due to the dynamics of the elevator system This is necessary because the perceived load at the crosshead varies with the position of the car in the hoistway due to the changing proportion of the traveling cable hanging beneath the car and the position of the compensation cables The Analog Load Weigher Learn Function is performed as follows a Move the empty car to a convenient floor where the test weights are located It is best to have one person in the machine room and another person at the floor to load the weights Place the car on Independent Service operation If an Independent Service switch is not available in the car place a jumper between panel mount terminal 2 and terminal 49 on the Main Relay board HC RB4 x Place the F3 switch in the up position and press the N pushbutton to select the Analog Load Weigher Learn Function scrolling message is displayed Press the S pushbutton to start The computer responds with one of two scrolling messages e CAR NOT READY TO LEARN MUST BE ON INDEPENDENT SERVICE Verify that the car has been placed on Independent Service e READY TO LEARN EMPTY CAR VALUES PRESS S TO START If the empty car values have already been learned and you want to be
431. on 00 00 cee eee 5 24 5 4 3 2 Fire Phase 1 Main Floor 0 0000 5 24 5 4 3 3 Fire Phase 1 Alt Floor 0 0 cee eee 5 24 5 4 3 4 Fire Svce Code a s Career eck ida CAw aes PANELS OLE ORR 5 25 5 4 3 5 Fire Phase 2nd Alt Floor 0 00000 5 25 5 4 3 6 Bypass Stop Sw On Phase 1 0 000 5 25 5 4 3 7 Honeywell Fire Operation 0 0000 eee 5 25 5 4 3 8 New York City Fire Phase 2 and ANSI 89 5 25 5 4 3 9 White Plains Ny Fire Code 002 cece 5 25 5 4 3 10 Mass 524 CMR Fire Code 0 0c eee ee 5 25 5 4 4 Door Operation Menu Options 2 eee 5 25 54 41 N dging Z sese kins cat Geng Sea koe aa oe wees a aie 5 25 5 4 4 2 Stuck Photo Eye Protection ususani aaa 5 26 5 4 4 3 Sequential Door Oper F R aeann 5 26 5 4 4 4 Car Call Cancels Door Time nannaa 5 26 5 4 4 5 Nudging During Fire Ph 1 2 000002 eee eee 5 26 5 4 4 6 Retiring Cam Option 0 ee 5 26 5 4 4 7 IPRO OPGMING eschew 2h naana Oh oP seit tite Bee AEP LE 2 5 26 5 4 4 8 Mechanical Safety Edge 0 000 5 26 5 4 4 9 Nudging Output buzzer Only asana 0 0002 ee 5 27 5 4 4 10 D C B Cancels Door Time 0 0 eee eee 5 27 5 4 4 11 Leave Doors Open on MGS 00 00 eee 5 27 5 4 4 12 Leave Doors Open on PTI ESS 00000 cee ee 5 27 5 4 4 13 Nudging During Fire Phase 2
432. on current and you might start hearing a humming noise from motor before the car stops and brake drops NOTE Refer to Section 4 3 5 b for more details regarding over voltage trip If all the items described above are set properly and the car still overshoots consult the Drive manual If the problem still exists then increase the slow down distance on a couple of floors so that you can run the car between these two floors at high speed and stop the car properly 6 5 5 OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR AT CONTRACT SPEED CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM ONLY FLUX VECTOR APPLICATIONS 6 5 6 6 5 7 42 02 2P21 For aclosed loop system if there are OSCILLATIONS in the car at contract speed then verify the following 1 2 3 Are the gain parameters C5 01 and C5 02 are set very high The default settings are C5 01 20 and C5 02 0 2 Is the Motor Slip parameter E2 02 set correctly Is the encoder properly mounted If it is properly mounted it should not oscillate OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR OPEN LOOP SYSTEM For open loop systems if there are oscillations in the car check the commanded speed input to the drive unit Verify the motor slip parameter E2 02 and the Slip Compensation Gain parameter C3 01 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE BY CLIPPING THE DOOR LOCKS If the drive trips on over voltage by clipping the door locks check the dynamic braking circuit and verify that drive parameter L5 01 1 and parameter L5 02 0 TROUBLESHOOTING
433. on H speed gt This speed can be increased to 55Hz if required but must be less than D1 02 for proper operation HighLevel D103 015 80o HO This speed can be increased to 40 Hz if Intermediate FIGURE 4 1 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters G5 GPD515 Velocity Hz Velocity High Speed a eg ee a ee Range D1 02 60 Hz A P1 17 P1 18 C1 01 Acceleration Intermediate Di 07 45 Hz High Level D1 05 1 3 Hz Zero Speed P1 04 R P1 07 Time 42 02 2P21 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 5 4 2 2 ADJUSTING ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RATE The acceleration and deceleration rate is programmed in seconds This value is the amount of time to accelerate from Zero Speed to High Speed or decelerate from High Speed to Zero Speed The drive has the capability to use a two sectioned acceleration deceleration curve as shown in Figure 4 2 However in this application parameter C1 11 Acceleration Deceleration Switching Level is set to 0 0 Hz Therefore parameter C1 01 defines the total acceleration time from Zero Speed to High Speed and parameter C1 02 defines the total deceleration time from High Speed to Zero Speed With parameter C1 11 set to 0 0 Hz parameters C1 07 and C1 08 have no affect on acceleration or deceleration FIGURE 4 2 Acceleration and Deceleration Rate Parameters G5 GPD515 Acceleration C1 01 1 to 3 seconds Set initially to1 7 seconds C1 07 C1 01
434. on car call button is pressed or if the door close button for the rear doors is pressed ECRN Emergency Power Car Run Output This output is associated with the emergency power logic Activation of this output indicates that the car is being prevented from running by the emergency power operation logic EFG Egress Floor Gong Output EMSB Emergency Medical Service Buzzer Output EMSIC Emergency Medical Service Indicator Car Output EMSIH Emergency Medical Service Indicator Hall Output EP1 Emergency Power Phase 1 Output This output is generated when the system is in the first phase of emergency power the sequential lowering phase EP2 Emergency Power Phase 2 Output This output is generated when the system is in the second phase of emergency power the normal running of a car on emergency power generators EQIND Earthquake Indicator Output This output is generated when the CWI input is activated and the car is out of a door zone on Independent Service only during the 10 seconds the car waits before moving FIR1 Fire Service Phase output This output is activated during Fire Service Phase operation FLASH Flash output This output turns ON and OFF at 0 5 second intervals FLO Fan Light Operation Output This output is used to turn OFF the fan and the light within the car The output is usually OFF It is turned ON after the Fan Light Timer elapses The
435. on ft s n 0 1 2 LF 27 Encoder Pulse Number ppr closed loop n LF 54 Deceleration ft s n 0 1 2 If all the parameters are correct relay DRO turns ON when direction is picked and car still does not move then call MCE technical support 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 43 6 9 2 CAR DOES NOT RUN REACH CONTRACT SPEED 6 44 If the car was operational on Inspection operation but does not reach CONTRACT SPEED verify that the following drive parameters are set correctly en wooren SSS ea Conracspeeamn rme OOOO E21 Traction Sheave diameterinches fir 22 Gearreductionratio J eas Rogo S A LF 31 Kp Speed Accel Proportional gain d LF 31 Kp Speed Decel Proportional gain A LF 32 Ki Speed Accel Integral gain J ooo _d LF 32 Ki Speed Decel Integral gain i O LFa2 HighspeedFPM Verify that the drive is getting the High speed command signal To verify that the drive is getting the High speed command signal from the controller select parameter LF 86 and make a multi floor run The display should change from zero 0 to three 3 when high speed is picked If the value remains zero 0 the drive is not getting the high speed command signal Check the following e Verify that relay H on the HC RB4 VFAC board and relay HX on the HC ACI board are both picked e Verify that the voltage between terminal H and COM on the HC ACI board is zero when relay HX is picked If not check the wiring be
436. on relay INX is dropped out The trimpot is labeled ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed and is located on the HC ACI board The circuit looks at pulses coming from the hall effect sensor sensing the magnets on the motor shaft or brake drum etc Calibrate this circuit as follows a Put the car on Inspection operation by placing the Relay Panel Inspection switch on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board in the ON position b Run the car on Inspection up or down and record the actual car speed measured with a hand held tachometer It must be returned to the original value when this test is complete Now run the car on Inspection and increase the Inspection speed A3 Speed Command 1 parameter in increments of 2 feet per minute to trip the ILO The ILO tripping speed should not exceed 140 fom If the red ILO light on the HC ACI board is lit push the FAULT RESET button and the light should go out C Turn the ILO trimpot fully CCW Run the car in the UP direction on Inspection while very slowly turning the ILO trimpot clockwise until the ILO indicator just turns ON After stopping push the FAULT RESET button on the HC ACI board and then set the A3 Speed Command 1 parameter to a lower value Run the car on Inspection and increase the inspection speed by increasing the A3 Speed Command 1 parameter to show that this low speed safety monitor circuit will trip at no higher than 140 fpm or no higher than the maximum available inspection speed if i
437. on speed is set by drive parameter D1 09 in Hz For flux vector applications set D1 09 4Hz as the initial setting to slowly move the car amp to prevent arcing on the contactors during initial start up Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Verify that the drive is in OPERATION mode Run the car in the desired direction by toggling the UP DN toggle switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board The PM contactor and the BR contactor should pick and the car should move Make sure that the car moves in the appropriate direction and the brake works properly START UP 3 9 If the car moves in the opposite direction e for open loop applications interchange two of the motor leads for flux vector applications display the OUTPUT CURRENT on the drive keypad by pressing the UP arrow twice Pick direction on Inspection and check the following 1 If the car moves in the opposite direction and draws a normal value of current less than the Motor FLA or approximately 30 to 40 of motor FLA then perform the following steps a Turn the controller power OFF Interchange two of the motor connections b Turn the controller power ON Set parameter F1 05 CCW if its original setting is CW If the original setting was CCW then set F1 05 to CW The car should now move in the correct direction and draw the normal value of current 2 Ifthe car moves in the opposite direction and draws higher current than norma
438. once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection b Move the car to the bottom terminal landing Check to see if the DZ relay is picked If not move the car on Inspection to place it in the Door Zone SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION HPV 900 Place the Relay Panel Inspection switch in the OFF position If the car is not at a landing it will move to a landing If the car is at a landing but not in the door zone relays L and either LU or LD should pick and the car should perform a relevel If the relevel is not successful check the following If the brake picks and the car is trying to level but is not able to it may be necessary to adjust the Level Speed parameter A3 Speed Command 2 on the HPV 900 AC Drive to get the car to move If relays L and LD are picked but the brake and other relays are not the down direction limit switch may be preventing the leveling down operation If the car is trying to level it will not leave the landing for a call until the leveling is complete Move the limit switch if necessary The Status Indicator lights should now display the indication for Independent Service operation At this time the Position Indicator should match the actual car location Note that all of the Position Indicators and direction arrows are conveniently displayed on the controller All the calls are also displayed on the controller BRAKE ADJUSTMENT FOR 125 LOAD HPV 900
439. one of the relays have been picked inspect fuse F4 on the controller s back plate Verify that there is 120 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board If no problems are found then briefly place a jumper between terminals 2 and 20 on the HC RB4 VFAC board and confirm that the SAF relay turns ON after four seconds If the SAF relay turns OFF after removing the jumper there is a problem with the safety string Note that the RDY relay will turn ON as long as the VFAC drive is in normal condition and there is 15DVC present on the HC ACI board The N C contact of the fault tripping output on the drive is used to pick the RDY relay This contact opens if there is a fault in the VFAC drive unit The fault can be reset by pressing the drive reset button on the HC ACI board or by pressing the drive reset button on the drive keypad All of the soeed commands acceleration deceleration and the S curves are adjusted by setting drive parameters using the drive key pad A complete listing of the Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters is found in Appendix J A parameter sheet listing the parameter settings as shipped from MCE is shipped with each controller If required install a temporary jumper between terminals 4 and 8 to bypass the door locks f the car is on a final limit switch place a jumper between terminals 2 and 16 to bypass the main safety string Remember to remove these jumpers as soon as possible For Flux Vector applicat
440. ons 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 WARNING The following tests should be performed only by the qualified elevator personnel skilled in final adjustment and inspections 4 16 1 INSPECTION LEVELING OVER SPEED TEST TORQMAX F5 The HC ACI board is equipped with an independent low speed monitoring system which can trip and open a fault contact if the car runs faster than a preset speed 150 fom max on Car Top Inspection Hoistway Access or Leveling operation The monitoring system is active when the Leveling L relay is picked or when the Access Inspection relay INX is dropped The trimpot is labeled ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed and is located on the HC ACI board The circuit looks at pulses coming from the hall effect sensor sensing the magnets on the motor shaft or brake drum etc Calibrate this circuit as follows a Put the car on Inspection operation by placing the Relay Panel Inspection switch on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board in the ON position b Run the car on Inspection up or down and record the actual measured car speed with a hand held tachometer It must be returned to the original value when this test is complete Now run the car on Inspection and increase the Inspection speed parameter LF 43 in increments of 2 feet per minute to trip the ILO The ILO tripping speed should not exceed 140
441. ontract Speed YN LF 41 Zoro Speed LF 50 f LF 56 Time Job Drive Serial Production Order Test technician Drive Model Date A 50 APPENDIX L QUICK REFERENCE FOR TORQMAX F5 DRIVE PARAMETERS 42 02 2P21 INDEX 2AB Redundancy Fault message 5 6 2AB Relay coil monitoring input option 5 31 A ABI Alarm Bell Input option 5 31 absolute floor encoding 4 2 ABZ Attendant Service Buzzer Output option 5 35 AC Drive parameters G5 GPD515 Drive A 6 A 13 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive A 14 A 20 TORQMAX F4 Drive A 21 A 23 TORQMAX F5 Drive A 47 Yaskawa F7 Drive A 37 acceleration deceleration rate G5 GPD515 Drive 4 6 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 20 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 32 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 60 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 46 Adaptive tuning MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 25 Alarm 4 times in 60 secs message 5 6 Alarm Car not in DZ message 5 6 ALT PARKING FLOOR option 5 24 ALV Alive Input option 5 31 ALV Other car alive output flag 5 15 analog load weigher learn function 5 52 ANALOG LOAD WEIGHER NONE MCE K TECH option 5 43 API Alternate Parking Input flag 5 15 API Alternate Parking Input option 5 31 AS At Speed fault 3 5 AS DBF Reset switch 3 5 ATS BYPASS SECURITY YES NO option 5 43 ATS Attendant Service Input option 5 31 Attendant Service Operation message 5 6 AUTO Emergency power auto output flag 5 15 AUTO Emergency Power Auto Selection Input option 5 31 AUTOMATIC FLOOR
442. operation Call MCE about a week before you are ready to turn the elevator over to full automatic operation so the running program can be shipped to you If you need to change a program chip on a computer board make sure that you read the instructions and know exactly how to install the new chip Plugging these devices in backwards may damage your chip Elevator control products must be installed by experienced field personnel This manual does not address code requirements The field personnel must know all the rules and regulations pertaining to the safe installation and running of elevators This equipment is an O E M product designed and built to comply with ASME A17 1 and National Electrical Code CAN CSA B44 1 ASME A17 5 and must be installed by a qualified contractor It is the responsibility of the contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with any local codes and is installed safely The 3 phase AC power supply to this equipment must come from a fused disconnect switch or a circuit breaker that is sized in conformance with all applicable national state and local electrical codes to provide the necessary overload protection for the drive unit and motor Incorrect motor branch circuit protection will void the warranty and may create a hazardous condition Proper grounding is vitally important to the safe and successful operation of your system Bring your ground wire to the system subplate You must choose the proper
443. or OUT14 used for OUT15 used for OUT16 used for OUT17 used for OUT18 used for OUT19 used for OUT20 used for OUT21 used for OUT22 used for OUT23 used for OUT24 used for OUT25 used for OUT26 used for OUT27 used for OUT28 used for OUT29 used for OUT30 used for OUT31 used for OUT32 used for EXTRA FEATURES OPTIONS MCE VALUES NEW VALUES PI Output Type 1 wire Binary 1 wire Binary Floor Encoding Inputs Yes No Yes No Encode All Floors Yes No Yes No Intermediate Speed Yes No Yes No Emergency Power Operation ____No Emergency Power Return Floor ____ No Emergency Power Return Floor ____ Light Load Weighing No Light Load Car Call Limit No Photo Eye Anti Nuisance ____No Consec Stops w o PHE Limit lt Light Load Car Call Limit No Consec Stops w o PHE Limit Earthquake Operations ANSI Earthquake Operation California Earthquake Operation ANSI Earthquake Operation California Earthquake Operation Counterweighted Drum Machine Yes No Yes No MG Shutdown Operation _____ No MGS Return Floor __ ____ No MGS Return Floor _ Peripheral Device Yes No Yes No PA COM 1 Media _____ None ____ Serial Cable None Serial Cable ___Line Driver _ Modem ___ Line Driver _ Mod
444. or before the brake is fully lifted but not so long as to allow the car to roll back Run the car again and verify that the car will start accelerate decelerate and run at High Level and Level speeds into the floor and stop Place calls for all of the landings Verify that all of the calls work Verify the operation and placement of all vanes or magnets and vane or magnet switches and verify that the car steps the Position Indicators correctly The slowdown distance for the elevator is measured from the point where the STU sensor or STD sensor if going down is activated by a metal vane or magnetic strip to the position where the car is stopped at the floor with the DZ sensor centered on the leveling target with LU or LD sensors not engaged This slowdown distance was chosen to give a reasonable deceleration rate Continue to make two floor runs and slowly increase High speed until Contract Speed is reached It may be necessary to adjust the Deceleration rate LF 54 and deceleration jerk rate LF 52 to stop the car at the floor Adjust the Acceleration rate parameter LF 51 until the desired acceleration rate is achieved Several runs may be required to obtain optimum acceleration The acceleration rate should be about the same as the deceleration rate NOTE To observe the Actual speed and the motor torque with an oscilloscope or a chart recorder monitor drive terminal X2A 5 and X2A 6 with respect to X2A 8 Take all necessary precautions w
445. or operation A WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific motor machine job Refer to the adjustment manual for detailed information Digital Operator eos A Setting Drive Field MCE No Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults Setting Adjust AO A1 Drive Contract Car Spod Elevator Contract Speed fpm 0 3000 0 1 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at elevator contract speed rom 50 3000 1130 Respone Sensitivity of the speed regulator pa 1 0 20 0 10 20 Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 Inner speed loop crossover frequency rad 5 Inner Loop Xover only with Ereg speed regulator ee 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 Percent of response of the speed regulator 7 Gain Reduce Mult using when in the low gain Mode o 10 100 100 80 Speed level to change to low gain mode z Gain Chng Level only with internal gain switch o 0 100 0 100 10 Tach Rate Gain Helps with the effects of rope resonance 0 30 0 0 0 Sets phase margin of speed regulator o 7 Spd Phase Margin only with PI speed regulator 43730 ap 20 Time to ramp torque from rated torque to Ramped Stop Time zero sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 only with torque ramp down stop function Contact Fit Time Time before a contactor fault is declared sec 0 10 5 00 0 50 0 50 Brake Pick Time Time before a brake pick fau
446. ormal current perform the following a Verify the actual traction sheave diameter Enter the measured value in parameter LF 21 b Verify the gear reduction ratio parameter LF 22 Verify the Rated Motor speed parameter LF 11 This value is the full load motor RPM NOTE The Imperial motors name plate has full load RPM information which should be entered in parameter LF 11 Full load RPM information may not be available for Reuland motors The motor name plate lists the Synchronous RPM i e 900 1200 1500 or 1800 In flux vector applications Reuland motors have slip between 1 8 and 2 0 Set LF 11 Motor Synchronous RPM 0 018 x Motor Synchronous RPM This calculation gives a very reasonable value for LF 11 Its effect can be verified by observing the motor current parameter ru 09 If ru 09 is normal compared to the motor FLA when the car is running at contract speed the motor slip is correct If required LF 11 can be adjusted in small increments 5 10 RPM However higher values close to the Synchronous RPM will trip the E ENC drive fault d Lower the Kp Speed Accel Decel Proportional Gain A LF 31 d LF 31 do not set below 1200 Refer to section 3 6 3 g of this manual for more detailed information 4 66 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 16 FINAL ELEVATOR INSPECTION PROCEDURE TORQMAX F5 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 AC Drive see Secti
447. ors the INAX relay for proper operation If the INAX relay is ON the RINAX input will be OFF RINAX should always be the opposite of INAX otherwise the INAX Redundancy Fault is logged and the elevator shuts down Troubleshooting Check the INAX relay for proper operation Also check the prints to see where the input RINAX comes in and check 47 K resistor swap ribbon cable and finally try replacing the associated board w relay or HC IOX INDEPENDENT SERVICE OPERATION Independent Service Description The Independent Service switch inside the car has been turned on Troubleshooting Check the Independent Service switch inside the car 5 10 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message INSPECTION OPERATION Inspection Description The inspection computer input IN is deactivated Troubleshooting Check all of the inspection switches and associated wiring NDING SYSTEM REDUNDANCY FAILURE Non ASME 2000 Description Either DZ LU or LD has failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that on any run between floors the LSR input goes low at least once If the DZ sensor has failed closed power will be present continuously on the LSR input If either the LU or LD sensor has failed closed power will be present constantly on their respective inputs and this can also cause this error This condition can be cleared by pressing the Redundancy Reset button LE
448. orting C Bypass the Emergency Terminal Up Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and UET on the HC ACIF board d Bypass the Up terminal slowdown and Up Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 on the HC RB4 VFAC board e Register a car call for the top terminal landing from the controller The counter weight will strike the buffer f Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the down direction to move the car g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 10 and terminals 10 and 11 and reconnect the wire to terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Reseat the FLT relay 4 4 4 2 CAR BUFFER TEST WITH A FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car b Disconnect the Step Down STD input by removing the wire from terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent shorting C Bypass the Emergency Terminal Down Limit if provided by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and DET on the HC ACIF board d Bypass the Down terminal slowdown and Down Normal Limit by placing jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 on the HC RB4 VFAC board e Position the elevator several floor
449. osition Input option 5 33 FCS Fire phase 2 input flag 5 17 FCSM Fire service phase 2 input memory flag 5 17 FDC Door fully closed phase 2 flag 5 17 FDCR Door fully closed phase 2 rear flag 5 17 FIR1 Fire Service Phase output option 5 36 FIRE BYPASSES HOSPITAL option 5 42 FIRE PHASE 1 ALT FLOOR option 5 24 FIRE PHASE 1 MAIN FLOOR option 5 24 FIRE PHASE 2ND ALT FLOOR option 5 25 Fire Service Alternate message 5 9 6 13 Fire Service Main message 5 9 6 13 FIRE SERVICE MENU OPTIONS 5 24 FIRE SERVICE OPERATION option 5 24 Fire Service Phase 1 Main message 5 9 Fire Service Phase 1 Alternate message 5 9 Fire Service Phase 2 message 5 9 6 13 FIRE SVCE CODE option 5 25 FLASH Flash output option 5 36 Flex Talk option A 28 A 30 FLO Fan Light Operation Output option 5 36 FLOOR ENCODING INPUTS option 5 38 flux vector applications G5 GPD515 Drive 4 11 4 13 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 50 4 52 INDEX l 3 FRA Alternate Fire service phase 1 input flag 5 17 FRAA Fire Phase 1 Alternate 2nd alternate Input option 5 33 FRAON Fire Phase 1 Alternate Switch ON Position Input option 5 33 FRAS Alternate fire flag 5 17 FRBYP Fire phase 1 bypass input flag 5 17 FRBYP Fire Phase 1 Switch BYPASS Position Input option 5 33 FRC Fire phase 2 flag 5 17 FRC Fire Service Phase 2 Output option 5 36 FREE No demand and in service flag 5 17 FRHTW Fire Sensor Hoistway option 5 33 FRM Fire service phas
450. ostic mode FUNCTION OF N PUSHBUTTON The N pushbutton see Figure 5 1 allows for the advancement of the computer memory address which is displayed on the second line of the LCD For example in this display pressing the N pushbutton once will cause the 2 of the address 20 to begin blinking By continuing to press the THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 N pushbutton the 0 of the address 20 will begin to blink The cycle continues while the N pushbutton is being pressed Once the digit to be changed is blinking the address can be modified using the and pushbuttons refer to Sections 5 3 4 and 5 3 5 The data 8 digits that corresponds to the memory address is displayed to the right of the address see Section 5 3 6 4 This display will change as the memory address changes FUNCTION OF S PUSHBUTTON The S pushbutton see Figure 5 1 ends the ability to change the address by stopping the digit from blinking If the S pushbutton is not pressed the selected digit will stop blinking automatically after a period of about 20 seconds FUNCTION OF PUSHBUTTON The pushbutton see Figure 5 1 modifies the digit of the computer memory address selected by the Npushbutton If the pushbutton is pressed the selected digit is incremented by one The data display will also change as the address changes For example if the 0 of the address 20 is blinking pressing the pushbutton once will change t
451. ot available if the car is programmed for sequential door operation See Section 5 4 4 3 for more details 5 4 4 27 CONST PRESS OP BYPASS PHE This option is used to indicate if Constant Pressure Operations such as Independent Service Attendant Service or if the Constant Pressure Door Close option is set to YES should bypass the Photo Eye when the Photo Eye is active and there is a demand to close the doors and move the car When set to YES the car will bypass the Photo Eye and nudge the doors closed When set to NO the car will not bypass the Photo Eye the doors will remain open until the Photo Eye is cleared THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 5 5 4 4 28 DOOR TYPE IS HORIZONTAL VERTICAL This option is used to indicate if the doors open horizontally or vertically When set to vertical requires constant pressure on the door close button DCB to shut the doors when exiting Fire Phase 2 away from the recall floor with Fire Phase 1 active ASME A17 1 requirement 5 4 4 29 FRONT DOOR MECH COUPLED YES NO Set to YES if the front car gate is mechanically coupled to the hallway doors To satisfy A17 1 2000 code requirements this option is used to qualify the HD Redundancy fault when the Retiring Cam Option Section 5 4 4 6 is set to YES and this option is set to YES 5 4 4 30 REAR DOOR MECH COUPLED YES NO Set to YES if the rear car gate is mechanically coupled to the hallway doors To satisfy A17 1 2000 code requireme
452. ovided that the drive out current is greater than 30 of the drive full load current The adjustments and tests are complete Now is the time to fine tune any areas that may require touching up Make sure that all of the appropriate data has been properly documented and that all of the jumpers have been removed before the car is returned to service WARNING Before the Elevator can be turned over to normal use it is very important that no safety circuit is bypassed The items to be checked include but are not limited to Relays FLT on HC ACI board and AS and ETL on the HC ACIF board if provided must be installed properly in their sockets Wire connected to panel mount terminal DCL Wire connected to terminal 47 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board No jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present No jumpers between terminals 2 and UET or DET No jumper between terminals 2 and 15 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 4 and 8 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 8 and 10 or 12 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 10 and 11 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 12 and 13 HC RB4 VFAC No jumper between terminals 16 and 17 HC RB4 VFAC Drive parameter D1 02 E1 04 and 01 03 must be set to original value for High speed No jumper between F7 Drive terminals SN and S3
453. ow the resistor fuse or triac which plugs into the Call board Later versions of these boards may have plug in zener diodes These parts are designed to be field re placeable and spares are provided in unused positions on the Call board or are available from MCE DO NOT JUMPER THESE PLUG IN COMPONENTS AS IT MAY DESTROY THE BOARD OR OTHER CONTROLLER COMPONENTS If any of these components should blow FIND OUT WHY instead of constantly replacing them as the constant faults can eventually damage the board 4 1 6 42 02 2P21 TEST MODE OPERATION The purpose of Test mode is to allow easy and convenient operation of the car so that the final adjustments can be made without cycling the doors When the elevator is operated in the TEST mode the elevator doors do not open The door open relays are disconnected automatically during Test mode operation The car is put into TEST mode by placing the TEST NORMAL switch on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board in the TEST position Note that when the TEST NORMAL switch is in the TEST position it puts the car into Test mode provided that the Car Top Inspection and Relay Panel Inspection switches are in the OFF or normal positions In that case the LCD should be showing TEST MODE and not NORMAL If the expected indication is not displayed check to see what message is being displayed and correct the problem Operation while in Test mode should be easy to understand by knowing the following a Every ti
454. pad display should change from nOP no operation to Facc forward acceleration and then to Fcon forward constant running Pick DOWN direction on Inspection The drive keypad display should change from nOP no operation to rAcc reverse acceleration and then to rCon reverse constant running 6 42 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 When direction is picked on Inspection the DRO relay should pick If this is not true check the following a Verify that the CNP and RDY relays are picked when the direction is not picked If the RDY relay is not picked then check for a fault displayed on the drive keypad If there is no fault in the AC drive unit then check the wiring for the RDY circuit Relays PT1 PT2 UA or DA on the HC ACI board should pick when the direction relays are picked If these relays are not picking check for 36VAC between terminals XC1 XC2 and 15 and 15 on the HC ACI board If there is no voltage check the fuse on the primary side of the 30 VA transformer shown in drawing 3 of the job prints Also check the wiring from the secondary of the same transformer to terminal XC1 XC2 on the HC ACI board b To verify the UP DN Enable and speed inputs to the drive measure the DC voltage between terminals X2 10 and the respective drive terminals In the down direction the voltage between X2 10 and X2 4 should be zero In the up direction the voltage between X2 10 and X 2 4 should be zero The floating voltage between these po
455. parameter settings before start up START UP 3 15 Q The drive software has been modified for this application therefore some of the parameters on the parameter sheet shipped with the controller are different from those shown in the drive manual If a drive is replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Refer to the instruction manual for the VFAC drive unit which is provided along with this manual as part of the documentation Become familiar with the VFAC Drive Manual particularly with the operation of the Digital Operator keypad operation Note that the way this VFAC drive unit is being used ignores many of its functions Pages D and DX of the job prints show the drive interface and which external functions are being used 3 6 2 VERIFYING THE CRITICAL TORQMAX F4 DRIVE PARAMETERS The AC drive parameters must be verified before moving the car on inspection operation The Caution box below lists critical drive parameters which must be verified before start up The remaining drive parameters must be verified with the Quick Reference for TORQMAX F4 Drive Parameters for Series M product which was shipped with the controller This complete listing of drive parameters can also be found in Appendix D of this manual N CAUTION Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running The following are very critical TOR
456. paration for running the elevator at High speed TABLE 4 11 _TORQMAX F5 Drive Speed Levels TORQMAX F5 Drive Speed Levels Speed Speed Drive Preferred setting in preparation for running the car p parameter at High speed Inspection This speed can be increased to 66 of Contract ftm LF Speed if required 2 to 5 of Contract Speed High Level High ET EH 5 to 10 of Contract Speed ft m Intermediate 42 of Contract Speed This speed can be increased to Intermediate 91 if required but must be less than Contract Speed t m Hioh High speed 50 of Contract Speed This parameter will be f m g LF 42 changed to Contract Speed during final adjustment When parameter LF 86 is selected the drive display indicates which speed is selected Inspection Leveling Speed High Leveling Speed High Speed 6 Intermediate Speed FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 59 FIGURE 4 7 S Curve Parameters and Recommended Speed Settings TORQMAX F5 Speed S Curve Speed Command Parameters Parameters High Speed Contract Speed LF 42 Intermediate Speed LF 45 High Level Speed LF 44 Level Speed LF 41 4 14 2 4 14 3 4 60 Zero Speed LF 52 LF 53 LF 54 60 to 75 of Contract Speed 5 to 10 of Contract Speed Time ADJUSTING ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION RATES The acceleration and deceleration rates are programmed in feet per second per second ft s using the S Curve parameters see Figure 4 7 and Table 4 12
457. ped with an independent low speed monitoring system which can trip and open a fault contact if the car runs faster than a preset speed 150 fom max on Car Top Inspection Hoistway Access or Leveling operation The monitoring system is active when the Leveling L relay is picked or when the Access Inspection relay INX is dropped out The trimpot is labeled ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed and is located on the HC ACI board The circuit looks at pulses coming from the hall effect sensor sensing the magnets on the motor shaft or brake drum etc Calibrate this circuit as follows a Put the car on Inspection operation by placing the Relay Panel Inspection switch on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board in the ON position b Run the car on Inspection up or down and record the actual measured car speed with a hand held tachometer It must be returned to the original value when this test is complete Now run the car on Inspection and adjust the IN speed Parameter D1 17 as high as possible to trip the ILO the maximum value for D1 17 is contract speed The ILO tripping speed should not exceed 140 fom If the red ILO light on the HC ACI board is lit push the FAULT RESET button and the light should go out C Turn the ILO trimpot fully CCW Run the car in the UP direction on Inspection while very slowly turning the ILO trimpot clockwise until the ILO indicator just turns ON After stopping push the FAULT RESET button on the HC ACI board and the
458. peed Between Floors 055 5 42 5 4 9 25 Leveling Sensor Enabled disabled 45 5 43 5 4 9 26 KCE Enable Disable 0 0 00 cee 5 43 5 4 9 27 Analog Load Weigher None Mce K tech 5 43 5 4 9 29 Ind Bypass Security Yes No 0 00 e eee 5 43 5 4 9 30 ATS Bypass Security Yes No 00 00 eee eae 5 43 5 4 9 31 Car to Floor Return Floor 2 000 c eee ee 5 43 5 4 9 32 Scrolling Speed Slow Normal Fast 5 43 5 4933 OFRP Between FLRS 4 4co05csine mies pose eee es 5 43 42 02 2P21 TABLE OF CONTENTS vii 5 5 External Memory Mode 2 22 25 s4s4c004 044 au Sas ee dem baswe ce dagwe tae 5 44 5 5 1 Getting into External Memory Mode 000 eee eee eee 5 44 5 5 2 Function of N Pusnbution so 2a oe Sea oe MOR oa eee et 5 44 5 5 3 Function of S Pushbutton 32 22 bee ch SA oak coher bee ee wee 5 44 5 5 4 Function of Pushbutton 2 206 et deed ema eee es ataee Cee mee oes 5 44 5 5 5 Function of Pushbutton 22 2 ied x eaten wc ala vecane oye teenies Oe 5 44 5 5 6 Troubleshooting Using External Memory Mode 5 45 5 6 System MOJ Erini T cohen BG SR DRG Sa ROG RAS Se Ree SG Ree 5 48 5 6 1 Building Security Menu lt sncsrre edu cop wane un seuss ou ote coun ss 5 48 5 6 1 1 Viewing the Building Security Menu 00 5 48 5 6 1 2 Programming and Viewing the Security Codes 5 49 5 6 2 Passcode Re
459. phone which make start up and adjustment assistance easier to obtain If any areas in the machine room are subject to vibration they should be avoided or reinforced to prevent equipment from being adversely affected Provide adequate lighting for the control cabinets and machines A good working space such as a workbench or table should also be provided The location of the Drive Isolation Transformer is flexible however wiring is reduced if it is located near the controller ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS The following are some important environmental considerations that will help to provide for the longevity of the elevator equipment and reduce maintenance requirements The ambient temperature should not exceed 32 to 104 Fahrenheit 0 40 Celsius Higher ambient temperatures are possible but not recommended because it will shorten the life of the equipment Adequate ventilation and possibly air conditioning may be required The air in the machine room should be free of excessive dust corrosive atmosphere or excessive moisture to avoid condensation A NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure would help meet these requirements If open windows exist in the machine room it is preferable to place cabinets away from these windows so that severe weather does not damage the equipment INSTALLATION 2 1 2 0 3 High levels of radio frequency RF radiation from nearby sources may cause interference to the computers and other parts of the
460. plex capability then it can operate a single car as a simplex or it can be connected to a second PTC controller and the 2 controllers can operate 2 cars as a duplex Both PTC controllers must have duplex capability for this arrangement to work Also the Simplex Duplex option on each controller must be set to duplex 5 4 2 2 OPERATION DISPATCHING OPERATION For simplex operation there are 3 dispatching operations to choose from Selective Collective Single Button Collective or Single Automatic Pushbutton Each operation is described below Selective Collective Choose this operation if there is an UP and DOWN button at each landing station except for the top floor DOWN button only and bottom floor UP button only and any number of calls can be registered at one time Single Button Collective Choose this operation if there is only 1 call button at each landing station and any number of calls can be registered at one time Single Automatic Pushbutton Choose this operation if there is only 1 call button at each landing station and only 1 call can be registered and or serviced at a time is selected then one of the spare output terminals should be used for an Q If either Single Button Collective or Single Automatic Push Button operation INDFRC output This output is used to cut out the hall calls during Fire Service and Independent Service see Section 5 4 8 for more details Refer to the Job Prints for information on using the
461. put When activated low this input causes the elevator to stop immediately Power Transfer Input When this input is activated it causes the car to stop at the next landing in the direction of travel open the doors and shut down This input is typically used with Emergency Power when transferring from normal power to emergency power testing or emergency power to normal power Floor Encoding Inputs These inputs are required for jobs with absolute floor encoding See Section 5 4 9 2 for more details about floor encoding inputs Redundancy monitoring input for the 2AB relay contact Redundancy monitoring input for the BAB relay contact Rear Hoistway Door Lock Contacts Relay Status The RDLSR input monitors the status of the DLSR relays for the purpose of redundancy checking Re Open Input Gate Switch Relay Redundancy Makes up when the car door is approximately 1 inch from fully closed With the car door closed there will be power on the RGS input Gate Switch Relay Redundancy Rear Input Redundancy monitoring input for the INAX relay contact Sabbath Operation Input This input is used to select Sabbath Operation This mode will move the car through the hoistway stopping at landings that are programmed in the Extra Features Menu Hoistway Safety Input Car Safety Input 5 34 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS
462. puts to the drive measure the DC voltage between terminals X2 10 and the respective drive terminals In the down direction the voltage between X2 10 and X2 4 should be zero In the up direction the voltage between X2 10 and X 2 4 should be zero The floating voltage between these points is approximately 24 VDC when the direction relays are not picked If all the functions described in the above steps are working properly and the car still does not move then verify the drive parameters and compare them with the drive parameter sheet which was shipped with the controller The motor name plate values should match the entered motor parameters Some of the following parameters if not set properly can prevent the car from moving on Inspection CAUTION The following are very critical TORQMAX F4 Drive parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation LF 02 2 Operating mode LF 22 Gear Reduction ratio LF 04 0 Induction motor LF 23 Roping Ratio LF 07 US Unit selection LF 24 Load LBS LF 10 Rated motor power HP LF 30 2 Close loop 0 open loop LF 11 Rated motor speed RPM LF 31 Speed Prop gain LF 12 Rated motor current Amp LF 32 Speed Int gain LF 13 Rated motor frequency Hz LF 42 High Speed FPM LF 14 Rated motor voltage LF 43 Inspection speed FPM LF 17 Encoder pulse number PPR LF 44 High level speed FPM LF 20 Rated speed FPM LF 45 Intermediate speed FPM LF
463. quest Menu 2 cece eee ee 5 50 5 6 3 Load Weigher Thresholds 02 0 cee eee 5 51 5 6 4 Analog Load Weigher Learn Function 0 000 e eee eee 5 52 5 7 DupleXiNg ayes at a e i Teh orice eink Da lar eal iN A Sik er A tea area 5 54 5 7 1 Dispatching Algorithm i 0 eesde eee eke eee See tee eee 5 54 5 7 2 Hardware Connections 0 0 ee 5 54 5 7 3 Troubleshooting fracas Ses Boe Behera Ae nk Gone Bom eons SR snk peewee 5 54 SECTION 6 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLESHOOTING 6 0 General Information cow acd ssas aaea eweuwe eo eu Seu aes eee ee eax eee ees 6 1 6 1 Tracing Signals in the Controller 0 000 6 1 6 2 DOGMLOGIC wea s crete ee ea eee aT Ow OE eRe HEROS ae OURO 6 3 6 3 Calli LOGIC rake cod to daewn dhe arana bide dws dee aA ee dacesaeees 6 7 6 3 1 Normal Operaatio aiis iais ana tuk eh eh breil eed ee et rel 6 7 6 3 2 Preparation for Troubleshooting Call Circuits 005 6 7 6 3 3 Troubleshooting 202 40 ec as ceeds bac ena ee Me ed ea Veena es 6 7 6 4 Using the Optional CRT for Troubleshooting 00 cece eee 6 12 6 4 1 Graphic Display of Elevator F3 Screen 0 00s 6 12 6 4 2 MCE Special Events Calendar Entries F7 1 Screen 6 12 6 5 Troubleshooting the G5 GPD515 AC Drive 0 0c eee eee 6 14 6 5 1 Car Does Not Move on Inspection 0 00 eee eee 6 14 6 5 2 Car Does Not Reach Contract Speed 0000s 6
464. r auxiliary page DRAWING NAME Some drawings have a drawing name directly above the title block or at the top of the drawing The drawing name may be used to refer to a particular drawing NOMENCLATURE The following is an example of the schematic symbols use to indicate that a signal either enters or exits a PC board PC Board 3 Ribbon Cable PC Board 1 Ca rtop Tape _ gt 7 _ DZ Reader C2 8 C2 8 47k 1w 27 VO A 127 1 SX PC Board Designators a A listing of PC boards and their designator numbers plus other schematic symbols used in the wiring prints can be found at the beginning of the Job Prints and in Appendix C of this manual e Become familiar with the Elevator Car Wiring Print drawing number 1 e Become familiar with the Elevator Hoistway Wiring Print drawing number 2 e Become familiar with page 7 of the job prints for duplex interconnect wiring if this is a duplex application e The power connections are shown on drawing number D Review any additional wiring diagrams and details as may be required The remainder are detailed drawings of the VVMC 1000 PTC programmable traction control system A specific part of the schematic may be referred to by the area number which will be found at the left hand margin of the schematic INSTALLATION 2 3 2 1 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION NOTE Itis strongly recommended that you review the wiring guidelines in sections
465. r s memory The figure shows the various parts of the LCD in Diagnostic mode f Duplex Configuration 5 3 6 1 For simplex controllers the letter D in the D Dispatcher drawing will not appear on the LCD and instead that S Slave s Blank Simplex Operation part of the display will always be blank For a duplex controller this part of the display provides py Car status information about the communication between the Ja controllers and about the dispatching One of the following codes should appear i Elevator Address location and S Indicates that this computer is acting as the location 8 flags at that address slave to the dispatching computer Hall call Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 5 assignments are received from the dispatching computer through the communication cable D Indicates that this computer is acting as the dispatcher It is responsible for assigning hall calls to itself and to the other controller BLANK If this part of the display is blank it denotes that communication has not been established between the two cars see Section 6 for information on identifying and solving communication problems 5 3 6 2 STATUS MESSAGE The scrolling part of the LCD shows the prevailing status of the elevator There is a status message for each special operation e g Fire Service There are also messages for many error conditions e g open safety string Refer to Table 5 2 Status and Error Messa
466. r Excessive Commun Error Activated Deactivated Activated Deactivated Hospital Service Hospital Service Independent Service Independent Service Scroll Page Up Dn Previous Next Page Home End 1st Last page Special Events Calendar Messages Bottom Floor Demand Generated when car comes off of Inspection or when car PI indicates top terminal landing but car is not there Check top terminal landing slowdown switches and USD input Both USD and DSD are Open Both USD and DSD are simultaneously active low Check wiring on terminal switches Bus Fuse Blown 2H No power exists on the Hall Call Common Bus Check fuse F4 on group Bus Fuse Blown 2 No power exists on the Car Call Common Bus Check fuse F4 on car Car Out of Svc w DLK Car was delayed from leaving a landing for a significant period of time Doors were locked Suspect a malfunction of the running circuits Car Out of Svc w o DLK Car was delayed from leaving a landing for a significant period of time Doors were not locked Suspect an obstruction that has kept the doors from closing thus preventing the car from leaving the landing Communication Loss Car not communicating with PA See troubleshooting guide in manual DOL Open and DLK Active Car is shutdown due to unsafe conditions of the DOL and or DLK sensors Door Open Limit input DOL activated low and Door Lock input DLK activated high Check DOL and DLK inputs
467. r Prohibition of reverse operation 0 Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Disabled 2 Exchange Phase change rotation direction DClnj Start Freq IDC Injection Braking Start Frequency speed Hz 0 0 10 0 1 5 1 5 DCInj Current DC Injection Braking Current N A to Flux Vector 0 100 50 50 DClInj Time Start DC Injection Braking Time at Start sec 0 00 10 00 0 00 Reference Source Run Source Stopping Method Reverse Oper amp loop 0 0 0 50 V F Control open loop 0 20 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop sec Flux Vector closed 0 00 10 00 0 50 DClInj Time Stop Accel Decel Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded Accel Rate 1 Acceleration Rate 1 0 01 8 00 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration Rate 1 0 01 8 00 Accel Rate 2 Acceleration Rate 2 0 01 8 00 42 02 2P21 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration Rate 2 0 01 8 00 APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 37 No a e Parameter Description Unit paid Rine ee C1 05 Accel Rate 3 Acceleration Rate 3 f s 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 06 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration Rate 3 f s 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 07 Accel Rate 4 Acceleration Rate 4 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 C1 08 Decel Rate 4 Deceleration Rate 4 f s _ 0 01 8 00 3 00 C1 09 Fast Stop Rate Fast Stop Rate fis 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 11 Acc Dec SW fre Accel Decel switching level Hz 0 00 400 0 0
468. r Voltage FLA Full Load RPM Frequency It is always best to write down the values of all drive parameters using drive key pad This will ensure that the drive parameter settings are not the cause of the problem Always verify that the motor encoder and machine data are set accurately This may take 3 5 minutes but it is time worth spending LF 02 LF 04 Operating mode motor selection LF 10 to LF 17 LF 18 Motor Encoder data LF 21 to LF 25 Machine data LF 30 to LF 32 Control method Gains LF 20 LF 40 to LF 53 Speed and S curves LF 57 to LF 59 Speed error detection E HSD fault LF 70 Speed pick delay Delay to turn on the DRO 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 29 FIGURE 6 27 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart PM Contactor does not pick PM Contactor does not pick Series M TORQMAX No Follow the controller drawing and check the safety circuit Yes Put the car on Inspection operation Reset the drive fault No AC Drive by pressing drive Drive fault Fault reset button on the cleared HC ACI board CNP and RDY relays on HC ACI board are ON Refer to the fault section in the drive manual to find the cause and 1 Verify that the main SAF relay is ON and there toccare fault is 120VAC between terminals 1 and 4 2 Verify 15VDC on the HC ACI board IDC terminals If no voltage is present refer to the job prints and verify 36VAC between XC1 and XC2 on
469. r close signal However if the elevator has a retiring cam the doors will not lock until the retiring cam is activated If this option is selected the controller turns OFF the door close signal when the doors are closed instead of waiting for the doors to be locked More precisely the controller will turn OFF the door close output signal DCF when the DCLC Doors Closed Contact input is ON or when the DCL Door Close Limit input is OFF instead of waiting for the DLK Door Lock input to turn ON 5 4 4 7 PRE OPENING If this option is selected the controller will begin to open the doors just before the car completely stops at a floor More precisely the controller will turn ON the DOF Door Open Function output signal when the DZ Door Zone input turns ON Typically the DZ input first turns ON when the car is about 3 inches away from the final stopping point This option is not recommended for elevators that may spend an extended period of time in leveling 5 4 4 8 MECHANICAL SAFETY EDGE If this option is selected the Nudging Operation will cycle until the doors are fully closed Otherwise the nudging function will operate continuously to comply with code requirements where a door reopening device is not used see Section 5 4 4 1 for more details THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 4 9 NUDGING OUTPUT BUZZER ONLY If this option is selected with the Nudging option the NUDG output will be activated when the Nudging Ti
470. raei u ede ae da iae a e de eda da ede A 29 Troubleshooting sa 2i5 eda bia waa tela eeaa ha waa da ha aes A 29 Peripheral Equipment 22244 od hake ved ote hatte teed eee A 29 LS QUTE Landing System Assembly Drawings A 30 POWERBACK R4 Regenerative Drive 000 0 eee eee A 32 Quick Reference for Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters A 36 Quick Reference for PowerBack R6 Regenerative AC Drive Parameters Series Mand IMC AC R A 44 Quick Reference for TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters A 47 42 02 2P21 IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS amp NOTES We strongly recommend that you read this manual carefully before proceeding with installation Throughout this manual you will see icons followed by a WARNING CAUTION or NOTE These icons denote the following A aX 0 Operating procedures and practices which if not done correctly may result in personal injury or substantial damage to equipment Operating procedures and practices which if not observed may result in some damage to equipment Procedures practices or information which are intended to be immediately helpful and informative The following general rules and safety precautions must be observed for safe and reliable operation of your system NOTE 0 WARNING 42 02 2P21 A This controller may be shipped without the final running program However you may install the unit hookup and run your elevator on Inspection
471. ration time 2 s__ 0 00 6000 0 1 96 B 1 60 A 6 APPENDIX B QUICK REFERENCE FOR G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS 4202 221 eis A MCE Field No e Parameter Description Unit setting Drive as MCE play Range Defaults Set C1 04 Decel Time 2 Deceleration time 2 s 0 00 6000 0 0 01 B 0 1 C1 05 Accel Time 3 Acceleration time 3 Ss 0 00 6000 1 0 A 1 0 C1 06 Decel Time 3 Deceleration time 3 Ss 0 00 6000 1 0 A 1 0 C1 07 Accel Time 4 Acceleration time 4 Ss 0 00 6000 1 96 B C1 08 Decel Time 4 Deceleration time 4 s 0 00 6000 1 96 B C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fast Stop Time s 0 00 6000 1 0 A 1 0 C1 10 Acc Dec units Accel Decel time 0 0 01 1 0 1 S 0 1 0 A 0 C1 11 Acc Dec SW fre Accel Decel switching level Hz 0 00 400 0 0 B 0 0 C3 Motor Slip Comp C3 01 Slip Comp Gain Slip compensation gain 0 0 2 5 1 0 B 1 0 C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Time Delay N A to Flux Vector 0 2000 200 B 200 C3 04 Slip comp regen Lee during regen N A to Flux 0 1 1 B 1 C4 Torque Comp C4 01 Torque Comp Gain Torque compensation gain N A to Flux Vector 0 00 2 50 1 00 1 0 C4 02 Torque Comp Time T0 9ue Compensation Time eee Vecto MS 0 1000 200 200 C5 ASR Tuning Flux Vector only C5 01 ASR P Gaini ASR proportional gain 1 Flux Vector only 0 0 300 20 B 20 0 C5 02 ASR ITime1 ASR integral
472. rear flag 5 17 setting parameters to default values 5 19 SHORT DOOR TIMER option 5 29 Shutdown Operation message 5 13 SIMP Simplex Input option 5 35 SIMPLEX OR DUPLEX option 5 23 SIMPO Simplex Output option 5 37 Single Automatic Pushbutton option 5 23 Single Button Collective option 5 23 SINGLE SPEED A C OPTION option 5 42 SLV Stable slave flag 5 17 SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS 5 31 SPARE OUTPUTS MENU OPTIONS 5 35 SPD Speed Pick Delay trimpot 3 4 3 10 3 14 3 18 3 25 3 30 4 1 6 62 G5 GPD515 Drive 4 10 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 23 4 24 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 35 4 36 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 63 4 64 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 49 Special Events Calendar Messages 6 13 speed level parameters G5 GPD515 Drive 4 4 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 19 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 31 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 59 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 44 speed sensor installation of 2 8 installing 2 7 STARTIN Start Input option 5 35 Status Displays Current Load 5 3 Eligibility Map 5 3 PTHC Software Version 5 3 Status Indicators 5 1 STC Stepping complete flag 5 17 STD RO Step down input absolute floor encoding 0 flag 5 17 Stop SW Safety Relay Ckt message 5 10 6 14 STOP In car Stop Switch Safety Input option 5 35 STU R1 Step up input absolute floor encoding 1 flag 5 17 Stuck Door Zone Input message 5 8 Stuck Leveling Input message 5 11 STUCK PHOTO EYE PROTECTION option 5 26 SU Supervisory up flag 5 17 SUA Up direction arrow flag 5 17 Sync
473. rear door calls Front door calls are not affected BOTH CALLS this option necessitates that DOB be pressed when the car responds to both front and rear door calls Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 27 5 28 5 4 4 18 2 MOMENT D O B FOR HALL CALLS CAR CALLS ALL CALLS Choose whether hall calls car calls or all calls need momentary D O B HALL CALLS this option necessitates that DOB be pressed when the car responds to hall calls Car calls are not affected CAR CALLS this option necessitates that DOB be pressed when the car responds to car calls Hall calls are not affected ALL CALLS this option necessitates that DOB be pressed when the car responds to both hall calls and car calls 5 4 4 19 DOORS TO OPEN IF PARKED VONE FRONT REAR BOTH If set to NONE the doors remain closed while the car is parked When set to FRONT REAR or BOTH the corresponding doors automatically open and remain open while the car is parked This option is available only if a parking floor is programmed in the Basic Features menu BOTH option is not available if the car is programmed for sequential door operation See Section 5 4 4 3 for more details 5 4 4 20 DOORS TO OPEN ON MAIN FIRE The choices for this option are FRONT REAR and BOTH This option determines which door s should open once the car has completed a Main Fire return only if option 5 4 2 4 is set to YES 5 4 4 21 DOORS TO OPEN ON ALT FIRE The choices
474. rect Check to see what the counter weighing should be before making any changes If a drum machine is being used follow the manufacturer s counterweighting recommendation and test the drum machine s limit switches On modernizations it is easy to overlook the typical 40 counter weighting Always put a 40 load in the car and check for equal motor current up verses down at Inspection speed in the middle of the hoistway Equal current readings on the keypad display indicate that the counterweight is close to the correct value Take whatever steps are necessary to achieve proper counterweighting This is especially important since many traction installations do not have compensation cables or chains n Turn OFF the power and reinstall the fuses that power terminals 2H and 2F The controller installation should now be complete Proceed to Section 4 Final Adjustment 3 26 be START UP 42 02 2P21 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 2 42 02 2P21 INSPECTION OPERATION TORQMAX F5 DRIVE For controllers with the G5 GPD515 drive see Section 3 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 drive see Section 3 5 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 drive see Section 3 6 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 drive see Section 3 7 DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS Each controller is shipped with completed parameter sheets and all of the field adjustable parameters have been entered into the drive unit based upon the provided field information However it is esse
475. rection The speed pick delay is achieved using the TORQMAX F4 drive parameter LF 70 Adjust LF 70 so that the brake is fully picked just as the motor first moves The goal is to delay long enough to avoid moving the motor before the brake is fully lifted but not so long as to allow the car to roll back Run the car again and verify that the car will start accelerate decelerate and run at High Level and Level speeds into the floor and stop Place calls for all of the landings Verify that all of the calls work Verify the operation and placement of all vanes or magnets and vane or magnet switches and verify that the car steps the Position Indicators correctly The slowdown distance for the elevator is measured from the point where the STU sensor or STD sensor if going down is activated by a metal vane or magnetic strip to the position where the car is stopped at the floor with the DZ sensor centered on the leveling target with LU or LD sensors not engaged This slowdown distance was chosen to give a reasonable deceleration rate Continue to make two floor runs and slowly increase High speed until Contract Speed is reached It may be necessary to adjust the Deceleration rate LF 53 and deceleration jerk rate LF 52 to stop the car at the floor Adjust the Acceleration rate parameter LF 51 until the desired acceleration rate is achieved Several runs may be required to obtain optimum acceleration The acceleration rate should be about the same as
476. relay has failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the car gate open there is no power present on the RGS input If power is present the car gate switch relay has failed closed DUNDANCY REAR GATE SWITCH FAILURE Description The rear car gate switch relay has failed closed Troubleshooting Ensure that with the rear car gate open there is no power on the RGSR input If power is present the rear car gate switch relay has failed closed SABBATH OPERATION ACTIVE Description The spare input SAB has been activated Troubleshooting Check spare input bit address for SAB Verify that the spare input address matches the SAB flag Check voltage level at the SAB input SAFETY CIRCUIT IS OPEN Safety Relay Circuit Open Description The Car Operating Panel emergency stop switch has been pulled or another contact switch in the safety circuit is in the open position Troubleshooting Check the C O P stop switch Check the other switches and contacts in the safety string Check safety string wiring against the MCE wiring diagrams Safety String Open not scrolled Event Calendar only Safety String Open Description The safety circuit is open Troubleshooting Check the on car and off car safety devices e g governor overload over travel limit switches car stop switches and the SAF input UTDOWN OPERATION MG Traction only Description The car is on MG Shutdown Operation MGS is high Troubleshooting Ensure th
477. ring the stop If an ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed problem is detected by the HC ACI board the ILO indicator will turn ON and the FLT relay will pick which will drop the RDY relay and shut down the controller Reset the fault by pressing the Fault reset button on the HC ACI board and adjust the ILO trimpot for the proper Inspection Leveling Overspeed trip threshold Test the safety by hand to make sure that it will hold the car START UP 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 O To make sure that the Car Top Inspection switch is working properly turn OFF the main disconnect remove the jumper between terminals 18 and 59 from step 3 3 1 j and reinstall the wire into terminal 59 Turn ON the main disconnect Make sure that there is 115VAC on terminal 59 with respect to terminal 1 when the car top inspection switch is in the NORMAL position There should be no power on terminal 59 when the car top inspection switch is in the INSP position Stop the car so that the car top is accessible from the top hall door Remove jumpers from the safety circuit Run the car from the car top Inspection station Verify that the SAF relay drops out and the car stops when the Car Top Emergency Stop Switch is released Also by opening the Emergency Stop Switch while the car is moving up or down verify that the brake stops and holds the car Run the car through the hoist way checking clearance and the door locks When all of the doors are closed remove the
478. rio B the USD input is usually the problem Look at the USD signal in the computer memory Address 2E Position 2 USD should be ON except when the car is at the top then it should be OFF If the signal is not following this rule then inspect the wiring associated with the USD input including the Up Slow Down limit switch The Up Slow Down switch contacts should be open when the car is at the top THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 3 9 WHAT TO DO FOR SCENARIO C For scenario C the DSD input is usually the problem Look at the DSD signal in the computer memory Address 2E Position 6 DSD should be ON except when the car is at the bottom then it should be OFF If the signal is not following this rule then inspect the wiring associated with the DSD input including the Down Slow Down limit switch The Down Slow Down switch contacts should be open when the car is at the bottom 5 3 8 2 PROBLEMS WITH CALLS See Section 6 3 for Call Logic and Troubleshooting of call circuits 5 3 8 3 PROBLEMS WITH DOORS See Section 6 2 which explains how to use computer memory to solve door problems SETTING PARAMETERS OPTIONS TO DEFAULT VALUES There are occasions when it is necessary to set the parameters options to their default values Setting the parameters to their default values is usually required when e The MC PCA and or MC PA software is changed EPROMS changed e g MC PCA software changed from version 5 02 xxxx to version 5 03
479. rive 4 52 4 53 load weigher learn function 5 52 load weighing system DLW Dispatch load weigher threshold 5 51 HLW Heavy load weigher threshold 5 51 LLW Light load weigher threshold 5 51 OLW Overloaded car threshold 5 51 OLW2 Overload 2 weigher threshold 5 51 setting load thresholds 5 51 LOBBY DOOR TIMER option 5 29 LOBBY FLOOR option 5 24 Lost DLK During Run message 5 11 6 14 LOT Lobby door time flag 5 16 LOTR Lobby door time rear flag 5 16 Low Oil Switch Input is Activated message 5 11 LS QUTE landing system Enclosure Assembly A 31 Wiring Diagram A 32 LSA Movement Failure message 5 12 LSR Landing System Redundancy Input option 5 34 LU Level up input flag 5 16 LWB Load Weigher Bypass input 5 34 INDEX l 5 M MagneTek HPV 900 Drive acceleration deceleration rates 4 20 alarms and faults 6 22 buffer tests 4 28 critical parameters 3 12 drive parameters table A 14 A 20 emergency terminal limit switch monitor 4 27 Final Adjustments 4 26 Final Inspection Procedure 4 30 governor overspeed tests 4 29 High speed 4 23 Inspection Leveling Overspeed test 4 26 Inspection operation 3 12 3 15 Inspection Speed 3 14 jerk parameters 4 20 load testing 4 25 parameter sheets 3 12 phase loss detection test 4 30 S curve parameters 4 20 4 21 setting the speed levels 4 19 terminal slowdown limit switches 4 27 troubleshooting 6 19 22 MASS 524 CMR FIRE CODE option
480. rive must be completed according to the drawings APPENDIX J POWERBACK R6 REGENERATIVE DRIVE 42 02 2P21 K 2 4 HOW TO USE THE DRIVE KEYPAD K 2 5 K 2 6 42 02 2P21 The R6 drive is delivered from the factory in the Application mode which allows access to all parameters and functions available on the unit The display shows three types of information which define the parameter Parameter set Parameter group Parameter number bo EEEEE r m ENTE FUNC F R SPE Yy By pressing the FUNC button you can change between the displayed parameter and its value To select a different parameter use the ENTER button to toggle the flashing point to the right of the field to be changed Then use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll the desired value Once the correct parameter information is displayed the FUNC button can be pressed at any time to see the value of the parameter When displaying a parameter value the value of the parameter can be changed by pressing the UP DOWN buttons Generally these changes are immediately effective and permanently stored meaning they remain stored after the unit is switched off Confirming the input with ENTER is not necessary with the exception of the parameters known as Enter Parameters Enter Parameter For some parameters the value adjusted by UP DOWN does not automatically become valid These parameters are called Enter Parameters since they must be confirmed by ENTER Wh
481. rive parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation LF 02 bnSPd Signal Operating Mode e LF 30 2 Closed loop 0 open loop LF 04 0 Induction motor A LF 31 Kp Speed Accel Proportional gain LF 10 Rated motor power HP d LF 31 Kp Speed Decel Proportional gain LF 11 Rated motor speed rpm e A LF 32 Ki Speed Accel Integral gain LF 12 Rated motor current Amp e d LF 32 Ki Speed Decel Integral gain LF 13 Rated motor frequency Hz e A LF 33 Ki Speed Offset Accel Low speed gain LF 14 Rated motor voltage d LF 33 Ki Speed Offset Decel Low speed gain LF 20 Contract speed fpm e LF 42 High Speed FPM LF 21 Traction sheave diameter inches e LF 43 Inspection speed FPM LF 22 Gear Reduction ratio LF 44 High leveling speed FPM LF 23 Roping Ratio LF 45 Intermediate speed FPM LF 24 Load Weight Ibs n LF 51 Acceleration ft s n 0 1 2 LF 27 Encoder Pulse Number ppr closed loop n LF 54 Deceleration ft s n 0 1 2 START UP 3 27 3 8 3 MOVING THE CAR ON INSPECTION OPERATION TORQMAX F5 is applied to the controller even when the motor is not rotating Do WARNING The motor circuit may have high voltage present whenever AC power not open the drive cover for 5 10 minutes after removing the AC power to allow the capacitors to discharge Use extreme caution Do not touch any circuit board power device or electrical connection without ensuring that high voltage is not
482. rive reset button on the drive keypad b All of the speed commands acceleration deceleration and the S curves are adjusted by setting drive parameters using the drive key pad A complete listing of the TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters is found in Appendix L A parameter sheet listing the parameter settings as programmed by MCE is shipped with each controller C If required install a temporary jumper between terminals 4 and 8 to bypass the door locks f the car is on a final limit switch place a jumper between terminals 2 and 16 to bypass the main safety string Remember to remove these jumpers as soon as possible d For Flux Vector applications the encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft and its connections must be complete according to the job prints at this time Auto Tuning Induction Motors For best performance with induction motors it is recommend to first perform the auto tuning procedure as follows a Make sure that the rated motor power LF 10 rated motor speed LF 11 rated motor current LF 12 rated motor frequency LF 13 rated motor voltage LF 14 and rated power factor LF 15 are entered into the drive before you begin If the power factor is not on the name plate use 0 90 as the value 3 28 START UP 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 g Remove one brake wire to prevent the brake from picking On the TORQMAX F5 drive keypad set parameter LF 3 S Lrn This will start the learn process The display will change
483. rminal 1 If board is not in system measure short between metal back and pad area around mounting hole Be careful the metal back of the triac is connected to AC when power is ON NOTE bottom triac corresponds to bottom terminal 6 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 6 If the call works correctly in the previous step and it does not register and the board is not arranged for neon indicator lamps in the fixtures the indicator for that call on the board will glow dimly If the board is arranged for neon indicators the call indicator on the board will not glow In this case a dim glow indicates that the incandescent bulb in the fixture is burned out when the call has the resistor fuse plugged in and the field wire connected normally With a known good resistor fuse plugged into the proper call position check to see that the indicator on the Call board works correctly glows brightly when the call is registered and glows dimly or not at all when the call is not registered If the call indicator burns brightly when the resistor fuse is plugged in and shows no change in brightness whether the call is registered or not then there is a bad triac or triac driver transistor The triacs are plug in types and can be easily replaced Usually if a triac has failed it will measure as a short circuit between the metal base and terminal 1 with the power disconnected and the field wire removed If the Call board is not in the system ch
484. rminals 12 and 13 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Position the elevator several floors above the bottom landing with a full load in the car Then register a car call for the bottom landing The car will strike the buffer Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the up direction to move the car FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 41 g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 and reconnect the wire to terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Remove all of the jumpers installed in this section Reseat the FLT relay 4 10 5 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY TESTS TORQMAX F4 4 42 4 10 5 1 GOVERNOR ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED SWITCH TEST Make sure that there are no jumpers between terminals 2 and 15 Trip open the electrical OVER SPEED switch contact manually and verify that the main safety circuit drops out Use which ever method is most familiar to verify the actual electrical and mechanical tripping speeds 4 10 5 2 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY OVERSPEED TEST WITH FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a b Move the fully loaded car to the top terminal landing and turn the power OFF On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car If the HC ACIF board is used in this controller remove relays AS and ETL from the
485. rt Encoder Fault Encoder Fault Series M TORQMAX Drive trips E ENC Fault occurs when drive is ready to E ENC Fault move the car but either the brake is not lifting or the encoder signals are incorrect Change encoder channel parameter LF 28 see TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference If the car moves in the wrong direction turn OFF power and change two of the motor leads If the car moves a little and then trips on E ENC fault verify that brake picks and encoder coupling and encoder connections are correct Refer to job prints to verify the connections voltage readings and LF 17 PPR Trips on Inspection If brake does not pick refer to Flow chart Car does not move on gperation Inspection If the problem persists check the encoder feed back by setting LF 30 0 Open loop mode and displaying LF 89 Actual Motor speed in RPM Run the car on Inspection LF 89 should display ve value in one direction and ve value in the other direction The reading should be a steady number and the sign should match that of LF 88 set motor speed in RPM If not change LF 28 see TORQMAX F5 Drive Parameters Quick Reference Set LF 30 2 Closed loop mode Verify Speed Pick delay Drive parameter LF 70 is Yes set correctly to ensure that car does not move under the brake Trips at start or stop Verify brake picking and holding voltages are correct No If drive trips during accelerat
486. rt and end of acceleration and deceleration known as jerk points see Figure 4 3 See Table 4 5 for a description of the Accel Jerk In 0 Accel Jerk Out 0 Decel Jerk In 0 and Decel Jerk Out 0 parameters The jerk parameter values are in feet per second per second per second ft s using the A2 S Curve parameters Decreasing the value decreases the rate of change and causes a smoother longer transition FIGURE 4 3 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters HPV 900 software version A2950 C 10304 Velocity Hz A3 Multistep Ref Speed Command Parameters High Speed A2 S Curve Parameters Contract Speed speed Command g Decel Jerk In 0 Accel Jerk Out 0 Decel Rate 0 Accel Rate 0 Intermediate Speed 60 to 75 of Contract Speed Speed Command 6 Decel Jerk In 0 Accel Jerk Out 0 Decel Jerk Out 0 Decel Jerk In 0 High Level Speed 5 to 10 of Contract Speed Speed Command 4 Level Speed 2 to 5 of Contract Speed Decel Rate 0 Speed Command 2 Zero Speed Accel Jerk In 0 Decel Jerk Out 0 Time 4 20 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 TABLE 4 5 HPV 900 Velocity Curve Parameters No Digital Operator Parameter Description Unit Setting Drive Field Display Range Defaults MCE Set A2 S Curves Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 00 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 00 Accel Jerk In 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up to Acce
487. rting and transition to High speed This will be addressed in the final adjustment section FINAL ADJUSTMENTS TORQMAX F5 For controllers with the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 FINAL PREPARATION FOR RUNNING ON AUTOMATIC OPERATION TORQMAX F5 a Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LED display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 61 b Move the car to the bottom terminal landing Check to see if the DZ relay is picked If not move the car on Inspection to place it in the Door Zone 4 15 2 SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION TORQMAX F5 Place the Relay Panel Inspection switch in the OFF position If the car is not at a landing it will move to a landing If the car is at a landing but not in the door zone relays L and either LU or LD should pick and the car should perform a relevel If
488. run and the initiation of the next run This option should be used in applications in which an immediate stop start is undesirable Under most normal circumstances the initiation of a run is delayed by the time required for the door operation In some cases however the car may stop and start immediately in the absence of a door operation example a direction reversal upon being assigned a hall call while the car is parking 5 4 9 22 SINGLE SPEED A C OPTION Setting this option allows the direction output to clear once the car steps into the floor Typically the direction output is not cleared until the car enters door zone However for applications only requiring one speed the direction must be cleared prior to door zone to allow the car to arrive into the landing properly 5 4 9 23 SABBATH OPERATION If you do not have Sabbath Operation set this option to NO by pressing the S Pushbutton Then press the N pushbutton to exit this option If you have Sabbath Operation set this option to YES by pressing the S pushbutton Press the N pushbutton to continue The following display will appear FRONT UP STOP AT FLOOR 1 If you want to set the car to stop at this floor while traveling in the UP direction change NO to YES by pressing the S pushbutton press S again to set this option to NO Press the pushbutton to increment floor value to the next landing Continue until all of the desired front UP stops are set to
489. run it to a terminal landing to make sure the CCD flag is turned OFF If the resistor fuse has been removed if necessary the field wires disconnected HCDX and CCD both OFF and the proper voltage exists on the call terminal the call should notbe registered Shorting the call terminal to terminal 1 or ground should register the call in the computer according to External Memory mode This does not mean the call registered light on the Call board will work correctly If the call does not register and cancel under the conditions mentioned in this step then a condition exists on the board that cannot be corrected in the field and the board should be replaced 6 8 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 3 HC CI O Call Input Output Board Quick Reference az ar uc cvorev 2 HC CI O QUICK REFERENCE CARD poang Call Power Terminals Bottom most CallTerminal 000 LOOQDOODOTOOOOOOOO O A JUMPER PLUG TO D72 D73 4 D744 M 66 4 D67 g 68 4 A D69 Call Label Strip If a call board is replaced remove the Call Label Strip and transfer it to the new board D65 4 D70 b3 D71 CHANGE TRANSFER A A u ovr YN V KR O DW vOrOrOLrOXZOXO ZOO R90 D75 O NOTE FOR BOARD NEW BOARD OBSERVE NOTCH ORIENTATION A Jumper Plug If a call board is replaced the jumper plug must be transferred to the new board and the notch orientation must stay the same
490. rying to level it will not pick high speed and leave the landing until it has completed the leveling process Drive Unit speed adjustments and direction limits at terminal landings may cause this problem e If any of the inputs that open the door are active Safety Edge On Photo Eye On Car Call input grounded to 1 for the floor matching the Position Indicator etc the car will not leave the landing f Both slowdown switch inputs terminals 11 and 13 should never be dead at the same time when the doors are closed and locked and the safety circuit is good EXPLANATION OF G5 GPD515 DRIVE PARAMETERS AND S CURVES 4 2 4 2 1 elevator operation 4 4 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 AC Drive see Sections 4 8 thru 4 10 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 Before attempting to bring the car up to contract speed or making any adjustments it is important to verify the following control parameters in the VFAC Drive Unit It is very important to become familiar with drive keypad operation to access the drive program Review the use of the Digital Operator drive keypad in the VFAC Drive manual SETTING THE SPEED LEVELS CAUTION Verify the critical drive parameter settings as described in Section 3 4 2 Incorrect values for these parameters ca
491. s above the bottom landing with a full load in the car Then register a car call for the bottom landing The car will strike the buffer f Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the up direction to move the car g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 and reconnect the wire to terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Remove all of the jumpers installed in this section Reseat the FLT relay GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY TESTS G5 GPD515 4 4 5 1 GOVERNOR ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED SWITCH TEST Make sure that there are no jumpers between terminals 2 and 15 Trip open the electrical OVER SPEED switch contact manually and verify that the main safety circuit drops out Use which ever method is most familiar to verify the actual electrical and mechanical tripping speeds e FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 42 02 2P21 4 4 5 2 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY OVERSPEED TEST WITH FULL LOAD GOING DOWN NOTE If the governor overspeed trip point is less than 133 of contract speed then perform the test as described below If the trip point is greater than 133 of contract speed then use other means to overspeed the car Move the fully loaded car to the top terminal landing Note the value of parameters D1 02 High Speed and E1 04 Maximum output frequency which are set to run the car on High speed These parameters will be reset to their original value later in the adjustments Set parameter E1 04 80Hz and parameter D1 02 8
492. s an E OP over voltage fault displayed it may mean that there is a problem with the regeneration braking resistors and or the braking unit if supplied separately Verify the DC bus voltage Two methods to check the DC bus voltage as described below 1 Through the drive keypad display When the drive is in Operation mode access parameter LF 95 DC bus voltage or parameter LF 96 Peak DC bus voltage You can then run the elevator and watch the voltage reading FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 65 2 Actual measurement of voltage Use extreme care when measuring the DC voltage across the drive power terminals and PA or under the above conditions The 230V drive will trip on E OP Over voltage in the DC bus circuit if the LF 96 reading is close to 400VDC The 460V drive will trip on E OP if the LF 96 reading is close to 800VDC If the DC bus voltage reading LF 95 is 325 VDC for a 230 VAC motor or 650 VDC for 460 VAC motor and if there is no voltage measured across the braking resistors while the car is slowing with a full load going down or empty car up there may be a wiring problem or a defective braking unit if provided Be sure to investigate this thoroughly These resistors perform the task of regulating car speed during a full load down or empty car up run regeneration 4 15 6 ELECTRICAL NOISE TORQMAX F5 If the motor emits excessive electrical noise at Inspection or Contract speeds or if the motor draws higher than n
493. s digital operator display must read as follows during power up Frequency reference U1 01 0 If any fault or problem is detected then turn off the power and refer to the Alarms and Fault Displays section of the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive Manual 6 8 1 CAR DOES NOT MOVE ON INSPECTION NOTE The drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in the parameter sheet are different and are not available in the drive manual If a drive has been replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Pick or Picked relay energized e Drop or dropped relay de energized If the car does not move on INSPECTION check the following 1 Verify that contactors PM Main and BR Brake pick when the direction relays U1 and U2 or D1 and D2 are picked If PM and BR do not pick check the related circuit as shown in the controller drawings Check for any fault that is displayed on the drive keypad before and after picking the direction on Inspection When the direction is picked on Inspection relays PT1 and PT2 on the HC ACI board should be picked If these relays are not picked check for 120VAC on terminals 8 10 and 12 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board If there is no voltage on these terminals refer to the controller drawings to find the problem Note that relays CNP and RDY should also be picked 2 Verify th
494. s on E Ol or E Op on Acceleration 6 45 6 9 4 Drive Trips E op or the Car Overshoots on Deceleration 6 45 6 9 5 Oscillations in the Car at Contract Speed 00 0 000 6 45 6 9 6 Drive Trips Over Voltage by Clipping the Door Locks 6 45 6 9 7 Error Messages and Their Causes 0000 c ee eee ee 6 45 6 9 8 Troubleshooting Flowcharts TORQMAX F5 Drive 6 47 Using the MET Data Trap e209 0ccenge diced enedaesedagugue heads 6 56 PC Board Quick References 2 00 cee tee 6 59 TABLE OF CONTENTS ix APPENDIX Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix Appendix J Appendix K Appendix L INDEX xX TABLE OF CONTENTS Original Programmed Values and the Record of Changes A 1 Quick Reference for G5 GPD515 Drive Parameters A 6 Quick Reference for HPV 900 Drive Parameters A 14 Quick Reference for TORQMAX Drive Parameters A 20 Nomenclat re wa ease eee ew dko maenad ee da Pe ee eee ee A 23 Elevator Security Information and Operation 005 A 24 Flex talk Option seitan eter aroma eats Maree ra coer har at arene ec ata tara renee ra A 27 Introduction and Theory of Operation 02 eee ee eee A 27 Diagnostics 2s xxv aralre o wre ore svat Siege ars Bia ate Bete ea ew eet A 28 Volume Control seis
495. s that the other car is powered This input is used in emergency power applications Alternate Parking Input This input is used to determine whether to park at the primary parking floor or at the alternate parking floor When API is low the car will park at the primary floor When API is high the car will park at the alternate floor Attendant Service Input Emergency Power Auto Selection Input This input is for duplexes only Auxiliary Reset Input Usually connected to a pushbutton on a controller to reset redundancy error conditions Monitoring input for the BAB relay coil Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 31 SPARE INPUTS MENU OPTIONS Brake Pick Sensor Input This input is used to monitor the position of the brake Three seconds after the initiation of a run the BPS input is checked If at that time the BPS input is seen as deactivated showing that the brake is fully picked it will not be monitored for the remainder of the run In other words if the brake drops during the run this will not count as a fault If however the BPS input was seen as activated showing that the brake is not fully picked this will be recorded as a fault If this type of fault is detected in three consecutive runs it is considered as a brake pick failure and the car is shut down after the completion of the third run f the computer detects that the BPS input remained active throughout an entire run the brake did not pi
496. s the Drive On status of the drive The DRON input must be ON when the elevator is stopped and OFF when the elevator is in motion If this condition is not true the Drive Failed To Respond fault will be logged The elevator will attempt to recover from this fault up to four consecutive times after which this fault will latch and require a manual reset by toggling the Inspection switch Troubleshooting Check the circuitry associated with the DRON input for proper operation Description The drive fault input DFI has been activated indicating that a drive fault has occurred Troubleshooting Check the contact wired to the DFI input this contact should originate from the drive system Refer to the installation user manual associated with the specific drive for troubleshooting suggestions EARTHQUAKE OPERATION Traction only Earthquake Description The car is shutdown on Earthquake Operation EQI is high used for ASME and California Earthquake Operation Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and check to see if any spare inputs are programmed as EQI Then check to see if that particular input is activated The elevator may be returned to normal service by means of the momentary reset button on the HC EQ2 board provided that the CWI input is not active 5 8 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message EARTHQUAKE REDUCED SPEED OPERATION Traction only
497. s to verify that they are picking on the HI ACI b pe If these relays are not picking refer to the job are ON prints and check the voltages Refer to the job prints to determine why 120VAC is PM contactor f turns ON not present on the contactor coil when PT1 and PT2 are ON 6 50 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 FIGURE 6 36 TORQMAX F5 Troubleshooting Flowchart Brake does not pick Brake does not pick Series M TORQMAX Put the car on Inspection operation and pick UP or DN direction No To resolve this issue refer to flow chart PM contactor does not pick Main PM Contactor urns ON Yes DRO BE relays turns ON BK relay turns ON No Yes i pix relay is used verify that it picks when direction is picked Follow the job prints and verify brake fuses and input voltage to the brake circuit Verify that all drive parameters are set correctly Relay BE on the HC ACI board turns ON when a direction is picked on inspection Select LF 82 The value should change from 0 to 37 or 41 when a direction is picked on Inspection 0 No signal 37 Enable Inspection and Forward UP inputs are ON 41 Enable Inspection and Reverse DN inputs are ON If this is not true the drive is not getting the enable and direction input signals To verify the drive input signals refer to the job prints and measure the DC voltage between drive common X2A 22 and the respective input X2A 14 Forw
498. s will then begin to close and the car will answer the next demand 5 4 5 14 CTL DOOR OPEN TIMER Range 2 0 60 0 seconds This timer is used to indicate how long the doors should remain open after lowering to the lobby floor when the CTL spare input is activated THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 6 5 4 7 5 4 5 15 DOOR BUZZER TIMER Range 0 0 30 0 Seconds This timer determines the length of time after the door dwell timer CCT HCT etc expires that the door buzzer sounds before the doors are automatically closed GONGS LANTERNS MENU OPTIONS 5 4 6 1 MOUNTED IN HALL OR CAR This option determines when the gongs and lanterns will activate as the car slows in to the floor for hall mounted fixtures or after the door lock breaks for car mounted fixtures If both types of gongs are used then the Hall option is recommended 5 4 6 2 DOUBLE STRIKE ON DOWN This option causes a double strike of the gongs and lanterns if the direction preference of the car is down 5 4 6 3 PFG ENABLE BUTTON Passing Floor Gong Enable Button If this option is selected the Passing Floor Gong will only be operative when initiated by a momentary pressure pushbutton Once initiated the Passing Floor Gong will operate for the current direction of travel but will be rendered inoperative when the car reverses direction The PFGE spare input see Section 5 4 7 should also be selected if this option is turned ON 5 4 6 4 EGRESS FLOO
499. sed loop system if there are OSCILLATIONS in the car at contract speed then verify the following 1 Are the gain parameters C5 01 and C5 02 are set very high The default settings are C5 01 20 and C5 02 0 2 2 Is the Motor Slip parameter E2 02 set correctly 3 Is the encoder properly mounted If it is properly mounted it should not oscillate OSCILLATIONS IN THE CAR OPEN LOOP SYSTEM For open loop systems if there are oscillations in the car check the commanded speed input to the drive unit Verify the motor slip parameter E2 02 and the Slip Compensation Gain parameter C3 01 DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE BY CLIPPING THE DOOR LOCKS If the drive trips on over voltage by clipping the door locks check the dynamic braking circuit and verify that drive parameter L5 01 1 and parameter L5 02 0 ALARMS AND FAULTS The Alarms amp Fault Displays section in the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive manual explains the fault conditions and suggests corrective actions to be taken if the AC Drive malfunctions There are some faults which are not listed in the drive manual such OPE40 AND OPE41 which are described in Table 6 6 AC Drive Alarms amp Faults When the AC Drive detects a fault the fault is displayed on the digital operator and activates a fault contact output after which the motor coasts to a stop Check the causes listed in the Alarms amp Fault Displays section in the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive manual and take the corresponding correct
500. sed message 5 13 Valve Limit Timer message 5 13 Viscosity Control Function message 5 13 42 02 2P21 W WHITE PLAINS NY FIRE CODE option 5 25 wiring controller wiring 2 4 drawing numbers 2 3 ground wiring 2 6 2 7 WLD Emergency Dispatch Input option 5 35 WLDI Wildop Indication Output option 5 37 X XPI1 XPI7 Auxiliary Position Indicators 1 thru 7 outputs option 5 37 XSDA Auxiliary Supervisory Down Arrow output option 5 37 XSUA Auxiliary Supervisory Up Arrow output option 5 37 42 02 2P21 Yaskawa F7 Drive acceleration deceleration rates 4 46 alarms and faults 6 40 buffer tests 4 55 4 56 critical parameters 3 20 3 22 drive parameters table A 37 emergency terminal limit switch monitor 4 55 Final Adjustments 4 53 Final Inspection Procedure 4 58 flux vector applications 4 50 4 52 governor overspeed tests 4 56 4 57 High speed 4 49 Inspection Leveling Overspeed test 4 54 Inspection operation 3 20 3 26 Inspection speed 3 24 load testing 4 52 4 53 parameter sheets 3 20 phase loss detection test 4 58 running on Normal operation 4 48 50 4 52 4 53 S curve parameters 4 46 4 47 setting the speed levels 4 44 terminal slowdown limit switches 4 54 troubleshooting 6 37 40 YSIM Wye simulation bit flag 5 17 INDEX l 9
501. series with the High speed command to the drive When parameter LF 86 is selected the drive display indicates which speed is selected LE 86 Display LE B6 Display inspection Speed High Leveling Speed righ Speed 6 intermediate Speed If the car does not reach Contract speed If the drive is getting the High speed command signal but the car does not reach Contract speed perform one of the following checks New motor If the hoist motor is new verify the following LF 20 and LF 42 are set to the correct value in FPM Rated motor speed LF 11 is set to motor full load RPM LF 22 Gear reduction ratio is set correctly e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 Old motor If the hoist motor is old and the car does not reach contract speed empty car down display LF 90 and do the following 1 Decrease the field weakening speed LF 16 to approximately 2 3 of the motor synchronous speed Set the power factor parameter LF 15 0 9 Decrease the rated motor speed parameter LF 11 in steps of 20 until the rated speed is reached empty car down 4 If the current drawn by the motor is too high parameter ru 90 then increase parameter LF 11 in steps of 10 6 7 3 CAR OVERSHOOTS OR THE DRIVE TRIPS on E OL or E OP ON ACCELERATION If during acceleration the car OVERSHOOTS or trips on OVER VOLTAGE then check the following Q NOTE It is mandatory to have 40 counterweight 1 Decrease drive parameters LF 51 Acceler
502. speed tests 4 42 High speed 4 35 Inspection Leveling Overspeed test 4 39 Inspection operation 3 15 3 19 Inspection speed 3 17 jerk parameters 4 32 load testing 4 37 4 38 parameter sheets 3 15 phase loss detection test 4 43 PM Contactor does not pick troubleshooting flowchart 6 30 6 49 S curve parameters 4 33 setting the speed levels 4 31 terminal slowdown limit switches 4 39 troubleshooting 6 22 26 6 28 TORQMAX F5 Drive acceleration deceleration rates 4 60 alarms and faults 6 45 buffer tests 4 69 Car does not move troubleshooting flowchart 6 53 critical parameters 3 27 Drive Key Pad flowchart 6 47 drive parameters table A 47 emergency terminal limit switch monitor 4 68 excessive electrical noise 4 66 Final Adjustments 4 66 Final Inspection Procedure 4 71 governor overspeed tests 4 70 High speed 4 63 Inspection Leveling Overspeed test 4 67 Inspection operation 3 27 3 31 Inspection Speed 3 29 jerk parameters 4 60 load testing 4 65 4 66 parameter sheets 3 27 phase loss detection test 4 71 S curve parameters 4 61 setting the speed levels 4 59 l 8 e INDEX terminal slowdown limit switches 4 67 troubleshooting 6 42 6 44 6 45 6 47 TOS Time Out of Service Output option 5 37 TOS Timed out of service flag 5 17 Troubleshooting Brake does not pick TORQMAX F4 drive 6 32 6 51 call logic 6 7 10 Car does not move TORQMAX F4 drive 6 33 Car does not move TORQMAX F5 drive 6 53
503. ssary to make the counter weight correct Check to see what the counter weighing should be before making any changes If a drum machine is being used follow the manufacturer s counterweighting recommendation and test the drum machine s limit switches On modernizations it is easy to overlook the typical 40 counter weighting Always put a 40 load in the car and check for equal motor current up verses down at Inspection speed in the middle of the hoistway Equal current readings on the keypad display indicate that the counterweight is close to the correct value Take whatever steps are necessary to achieve proper counterweighting This is especially important since many traction installations do not have compensation cables or chains Turn OFF the power and reinstall the fuses that power terminals 2H and 2F The elevator controller installation should now be complete Proceed to Section 4 Final Adjustment INSPECTION OPERATION TORQMAX F4 DRIVE For controllers with the G5 GPD515 drive see Section 3 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 drive see Section 3 5 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 drive see Section 3 7 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 drive see Section 3 8 DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS Each controller is shipped with completed parameter sheets and all of the field adjustable parameters have been entered into the drive unit based upon the provided field information However it is essential to verify all drive
504. st 4 14 Inspection operation 3 5 3 11 Inspection Speed 3 9 load testing 4 12 4 13 parameter sheets 3 5 phase loss detection test 4 18 running on Normal operation 4 8 4 9 4 11 13 S curve parameters 4 6 4 7 setting the speed levels 4 4 terminal slowdown limit switches 4 14 troubleshooting 6 14 18 GED Gong enable down output flag 5 15 GEDR Gong enable down output rear flag 5 15 GEU Gong enable up output flag 5 15 l 4 e INDEX GEUR Gong enable up output rear flag 5 15 GHT Gong hold timer flag 5 15 GHTR Gong hold timer flag rear 5 15 GONGS LANTERNS MENU OPTIONS 5 31 GOV Governor input option 5 33 governor overspeed tests G5 GPD515 Drive 4 16 4 17 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 29 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 42 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 70 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 56 4 57 Governor Switch Open message 5 10 ground check 3 1 wiring 2 6 2 7 GS Gate Switch Input option 5 33 GSR Gate Switch Rear Input option 5 33 GTDE Gong timer down enable flag 5 15 GTUE Gong timer up enable flag 5 15 H H High speed output flag 5 15 Hall and Car Call Buses Disconnected message 5 10 Hall Call Bus is disconnected message 5 10 HALL CALL DOOR TIMER option 5 29 HC ACI AC Drive Interface Board 1 7 3 4 3 14 Quick Reference 6 62 HC ACIF Additional Flux Vector Drive Interface Board 1 7 1 8 3 5 Quick Reference 6 63 HC CI O Call Input Output Board 1 3 1 4 Quick Reference 6 9 troubleshooting 6 9 6 10 HC 140 Input O
505. st Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only PG Rotation Sel PG rotation 0 CCW 1 CW Flux Vector only PG Output Ratio PG Division Rate Flux Vector only Flux Vector only Terminal S3 Sel Set to drive defaults Digital Inputs Multi Function Input Terminal S3 Function Selection 9 External BaseBlock N C See H1 01 descript ion in F7 Dri ive Manual Terminal S4 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S4 Function Selection 14 Fault Reset Terminal S5 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S5 Function Selection 80 Multi Step Ref 1F Terminal S6 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S6 Function Selection 81 Multi Step Ref 2F Terminal S7 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S7 Function Selection 82 Multi Step Ref 3F 42 02 2P21 Terminal S8 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S8 Function Selection APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 39 No Digital Operator Display Term M1 M2 Sel Parameter Description Digital Outputs Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 40 During Run 3 Setting Range See H2 01 descript Unit MCE Defaults ion in F7 Dri Field MCE Set ive Manual Term M3 M4 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 4 Frequency Detection 1 Term M5 M6 Sel Term A1 Lvl Set Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection F Not Used Sets the signal level of terminal A1 0 0to10VDC 1 10 to 10VDC Terminal A1
506. stomer Program Mode and System Mode When either of these two sections is accessed the LCD display will show The mechanic must then enter the correct passcode to log into the system Only then can the computer be used to program the controller The password is entered the same way and has the same code for both modes N Pushbutton Change the position of the cursor Pushbutton Increment the current position by one Pushbutton Decrement the current position by one S Pushbutton Check for a match If an invalid code is entered the operator will be prompted to re enter the code Once a valid code has been entered access is granted to the programming options and the password will not have to be reentered until the Password Timer expires DIAGNOSTIC MODE MCE s PTC Elevator Controller Computer with On Board Diagnostics is self sufficient external devices are not required when using the computer The computer is generally the most reliable component of the elevator control system and the On Board Diagnostics were designed to aid in evaluating the status of the control system The On Board Diagnostics help to pinpoint the cause of elevator malfunctions GETTING INTO DIAGNOSTIC MODE FUNCTION SWITCHES F8 F7F6 F5 F4 F3 F2F1 Diagnostic mode is initiated by placing the F1 F8 switches in the down position A description of the LCD display format and the function of the N S and pushbuttons during Diagnostic mode follows Diagn
507. stop and hold 125 of a contract load by tripping a stop switch open while running down on Inspection Hold the DOWN button in while tripping open the stop switch preferably on the Inspection station KEEP THE CAR NEAR THE BOTTOM AS IT IS LIKELY TO SLIDE THROUGH THE BRAKE ONTO THE BUFFERS If the AC Drive Unit trips on a fault when the car is going down but not while it is going up refer to the manual for the VFAC Drive Unit and look up the failure indicated on the Drive display If the displayed fault is E OP over voltage fault there may be a problem in the regeneration or braking resistors the braking module if one is provided or in the fuses that may be in series with the wires to the braking resistors If there is a problem lifting the load Set parameter LF 38 0 PWM 8KHz Then increase the drive gain using parameters LF 31 and LF 32 If this problem cannot be solved call MCE Technical Support BRINGING THE CAR UP TO HIGH SPEED TORQMAX F4 a Remove all test weights from the car Verify that all the steps described in Sections 4 1 and 4 8 regarding the adjustments and specifically the drive parameters are complete NOTE Itis very important that the drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation so that there is no demand FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 0 42 02 2P21 b Register a car call one floor above the car The High speed relay H should pick
508. t None None of the pre torque command Serial Chooses if analog pre torque command is Not latched Pre Torque Latch latched Latched Not latched Not latched Determines source of pre torque latch J External TB PTtorg Latch Clck control if used Serial External TB External TB External TB Fault Reset Src Fault reset source Serial External TB Automatic Automatic Determines external logic source to trigger k External TB Overspd Test Src overspeed test Serial External TB External TB If drive controls the mechanical brake this internal Brake Pick Src determines the source of the brake pick Serial Internal Internal command Determines if a logic input is used for brake _ None Brake Pick Cnfrm pick confirm External TB None None 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX C QUICK REFERENCE FOR HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS A 17 Digital Operator hat Setting Drive Field MCE No Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults Setting If drive controls the mechanical brake this internal Brake Hold Src determines the source of the brake hold S Serial Internal Internal command Chooses between normal stop and torque None Ramped Stop Sel ramp down stop Ramp on stop None None External TB Determines the source that signals the 7 Ramp Down En Src torque ramp down stop if used eee External TB External TB i Enable f Brk Pick Fit Ena Brake pick fault enable Disabl
509. t is less than 140 fpm The e FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 4 7 2 4 7 3 42 02 2P21 circuit should trip when the A3 Speed Command 1 parameter equals 23 of Contract Speed or above Check this in both directions The over speed monitor is now calibrated for less than 150 fpm for Access Inspection and Leveling Turn the Inspection speed A3 Speed Command 1 parameter back to the value recorded in 4 7 1 b TERMINAL SLOWDOWN LIMIT SWITCHES HPV 900 Make sure that the terminal slowdown limit switches are working properly by doing the following a Place the TEST NORMAL switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position b Disconnect and label the wires from terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board ron Register calls for the terminal landings top and bottom from the controller The car should make a normal slowdown at both terminal landings except that there may be a slight relevel which is okay If the car goes more than an inch past the floor move the slowdown limit until the approach is normal d Reconnect the wires to terminals 71 STU and 72 STD on the HC RB4 VFAC board and return theTEST NORMAL switch to the NORMAL position The final adjustments are now complete EMERGENCY TERMINAL LIMIT SWITCH MONITOR HPV 900 All jobs under the requirements of ANSI A17 1 SECTION 209 4 B ASME A 17 1b 1992 ADDENDA must have a means to insure that the car speed is below 95 of the contract speed after open
510. t when the car is going down but not while it is going up refer to the manual for the VFAC Drive Unit and look up the failure indicated on the Drive display If the displayed fault is E OP over voltage fault there may be a problem in the regeneration or braking resistors the braking module if one is provided or in the fuses that may be in series with the wires to the braking resistors If there is a problem lifting the load Set parameter LF 38 0 PWM 8KHz Then increase the drive gain using parameters A LF 31 KP Speed Accel Proportional Gain and A LF 32 Ki Speed Accel Integral Gain If this problem cannot be solved call MCE Technical Support 4 15 4 BRINGING THE CAR UP TO HIGH SPEED TORQMAX F5 a Remove all test weights from the car Verify that all the steps described in Sections 4 1 and 4 11 regarding the adjustments and specifically the drive parameters are complete Q NOTE Itis very important that the drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation so that there is no demand 4 62 FINAL ADJUSTMENT 42 02 2P21 0 42 02 2P21 Register a car call one floor above the car The High speed relay H should pick and the drive keypad display should read 50 of Contract Speed as the car attempts to start If the car runs normally commence multi floor runs and slowly increase High speed by increasing parameter LF 42 until Contract Speed is achieved If there
511. tal Parameter Description Unit Setting MCE Field MCE Operator Range Drive Set Display Defaults Cp Parameters Password 100 read only 200 customer mode Cp 0 440 application password 033399 440 a Pn Parameters Pn 0 Auto reset E UP z 0 1 1 1 Pn 1 Auto reset E OP 0 1 1 0 Pn 16 Delay time E doH sec 0 120 60 60 Pn 59 Delay time E nEt sec 0 10 0 0 Ud Parameters ud 0 Key Board Pass 0 9999 APPL APPL ud 1 Buss Password a 0 9999 N A N A ud 2 Start parameter group ru table ru ru ud 3 Start parameter number 0 99 0 0 0 Off ud 4 Save Changes izon 0 1 ud 6 Inverter Address 0 239 1 1 ud 7 Baud rate 1200 19200 9600 19200 Fr Parameters Fr 0 Copy parameter set a 2 init 2 init Fr 1 Copy Bus parameter 2 N A N A An Parameters An 14 Analog output function a 0 2 0 0 An 15 Analog output gain 20 to 20 1 0 1 An 16 Analog output offset X 100 to 100 0 0 0 0 An 17 Analog output offset Y 100 to 100 0 0 di Parameters di 0 Noise Filter Digital 0 31 0 0 0 PNP di 1 NPN PNP Selection 3 1 NPN 0 0 di 2 Input logic 0 7 0 0 di 3 Input function 11 0 1 0 0 di 14 0 di 15 Select Signal Source 0 7 0 0 di 16 Digital input setting 7 0 7 0 0 42 02 2P21 APPENDIX POWERBACK R4 REGENERATIVE DRIVE A 35 Digital Parameter Description Unit Setting MCE Fie
512. tch in the up position with all other F switches in the down position Programming System mode functions does not require the car to be on inspection When only the F8 switch is placed in the up position the system status displays are available on the LCD display see Section 5 1 4 5 1 2 4 LCD CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT TRIMPOT The contrast on the LCD can be adjusted to make it easier to read by turning this trimpot See Figure 5 1 TERMINALS 5 1 3 1 POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL The two terminals marked and are for 5VDC and Ground respectively to the MC PCA board See Figure 5 1 5 1 3 2 COMMUNICATION PORT FOR DUPLEXING The DIN connectors shown in Figure 5 1 are used for the high speed communication between two cars in a duplex configuration and connect to an optional MC PA Peripherals Adaptor board The communication cable is a twisted pair shielded cable Two wires are for signals and the third is for grounding the shield see the Job Prints for hook up details 5 1 3 3 COM PORT 1 AND 2 These terminals on the MC PA Peripherals Adaptor board are used to connect to a peripheral device Refer to Section 5 4 9 11 STATUS DISPLAYS To access the Status Displays place function switch F8 in the up position F1 thru F7 must be down Press the N pushbutton to cycle through the available status displays The following system status displays are available for viewing on the LCD display PTHC Software Version Main processor software
513. te to High Level speed Reduce the High Level speed parameter D1 03 so that the car runs at about 10 20 fpm or at a reasonable speed use your personal judgment Six inches before the floor at which the car is to stop High Level speed is dropped and the car decelerates to Level speed The Level speed can be adjusted using parameter D1 05 so that the car levels into the floor and stops Level speed should be 7 12 fpm or a reasonable leveling speed use personal judgement If the car re levels frequently once Level speed is adjusted satisfactorily spread apart the LU and LD sensors or switches in the landing system to provide enough Dead Zone FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 9 NOTE The active speed frequency in Hz will show on the drive key pad corresponding to the setting of the D parameters d Adjust the SPD Speed Pick Delay trimpot by first turning it far enough clockwise so that the empty car rolls back in the direction of the counterweight if it can Then adjust SPD so that the brake is fully picked just as the motor first moves The goal is to delay long enough to avoid moving the motor before the brake is fully lifted but not so long as to allow the car to roll back e Run the car again and verify that the car will start accelerate decelerate and run at High Level and Level speeds into the floor and stop Place calls for all of the landings Verify that all of the calls work Verify the operation and placement of all vanes or magn
514. ted acceleration rate may be excessive Try reducing the acceleration rate by decreasing the A2 Accel Rate 0 parameter The lower the rate of acceleration the lower the current demand 2 A more gradual transition from acceleration to high speed may be made by decreasing the A2 Accel Jerk Out 0 parameter 3 The motor may be underrated It may be possible to get excellent results if the speed is reduced slightly 4 The elevator may be improperly counter weighted This possibility should be thoroughly investigated 5 Make a copy of the table in Appendix C Quick Reference for MagneTek HPV 900 Drive Parameters and use the digital operator on the HPV 900 Drive Unit to look up and write down every parameter value as programmed in the unit Use this as a reference when calling MCE to review the data b If there is a full load in the car and there is trouble slowing in the down direction or if the VFAC Drive Unit is tripping off and there is an OV over voltage fault displayed it may mean that there is a problem with the regeneration braking resistors and or the braking unit if supplied separately Check for DC bus voltage There are two methods to check the DC bus voltage as described below FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 25 4 7 A 4 7 1 4 26 1 Through the drive keypad display When the drive is in Operation mode access the D2 Power Data DC bus voltage parameter You can then run the elevator and watch the voltage reading
515. tep spd 3F H1 06 6 Jog ref Inspection speed input terminal H2 01 40 During Run 3 This parameter is very critical for the operation of the brake terminal M1 amp M2 contact be START UP 42 02 2P21 TABLE 3 3 Critical Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters CRITICAL YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS Parameter Number Digital Operator Display Parameter Description Units Setting Range MCE drive default Field MCE settings A1 01 Access Level Parameter access level 0 Operation Only 1 User Level 2 Advanced Level 0 2 Control Method Control Method motor 1 0 V F Control without PG 1 V F Control with PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector closed loop 0 V F Control Open loop 3 Flux Vector B1 01 Reference Source Reference selection 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB 0 B1 02 Run Source Operation selection method 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB 0 3 1 1 C1 01 Accel Rate 1 Acceleration Rate 1 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 02 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration Rate 1 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 03 Accel Rate 2 Acceleration Rate 2 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 04 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration Rate 2 f s 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 07 Accel Rate 4 Acceleration Rate 4 f s 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 08 Decel
516. tes after removing the AC power to allow the capacitors to discharge Use extreme caution Do not touch any circuit board power device or electrical connection without ensuring that high voltage is not present Once all the steps described in Sections 3 3 1 3 5 1 and 3 5 2 are accomplished then proceed with the following a Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board is in the ON position Turn the main power disconnect ON There should be no fault message on the drive key pad display If there is a drive fault message refer to the fault section in the AC drive manual The drive key pad should be adjusted to display the speed The RPI relay will pick and after few seconds the SAF relay should pick the LED on the relay will be lit On the HC ACI board relays RDY and CNP must also be picked If none of the relays have been picked inspect fuse F4 on the controller s back plate Verify that there is 120 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board If no problems are found then briefly place a jumper between terminals 2 and 20 on the HC RB4 VFAC board and confirm that the SAF relay turns ON after four seconds If the SAF relay turns OFF after removing the jumper there is a problem with the safety string Note that the RDY relay will turn ON as long as the VFAC drive is in normal condition and there is 15DVC present on the HC ACI board The N C contact of the fault tripping output on the
517. th the G5 GPD515 AC Drive see Sections 4 2 thru 4 4 For controllers with the HPV 900 AC Drive see Sections 4 5 thru 4 7 For controllers with the Yaskawa F7 AC Drive see Sections 4 11 thru 4 13 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 AC Drive see Sections 4 14 thru 4 16 WARNING The following tests should be performed only by the qualified elevator personnel skilled in final adjustment and inspections 4 10 1 INSPECTION LEVELING OVER SPEED TEST TORQMAX F4 The HC ACI board is equipped with an independent low speed monitoring system which can trip and open a fault contact if the car runs faster than a preset speed 150 fom max on Car Top Inspection Hoistway Access or Leveling operation The monitoring system is active when the Leveling L relay is picked or when the Access Inspection relay INX is dropped The trimpot is labeled ILO Inspection Leveling Overspeed and is located on the HC ACI board The circuit looks at pulses coming from the hall effect sensor sensing the magnets on the motor shaft or brake drum etc Calibrate this circuit as follows a Put the car on Inspection operation by placing the Relay Panel Inspection switch on the HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay board in the ON position b Run the car on Inspection up or down and record the actual measured car speed with ahand held tachometer It must be returned to the original value when this test is complete Now run the car on Inspection and increase the Inspection speed paramet
518. that 3 1 4 bs START UP 42 02 2P21 3 6 3 6 1 42 02 2P21 n the SAF relay drops out and the car stops when the Car Top Emergency Stop Switch is released Also by opening the Emergency Stop Switch while the car is moving up or down verify that the brake stops and holds the car Run the car through the hoist way checking clearance and the door locks When all of the doors are closed remove the jumpers from terminals 4 and 8 and from terminals 18 and 59 if present Correct any problem with the door locks and the door closed contacts Temporarily take the car off of Inspection operation If the LCD display does not show TEST MODE see what message is being displayed and correct the problem For example if the indicators show that the car is on Fire Service Phase 1 a jumper must be connected between terminal 2 on the back plate and terminal 38 on the HC RB4 VFAC board in order to run the car on Normal Operation Remove the jumper once the Fire Service input is brought into the controller Place the car back on Inspection NOTE If the car is not completely wired temporary check the following e wire removed from panel mount terminal DCL wire removed from terminal 47 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 36 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to terminal 38 on the HC RB4 x board jumper from 2 bus to panel mount terminal EPI if present Check the counter weight balance Make whatever corrections are nece
519. the deceleration rate To observe the commanded speed and the drive output with an oscilloscope or a chart recorder monitor drive terminal X2 18 and X2 19 with respect to X2 13 Take all necessary precautions while measuring the voltage signals FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 35 CAUTION Most oscilloscopes have a grounding pin on their power plug We recommend defeating the grounding pin with one of the commonly available ground isolation adapter plugs so that the case of the oscilloscope is not at ground potential but at whatever potential the negative probe lead is connected to TREAT THE CASE OF THE OSCILLOSCOPE AS A LETHAL SHOCK HAZARD DEPENDING recommendation is being made because the ground potential on the grounding pin of the power outlet may not be the same as the controller cabinet ground If it is not substantial ground loop current may flow between the negative probe and the power plug grounding pin which can ruin the oscilloscope 1 ON WHERE THE NEGATIVE PROBE IS CONNECTED This f To achieve a proper start without rollback or snapping away from the floor a variable delay in the application of the speed signal is provided using drive parameter LF 70 Parameter LF 70 must be adjusted to let the brake just clear the brake drum before attempting to accelerate the car Do this with an empty car The correct setting will be obvious by watching the Drive sheave This was adjusted previously however check parameter LF 70 again
520. the EPI input TER SECURITY CODE Description MCE Security has been initiated Troubleshooting Enter floor passcode in the C O P within 10 seconds See Section 5 6 1 for instructions on how to program or change security passcodes MLT INPUT IS ACTIVATED Hyaro only Description MLT shutdown with External Motor Limit Timer EXMLT Troubleshooting Check the External Motor Limit Timer and the associated circuitry Check the voltage at the EXMLT input Verify that the wiring is correct Check the MLT VLT Data Trap to verify that EXMLT is active FIRE SERVICE PHASE 1 ALTERNATE Fire Service Alternate Description The car is returning to an alternate fire return landing The FRS input is low the FRA input is high or FRAON is active Troubleshooting Inspect the fire sensors especially the main floor sensor and the Fire Phase switch wiring For some fire codes including ASME the Fire Phase switch must be turned to the BYPASS position and then back to OFF to clear the fire service status once activated FIRE SERVICE PHASE 1 MAIN Fire Service Main Description The car is returning to the main fire return landing The FRS input is low or the FRON or FRON2 inputs are high Troubleshooting Inspect the fire sensors and the Fire Phase switch wiring For some fire codes including ASME the Fire Phase switch must be turned to the BYPASS position and then back to OFF to clear the fire service status once activated FIRE
521. the doors were not locked Troubleshooting Check for an obstruction that has kept the doors from closing Also check the door locks PHE and DOB circuits CAR SAFETY DEVICE OPEN Car Safety Device Open Description One of the car safety devices has activated opening the safety circuit e g emergency exit contact safety clamp switch car top emergency stop switch Troubleshooting Check all car safety devices Refer to controller wiring prints for applicable devices CAR TO FLOOR FUNCTION Description The CTF input has been activated Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and see if any spare inputs are programmed as CTF Then check to see if that particular input is activated Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 7 TABLE 5 2 Status and Error Messages Scrolling Message Special Event Message CAR TO LOBBY OPERATION Description The CTL input has been activated Troubleshooting Go into Program Mode and see if any spare inputs are programmed as CTL Then check to see if that particular input is activated mmunication Loss not scrolled Event Calendar only Communication Loss CONFIGURATION ERROR CHANGE SETTINGS BEFORE INSTALLATION Description The MC PCA board is not communicating with the MC PA board Troubleshooting Check the cable between the MC PCA and MC PA boards and the associated connectors Description Incorrect Programmed value s e g a floor selected for the fire floor is not o
522. the drive interface that the PM Aux contact 4 is in series with the drive enable and direction inputs If not complete the PMX mod Normal operation and it still trips E LC fault intermittently If all four items described above are correct then the PM contactor may be defective 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING s 6 35 FIGURE 6 32 TORQMAX F4 Troubleshooting Flowchart Excessive motor noise Excessive Motor Noise Series M TORQMAX The overhauling energy during deceleration empty car up full load Yes down from the system is dissipated among the dynamic braking Noise is coming from resistor cabinet resistors To reduce the noise you may have to reduce the deceleration rate No Verify LF 11 LF21 LF 22 LF 23 LF 24 LF 25 Verify LF 31 speed prop gain The default value of 3000 is good for all motors except Reuland For Reuland motor ee lowering LF 31 to 1500 should remove reduce the noise Noise is from emoi Verify that ru 09 motor current has normal value If the current is higher than Motor FLA the problem may be in the encoder signals Verify that LF 38 1 16 kHz Carrier frequency Yes Use whatever means necessary to determine if the noise is mechanical Make whatever corrections are required to eliminate the mechanical noise Noise is mechanical No 6 36 TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 6 8 TROUBLESHOOTING THE YASKAWA F7 AC DRIVE The VFAC drive
523. the drive keypad by selecting parameter ru 9 Run the car on Inspection and check for one of the following conditions 1 If the car moves in the correct direction and the drive draws normal current 30 to 40 of motor FLA proceed to step g 2 Ifthe car oscillates at zero speed moves at slow speed or trips the E ENC fault on the drive then set LF 18 ON or OFF change from previous value This parameter will swap the encoder channels internally in the drive START UP 3 17 It is not recommended to change the external encoder connections as the drive has the capability of changing them through software 3 If the motor draws normal current but the car moves in the opposite direction turn OFF the power and wait until there is no voltage present on the DC bus Then interchange two of the motor leads Turn ON the power and set parameter LF18 ON or OFF change from previous value The car should now move in the correct direction and draw normal current NOTE If the elevator does not run on Inspection refer to Section 6 7 Troubleshooting the TORQMAX AC Drive Verify the inspection speed using a hand held tachometer If the car moves slower than the set value of the Inspection speed parameter LF 43 then verify the following LF 11 Rated motor speed LF 20 Rated system speed LF 21 Traction sheave diameter LF 22 Gear reduction ratio LF 30 2 Close loop 0 Open loop If the gear reduction ratio is not available fro
524. the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Refer to the instruction manual for the VFAC drive unit which is provided along with this manual as part of the documentation Become familiar with the VFAC Drive Manual particularly with the operation of the Digital Operator keypad operation Note that the way this VFAC drive unit is being used ignores many of its functions Pages D and DX of the job prints show the drive interface and which external functions are being used VERIFYING THE CRITICAL YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS Table 3 1 lists the critical Yaskawa F7 drive parameters which must be verified before start up Table 3 2 lists additional parameters applicable only to flux vector drives which must be verified A complete listing of drive parameters can be found in Appendix B N CAUTION The following are very critical Yaskawa F7 Drive parameters 3 20 Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation A1 02 Setting 0 or 3 depending upon the type of controller Open loop or Flux Vector B1 01 0 Operator B1 02 1 Terminals 01 03 Determines max FPM This must be set before setting D1 02 thru D1 17 D1 02 H D1 03 HL D1 05 L D1 07 INT D1 17 INS must be set to valid speed settings None of these parameters may be set to zero value H1 01 9 External BaseBlock N C H1 02 14 Fault reset H1 03 80 Multi step spd 1F H1 04 81 Multi step spd 2F H1 05 82 Multi s
525. the parameters on the parameter sheet shipped with the controller are different from those shown in the drive manual If a drive is replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to the parameter sheet shipped with the controller Refer to the instruction manual for the VFAC drive unit which is provided along with this manual as part of the documentation Become familiar with the VFAC Drive Manual particularly with the operation of the Digital Operator keypad operation Note that the way this VFAC drive unit is being used ignores many of its functions Pages D and DX of the job prints show the drive interface and which external functions are being used VERIFYING THE CRITICAL MAGNETEK HPV 900 DRIVE PARAMETERS The AC drive parameters must be verified before moving the car on inspection operation The Caution box below lists critical drive parameters which must be verified before start up The remaining drive parameters must be verified with the Quick Reference for HPV 900 Drive Parameters for the Series M product which was shipped with the controller This complete listing of drive parameters can also be found in Appendix C of this manual CAUTION Do not change drive parameters while the elevator is running The following are very critical HPV900 Drive parameters Incorrect values for these parameters can cause erratic elevator operation A1 Contract Car Spd Elevator contract
526. the relevel in not successful check the following If the brake picks and the car is trying to level but is not able to it may be necessary to adjust the Leveling Speed parameter LF 41 on the TORQMAX F5 Drive to get the car to move If relays L and LD are picked but the brake and other relays are not the down direction limit switch may be preventing the leveling down operation If the car is trying to level it will not leave the landing for a call until the leveling is complete Move the limit switch if necessary The Status Indicator lights should now display the indication for Independent Service operation At this time the Position Indicator should match the actual car location Note that all of the Position Indicators and direction arrows are conveniently displayed on the controller All the calls are also displayed on the controller 4 15 3 BRAKE ADJUSTMENT FOR 125 LOAD TORQMAX F5 Put the car on Inspection at the bottom landing Put 2 3 of a contract load in the car Begin adding weights in 50 or 100 pound increments and move the car up and down on Inspection each time Adjust the brake tension to stop and hold 125 of a contract load by tripping a stop switch open while running down on Inspection Hold the DOWN button in while tripping open the stop switch preferably on the Inspection station KEEP THE CAR NEAR THE BOTTOM AS IT IS LIKELY TO SLIDE THROUGH THE BRAKE ONTO THE BUFFERS If the AC Drive Unit trips on a faul
527. the system MCE s VFMC 1000 PTC controller is designed to be able to operate on Inspection and Access without the computers hooked up during start up 3 3 APPLYING POWER PREPARING TO MOVE THE CAR ON INSPECTION AN WARNING This equipment contains rotating parts on motors and driven machines and voltages that may be as high as 800 volts High voltage and moving parts can cause serious or fatal injury Only qualified personnel familiar with this manual and any driven machinery should attempt to start up or troubleshoot this equipment Observe these precautions a USE EXTREME CAUTION DO NOT TOUCH any circuit board the VFAC Drive or a motor electrical connection without making sure that the unit is properly grounded and that no high voltage is present DO NOT apply AC power before grounding per instructions herein Improper control operation may cause violent motion of the motor shaft and driven equipment Be certain that unexpected motor shaft movement will not cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment Peak torques of several times rated motor torque can occur during a control failure The VFAC Drive the AC motor the braking unit and the field circuits may have high voltage present whenever AC power is applied even when the motor is not rotating Make sure to use SHIELDED CABLE for the speed sensor and wire it exactly as shown Make sure to ground the controller cabinet according to local code 3 2 be START UP 42 02 2P21
528. timing starts when the car becomes inactive FRC Fire Service Phase 2 Output FRM Fire Service Phase 1 Output FSA Fire Service Alternate Output FSM Fire Service Main Output FSO Fire Service On Output FSVC True Fire Service Output This input is used to indicate when the car is on Fire Service Phase One or Two FWL Fire Warning Light Output This output is used to indicate when the car is on Fire Phase 1 or 2 It will flash if the Machine Room or Hoistway fire sensor is active HCP Hall call pushed output This output is active whenever a hall call button is pressed It is only activated for the amount of time that the button is being pressed HCR Hall Call Reject Output HDSC Heat Detector Shutdown Complete Output HLW Heavy Load Weigher Output This output will be generated when the car is heavy THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 SPARE OUTPUTS MENU OPTIONS INDFRC Independent Service Fire Service Phase 2 Output This output is needed for all elevators with either Single Button Collective or Single Automatic Pushbutton Operation see Section 5 4 2 2 This output will be used to cut out hall calls during Fire Service and Independent Service ISRT In Service and Running Output This output reflects the car s ability to respond to hall calls the ISRT status ISRT is active when the car s status is such that it can answer hall calls
529. tion 5 32 DHLDI Normal door hold input flag 5 16 DHLDR DHLD for Rear Doors option 5 32 DHO Door hold open flag 5 16 DHO Door Hold Output option 5 36 DHOR Door hold open flag rear 5 16 Diagnostic Mode 5 4 5 19 DIN Door open inactive flag 5 16 DIR PREFERENCE UNTIL DLK option 5 27 Direction Relay Redundancy Failure message 5 8 dispatching features dispatch load 5 52 heavy load hall call bypass 5 52 light load anti nuisance 5 52 overloaded 5 52 DLI Dispatch Load Input flag 5 16 DLI Dispatch Load Input option 5 32 DLK Door lock input flag 5 16 DLKS Door lock store bit flag 5 16 DLOB Door Left Open Bell Output option 5 36 DLS Door Lock Sensor Input option 5 32 DLSR DLS for rear doors option 5 32 DLW Dispatch load weighing function flag 5 16 DMD Demand down flag 5 16 DMU Demand up flag 5 16 DNDO Down direction output flag 5 16 DNI Down Input Attendant Service option 5 32 DNO Down output Attendant Service option 5 36 DNS Down direction sense input flag 5 16 DO1 DO2 DO4 DO8 DO16 D032 Binary coded P I outputs for digital P I devices option 5 36 DOB Door open button input flag 5 16 DOBR Door open button input rear flag 5 16 DOC Door open command flag 5 16 DOCR Door open command rear flag 5 16 DOF Door open function output flag 5 16 DOFR Door open function output rear flag 5 16 DOI Door open intent flag 5 16 DOIR Door open intent flag rear 5 16 DOL Op
530. tion according to the applicable elevator code Make sure that the cam that operates the slowdown and limit switches maintains the terminal slowdown switch open until the direction limit switch and emergency terminal slowdown switches if required are open Make sure that the terminal slowdown direction limit and emergency terminal slowdown switches are held open for the entire runby or overtravel of the elevator The hoistway access limit switch if required should be installed and adjusted to open and stop the elevator in the down direction when the top of the elevator is approximately level with the top landing when the top hoistway access switch is activated while on Access or Inspection operation For faster geared elevators the face of the cam operating the limit switches must be sufficiently gradual so that the impact of the switch rollers striking the cam is relatively silent INSTALLING THE LANDING SYSTEM CONTROL BOX LS QUTE Refer to the drawings in the job prints The location for the landing system box should have already been selected Holes are available on both sides and on the bottom of the landing system box for mounting to any support brackets or structural channels The mounting of the box INSTALLATION 2 11 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 12 should be very firm and solid so that knocking it out of alignment should be difficult Use 1 4 20 hardware e To install the tape into the tape guides on the LS QUT
531. tion to place it in the Door Zone SWITCHING TO AUTOMATIC OPERATION TORQMAX F4 Place the Relay Panel Inspection switch in the OFF position If the car is not at a landing it will move to a landing If the car is at a landing but not in the door zone relays L and either LU or LD should pick and the car should perform a relevel If the relevel in not successful check the following If the brake picks and the car is trying to level but is not able to it may be necessary to adjust the Level Speed parameter LF 41 on the TORQMAX F4 Drive to get the car to move If relays L and LD are picked but the brake and other relays are not the down direction limit switch may be preventing the leveling down operation If the car is trying to level it will not leave the landing for a call until the leveling is complete Move the limit switch if necessary The Status Indicator lights should now display the indication for Independent Service operation At this time the Position Indicator should match the actual car location Note that all of the Position Indicators and direction arrows are conveniently displayed on the controller All the calls are also displayed on the controller BRAKE ADJUSTMENT FOR 125 LOAD TORQMAX F4 Put the car on Inspection at the bottom landing Put 2 3 of a contract load in the car Begin adding weights in 50 or 100 pound increments and move the car up and down on Inspection each time Adjust the brake tension to
532. to StArt With the controller on machine room inspection pick and hold Up direction The motor contactor should pull in and the brake should not pick Motor current will begin to flow an audible noise in the motor will be heard and the drive display will change to LS103 The drive will measure various parameters in the motor as well as in the drive s own power stage During each measurement the display will change to signify what is being measured In the event of problems during the measurement phase the factory can use the codes to determine what is happening Continue to hold the inspection switch ON until the drive displays done In the event that the drive cannot complete the measurements two error messages may occur e FAILd the drive is not able to begin measurements due to a configuration error Consult the factory to resolve e FAIL the measurement sequence was interrupted e g the inspection switch was released prematurely electrically the motor was not properly connected Try the measurement again When done is displayed release the inspection switch The drive will finish by making several calculations CALC is displayed and updating the parameter values with the measured values Reinstall the brake wire removed in step b above Verify proper car movement and brake operation a The Inspection Speed is set by drive parameter LF 43 Verify that the INSPECTION switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board
533. to the braking resistors If this problem cannot be solved call MCE Technical Support Remove all test weights from the car BRINGING THE CAR UP TO HIGH SPEED G5 GPD515 a Verify that all the steps described in Sections 4 1 and 4 2 regarding the adjustments and specifically the drive parameters are complete It is very important that the drive parameters only be changed when the car is stopped and the elevator is on Inspection or Test operation so that there is no demand To change a drive parameter the Programming mode has to be accessed When the drive is in Programming mode it will not function The drive has to be in Operation mode to run the elevator b Register a car call one floor above the car The High speed relay H should pick and the drive keypad should read 30HZ as the car attempts to start If the car runs normally commence multi floor runs and slowly increase the High speed parameter D1 02 until contract speed is achieved If the motor is designed for 60 Hz contract speed should be reached when the keypad displays 60Hz Some motors are designed for 50Hz or 40Hz In those applications parameter D1 02 must be set according to the designed motor frequency 50Hz or 40Hz Contract speed should be reached when the keypad display reads 50Hz or 40Hz respectively C The Position Indicator will step at the slowdown distance from the next floor After stepping occurs High speed is dropped and the car should rapidly decelera
534. tomatic restart attempts Restart Sel Torq Det 1 Sel Automatic restart operation selection 0 No Fault Relay 1 Fault Relay Active Torque Detection Torque Detection Selection 1 0 Disabled Torq Det 1 Lvl Torque Detection Level 1 Torq Det 1 Time Torque Limits Flux Vector only DB Resistor Prot Torque Detection Time 1 Protection Selection for Internal DB Resistor 0 Not Provided 1 Provided 0 1 0 1 Ph Loss In Sel Input Phase Loss Protection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Ph Loss Out Sel User Monitor Sel Output Phase Loss Protection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Monitor Selection 6 Output voltage 6 6 Power On Monitor Monitor Selection upon Power up 1 Frequency reference 2 Output Frequency 3 Output Current 4 User monitor 1 1 42 02 2P21 Display Scaling Digital Operator Display Selection Sets the units of the Frequency References D1 01 to D1 17 the Frequency Reference Monitors U1 01 U1 02 U1 05 and the Modbus communication frequency reference Units are fixed at FPM ft Min with a range of 10 0 to 999 9 FPM at max frequency 10100 to 19999 User units 10100 10 0 FPM 19999 999 9 FPM 10100 to 19999 11000 100 FPM APPENDIX J QUICK REFERENCE FOR YASKAWA F7 DRIVE PARAMETERS Set to contract speed A 41 No Digital Operator Setting MCE Field MCE Display Range Defaults Set Key Sele
535. top The elevator will then go to the terminal landing or to the next landing if the controller has the absolute floor encoding feature to correct its position before it can respond to any calls Existing calls and P I information will be lost each time the computer is reset 5 1 2 2 N S and PUSHBUTTONS These s pushbuttons will allow the mechanic to view and change gt lt Dand B data in the computer memory These pushbuttons N s permenon ee eee have different functions depending on the current m IFA mode Diagnostic mode see Section 5 3 Program pt AUR OG mode see Section 5 4 External Memory mode see Section 5 5 or System mode see Section 5 6 THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 2 5 1 2 3 MODE SELECTION F1 F8 FUNCTION SWITCHES The computer panel operates in different modes Diagnostic mode is useful for diagnosing and troubleshooting the elevator system It is initiated by placing all of the F1 F8 switches in the down position Program mode is used to set up the controller to meet the elevator specifications Program mode is initiated by moving the F7 switch to the up position with all other F switches in the down position External Memory mode is initiated by placing the F2 switch in the up position with all other F switches in the down position and is useful for diagnosing the elevator system by viewing the computer s external memory System mode is initiated by placing the F3 swi
536. ts two magnets that pass within 1 16 or 1 6 mm of the face of the sensor INSTALLATION 2 7 There are many ways to mount the magnets that actuate the sensor depending on the amount of space available to attach the magnets Generally the magnets are installed in two locations so that there are two pulses per each revolution of the motor They must also be spaced equally One way to install the magnets is to glue them to an accessible part of the motor shaft and then secure them with nylon wire ties see Figure 2 5 Q The magnets must be 1 4 thick strips with the South pole facing out The South pole is the side without adhesive and peal off tape If 1 8 thick magnet strips are being used a double thickness must be used one on top of the other FIGURE 2 5 Installing Magnets on Motor Shaft FIGURE 2 6 Installing Magnets on Brake Drum BRAKE DRUM MOTOR CABLE TIES MOTOR SHAFT MAGNETS D N 1286 MAGNETS D N 1288 CAUTION Do not drill any holes in the motor shaft to mount the magnets This will weaken the shaft See Figure 2 5 for a sample installation of magnets on the motor shaft One alternative to mounting the magnets on the shaft is to mount them inside the brake drum using a high quality contact adhesive See Figure 2 6 N CAUTION Make sure that any adhesive used is kept away from the brake mechanism Do not drill holes in the brake drum b The speed sensor must be mounted on a bracket with
537. ttempting to install the equipment PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS Number of Stops 32 Maximum Number of Cars 2 Car Speed open loop up to 150 fpm no Encoder Speed Regulation 5 Car Speed flux vector up to 350 fom requires Encoder feedback Speed Regulation less than 5 Field Programmable Rotating equipment AC machine with VVVF Drive Environment 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C ambient 12 000 ft altitude 95 humidity EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES The VFMC 1000 PTC traction controller consists of three major pieces of equipment e Controller Unit Car Top Selector Landing system e Peripherals 42 02 2P21 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 1 CAR CONTROLLER PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION Figure 1 1 shows a typical layout of the Car Controller in a standard MCE traction cabinet A brief description of each block follows FIGURE 1 1 Typical Physical Layout TERMINAL RESISTOR RELAYS Gec AND FUSES o VWF DRIVE B CAGE HC ACIF HC IOX BOARD HC RD 1 INPUT BOARD OUTPUT A BOARDS HC CI O E BOARD HC PCI O COMPUTER BOARD y eca g T MC PA O POWER SUPPLY l 6 RELAY BOARD TERMINALS i 7 i t WIRE TROUGH PERIPHERALS ADAPTER l 2
538. ttom of the hoist way and while running the car in the up direction slowly turn the ETS trimpot CCW until the ETS indicator turns ON and trips the FLT2 FLT relay on the HC ACIF HC ETS board and the car stops Press the ETS reset push button on the HC ACIF HC ETS board to drop the FLT2 FLT relay The ETS indicator should turn OFF and the car should be able to run Repeat d and e in the down direction with the wire from the DET terminal removed The car should stop when it reaches 95 of contract speed Reconnect the wires removed from controller terminals UET and DET when the test is complete 4 4 4 CONTRACT SPEED BUFFER TEST G5 GPD515 4 4 4 1 COUNTER WEIGHT BUFFER TEST WITH EMPTY CAR GOING UP O NOTE The car should be at the bottom landing with the TEST NORM switch on the HC RB4 VFAC board in the TEST position To conduct the empty car buffer test going UP a number of functions need to be bypassed using jumpers Follow the steps below a 42 02 2P21 On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 15 4 4 5 4 16 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car b Disconnect the Step Up STU input by removing the wire from terminal 72 on the HC RB4 VFAC relay board Tape the wire to prevent sh
539. tween the HC ACI board and the drive Verify the operation of relay USD DSD on the HC ACI board The normally open contacts of these relays are in series with the High speed command to the drive If the car does not reach Contract speed If the drive is getting the High speed command signal but the car does not reach Contract speed perform one of the following checks New motor If the hoist motor is new verify the following e LF 20 and LF 42 are set to the correct value in FPM Rated motor speed LF 11 is set to motor full load RPM LF 22 Gear reduction ratio is set correctly Old motor If the hoist motor is old and the car does not reach contract speed empty car down display LF 90 and do the following 1 Decrease the field weakening speed LF 16 to approximately 2 3 of the motor synchronous speed Set the power factor parameter LF 15 0 9 Decrease the rated motor speed parameter LF 11 in steps of 20 until the rated speed is reached empty car down 4 If the current drawn by the motor is too high parameter ru 90 then increase parameter LF 11 in steps of 10 e TROUBLESHOOTING 42 02 2P21 6 9 3 0 6 9 4 6 9 5 6 9 6 6 9 7 42 02 2P21 CAR OVERSHOOTS OR THE DRIVE TRIPS on E OL or E OP ON ACCELERATION If during acceleration the car OVERSHOOTS or trips on OVER VOLTAGE then check the following NOTE It is mandatory to have 40 counterweight 1 Decrease drive parameters LF
540. uld be turned ON and in a normal running configuration Use Diagnostic mode on the computer as described previously to check the status of the HCDX flag and CCD flag If they are ON they will shut OFF hall calls and car calls respectively TROUBLESHOOTING 6 7 Q If it appears that there is a problem with a call disconnect the field wire or wires from that call terminal in order to find out if the problem is on the board or out in the field The calls can be disconnected by unplugging the terminals or by removing individual wires If the individual field wire is disconnected lightly tighten the screw on the terminal If the screw is loose while trying to ground the terminal using a jumper contact may not be made 2 If HCDX and CCD are normal or OFF take a meter with a high input impedance such as a good digital meter and check the voltage on the call terminal in question Depending on the voltage that the call circuits were set up for the reading should be approximately the voltage on the call terminal called for or up to 15 less If the voltage is lower than what is specified and the call terminal is on an HC CI O E board turn OFF the power and remove the resistor fuse associated with the call terminal i e if the call terminal is the fifth one from the bottom remove the fifth resistor fuse from the bottom Turn the power back ON The reading should be the voltage as discussed above Note the HC PCI O board does not h
541. ults in tighter control A low value may result in a speed deviation error A too high value may result in oscillation 2 ASR Integral Time 1 C5 02 The ASR Integral Time 1 adjusts the amount of time for the drive to respond to a change in speed command Response time is increased when the C5 02 is decreased However the car may become unstable if the ASR Integral Time is set too low 3 Parameters C5 03 ASR P Gain 2 and C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 are not used and must be set to the factory default values The car should be running well now except possibly for the final stop Since the speed reference goes to zero when the car stops the VFAC Drive Unit will cause the machine to stop electrically Enough delay in the setting of the brake BDD will have to be provided to allow the sheave to stop turning before setting the brake firmly on the brake drum NOTE If the job has Intermediate Speed first adjust the multi floor runs Then make one floor runs and adjust parameter D1 07 to reach the correct intermediate speed Do not change any other parameter except P1 13 or P1 14 if required as described in Figure 4 6 When the elevator slows down to leveling speed and travels to door zone the speed command will drop to zero before the brake drops This is adjustable by the BDD Brake Drop Delay trimpot For open loop applications the car stop will be accomplished with injection braking current supplied by the VFAC Drive Un
542. ure that it does not stall If the car stalls then you might have to increase the leveling speed 4 9 5 LOAD TESTING TORQMAX F4 42 02 2P21 a Begin adding test weights to the car in 100 or 200 pound increments all the way up to the rated load Observe the AC Drive Unit current on its display ru 9 and check to see if there is an E OL or E OL2 Overload error indication as the car accelerates to full speed If so it is an indication that the AC drive unit is being pushed close to its limits and may require one or more of the following actions 1 The requested acceleration rate may be excessive Try reducing the acceleration rate by decreasing the LF 51 parameter The lower the rate of acceleration the lower the current demand 2 A more gradual transition from acceleration to high speed may be made by decreasing the LF 55 Acceleration Jerk parameter 3 Verify that LF 38 0 PWM 8KHz The drive gains parameters LF 31 and LF 32 may need to be increased 4 The motor may be underrated It may be possible to get excellent results if the speed is reduced slightly 5 The elevator may be improperly counter weighted This possibility should be thoroughly investigated 6 Make a copy of the table in Appendix D Quick Reference for TORQMAX F4 Drive Parameters Use the digital operator on the Drive Unit to look up and write down every parameter value as programmed in the unit Use this as a reference when calling MCE to review th
543. urve Parameters The Field Adjustable Parameters are shown in the shaded rows No Digital Operator Display Parameter Description Setting Range MCE Defaults Field MCE Set 01 Jerk Change P1 Frequency reference for S curve 1 selection 0 400 4 0 4 0 02 Jerk Change P2 Frequency reference for S curve 2 selection 0 400 10 5 10 5 03 Jerk Change P3 Frequency reference for S curve 3 selecting 0 400 48 0 48 0 04 Accel Jerk In 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Acceleration 30 00 2 50 05 Accel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Acceleration 30 00 15 00 15 00 06 Decel Jerk In 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Deceleration 30 00 5 00 07 Decel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Deceleration 30 00 3 00 08 Accel Jerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Acceleration 30 00 15 00 09 Accel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Acceleration 30 00 15 00 10 Decel Jerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Deceleration 30 00 2 00 11 Decel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Deceleration 30 00 3 00 12 Accel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Acceleration 30 00 15 00 13 Accel Jerk Out 3 S Curve 3 at the End of Acceleration 30 00 2 50 14 Decel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Deceleration 30
544. us connections be correct Incorrect connections will damage the drive units The line inductor ground connection to the R4 Drive and F4 Drive must be completed according to the drawings APPENDIX POWERBACK R4 REGENERATIVE DRIVE A 33 1 2 4 HOW TO USE THE DRIVE KEYPAD The R4 drive is delivered from the factory in the Application mode which allows access to all parameters and functions available on the unit The display shows three types of information which define the parameter Parameter set Parameter group LE Parameter number By pressing the FUNC button you can change between the EEEEE displayed parameter and its value e ee To select a different parameter use the ENTER button to ae aoe toggle the flashing point to the right of the field to be changed Then use the UP and DOWN buttons to scroll the desired value Once the correct parameter information is displayed the FUNC button can be pressed at any time to see the value of the parameter When displaying a parameter value the value of the parameter can be changed by pressing the UP DOWN buttons Generally these changes are immediately effective and permanently stored meaning they remain stored after the unit is switched off Confirming the input with ENTER is not necessary with the exception of the parameters known as Enter Parameters Enter Parameter For some parameters the value adjusted by UP DOWN does not automatically become valid Th
545. utput Expander Board 1 4 HC IOX Input Output Expander Board 1 4 HC PCI O Power and Call Input Output Board 1 2 1 3 Quick Reference 6 2 HC RB4 VFAC Main Relay Board 1 6 Quick Reference 6 61 HCDxX Hall call disconnect flag 5 15 HCP Hall call pushed output option 5 36 HCR Hall call reject flag 5 15 HCR Hall Call Reject Output option 5 36 HCT Hall call door time flag 5 15 HCTR Hall call door time flag rear 5 16 HD High speed delay flag 5 16 HDLYE High speed delay elapsed flag 5 16 HDSC Heat Detector Shutdown Complete Output option 5 36 HEATD Heat Detector Input option 5 33 Heavy Load Weigher Condition message 5 10 High speed G5 GPD515 Drive 4 9 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 23 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 35 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 63 Yaskawa F7 Drive 4 49 HIGH SPEED DELAY AFTER RUN option 5 42 HLI Heavy load input flag 5 16 HLI Heavy Load Input option 5 33 HLW Heavy load weigher flag 5 16 HLW Heavy Load Weigher Output option 5 36 HML Home landing input flag 5 16 HML Home Landing Input option 5 33 Hoistway Safety Device Open message 5 10 HONEYWELL FIRE OPERATION option 5 25 42 02 2P21 HOSP Hospital Emergency Operation Input option 5 34 HOSP In car hospital emergency input flag 5 16 HOSPH2 Hospital emergency phase 2 flag 5 16 HOSPITAL EMERG OPERATION option 5 41 HOSPITAL EMERG TIMER option 5 30 Hospital Phase 1 Operation message 5 10 Hospital Phase 2 Operation message 5 10 Hospital Service
546. ve Input Power Output GND GND GND Lug in the MCE Controller Cabinet AC Motor Building Ground 2 2 2 AC MOTOR AND BRAKE WIRING a O If existing rotating equipment is being reused it is strongly recommended to disconnect all of the wires from the terminals on the AC hoist motor and brake This is to guarantee that the controller is dis connected from the rotating equipment before the insulation test is performed Using a Megohmmeter check for insulation breakdown between of each piece of the motor and brake coil A reading of 100K ohms or above is considered acceptable Any insulation problems must be corrected before proceeding as this may be an indication of a serious problem with the equipment Incoming power to the controller and outgoing power wires must be in their respective grounded conduit and must be separate from control wires both inside and outside the control enclosure The Encoder and speed sensor wiring must use a Separate grounded conduit The use of a shielded power cable between the MCE controller and the AC Motor is recommended to reduce RFI EMI noise Siemens Protoflex EMV or equivalent 2 2 3 INSTALLING AND WIRING THE SPEED SENSOR a 42 02 2P21 The speed sensor must be mounted and wired The instructions for this are in Step b The speed sensor device is about 5 8 to 3 4 in diameter about 11 2 long and is threaded over its entire length This sensor detec
547. verhauling conditions Noise is coming from resistor cabinet Yes To reduce the noise you may have to reduce the deceleration rate No Verify LF 11 LF21 LF 22 LF 23 LF 24 LF 25 Verify LF 31 speed prop gain The default value of 3000 is good for all motors except Reuland For Reuland motor Noise is trom lowering LF 31 to 1500 should remove reduce the noise the motor Verify that LF 93 motor current has normal value If the current is higher than Motor FLA the problem may be in the encoder signals 4 Verify that LF 38 1 16 kHz Carrier frequency Yes Use whatever means necessary to determine Noise i pees if the noise is mechanical and find required mechanical solution to eliminate the mechanical noise No 42 02 2P21 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 10 USING THE MLT DATA TRAP The MLT data trap records many of the controller s operation flags at the moment the MLT occurs This allows you to see what flags led up to the fault Note Direction must be on inputs UPS or DNS for the adjustable time set via parameter MOTOR LIMIT TIMER 1 6 minutes before MLT will occur Once an MLT shuts down the car use these steps to look at the stored flags 1 6 56 Do not reset the computer as this will clear the data trap on software version 5 19 0001 or earlier To return the car to service and not harm the data simply toggle the relay panel inspection switch from OFF to ON and ba
548. version number Eligibility Map Door access for each floor F front R rear B both Read left to right floors 1 thru 16 in the top row floors 17 thru 32 in the bottom row See Sections 5 4 2 5 and 5 4 2 6 for programming instructions Current Load The current load in the car as a percentage of full load analog load weigher required COMPUTER SECURITY A computer security system is available for the PTC controllers The system requires the user to enter a passcode before they can access the Program Mode or System Mode through the Computer Panel and adjust the controllers parameters The controllers are shipped without the computer security system However the computer security system can be purchased through MCE s Technical Support Department Complete installation instructions are provided with the modification package The next few paragraphs explain how the security system works after it is installed Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER s 5 3 5 2 1 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 4 NOTE This message is not related to Computer Security If this message is seen on the LCD screen it means that the Passcode Request Option has been activated and that a passcode is required in order to run the elevator on any mode of operation other than Inspection See Section 5 6 2 Passcode Request Menu for more information PASSWORD There are two sections that are secured by an 8 digit alpha numeric code chosen by the cu
549. ves a front and rear call to the same landing the car will upon reaching that landing first open the front doors and close them then open the rear doors and close them The default is to open the front doors first unless the rear doors have already started to open 5 4 4 4 CAR CALL CANCELS DOOR TIME If this option is selected pressing a car call button when the doors are fully open will cause the doors to start closing There is one exception If the car is stopped at a floor pressing the car call button for that same floor will not cause the doors to close but will cause the doors to reopen if they are in the process of closing 5 4 4 5 NUDGING DURING FIRE PH 1 If this option is selected the controller will turn ON the NUDG output while the doors are closing during Fire Phase 1 The NUDG output signals the door operator to close the doors at a reduced speed This option is useful for elevators that do not have mechanical safety edges During Fire Phase 1 all smoke sensitive reopening devices must be disabled This includes photo eyes and other devices that use infrared beams If there are no other reopening devices active then the doors should be closed at a reduced speed 5 4 4 6 RETIRING CAM OPTION This option should be selected for elevators with retiring cams The option affects the car only when it s sitting at a floor Without this option the controller waits until the doors are closed and locked before turning OFF the doo
550. vice flag 5 16 ISV In Service Output option 5 37 IUL In Use Light output option 5 37 J jerk parameters MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 20 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 32 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 60 K KCE ENABLE DISABLE option 5 43 42 02 2P21 L landing system installation of 2 11 2 12 LS QUTE Enclosure Assembly A 31 LS QUTE Wiring Diagram A 32 LS QUTE 1 12 1 13 LS STAN 1 12 1 13 Landing System Redundancy Failure message 5 11 LCD display 5 5 5 20 22 LD Level down input flag 5 16 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON CTL option 5 28 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON EPI 5 28 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON MGS option 5 27 LEAVE DOORS OPEN ON PTI ESS option 5 27 LEF Leveling encounter flag 5 16 Leveling Down message 5 11 Leveling Input is absent message 5 11 LEVELING SENSOR ENABLED DISABLED option 5 43 Leveling Sensor Failed OFF Position message 5 11 Leveling Sensor Failed ON Position message 5 11 Leveling Sensor Failure message 5 11 Leveling up message 5 11 LFP Lower parking floor flag 5 16 Light Load Weigher Condition message 5 11 LIGHT LOAD WEIGHING option 5 38 limit switches installation of 2 11 LIMITED DOOR RE OPEN OPTION option 5 28 LLI Light load input flag 5 16 LLI Light Load Input option 5 34 LLW Light Load Weigher Output option 5 37 LLW Light load weighing function input flag 5 16 load testing G5 GPD515 Drive 4 12 4 13 MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 4 25 TORQMAX F4 Drive 4 37 4 38 TORQMAX F5 Drive 4 65 4 66 Yaskawa F7 D
551. ving down no car calls can be registered from sixth floor and above 5 4 9 15 CE ELECTRONICS INTERFACE This option allows information such as position and arrival gong outputs to be provided for a CE electronics device This option is to be used with the CE2242 CE Electronics Interface board which provides a 3 wire serial interface to CE electronic fixtures 5 4 9 16 MASSACHUSETTS EMS SERVICE EMS SERVICE FLOOR This option is provided in the state of Massachusetts only This option is key operated and provides immediate car service for Massachusetts Emergency Medical Service personnel 5 4 9 17 MASTER SOFTWARE KEY This option is a board level control of the security system MCE Security is initiated by the Master Software Key There are three possible settings for the Master Software Key ACTIVATED ENABLED and DEACTIVATED If set to ACTIVATED Security is initiated If set to ENABLED Security is initiated if the Building Security Input BSI is ON If set to DEACTIVATED Security is deactivated regardless of the status of the BSI input THE COMPUTER Software Revision 6 03 5 4 9 18 PI TURNED OFF IF NO DEMAND Setting this option to yes will allow the PI outputs to turn OFF if the car has been inactive for an adjustable time from 1 to 10 minutes 5 4 9 19 HOSPITAL EMERG OPERATION This option calls any eligible in service elevator to any floor on an emergency basis If this installation has Hospital Emergency
552. voltage between the COM and H terminals on the HC ACI board are zero when the H relay is picked Also check the wiring between the HC RB4 VFAC board and the HC ACI board and the wiring between the HC ACI board and the drive unit 6 5 3 CAR OVERSHOOTS OR THE DRIVE TRIPS OVER VOLTAGE ON ACCELERATION If during acceleration the car OVERSHOOTS or trips on OVER VOLTAGE then check the following Q NOTE Itis mandatory to have 40 counterweight 1 Adjust the ACC Drive parameter C1 01 C1 07 and increase acceleration time 2 Verify that parameter E2 02 and D1 02 are set correctly Adjust parameter P1 14 if required as described in section 4 2 3 and Figure 4 1 For Flux Vector applications adjust the gain parameters as described in Section 4 3 4 g 3 Turn the power OFF and wait for at least 5 minutes so that the DC BUS voltage is not present in the dynamic braking circuit Verify this by using a multi meter to check the fuse the value of the resistance and to check for any open or loose connections in the dynamic braking circuit Verify the voltage jumper setting inside the braking unit If MCE s ACBU L50 or ACBU L75 braking unit is provided then the jumper must be set at a value 10 volts less than the incoming AC line voltage to the drive unit If Yaskawa s braking unit is provided then the voltage selector jumper should be set to the same value as that of incoming AC line voltage to the drive unit Q NOTE Refer to Section 4 3
553. witch The purpose of this input is to monitor the brake status and not for the purpose of energy saving This is an additional feature It may enhance the reliability of the system It prevents the operation of the elevator in the event that the brake fails to release in the intended manner When this happens the Brake Pick Failure message will flash on the LCD display A switch contact must be attached to the brake assembly if one does not already exist This is needed for the brake monitor circuit that shuts down the car in the event of a brake failure There are many types of switches that can be used and there is no way to anticipate all the 42 02 2P21 INSTALLATION 2 9 methods of mounting them Take all necessary precautions to not interfere with the normal brake design or operation The contact must open when the brake is lifted and it should be rated for at least 1 4 amp 125VAC There are many micro switches suitable for this application 2 2 5 INSTALLING AND WIRING THE ENCODER The encoder is only required for Flux Vector applications a O The encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft and the encoder wiring should be completed according to the drawing The purpose of the encoder is to determine the exact shaft speed and position It is very important that the encoder does not slip wobble bounce or vibrate due to poor installation of the shaft extension coupling or encoder mounting It is also important that the encoder
554. with a full load in the car Then register a car call for the bottom landing The car will strike the buffer Put the elevator on Inspection and pick the up direction to move the car FINAL ADJUSTMENT 4 69 g Remove the jumpers between terminals 8 and 12 and terminals 12 and 13 and reconnect the wire to terminal 71 on the HC RB4 VFAC board Remove all of the jumpers installed in this section Reseat the FLT relay 4 16 5 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY TESTS TORQMAX F5 4 70 4 16 5 1 GOVERNOR ELECTRICAL OVERSPEED SWITCH TEST Make sure that there are no jumpers between terminals 2 and 15 Trip open the electrical OVER SPEED switch contact manually and verify that the main safety circuit drops out Use which ever method is most familiar to verify the actual electrical and mechanical tripping speeds 4 16 5 2 GOVERNOR AND CAR SAFETY OVERSPEED TEST WITH FULL LOAD GOING DOWN a b Move the fully loaded car to the top terminal landing and turn the power OFF On the HC ACI board pull the FLT relay partially out of its socket at the coil end left or diode side so it will not shut down the elevator when the car is going faster than 150 fpm on Inspection The safety on the HC ACI board will trip but will not activate the FLT relay and stop the car If the HC ACIF board is used in this controller remove relays AS and ETL from their sockets Bypass the Governor OVER SPEED switch by placing a jumper between terminals 2 and 15 on the
555. wn at Inspection speed in the middle of the hoistway Equal current readings on the keypad display indicate that the counterweight is close to the correct value Take whatever steps are necessary to achieve proper counterweighting This is especially important since many traction installations do not have compensation cables or chains Turn OFF the power and reinstall the fuses that power terminals 2H and 2F The elevator controller installation should now be complete Proceed to Section 4 Final Adjustment START UP 3 19 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 INSPECTION OPERATION YASKAWA F7 DRIVE For controllers with the G5 GPD515 drive see Section 3 4 For controllers with the MagneTek HPV 900 drive see Section 3 5 For controllers with the TORQMAX F4 drive see Section 3 6 For controllers with the TORQMAX F5 drive see Section 3 8 DRIVE PARAMETER SETTINGS Each controller is shipped with completed parameter sheets and all of the field adjustable parameters have been entered into the drive unit based upon the provided field information However it is essential to verify all drive parameter settings before start up The drive software has been modified for this application therefore some of the parameters on the parameter sheet shipped with the controller are different from those shown in the drive manual If a drive is replaced in the field all of the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to
556. wn provides the inputs and outputs required for independent rear doors FIGURE 1 4 HC IOX Input Output Expander Board _ Components in shaded area are loaded for HC IOX A BIPA COPYRIGHT C 1992 MADE IN USA HC IOX B REV 4 O GAA ME C26 C25 ag R1 R17 O V4 oY c27 Du Cus Cuz Cy Ri7 c1 OUTPUTS RA Q10 R2 25 INPUTS J C a BA 1 1 1 Q Ris C2 INPUTS OUTS BY an a ee an OUT8 a12 J a Lae r Cae e OUT 20 C4 as BS mi Co Cas SP OUTS bra RE R29 C_D a4 _SP6 R22 C6 OUTS Y oe R7 Cy 8 OUT4 ais RE RL GO ae sp4 OUT3 i 7 RULA con RES nee MP c7 ngs rer Cen OUT2 CGW IE E Fe BEGI T7 T o pa XS J1 h h R10 ANI Z E O m 1 D24 Gb OTS UG Rie uke R12 O Us S N DN 2088 R2 HC IOX Input Output Expander Board This is a multi purpose input output board designed to accommodate additional inputs and outputs as required such as floor encoding signals etc FIGURE 1 5 HC I40 Input Output Expander Board O US COPYRI
557. xxxx e RAM memory becomes corrupted This sometimes happens due to lightening e Changes to Communication Port settings on the MC PCA require that the MC PA parameters be set to their default values To set the MC PCA parameters to their default values 1 Place the car on Machine Room Inspection 2 Place function switches F1 F3 F5 and F7 in the On up position 3 Press all four pushbuttons N S at the same time 4 Using the settings shown in Appendix A Original Programmed Values and the Record of Changes reprogram the values that are different from the default values To set the MC PA parameters to their default values e Place function switches A1 A3 A5 and A7 in the On up position e Press the Reset button on the MC PA board e Keep function switches A1 A3 A5 and A7 in the On up position for about 30 seconds or until the CRT terminal reinitializes e If you have a CRT terminal verify that parameters are correct security and or CMS parameters must be reprogrammed Software Revision 6 03 THE COMPUTER 5 19 5 4 oO 5 4 1 5 20 PROGRAM MODE This section will explain how to use Program mode Enter FUNCTION SWITCHES Program mode by moving the F1 switch on the computer board F8 F7FGF5 F4F3 F2F1 to the up position Program mode can be used to program the controller to meet the requirements of the elevator such as the selection of stops and fire floors or changing timer values and selecting options such
558. y 31 hours or whenever the car is idle at the bottom floor for 30 seconds 900 Software Revision 6 03 Car Call Cancellation Output This output is generated at the time of registration of a car call This output is used to comply with specific handicap codes barrier free codes that require an audible acknowledgment of car call registration THE COMPUTER 5 37 5 4 9 EXTRA FEATURES MENU OPTIONS 5 38 5 4 9 1 PI OUTPUT TYPE Choose either 1 WIRE PER FLOOR or BINARY CODED PIs depending on the inputs required by the P I device itself 5 4 9 2 FLOOR ENCODING INPUTS If this option is selected whenever the car is in a door zone the computer checks the floor code inputs and corrects the P I if necessary The code inputs are provided by the landing system refer to the Job Prints Refer to R4 R3 R2 in Section 5 4 7 5 4 9 3 ENCODE ALL FLOORS This option is only available when the Floor Encoding option is programmed to YES This option indicates at what landing the Absolute Floor Encoding values begin When set to YES then every landing must have AFE code values including the terminal landings When set to NO then only intermediate landings must have AFE code values 5 4 9 4 INTERMEDIATE SPEED This option must be selected for all elevators that use Intermediate speed 5 4 9 5 EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION EMERGENCY POWER RETURN FLOOR If this option is selected the controller will put the elevator into Emergency
559. y the MOTOR CURRENT on the drive keypad under DISPLAY POWER DATA D2 Pick direction on Inspection and check for one of the following conditions 1 Ifthe car moves in the correct direction and the drive draws normal current 30 to 40 of motor FLA proceed to step f 2 Ifthe car oscillates at zero speed moves at slow speed or a Torque Limit Drive Fault is tripped interchange two of the motor leads to correct this problem 3 Ifthe motor draws normal current but the car moves in the opposite direction change the C1 Motor Rotation parameter from Forward to Reverse or vice versa NOTE If the elevator does not run on Inspection refer to Section 6 6 Troubleshooting the MagneTek HPV 900 AC Drive f Verify the inspection speed using a hand held Tachometer If the car moves slower than the set value of A3 Inspection Speed Command 1 then increase the A1 Contract Mtr Spd rpm parameter If the speed is higher decrease the value of the A1 Contract Mtr Spd rpm parameter The A1 Contract Mtr Spd parameter can be adjusted up to 5 of the motor rated F L RPM without having much effect on the performance The correct Inspection speed in feet per minute ft m should now be displayed on the drive key pad whenever car moves on Inspection Adjust the Inspection Speed A3 Inspection Speed Command 1 parameter for a comfortable inspection speed For proper brake operation adjust the SPD trimpot on the HC ACI board to coordinate the appli

vfmc-1000-ptc series m - Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents